PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION PROJECT
KIRKLAND, WASHINGTON
NOVEMBER 2015
BID SET
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
VOLUME 3 (DIV 21-28)
Prepared for:
City of Kirkland
Department of Development Services
123 5th Avenue
Kirland, WA 98033
Prepared by:
1101 E. Pike St. Flr 3 Seattle, Washington 98122 206‐322‐3322
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
Section
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Title
DIVISION 00 – PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
BID PROPOSAL
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
STATEMENT OF BIDDER’S QUALIFICATIONS
SUBCONTRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
BIDDER’S CHECKLIST
CONTRACT
PERFORMANCE BOND
LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
CONTRACTOR’S DECLARATION OF OPTION FOR MANAGEMENT OF STATUTORY
RETAINED PERCENTAGE
RETAINAGE BOND
RETAINED PERCENTAGE ESCROW AGREEMENT
RETAINAGE RELEASE REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00
SUMMARY
01 23 00
ALTERNATES
01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
01 26 00
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01 29 00
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
01 32 00
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 42 00
REFERENCES
01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
01 73 00
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
01 78 23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
01 91 13
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 19
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 01 30
MAINTENANCE OF CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
00 00 00 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
03 30 00
03 30 01
03 54 13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE – SEISMIC
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
04 01 20
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
04 20 00
UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 05 – METALS
05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 12 01
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING – SEISMIC
05 12 13
ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
05 31 00
STEEL DECKING
05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
05 73 00
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06 16 00
SHEATHING
06 20 23
INTEROR FINISH CARPENTRY
06 41 16
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
06 61 16
SOLID SURFACING
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 10 00
THERMAL INSULATION
07 41 14.16 STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
07 52 00
BITUMINUOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING (& WEATHER BARRIERS)
07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 81 00
SPRAY APPLIED THERMAL INSULATION
07 84 13
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 12 13
HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES
08 12 16
ALUMINUM DOOR RAMES
08 33 00
ROLLING SECURITY GRILLES
08 37 00
SLIDING & SWING PATIO DOORS & FRAMES
08 41 13
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08 70 00
DOOR HARDWARE
08 80 00
GLAZING
08 83 00
MIRRORS
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09 24 00
PORTLAND CEMENT STUCCO
09 29 00
GYPSUM BOARD
00 00 00 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
09 30 00
09 51 23
09 52 36
09 54 70
09 65 13
09 65 19
09 65 20
09 66 23
09 69 33
09 77 13
09 91 13
09 91 23
09 93 00
09 96 00
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TILING
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
LINEAR WOOD CEILINGS
MODULAR METAL CEILING SYSTEMS
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
CARPETING
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
RUBBER FLOORING
LOW PROFILE ACCESS FLOORING
STRETCHED-FABRIC WALL SYSTEM
EXTERIOR PAINTING
INTERIOR PAINTING
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 11 00
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
10 14 23
PANEL SIGNAGE
10 21 13
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10 26 00
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
10 44 00
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS AND ACCESSSORIES
10 28 00
TOILET ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
11 31 00
APPLIANCES
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
12 24 13
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
14 21 00
ELECTRONIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 10 00
AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
21 20 00
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
22 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 07 00
PLUMBING INSULATION
22 10 00
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
22 33 00
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
00 00 00 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 23
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53
PAINTING & IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTS AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
23 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 09 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 20 00
HVAC PIPING
23 30 00
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 34 00
HVAC FANS
23 70 00
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
23 80 00
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 26 26 01 26
26 05 00
26 05 10
26 05 19
26 05 26
26 05 29
26 05 33
26 05 33.10
26 05 53
26 05 73
26 05 75
26 09 23
26 09 36.19
26 09 43
26 24 16
26 27 26
26 28 13
26 28 16
26 31 00
26 51 00
ELECTRICAL
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
EXISTING SYSTEMS
COPPER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
ELECTRIC SERVICE
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
STANDALONE MULTIPRESET MODULAR DIMMING CONTROLS
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PANELBOARDS
APPENDIX A: PANEL SCHEDULES/LOAD CALCULATIONS
WIRING DEVICES
FUSES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PHOTOVOLTAIC ENERGY EQUIPMENT
INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 – TELECOMMUNICATIONS
27 05 00
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
27 05 10
BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS AND METHODS
27 05 12
TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEMOLITION
27 05 33
TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
27 05 34
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES
27 11 00
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
27 41 16
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
00 00 00 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 11
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
00 00 00 - 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
SECTION 21 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
WORK INCLUDED
Work includes complete fire protection systems indicated on the drawings and specified.
The Bid and Contract Documents and General Requirements of the specification are a
part of this division of the specification. Where the word “provide” is used, it means “furnish
and install complete and ready for use.” Provide supervision, labor, material, equipment,
and machinery necessary to complete the mechanical systems. Provide finished work,
tested and ready for operation.
DRAWINGS
Drawings are diagrammatic, indicating the general arrangement of systems and work, and
do not attempt to show exact details or all offsets in piping and ductwork. Do not scale
drawings. Examine the architectural drawings for exact location of fixtures and equipment.
Where they are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect.
1. Follow drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify
spaces in which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom. If space
conditions appear inadequate, notify the Architect before proceeding with the work.
Make reasonable modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent
conflict with work of other trades and for proper execution of the work.
1.3
EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS
A.
Specific manufacturers and model numbers are noted to indicate a standard of design and
are not intended to be restrictive.
B.
Where the term “or approved equal” is used, alternative and/or substitute products will be
considered only prior to the bid date (Prior Approval). Where the term “or equal” is used,
approval of alternative and/or substitute products may be requested by the contractor after
the bid date. Submittal, review and potential approval of alternative and/or substitute
products will be considered and executed only under terms and conditions specified in
Divisons 0 and 1.
C. When submitting an alternative and/or substitute product, Contractor shall include
complete product literature of original specified item.
D. Provide redesign to any part of the work resulting from the use of equipment and material
other than specified or indicated on the drawings. Obtain approval of redesign from the
Architect. Redesign cost and additional construction cost resulting from the redesign shall
be at the Contractor’s expense.
1.4
A.
SHOP DRAWING AND SUBMITTAL DATA
Check and verify field measurements and requirements. Submit promptly, so as not to
delay the work, three copies, checked and approved by the Contractor, of all shop
drawings, submittal data, and layout drawings. At the discretion of the Architect, the
Contractor may submit PDF submittals in leiu of paper copies. Confirm with the Architect
21 05 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
SECTION 21 05 00
prior to submitting. The Architect will check and review with reasonable promptness the
shop drawings and submittal data only for conformance with the design concept of the
project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents.
Make corrections required by the Architect and resubmit to the Architect one corrected
copies. The Architect’s review of the shop drawings and submittal data shall not relieve
the Contractor from responsibilities for deviation from the Contract Documents unless the
Contractor has in writing called to the Architect’s attention deviation at the time of
submission and secured the Architect’s written approval, nor shall it relieve the Contractor
from responsibility for errors in the shop drawings and submittal data.
B.
The shop drawings and submittal data for the material and equipment shall be submitted
at one time. Each copy shall be in a three ring binder, indexed, and properly labeled
indicating specific material or equipment for which it is to be used and the specification
section and paragraph number relating to the submitted item.
C. Review, approve and stamp shop drawings and submittal data before submission to the
Architect. Notify the Architect in writing of any deviation from the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
D. Failure to submit shop drawings and submittal data in ample time for checking and review
shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of contract time.
E.
1.5
See individual specification sections for required submittal data.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Give necessary notices, obtain permits and pay taxes, fees and other costs, including
utility connections or extensions for the work. File necessary drawings, prepare
documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental departments having
jurisdiction. Include all costs associated with notices, permits, taxes, fees, utility
connections or extensions, government approvals and other related costs in original bid.
Obtain required certificates of inspection for work and deliver to the Architect before
request for acceptance and final payment for the work.
B.
Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority
bearing on the performance of the work. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract
Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Architect
in writing and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate modification.
If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations, and without notice to the Architect, he shall assume full
responsibility, and shall bear all costs.
C. Material and equipment within the scope of this project shall be listed by the Underwriters'
Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their listing mark and
shall comply with the applicable standards and codes listed below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ASTM A 53 – Pipe, Steel, Black, Welded and Seamless.
ASTM A 135 – Electric – Resistance – Welded Steel Pipe.
ANSI B16.4 – Cast Iron Threaded Fittings.
ASTM A 536 – Grooved Fittings
ANSI A13.1 – Pipe Marking System.
International Building Code (IBC) – Latest Edition accepted by the local AHJ.
International Fire Code (IFC) – Latest Edition accepted by the local AHJ.
21 05 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
SECTION 21 05 00
8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
9. NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems – Latest Edition accepted
by local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
10. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
11. UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory – Latest Edition.
1.6
COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish in writing to other trades, with copies to
the Architect, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed
satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
B.
Where Fire Protection work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with work
of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment.
If work is installed before coordinating with other trades, or if it causes any interference
with work of other trades, make the necessary changes in the work to correct the
conditions and bear all costs.
C. Furnish to other trades necessary templates, patterns, setting drawings and shop details
for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.
1.7
A.
1.8
SAFETY
The Architect has not been retained to provide design and construction services relation
to the Contractor’s safety precautions, or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor is solely and
completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of persons and
property during performance of work. This requirement applies continuously and is not
limited to normal working hours. Comply with “Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction”, Volume 36, No. 75, of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of
Labor. Provide required safety measures and consult with the state or federal safety
inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not
exist or whether compliance with state or federal regulations exists.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work and material from damage and be liable for damage.
B.
Be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted; protect
work against theft, injury or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received
on site which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary
covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
1.9
A.
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING
Provide ladders, scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for delivery into the
premises and erection of any equipment and apparatus and execution for the work.
Remove same from premises when no longer required.
21 05 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
SECTION 21 05 00
1.10
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
Materials and equipment required for the work shall be new and shall be furnished,
delivered, erected, installed, connected and finished in every detail; and shall be selected
and arranged to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of
material is given, an article as approved by the Architect shall be provided.
B.
Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge
of the work.
C. Equipment and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Architect in accordance
with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such
tests as the manufacturer recommends.
D. Provide equipment in the mid- range of written performance documentation to allow for
adjustment.
1.11
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Install the work with adequate clearances throughout the project, including being
responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts, chases, double partitions and
suspended ceilings. Cooperate with other trades where work is in the same space. Such
spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.
B.
Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible
positions. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility
and any change shall be approved by the Architect.
C. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall provide the General Contractor the exact locations
of access panels for each concealed valve, control damper or other device requiring
service. Access panels will be provided and installed by the General Contractor and as
specified in the other divisions of the specifications. Submit locations of these panels to
the General Contractor in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work.
1.12
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.
The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide wiring, except control wiring and interlock
wiring. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide power wiring complete from power
source to equipment junction box. Electrical Subcontractor shall provide starters and
disconnect switches not factory-mounted on equipment
B.
The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for power wiring. Control wiring shall be
the responsibility of the Mechanical Subcontractor. Motors and equipment shall be
provided for current characteristics as indicated on the electrical drawings.
1.13
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Provide drilling, coring, cutting and patching necessary to install the work specified in this
division. Patching shall match adjacent surfaces.
B.
No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect, and cutting shall
be done in a manner directed by him. Do not damage or endanger any portion of the
21 05 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
SECTION 21 05 00
project or work of the Owner or any other separate contractor by drilling, coring, cutting,
patching, excavating and backfilling.
C. Inform the General Contractor and other subcontractors affected of requirements for
cutting and patching.
1.14
A.
1.15
BOXES, SLEEVES, AND CHASES
Inform the General Contractor of requirements for boxes, sleeves, and chases. The
General Contractor shall set boxes, sleeves and chases. Furnish General Contractor with
the boxes and sleeves and be responsible for informing General Contractor of required
location.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Upon completion of the work, furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating
the systems and equipment for a period of one (1) day of eight (8) hours, or as otherwise
specified. Give at least forty-eight (48) hours notice to the Owner in advance of this period.
During this period, instruct the Owner or his representative fully in the operation,
adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The training of the appropriate
maintenance staff for each equipment type and/or system shall include, as a minimum,
the following:
B.
System/Equipment overview (what it is, what it does and which other systems and/or
equipment does it interface with).
C. Review of the available O&M materials.
D. Review of the Record Drawings on the subject system/equipment.
E.
1.16
Hands-on demonstration of all normal maintenance procedures, normal operating modes,
and all emergency shutdown and start-up procedures.
EQUIPMENT MANUALS
A.
Upon completion of the work and prior to acceptance of the mechanical work, prepare
servicing manuals in accordance with industry accepted standards describing the
requirements of mechanical equipment provided under this division of the specification.
B.
As a minimum, include in the manuals:
1. Submittal data stating equipment size and selected options for each piece of
equipment requiring maintenance.
2. Maintenance schedules
3. Manufacturers’ operation and maintenance instructions with parts list specific to the
equipment installed, with extraneous matter removed or neatly marked out. Routine
maintenance actions shall be clearly identified together with supplementary
drawings and information where necessary to describe and itemize servicing.
4. Provide a table of contents with all contents listed in an orderly presentation.
5. Manufacturers’ printed warranties
6. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of General Contractor, Mechanical
Subcontractor(s) and all other related Subcontractors.
21 05 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
SECTION 21 05 00
7. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of equipment suppliers.
8. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of at least two service agencies.
9. System maintenance and calibration information, including wiring diagrams,
schematics and control sequence descriptions. Desired or field determined setpoints
shall be permanently recorded on control drawings at control devices, or for digital
control systems, in programming comments.
10. A complete narrative of how each system is intended to operate. A Sequence of
Operation is not acceptable as a narrative for this requirement. Narrative shall
include:
a.
A detailed explanation of the original design intent.
b.
The basis of design (how the design was selected to meet the design intent).
c.
A detailed explanation of how new equipment is to interface with existing
equipment or systems (where applicable).
C. Data in manuals shall be neat, clean copies. Drawings shall be accordion-folded.
Manufacturers' advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and
maintenance instruction.
D. Place data for the manual in hardcover 3-ring loose-leaf notebooks. Label bound edge of
notebooks with the name of the building, Owner, name of the project, year of completion
and the words "Mechanical Equipment”. Label front of notebooks with the name of the
Owner, name of the building, name of the project, Owner’s project number, date, General
Contractor, Mechanical Subcontractor, Architect and Mechanical Engineer.
E.
Submit one copy of the data in a preliminary draft form to the Architect for approval prior
to preparing finished copies.
F.
Provide two (2) copies of the finished manuals to the Architect.
1.17
A.
1.18
RECORD DRAWINGS
Within 90 days after the date of system acceptance, provide record drawings of all
buildings and plot plans. Record drawings shall include as a minimum the location and
performance data on each piece of equipment, general configuration of duct and pipe
distribution system, including sizes, and the terminal air and water design flow rates of the
actual installation. Record drawings shall also incorporate any mechanical work which
deviates from the contract drawings, including changes resulting from addenda, Requests
For Information and Change Orders. Neatly draft changes on clean “hard copy” drawings
to show the work clearly in the actual locations as built.
CLEANING
A.
Promptly remove waste material and rubbish caused by the work. At Completion of the
work, clean dirt and debris from the mechanical installation, including equipment, piping,
ductwork, and plumbing fixtures.
B.
Upon completion of the project and after cleaning is complete and before project is air
balanced, provide clean air filters throughout.
21 05 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
SECTION 21 05 00
1.19
WARRANTY
A.
All work, material and equipment to be free from defects. Correct all defects and failures
occurring within one year from date of substantial completion without cost to the Owner
except when such failure is due to neglect or carelessness by the Owner, as determined
by the Architect.
B.
The warranty disregards shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment provided.
C. Make all necessary adjustments and corrections during first year of operation. The fact
that the Architect was present during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work.
1.20
A.
ASBESTOS
This project is not expected to require work in the presence of asbestos fibers. These
Division 21 Bid Documents do not provide for or cover the identification, removal,
encapsulation, or disposition of such materials. The Contractor is cautioned that should
he encounter suspicious material, to obtain all instructions relative to proceeding with the
execution of the work directly from the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCT (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
END OF SECTION 21 05 00
21 05 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
Modification of the existing sprinkler system as indicated on the drawings and as further
required by these specifications.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A 53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
B.
ASTM A 135 – Electric – Resistance – Welded Steel Pipe.
C. ANSI B16.4 – Cast Iron Threaded Fittings.
D. ASTM A 47 – Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
E.
ASTM D2000 – Rubber products in automotive Applications.
F.
ANSI A13.1 – Pipe Marking System.
G. International Building Code (IBC) – Latest Edition accepted by the local AHJ.
H. International Fire Code (IFC) – Latest Edition accepted by the local AHJ.
I.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
J.
NFPA 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems – Latest Edition accepted by
local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
K.
Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
L.
UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory – Latest Edition.
1.3
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification section 21 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
1.4
APPROVALS
A.
Systems will require approval by the local Authority Having Jurisdication (AHJ), Fire
Protection Engineer.
B.
For purposes of code compliance the local Authority Having Jurisdication (AHJ) will be the
City of Kirkland Fire Marshal.
C. Where there are conflicts between the AHJ and the referenced codes and standards, the
more stringent shall apply. If there is a question of interpretation as to which is more
stringent, it shall be decided by the owner.
21 10 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
1.5
AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Submit as one package each item specified in this section according to the Conditions of
the Contract, specification Division 1, and section 21 05 00. Partial submittals shall not be
accepted.
B.
Manufacturer’s Literature and Data:
1. Piping materials, including sprinkler specialty fittings
2. Pipe hangers and supports, including seismic restraints
3. Valves, including listed fire-protection valves, unlisted general-duty valves, and
specialty valves and trim
4. Excess pressure pumps, including electrical data
5. Sprinklers, escutcheons, and guards. Include sprinkler flow characteristics,
mounting, finish, and other pertinent data
6. Alarm devices, including electrical data
7. Other equipment, not listed but integral to the fire protection system
C. Shop Drawings
1. Approved sprinkler drawings.
2. Sprinkler design shall be signed by a NICET level III or higher professional. Include
sprinkler design professional’s Registration of Certification.
3. Detailed drawings shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. Drawings shall be stamped
by the sprinkler design professional and include all new sprinklers and piping.
Drawings are subject to change during bidding and construction periods. Any wall
and/or ceiling changes occurring prior to the submittal of contractor’s shop drawings
shall be incorporated into the contractor’s detailed design at no additional contract
cost.
D. Submit hydraulic calculations for each sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data for sprinkler specialties to include in emergency,
operation and maintenance manuals.
F.
Recommended preventative maintenance schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
PIPING
Underground and overhead piping shall conform to NFPA 13.
FITTINGS
Materials shall conform to NFPA 13.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Hangers: Provide hangers to support all piping in perfect alignment without sagging or
interference, to permit free expansion and contraction, and meet the requirements of
NFPA 13.
21 10 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
Pipe rings: Pipe rings shall be galvanized Tolco Fig. 200 or approved equal. For end of
branch line restraint provide Tolco Fig. 25 restrainer or approved equal or installation
method.
C. Hanger rods: Hanger rods shall be electro-galvanized.
D. C-clamps: Equip all c-clamps (beam clamps) with earthquake retaining straps.
E.
Concrete anchors: Concrete expansion anchors shall be Hilti, Phillips, Impex, ITW, or
approved equal.
F.
Explosive anchors: Explosive type fasteners are not permitted.
2.4
VALVES
A.
All valves shall be UL listed.
B.
Low Point Drain and Inspectors Test Valves: 1" gate valve, bronze body, 150 PSI wg,
rising stem, screwed, with plug (or 1/2" orifice for test valve).
C. Gate Valves Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, OS&Y,
single wedge, flanged or grooved ends.
2.5
FIRE SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
Sprinklers shall be UL listed, with 175-psig minimum pressure rating. In areas with
dropped ceilings, use pendent type, semi recessed, chrome plated, glass bulb head, ½
inch orifice, Gem Issue D or equal, rated for 165°F unless otherwise noted, or required by
NFPA 13. Provide with escutcheon plate.
B.
In unfinished areas, and areas without dropped ceilings, use upright type, bronze heads,
glass bulb, ½ inch orifice, Gem Issue D or equal, rated at 165°F unless otherwise noted,
or required by NFPA 13.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
The material and equipment furnished and installed by the Contractor shall be first-quality,
new, full-size and weight, free from any defects, in first-class condition and standard in
every respect.
B.
Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall
be the product of the same manufacturer.
C. Storage and handling of all material shall be done such that they are at all times protected
against loss and damage.
D. The materials comprising the fire protection system and its appurtenances shall be
installed as described herein and on the plans and as required by the applicable codes,
listed authorities and manufacturers recommendations.
21 10 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
E.
In the event of conflict between the plans and specifications, the decision of the Architect
shall be final.
F.
The mechanical drawings do not attempt to show complete details of building construction,
which affect the installation. Refer to the architectural, structural and electrical drawings
for additional building details which affect the installation of the work covered under this
unit of contract.
G. Inspection of the site is mandatory. Determine the extent of difficulties and obstacles likely
to be encountered in the installation of the work before preparing bid.
H. Drawings do not attempt to show exact details of all piping, and no extra payment will be
allowed for obstruction by work of other trades or local obstructions to the work under this
contract which require offsets.
I.
Where diagrams have been made to show piping connections, the Contractor is cautioned
that these diagrams shall not be used for obtaining material quantities.
J.
Changes in location of equipment or piping, advisable in the opinion of the Contractor,
shall be submitted to the Architect for approval before proceeding with the work.
K.
All measurements and dimensions shall be verified at the site. All equipment shall be
adjusted and left in a condition satisfactory to the Architect.
L.
Before starting work, carefully examine the site and all of the architectural, structural,
electrical and utility drawings to be thoroughly familiar with the conditions governing the
work on this project.
M. Call to the attention of the Architect any error or conflict or discrepancy in the plans or
specifications coming to his attention; he is not to proceed with any questionable items of
work until clarification of same has been made.
N. Supplementary details and plans shall be supplied as required and they will become a part
of the Contract Documents.
O. Coordination of the work with all of the other crafts employed on the project is mandatory.
3.2
A.
3.3
EXAMINATION
Verify installation conditions satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do not install until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate shut down of fire protection system with owner 24 hours in advance.
B.
Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter.
C. Remove burrs, scale and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly.
3.4
INSTALLATION
21 10 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
A.
AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
Install the work in accordance with NFPA 13, Contract Documents, accepted Shop
Drawings, and manufacturer's instructions, and with the following inclusions. Where these
conflict, obtain direction from Owner.
1. Sleeves: Provide where pipes pass through walls, floors, and ceilings.
2. Give exact locations for openings through walls and set all sleeves and cutouts in
concrete work before said work is done
3. Ensure sprinkler piping penetrations of the fire walls or floor are sealed tightly with
firestopping, see Architectural Specifications. Fire rated walls, ceilings, and floors
are identified on the Architectural Drawings.
4. Flexible connections: Provide flexible connections at locations recommended or
required by NFPA 13.
5. Earthquake protection: Provide earthquake sway bracing and other precautions in
accordance with NFPA 13.
6. Sprinkler heads:
a.
Install sprinkler heads in accordance with NFPA 13 and the Drawings. The
number of heads shown is approximate and shall be increased without
change in the contract price where necessary to meet codes and approval.
b.
Heads shall be aligned with other heads, lighting fixtures and registers, in
the room in a symmetrical pattern.
c.
Provide escutcheons in finished areas.
d.
Provide wire guards on heads in mechanical rooms of other areas where
heads are subject to damage.
7. Do not cover or enclose work until it has been inspected and approved by the AHJ.
Uncover work covered or enclosed before inspection and approval. After it has been
inspected and approved, make repairs and replacements at no additional cost. Notify
inspector 7 days prior to inspection.
8. Install piping as concealed work in finished areas unless shown otherwise.
9. Run piping parallel to column lines, perpendicular to floor unless shown otherwise
on Drawings. Group piping wherever practical at common elevations. Install piping
to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space and other work.
10. Allow sufficient clearance for insulation, access to valves, equipment, and walkways.
11. Do not cut or weld to any structural member unless shown on the Drawings or
approved by the Construction Manager.
12. Install pipe without springing or forcing.
13. Unless otherwise detailed, allow 6-inch minimum clearance between pipe and
nearest construction, piping, conduit, or equipment.
14. Inspector test valve: Provide at the highest hydraulically most remote part of the
system in relation to the riser assembly. Locate conveniently accessible 5 feet above
the floor. Discharge water from valves outside building at a safe location which will
not damage landscaping or building.
15. Flush underground mains and lead-in connections in accordance with NFPA 13
before connection of the sprinkler system and testing.
16. System drainage: Install system to fully drain once filled with water. Slope piping to
riser if possible. Otherwise slope to low point drains. Pipe drains outside of building
in a location which will not damage landscaping or building.
B.
Identification: Section 21 05 00 and the following requirements specific to wet pipe
sprinkler systems:
1. Identify piping in accordance with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI Z53.1.
21 10 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
AUTOMATIC FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
2. Identify risers, valves and system trim with tags as to function.
3. Identify risers by valve number.
C. Pipe Hangers and Supports
1. Provide hangars and supports in accordance with NFPA 13 and with the following
additions.
2. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between pipe surface and
adjacent work.
3. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
4. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
5. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
3.5
A.
3.6
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Clean up and remove from the premises all refuse material, crates and rubbish arising
from this work. Proper adjustment of all devices shall be made and proper operation shall
be demonstrated as required by the Architect.
TESTS AND INSPECTION
A.
All tests required shall be performed and certificates transmitted to the authorities having
jurisdiction. An inspection of the system will be made by the Authority and the Architect
and any discrepancies which are a part of the Contract shall be corrected prior to final
acceptance.
B.
Perform acceptance tests according to NFPA 13 Chapter 8 and additional requirements
of the AHJ.
C. Tests to be witnessed by the AHJ, Construction Manager, Fire Department, and Fire
Protection Engineering.
D. Fill out Contractor’s Material and Test Certificates as outlined in NFPA 13. Submit 3 signed
and dated copies to Fire Protection Engineering through the Construction Manager.
END OF SECTION 21 10 00
21 10 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
WORK INCLUDED
Provide a “Total Flood” Clean Agent Fire Suppression System with automatic detection
and control. The work described in this specification includes all engineering, labor,
materials, equipment and service necessary, and required, to complete and test the
suppression system.
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
Design information and drawings.
CODES AND STANDARDS
Suppression System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements set forth in
the latest edition of the following codes and standards:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards:
a.
NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
b.
NFPA 70 National Electric Code
c.
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
2. Factory Mutual Approval Guide
3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publication
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publication Enclosures for
Industrial Controls and Systems
5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Protection of Stratospheric Ozone 59 FR
13044 (SNAP)
B.
1.4
A.
1.5
The standards listed, as well as all other applicable codes, standards, and good
engineering practices, shall be used as “minimum” design standards.
REQUIREMENTS
The Suppression System installation shall be provided and installed in accordance with
the drawings, specifications, and applicable standards. Should a conflict occur between
the drawings and specifications bring it to the attention of the engineer for resolution.
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 21 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
21 20 00-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
1.6
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
APPROVALS
A.
Systems will require approval by the local Authority Having Jurisdication (AHJ).
B.
For purposes of code compliance the local Authority Having Jurisdication (AHJ) will be the
City of Kirkland Fire Marshal.
C. Where there are conflicts between the AHJ and the referenced codes and standards, the
more stringent shall apply. If there is a question of interpretation as to which is more
stringent, it shall be decided by the owner.
1.7
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer
1. The manufacturer of the suppression system hardware and detection components
shall be ISO 9001 registered.
2. The name of the manufacturer shall appear on all major components.
3. All devices, components, and equipment shall be the products of the same
manufacturer, or supplied by the same manufacturer.
4. All devices, components, and equipment shall be new, standard products of the
manufacturer's latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended.
5. All devices and equipment shall be UL listed and/or FM approved.
6. Locks for all cabinets shall be keyed alike.
B.
Installer
1. The installing contractor shall be trained by the supplier to design, install, test, and
maintain fire suppression systems.
2. The installing contractor shall employ a NICET certified special hazard designer,
Level II or above, who will be responsible for this project.
3. The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the
installation of automatic clean agent, or similar, fire suppression systems, in strict
accordance with all applicable codes and standards.
4. The installing contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience in the
design, installation, and testing, of clean agent, or similar fire suppression systems.
A list of systems of
5. The installing contractor shall show evidence that his company carries a minimum
$2,000,000.00 liability and completed operations insurance policy. These limits shall
supersede limits required in the general conditions of the specifications.
6. The installing contractor shall maintain, or have access to, a clean agent recharging
station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to recharge the
largest clean agent system within 24 hours after a discharge. Include the amount of
bulk agent storage available.
7. The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the clean agent
system equipment so that immediate replacement parts are available from inventory.
8. The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available on a
twenty-four-hour-seven-day-a-week basis.
21 20 00-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
C. Submittals
1. The installing contractor shall submit the following design information and drawings
for approval prior to starting work on this project:
a.
Field installation layout drawings having a scale of not less than ⅛ in =
1ft-0 in detailing the location of all agent storage tanks, nozzles, pipe runs,
including pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s), detectors, manual pull
stations, audible and visual alarms, etc.
b.
Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door holders,
special sealing requirements, and equipment shutdown.
c.
Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, (room and
above ceiling as applicable) and for mechanical and electrical work.
d.
Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and include
point-to-point conduit runs and a description of the method(s) used for
detector mounting.
e.
Provide an internal control panel wiring diagram which shall include power
supply requirements and field wiring termination points
f.
Separate drawing providing symbol legend and identifying all symbols used.
g.
Annunciator wiring schematics and dimensioned display panel illustration
shall be provided.
h.
Complete hydraulic flow calculations, from a UL listed computer program,
shall be provided for all engineered clean agent systems. Calculation
sheet(s) shall include the manufacturer’s name and UL listing number for
verification. The individual sections of pipe and each fitting to be used, as
shown on the isometrics, shall be identified and included in the calculation.
Total agent discharge time shall be shown and detailed by zone.
i.
Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply, taking into
consideration the power requirements of all alarms, initiating devices, and
auxiliary components under full load conditions.
j.
A complete sequence of operation shall be submitted detailing all alarm
devices, shutdown functions, remote signaling, damper operation, time
delay, and agent discharge for each zone or system.
2. Submit drawings, calculations and system component sheets for approval to the
local fire prevention agency, owner's insurance underwriter, and all other authorities
having jurisdiction before starting installation. Submit approved plans to the
architect/engineer for record.
PART 2 - SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
2.1
System Description and Operation
A.
The system shall be a Total Flood Clean Agent Fire Suppression System.
B.
This Specification is based upon FM200 system. Prior to bid, other Clean Agent Systems
will be considered for approval as equal provided there is no additional cost is incurred by
the owner.
C. The system shall provide a Clean Agent minimum design concentration as defined in
NFPA 2001, at the minimum anticipated temperature within the protected area. System
21 20 00-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
design shall not exceed 10% for normally occupied spaces, adjusted for maximum space
temperature anticipated, with provisions for room evacuation before agent release.
D. The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include a mechanical and electrical
installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, Clean Agent,
discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release and abort stations, audible and visual
alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls, shutdowns, alarm interface, advisory signs,
functional checkout and testing, training and any other operations necessary for a
functional UL listed Clean Agent suppression system.
E.
The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected spaces
against agent loss and/or leakage during the 10-minute "hold" period.
F.
The system(s) shall be actuated by a combination of ionization and photoelectric detectors
installed for maximum area coverage of 250 sq. ft. per detector, in the room, under floor
and above ceiling protected spaces. If the airflow is one air change per minute,
photoelectric detectors only shall be installed for maximum area coverage of 125 sq. ft.
per detector. (see NFPA 72.)
G. Detectors shall be Cross-Zoned detection, which requires two detectors to be in alarm
before release.
H. Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:
1. Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system, shall:
a.
Illuminate the “ALARM” lamp on the control panel face.
b.
Energize an alarm bell.
c.
Transfer auxiliary contacts to perform auxiliary system functions such as:
Operate door holder/closures on access doors; Transmit a signal to a fire
alarm system; Shutdown HVAC equipment.
d.
Light an individual lamp on an optional annunciator.
2. Actuation of a second detector, within the system, shall:
a.
Illuminate the “PRE-DISCHARGE” lamp on the control panel face.
b.
Energize a pre-discharge horn/strobe device.
c.
Shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
d.
Start time-delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds).
e.
System abort sequence is enabled at this time.
f.
Light an individual lamp on an optional annunciator.
3. After completion of the time-delay sequence, the Clean Agent system shall
discharge and the following shall occur:
a.
Illuminate a “SYSTEM FIRED” lamp on the control panel face.
b.
Shutdown of all power to high-voltage equipment.
c.
Energize a visual indicator(s) outside the hazard in which the discharge
occurred.
d.
Energize a “SYSTEM FIRED” audible device.
4. The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices located
at each hazard exit. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the sequence
description above except that the time delay and abort functions shall be bypassed.
21 20 00-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
The manual discharge station shall be of the electrical actuation type and shall be
supervised at the main control panel.
2.2
A.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. The Clean Agent system materials and equipment shall be standard products of the
supplier's latest design and suitable to perform all functions intended. When one or
more pieces of equipment shall perform the same function(s), they shall be
duplicates produced by one manufacturer.
2. All devices and equipment shall be UL Listed and/or FM approved.
3. Each system shall have its own supply of clean agent.
4. Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
5. Each supply shall be located within the hazard area, or as near as possible, to reduce
the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
6. The clean agent shall be stored in approved Clean Agent storage tanks. Tanks shall
be super-pressurized with dry nitrogen to an operating pressure of 360 psi at 70 °F.
Tanks shall be of high-strength low alloy steel construction and conforming to
NFPA 2001.
7. Tanks shall be actuated by either a resettable electric actuator or by pneumatic
means from a nitrogen cartridge located in the releasing device. Explosive devices
shall not be permitted.
8. Each tank shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to provide visual
and electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low-pressure switch shall
be wired to the control panel to provide audible and visual "Trouble" alarms in the
event the container pressure drops below 290 psi. The pressure gauge shall be color
coded to provide an easy, visual indication of container pressure.
9. Tanks shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates before the
internal nominal pressure exceeds 730 psi.
10. Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided within the manufacturer's guidelines
to distribute the Clean Agent throughout the protected spaces. The nozzles shall be
designed to provide proper agent quantity and distribution. Nozzles shall be available
in ½ in. through 2 in. pipe sizes. Each size shall be available in 180° and 360°
distribution patterns.
11. Distribution piping and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's requirements, NFPA 2001, and approved piping standards and
guidelines. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using
accepted practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be adequately supported
and anchored at all directional changes and nozzle locations.
a.
All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable solvents
to remove burrs, mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
b.
All pipe threads shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to the
male thread only.
12. Piping shall be clearly labeled and identified as part of Clean Agent system.
13. Complete system shall be seismically braced in accordance with the most current
versions of SMACNA publication “Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for
Mechanical Systems” for seismic protection of piping and the International Building
Code (IBC) for seismic protection of equipment, Hazard Level B.
21 20 00-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
AGENT
1. The fire suppression agent shall be 3M™ Novec™ 1230 Fire Protection Fluid
manufactured by 3M Company, St. Paul, MN or approved equal by their supplier.
2. Agent shall not contain any Hydrofluorocarbons (HFC).
C. CONTROL PANEL
1. The control panel shall be an AUTOPULSE releasing panel supplied by ANSUL
INCORPORATED, or approved equal.
2. The detection control system and its components shall be UL listed and FM
approved for use as a local fire alarm system with releasing device service.
3. The control system shall perform all functions necessary to operate the system
detection, actuation, and auxiliary functions.
4. The control system shall include battery standby power to support 24 hours in
standby and 5 minutes in alarm.
5. The control system shall be microprocessor based, utilizing a distributed processing
concept. A single microprocessor failure shall not impact operation of additional
modules in the system.
6. The control system shall be capable of supporting Cross Zoned Detection.
7. The control system shall supply integrated 2.0 amp (minimum) power supply
circuitry.
8. Each control system shall contain four (4) initiating circuits:
a.
Each circuit shall be capable of Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style A)
operation.
b.
Each circuit shall be capable of operating up to fifteen (15) approved
detectors or thirty (30) detectors per system.
c.
Each circuit shall be capable of monitoring contact devices configured for
manual release, manual alarm, system abort, trouble input or auxiliary
(non-fire) input.
9. Each control system shall contain release circuits for activation of a fire suppression
system(s):
a.
Each circuit shall be capable of Class B (Style Y) operation.
b.
Each circuit shall be rated for a minimum of 1.5 amp @ 24 VDC.
c.
Each control system shall contain two (2) indicating appliance circuits for
annunciation:
d.
Each circuit shall be capable of Class A (Style B) or Class B (Style Y)
operation.
e.
Each circuit shall be rated for a minimum of 1.5 amp @ 24 VDC.
10. Each control system shall provide an auxiliary power supply rated for 2 amps @
24 VDC.
11. Each control system shall provide two (2) SPST relays: one for common alarm and
one for common trouble. Four (4) additional programmable relays can be added to
each control system by adding a relay module.
D. DETECTORS
1. The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and the guidelines of NFPA 72.
21 20 00-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
2. The ionization detector shall be an Ansul model, or approved equal.
3. The photoelectric detector shall be an Ansul model, or approved equal.
E.
MANUAL RELEASE (Electric)
1. The electric manual release shall be a dual action device which provides a means
of manually discharging the suppression system when used in conjunction with the
detection system.
2. The manual release shall be an Ansul model, or approved equal.
3. The manual release or manual pull station shall be a dual action device requiring
two distinct operations to initiate a system actuation.
4. Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions and shall cause all
release and shutdown devices to operate in the same manner as if the system had
operated automatically.
5. Manual release shall be located at each exit from the protected hazard.
F.
ABORT STATION
1. The abort station shall be the “Dead Man” type and shall be located next to each
manual release.
2. The abort station shall be an Ansul model, or approved equal.
3. The abort station shall be supervised and shall indicate a trouble condition at the
control panel, if depressed, and no alarm condition exists.
4. “Locking” or “Keyed” abort stations shall not be permitted.
G. AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARMS
1. Alarm audible and visual signal devices shall operate from the control panel.
2. The alarm bell, alarm horn, and horn strobe devices shall be an Ansul model or
approved equal.
3. The visual alarm unit shall be an Ansul strobe device, or approved equal.
4. A strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exit door from the
protected space. Provide an advisory sign at each light location.
H. CAUTION AND ADVISORY SIGNS
1. Signs shall be provided to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations of the
system equipment provider
2. Entrance sign: (1) required at each entrance to a protected space.
3. Manual discharge sign: (1) required at each manual release station.
4. Flashing light sign: (1) required at each flashing light over each exit from a protected
space.
I.
SYSTEM AND CONTROL WIRING
1. All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
2. All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or conduit, and shall
be installed and kept separate from all other building wiring.
3. All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring. Runs
of conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, and
installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions.
21 20 00-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
4. The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Colorcoded wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be
free from shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the system drawings), and
crosses between conductors. Final terminations between the control panel and the
system field wiring shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory-trained
representative.
5. All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike
manner, to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725 and Article 760,
except as otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in NFPA 72.
Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province, and/or country codes.
6. The complete system electrical installation and all auxiliary components shall be
connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
PART 3 - TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION
3.1
SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT
A.
After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked out,
inspected, and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures and NFPA standards.
B.
All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and installation.
C. All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and resistance to
earth.
D. Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
procedures and test values recorded.
E.
The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner or his
representative, and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks, shall be
operational at least five (5) days prior to the final acceptance tests.
F.
All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and visual
devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall function as required
and designed.
G. Each control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble condition into
the system.
3.2
A.
TRAINING REQUIREMENTS
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to each
shift of the owner’s personnel. Each training session shall include control panel operation,
manual and abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory procedures, auxiliary
functions and emergency procedures.
21 20 00-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) complete operation
and maintenance instruction manuals to the owner. All aspects of system operation and
maintenance shall be detailed, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits,
a written description of the system design, sequence of operation and drawing(s)
illustrating control logic and equipment used in the system. Checklists and procedures for
emergency situations, troubleshooting techniques, maintenance operations and
procedures shall be included in the manual.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) copies of
system “As-Built” drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation
details including all equipment locations (ie., control panel(s), agent container(s),
detectors, alarms, manual pull station(s) and abort switch(s), etc.), as well as piping and
conduit routing details. Show all room or facilities modifications, including door and/or
damper installations completed. One (1) copy of reproducible engineering drawings shall
be provided reflecting all actual installation details.
ACCEPTANCE TEST
A.
At the time “As-Built” drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted, the
installing contractor shall submit a “Test Plan” describing procedures to be used to test
the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of all tests to
be performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to be employed.
The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation requirements of this
specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the owner and
shall not be conducted until the Test Plan has been approved.
B.
The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and
intended. All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation and manual actuation, HVAC
and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices, and manual override of abort
functions. Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power and battery power supplies,
shall be tested and qualified.
C. A room pressurization test shall be conducted in each protected space to determine the
presence of openings, which would affect the agent concentration levels. The test(s) shall
be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp. Door Fan system, or approved equal, with
integrated computer program. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001.
D. If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in leaks
and/or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be responsible for
coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the general contractor or his
sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor shall be responsible for adequately
sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or leakage. The installing contractor shall
inspect all work to ascertain that the protected space(s) have been adequately and
properly sealed. THE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE
RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SUCCESS OF THE ROOM PRESSURIZATION TESTS. If the
first room pressurization test is not successful, in accordance with these specifications,
21 20 00-9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 10 00
the installing contractor shall direct the general contractor to determine, and correct, the
cause of the test failure. The installing contractor shall conduct additional room
pressurization tests, at no additional cost to the owner, until a successful test is obtained.
Copies of successful test results shall be submitted to the owner for his record. Upon
acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into service.
3.6
A.
3.7
WARRANTY
All system components furnished and installed under this contract shall be warranted
against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full warranty period which is
standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of
system acceptance.
SYSTEM INSPECTIONS
A.
During the one-year warranty period, the installing contractor shall provide two (2)
inspections of each system installed under this contract. The first inspection shall be at
the six-month interval, and the second inspection at the 12-month interval. Inspections
shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and the
recommendations of NFPA 2001.
B.
Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) inspection shall be submitted to the owner
upon completion of each inspection.
END OF SECTION 21 20 00
21 20 00-10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Work includes complete mechanical systems indicated on the drawings and specified. The
Bid and Contract Documents and General Requirements of the specification are a part of
this division of the specification. Where the word "provide" is used, it means "furnish and
install complete and ready for use”. Provide supervision, labor, material, equipment, and
machinery necessary to complete the mechanical systems. Provide finished work, tested
and ready for operation.
B.
Valves
1.2
DRAWINGS
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic, indicating the general arrangement of systems and work, and
do not attempt to show exact details or all offsets in piping and ductwork. Do not scale
drawings. Examine the architectural drawings for exact location of fixtures and equipment.
Where they are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect.
B.
Follow drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in
which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom. If space conditions appear
inadequate, notify the Architect before proceeding with the work. Make reasonable
modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent conflict with work of
other trades and for proper execution of the work.
1.3
EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS
A.
Specific manufacturers and model numbers are noted to indicate a standard of design and
are not intended to be restrictive.
B.
Where the term “or approved equal” is used, alternative and/or substitute products will be
considered only prior to the bid date (Prior Approval). Where the term “or equal” is used,
approval of alternative and/or substitute products may be requested by the contractor after
the bid date. Submittal, review and potential approval of alternative and/or substitute
products will be considered and executed only under terms and conditions specified in
Section ____________.
C. When submitting an alternative and/or substitute product, Contractor shall include
complete product literature of original specified item.
D. Provide redesign to any part of the work resulting from the use of equipment and material
other than specified or indicated on the drawings. Obtain approval of redesign from the
Architect. Redesign cost and additional construction cost resulting from the redesign shall
be at the Contractor's expense.
1.4
A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOP DRAWING AND SUBMITTAL DATA
Check and verify field measurements and requirements. Submit promptly, so as not to
delay the work, one copies, checked and approved by the Contractor, of all shop drawings,
submittal data, and layout drawings. At the discretion of the Architect, the Contractor may
22 05 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
submit PDF submittals in leiu of paper copies. Confirm with the Architect prior to
submitting. The Architect will check and review with reasonable promptness the shop
drawings and submittal data only for conformance with the design concept of the project
and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Make
corrections required by the Architect and re-submit to the Architect one corrected copies.
The Architect’s review of the shop drawings and submittal data shall not relieve the
Contractor from responsibilities for deviation from the Contract Documents unless the
Contractor has in writing called to the Architect’s attention deviation at the time of
submission and secured the Architect’s written approval, nor shall it relieve the Contractor
from responsibility for errors in the shop drawings and submittal data.
B.
The shop drawings and submittal data for the material and equipment shall be submitted
at one time. Each copy shall be in a three ring binder, indexed, properly labeled indicating
specific material or equipment for which it is to be used and the specification section and
paragraph number relating to the submitted item.
C. Review, approve and stamp shop drawings and submittal data before submission to the
Architect. Notify the Architect in writing of any deviation from the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
D. Failure to submit shop drawings and submittal data in ample time for checking and review
shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of contract time.
E.
1.5
A.
1.6
See individual specification sections for required submittal data.
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA FOR THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION
Valves
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Give necessary notices, obtain permits and pay taxes, fees and other costs, including
utility connections or extensions for the work. File necessary drawings, prepare
documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental departments having
jurisdiction. Include all costs associated with notices, permits, taxes, fees, utility
connections or extensions, government approvals and other related costs in original bid.
Obtain required certificates of inspection for work and deliver to the Architect before
request for acceptance and final payment for the work.
B.
Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority
bearing on the performance of the work. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract
Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Architect
in writing and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate modification.
If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations, and without notice to the Architect, he shall assume full
responsibility, and shall bear all costs.
C. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall be
listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall
bear their listing mark.
22 05 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible.
B.
Provide valves with manufacturer’s name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside
of body.
C. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe
size valves, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Thread pipe sizes 2-inches and smaller.
E.
Flange pipe sizes 2½-inches and larger.
F.
Solder or thread-to-solder adapters for copper tubing.
G. Use valves with factory installed press ends with press copper piping.
H. Grooved end valves may be used in limited applications as specified herein.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
2.5
BALL VALVES FOR PRESS FIT COPPER SYSTEMS
2-Inch and Smaller: Forged brass body, 300 psig CWP, chrome plated brass ball and
stem, TFE seats and fluoroelastomer packing, lever handle, Vic-Press 304 ends. Victaulic
Series 589 or approved equal.
ALL OTHER BALL VALVES
2-Inch and Smaller: 2 piece cast bronze body and end-piece ASTM B 584 (alloy shall
contain no more than 15% zinc), full port stainless steel ball, blowout proof; B16 stainless
steel stem, teflon seats and seals, threaded ends, 600 psi CWP, Class 150. Where piping
is insulated, valves shall be provided with 2" extended handles of non-thermal conductive
material and a protective sleeve that allows operation of the valve without breaking the
vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. Provide with memory stops, which are fully
adjustable after insulation is applied, NIBCO T-585-70-66; Apollo 77C-140, Milwaukee
BA-400S; equal of Red-White, Crane, Watts; or other approved equal.
GATE VALVES
2-Inch and Smaller: Bronze body, wedge disc, threaded bonnet, threaded ends, rising
stem, 125 psi, S.W.P., NIBCO T-113, Milwaukee 148, equal of Red-White or Crane, or
other approved equal. Non-rising stem may be used for buried and confined space areas.
VALVE OPERATORS
A.
Provide suitable handwheels for valves.
B.
Provide one (1) plug cock wrench for every ten (10) plug cocks sized 2-inches and smaller,
minimum of one wrench. Provide wrench with set screw for each plug cock sized
2½-inches and larger.
22 05 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish in writing to other trades, with copies to
the Architect, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed
satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
B.
Where plumbing work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of
other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If
work is installed before coordinating with other trades, or if it causes any interference with
work of other trades, make the necessary changes in the work to correct the conditions
and bear all costs.
C. Furnish to other trades necessary templates, patterns, setting drawings and shop details
for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.
3.2
A.
3.3
SAFETY
The Architect has not been retained to provide design and construction services relation
to the Contractor’s safety precautions, or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor is solely and
completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of persons and
property during performance of work. This requirement applies continuously and is not
limited to normal working hours. Comply with “Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction”, Volume 36, No. 75, of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of
Labor. Provide required safety measures and consult with the state or federal safety
inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not
exist or whether compliance with state or federal regulations exists.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work and material from damage and be liable for damage.
B.
Be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted; protect
work against theft, injury or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received
on site which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary
covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING
Provide ladders, scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for delivery into the
premises and erection of any equipment and apparatus and execution for the work.
Remove same from premises when no longer required.
EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
Mass excavation to approximate building levels will be done by the General Contractor.
The Mechanical Subcontractor shall do trench and pit excavation and backfilling required
for mechanical work, inside and outside the building, including repairing of finished
surfaces, required shoring, bracing, pumping and protection for safety of persons and
22 05 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
property. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall remove excess earth resulting from his work
from the site. Local or State safety codes shall be strictly observed. Check the elevations
of the utilities entering and leaving the building. If such elevations require excavations
lower than the footing levels, notify the Architect of such conditions before excavations are
commenced. Make the excavations at the minimum required depths to not undercut the
footings.
B.
Filling, Backfilling, and Compaction:
1. General: Remove debris and decayable matter from areas to be filled before
proceeding. Use only materials approved by the Architect for fills. Obtain Architect’s
approval before filling against concrete or masonry walls. Make fills as soon as
feasible to insure maximum settlement.
2. Compaction of fills: Compact by ASTM D-1557, Method “A”, 95 percent density
under paved areas and building areas to 10 feet beyond building perimeter,
90 percent elsewhere. Place fills in lifts which, when compacted, shall not exceed
8-inches in depth and compact with multiple-wheeled pneumatic-tired rollers or other
approved methods. Fills made from cuts shall be made and compacted in one
operation so that the material is not left exposed to rain while in an uncompacted
state.
3. Fills under interior slabs: 4-inches of ¾-inch to 1½ inches washed gravel, evenly
graded. Cover with reinforced Kraft paper, Brownskin, Sisalkraft or equal. Lap joints
4-inches, turn up 4-inches onto vertical surfaces. Repair any punctures in membrane
before pouring concrete. Place 12-inches of washed gravel under plenums.
4. Fills against concrete walls where walls are dampproofed: Fill to be material from
excavations, approved by the Architect.
3.6
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
Materials and equipment required for the work shall be new and shall be furnished,
delivered, erected, installed, connected and finished in every detail; and shall be selected
and arranged to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of
material is given, an article as approved by the Architect shall be provided.
B.
Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge
of the work.
C. Equipment and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Architect in accordance
with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such
tests as the manufacturer recommends.
D. Provide equipment in the mid- range of written performance documentation to allow for
adjustment.
3.7
A.
ACCESSIBILITY
Install the work with adequate clearances throughout the project, including being
responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts, chases, double partitions and
suspended ceilings. Cooperate with other trades where work is in the same space. Such
spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.
22 05 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible
positions. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility
and any change shall be approved by the Architect.
C. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide the General Contractor the exact locations of
access panels for each concealed valve, control damper or other device requiring service.
Access panels will be provided and installed by the General Contractor and as specified
in the other divisions of the specifications. Submit locations of these panels to the General
Contractor in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work.
3.8
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A.
The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide wiring, except temperature control wiring,
equipment control wiring and interlock wiring. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide
power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including
power wiring through starters. Electrical Subcontractor shall provide starters and
disconnect switches not factory-mounted on equipment
B.
The Mechanical Subcontractor shall, regardless of voltage, provide temperature control
wiring, interlock wiring and equipment control wiring for the equipment that the Mechanical
Subcontractor furnishes or installs.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for power wiring. Control wiring shall be
the responsibility of the Mechanical Subcontractor. Motors and equipment shall be
provided for current characteristics as indicated on the electrical drawings.
3.9
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Provide drilling, coring, cutting, and patching necessary to install the work specified in this
division. Patching shall match adjacent surfaces.
B.
No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect, and cutting shall
be done in a manner directed by him. Do not damage or endanger any portion of the
project or work of the Owner or any other separate contractor by drilling, coring, cutting,
patching, excavating, and backfilling.
C. Inform the General Contractor and other subcontractors affected of requirements for
cutting and patching.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
BOXES, SLEEVES AND CHASES
Inform the General Contractor of requirements for boxes, sleeves and chases. The
General Contractor shall set boxes, sleeves and chases. Furnish General Contractor with
the boxes and sleeves and be responsible for informing General Contractor of required
location.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Upon completion of the work, furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating
the systems and equipment for a period of three (3) days of eight (8) hours each, or as
otherwise specified. Give at least forty-eight (48) hours’ notice to the Owner in advance of
22 05 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
this period. During this period, instruct the Owner or his representative fully in the
operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The training of the
appropriate maintenance staff for each equipment type and/or system shall include, as a
minimum, the following:
1. System/Equipment overview (what it is, what it does and which other systems and/or
equipment does it interface with).
2. Review of the available O&M materials.
3. Review of the Record Drawings on the subject system/equipment.
4. Hands-on demonstration of all normal maintenance procedures, normal operating
modes, and all emergency shutdown and start-up procedures.
3.12
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUALS
A.
Upon completion of the work and prior to acceptance of the mechanical work, prepare
servicing manuals in accordance with industry accepted standards describing the
requirements of mechanical equipment provided under this division of the specification.
B.
As a minimum, include in the manuals:
1. Submittal data stating equipment size and selected options for each piece of
equipment requiring maintenance.
2. Maintenance schedules
3. Manufacturers’ operation and maintenance instructions with parts list specific to the
equipment installed, with extraneous matter removed or neatly marked out. Routine
maintenance actions shall be clearly identified together with supplementary
drawings and information where necessary to describe and itemize servicing.
4. Provide a table of contents with all contents listed in an orderly presentation.
5. Manufacturers’ printed warranties
6. Names, addresses and phone numbers of General Contractor, Mechanical
Subcontractor(s), and all other related Subcontractors.
7. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of equipment suppliers.
8. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of at least two service agencies.
9. Controls system maintenance and calibration information, including wiring diagrams,
schematics and control sequence descriptions. Desired or field determined setpoints
shall be permanently recorded on control drawings at control devices, or for digital
control systems, in programming comments.
10. A complete narrative of how each system is intended to operate. A Sequence of
Operation is not acceptable as a narrative for this requirement. Narrative shall
include:
a.
A detailed explanation of the original design intent.
b.
The basis of design (how the design was selected to meet the design intent).
c.
A detailed explanation of how new equipment is to interface with existing
equipment or systems (where applicable).
d.
Suggested set points.
C. Data in manuals shall be neat, clean copies. Drawings shall be accordion-folded.
Manufacturers’ advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and
maintenance instruction.
D. Place data for the manual in hardcover 3-ring loose-leaf notebooks. Label bound edge of
notebooks with the name of the building, Owner, name of the project, year of completion,
22 05 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
and the words “Mechanical Equipment”. Label front of notebooks with the name of the
Owner, name of the building, name of the project, Owner’s project number, date, General
Contractor, Mechanical Subcontractor, Architect, and Mechanical Engineer.
E.
Submit one copy of the data in a preliminary draft form to the Architect for approval prior
to preparing finished copies.
F.
Provide two (2) copies of the finished manuals to the Architect.
3.13
A.
3.14
A.
3.15
RECORD DRAWINGS
Within 90 days after the date of system acceptance, provide record drawings of all
buildings and plot plans. Record drawings shall include as a minimum the location and
performance data on each piece of equipment, general configuration of duct and pipe
distribution system, including sizes, and the terminal air and water design flow rates of the
actual installation. Record drawings shall also incorporate any mechanical work which
deviates from the contract drawings, including changes resulting from addenda, Requests
for Information and Change Orders. Neatly draft changes on clean “hard copy” drawings
to show the work clearly in the actual locations as built.
CLEANING
Promptly remove waste material and rubbish caused by the work. At Completion of the
work, clean dirt and debris from the mechanical installation, including equipment, piping,
ductwork, and plumbing fixtures.
WARRANTY
A.
All work, material and equipment to be free from defects. Correct all defects and failures
occurring within one year from date of final acceptance without cost to the Owner except
when such failure is due to neglect or carelessness by the Owner, as determined by the
Architect.
B.
The warranty disregards shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment provided.
C. Make all necessary adjustments and corrections during first year of operation. The fact
that the Architect was present during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work.
3.16
A.
3.17
A.
ASBESTOS
This project is not expected to require work in the presence of asbestos fibers. These
Division 22 Bid Documents do not provide for or cover the identification, removal,
encapsulation, or disposition of such materials. The Contractor is cautioned that should
he encounter suspicious material, to obtain all instructions relative to proceeding with the
execution of the work directly from the Owner.
GENERAL INSTALLATION
Install all valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
22 05 00 – 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.18
A.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00
VALVE SERVICE
Isolation and shut-off for press-fit copper systems
1. 2-Inch and smaller: Use valves listed under “ball valves for press fit copper systems.
3.19
VALVE ACCESS
A.
Install valves in accessible location to allow for maintenance and removal.
B.
Provide chain-guides and chains for valves 4-inch and larger with horizontal centerline of
the valve more than 7-feet above the floor. Mount valve horizontally with chain long
enough to terminate 4-feet above the floor. Chain operators shall be same manufacturer
as the valve.
END OF SECTION 22 05 00
22 05 00 – 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 07 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Pipe Insulation
B.
Equipment Insulation
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
Equipment insulation
CODES AND STANDARDS
General
1. NFPA 90A and 90B, UL-181 (Class 1) and UL-723
2. Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions, latest adopted version.
B.
For Elastomeric Material
1. ASTM C-534
C. For Flame Spread and Fuel Contributed and Smoke
1. UL Standard No. 723, NFPA Standard No. 255 and ASTM Standard No. E-84
D. Red List
1. Materials as defined by the Living Building Challenge Rating System known to have
a hazardous effect on human health.
1.4
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification section 22 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
GENERAL
Materials shall be of the highest grade. Adhesives, sealers, vapor coatings, etc., shall be
compatible with the materials to which they are applied, and shall not corrode, soften or
otherwise attack such material in either the wet or dry state. Scrap pieces of insulation
shall not be used where a full section will fit. Glass fiber materials which become wet or
damaged during installation shall be removed and replaced with new materials.
Acceptability of a manufacturer is not to be taken as acceptability of his “usual” or “regular”
accessory materials such as facings, adhesives, etc.
22 07 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 07 00
Unless specified otherwise, all facings, coatings, PVC covers and other accessories shall
have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for Flame Spread and 50 for Fuel Contributed
and Smoke Developed; ratings determined by UL Standard No. 723, NFPA Standard
No. 255 or ASTM Standard No. E-84. UL label or listing, or satisfactory test results from
the approved testing laboratory, shall be available to indicate that fire hazard ratings for
materials do not exceed the above amounts.
C. Materials shall be formaldehyde free and free of Living Building Challege Red List
Materials.
D. Product used shall emit no Volatile Organic Compounds when applied, and shall not
contain phenol, formaldehyde, or acrylics.
E.
2.2
Insulation shall comply with the latest adopted version of the Washington State Energy
Code Commercial Provisions.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Product name and numbers listed are Owens-Corning Fiberglas, Armstrong Cork
Company, and Childers.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers are Manville, Certain-Teed, Knauf, or equal.
2.3
PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Provide insulation material as follows:
Service
Insulation Material
DOMESTIC HOT, COLD
Two-Piece Fiberglas ASJ/SSLAND HOT CIRCULATING
II
WATER PIPING
MISCELLANEOUS
SYSTEMS:
REFRIGERATION
CONDENSATE DRAIN
PIPING, SOIL, AND WASTE
PIPING
2.4
Two-Piece Fiberglas ASJ/SSLII
Insulation Cover
Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II , or at
contractor's option
Armstrong ½-inch thick
self-seal Armaflex 2000 on
piping 1/2-inch thru 2-inch
pipe size
Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II , or at
contractor's option
Armstrong ½-inch thick
self-seal Armaflex 2000 on
piping ½-inch thru 2-inch
pipe size
PIPING INSULATION THICKNESS
A.
All domestic cold water piping, including all piping installed in concealed spaces, shall be
insulated per the following table, and in accordance with all requirements of the
Washington State Plumbing Code, and shall be sealed vapor tight to prevent condensation
from forming on the pipe or insulation.
B.
Insulate all piping with the materials specified in the preceding table to the thicknesses
required in the latest adopted version of the Washington State Energy Code Commercial
Provisions, and in accordance with the following table, except:
22 07 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 07 00
1. Specified insulation that has a conductivity outside the range indicated in the
following table shall be provided with the minimum thickness required in the
“Alternative Insulation Types” portion of the Washington State Energy Code
Commercial Provisions.
Insulation
Conductivity
Conductivity
Range (Btuin/(h-ft2-deg
F)
Nominal Pipe Diameter (Inches)
Mean
Design
Rating
Operating
Temp
Temp
(deg F)
Range
(deg F)
All Domestic Water and Service Hot Water
Systems
105-140
0.21-0.28
100
Below
0.22-0.28
75
105
2.5
Up to 1
1 to
˂1-1/2
1-1/2
to ˂4
4 to ˂8
>8
1.0
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.0
PIPE METAL JACKETING
A.
Childers Strap-On aluminum jacket, 0.016-inch minimum thickness and 1/2-inch wide
aluminum bands, 0.02-inch minimum thickness for pipe.
B.
Childers aluminum jacket, 0.02-inch minimum thickness for pipe fittings.
2.6
A.
EQUIPMENT, VALVE AND ACCESSORY INSULATION
Hydrous Calcium Silicate Insulation for Equipment
1. Insulation: Manville “Thermo-12”, Owens-Corning “Kaylo” 10-inch, Pabco “Caltemp”
or Carey “Careytemp” (expanded silica); asbestos free; premolded, 1½-inch
thickness.
2. Insulating Cement: Asbestos-free; A.P. Green, Quigley, Eagle Picher or Carey
manufacturer.
3. Jacket: 8.5 ounce glass fiber cloth, Alpha Style 84205 fabric.
4. Sewing Thread: Alpha Associates No. S-40-1 “Alpha-Maritex” braided glass fiber
sewing thread with stainless steel reinforcement and Teflon coating; 0.050-inch
diameter.
B.
Prefabricated Insulation Batts.
1. Insulation: 3-inch thick Owens-Corning Type II glass wool or Knauf “Elevated
Temperature Blanket”; non-oiled.
2. Jacket: Tight weave, woven glass fiber cloth; Alpha Associates Type 1925.
3. Accessories: Jacket sewing thread shall be glass fiber and stainless steel sewing
twine. Jacket lacing hooks shall be brass or stainless steel Bergen hooks. Lacing
shall be copper wire.
4. Lagging Finish Compound: Benjamin Foster 30-30 lagging adhesive and 30-42
lagging adhesive.
22 07 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
2.7
A.
PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 07 00
RIGID INSERTS
Manville Thermo-12 pipe insulation, cork, or shaped wood.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Install covering after piping, ductwork, and equipment have been tested and approved.
B.
Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and
during application.
C. Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls except at firewalls.
D. Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, with manufacturer's
labels.
E.
3.2
Perform work at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PIPING
A.
Apply insulation to connections, joints, welds, flanges, or threaded joints after pipe tests
are completed.
B.
Apply insulation over flanged joints after piping has been brought up to operating
temperature and flange bolts have been fully tightened.
C. Insulate flanges, unions, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints only on
domestic cold water systems.
D. Provide rigid inserts where piping supports pass around the outside of insulation with a
vapor barrier. Repair damage to vapor barrier resulting from installation of the inserts by
sealing with a vapor barrier pressure-sensitive tape.
E.
Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports, and other protrusions.
F.
Provide adequate support for insulation on vertical pipe to prevent slipping.
G. Insulate thermometer and pressure/temperature test wells over their exterior length.
Insulate wells protruding above finish pipe or equipment insulation. Neatly taper insulation
away from top of well.
H. Insulate pressure gauge lines up to first shutoff valve in gauge lines.
I.
Cover piping, fittings, valves, and accessories in utility tunnels, located outdoors, and
where indicated on the drawings with metal jacketing.
J.
Do not insulate cold water piping buried under concrete slab on grade, or direct buried
underground pipe outside the building.
K.
Insulate soil and waste piping where noted on the drawings, where piping is installed in
outside walls, and where subject to freezing.
22 07 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
L.
PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 07 00
Seal butt joints of insulation with pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape. Seal exposed ends
of insulation with Benjamin-Foster 30-36, and at 21-foot intervals on continuous runs of
pipe. Use Armstrong #520 adhesive on Armaflex II and Armstrong 2000 products. Apply
insulation with all sides and end joints butted tightly.
M. Valves, fittings and accessories:
1. Except as specified otherwise, insulate with covering same as pipe insulation
material or equal in temperature resistance and thickness to that of connecting pipe.
2. Fittings, valves and accessories exposed in rooms cover with Zeston PVC covers,
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
N. Calcium silicate insulation:
1. Wire in place with 16-gauge black annealed wire, 12-inches on center. Stagger joints
on multi-layered applications.
2. Field apply jackets in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
O. At handicapped lavatories, insulate tailpiece, trap, trap arm, and hot water supply with
same insulation as hot water piping, and cover with Zeston jackets.
3.3
A.
EQUIPMENT, VALVE AND ACCESSORY
Application
1. Hydrous Calcium Silicate Insulation: Insulate the following to the thickness listed:
Item
Thickness
Hot Water Tank
3-inch
All Other Hot Equipment
3-inch
2. Prefabricated Insulation Batts: Insulate the following:
a.
Domestic Cold Water Flanges, Valves, Unions, Strainers, Flexible
Connections and Expansion Joints
B.
Calcium Silicate Insulation
1. Provide lugs, nuts or 10-gauge black annealed iron wire welded to metal surfaces
for securing insulation.
2. Fill depression and cavities in equipment surfaces with insulating cement to provide
smooth base for insulation. Finish curved surface to conform with curve of surface
being covered. Finish other surfaces true and smooth. Reinforce insulation at
openings and corners with metal beading. Leave access doors, moving parts and
code stamps uncovered. Install insulation around openings to assure accessibility.
3. Apply insulation around removable heads on tanks and heaters to permit removal of
heads without disturbing shell insulation. Cover shell flanges and head flanges with
insulation of thickness specified. Apply insulation on head flanges for removal and
replacement in sections without undue difficulty and breakage.
4. Insulate the heads of the tube bundles of converters with two-segment, removable
jacketed heads. Fabricate jackets from 22-gauge galvanized iron. Mold insulation
into the jacket using high temperature cement, 2-inch thick reinforced with 1-inch
poultry netting.
22 07 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 07 00
5. Secure block insulation with ½-inch wide stainless steel bands spaced at maximum
18-inch centers except where block insulation is reduced in dimension. Space bands
as required. Fasten to lugs, nuts or to wires welded to shells.
6. Cover entire area of insulation with 1-inch mesh poultry netting and apply two coats
of insulating finish cement 1-inch thick over entire surface. Cover with 6-ounce
canvas and two (2) coats of mastic. Glass fabric may be used in lieu of 6-ounce
canvas. Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation.
C. Prefabricated Insulation Batts
1. Materials: Cover all surfaces with batts of glass fiber within glass cloth jackets and
with outer vapor barrier finish, made and shaped to fit irregular contour surfaces of
the valves. Thickness shall be same as on adjacent piping.
2. Construction of Batts: Construct batts with glass wool, fully enclose all sides and
edges, within woven glass fiber cloth. Jacket shall be sewn with glass fiber and
stainless steel sewing twine, and rolled in blind seams, with batts compressed to 1
½-inch thickness. Attach stainless steel Bergen hooks on 3-inch centers around all
edges of batts on top surfaces.
3. Attachment: Fit the batts to the surface, with edges overlapping adjacent insulation
at least 3-inch, and lace between hooks with stainless steel wire lacing.
END OF SECTION 22 07 00
22 07 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 22 10 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Hot, cold, and hot water circulating piping system, connection to fixtures and equipment.
B.
Cleaning and disinfection of domestic hot and cold systems.
1.2
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Thermometers
B.
Pressure Gauges
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Conform to the standards, details, specifications and requirements of the Water Purveyor
City of Kirkland.
B.
Conform to the current listing of “Approved Cross-connection Control Devices”, D.S.H.S.,
Health Services Division, Water Supply and Waste Section.
C. All standards refer to the current edition.
1. ASTM A47 – Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
2. ANSI/ASTM A53 – Pipe, steel, black and hot-dipped zinc-coated, welded and
seamless.
3. ANSI/ASTM A74 – Cast iron soil pipe and fittings.
4. ANSI/ASTM A120 – Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless Steel Pipe
5. ANSI/ASME A197 – Cupola Malleable Iron
6. ANSI/ASME A234 – Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature Service
7. ASTM A307 – Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs
8. ASTM A525 – Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanised) by the Hot-Dip Process
9. ASTM A518 – Corrosion-resistant high silicon iron castings, pipe fitting.
10. ASTM A795 – Black and hot-dipped zinc-coated (galvanized) welded and seamless
steel pipe for fire protection.
11. ANSI/ASTM A126 – Gray iron castings for valves, flanges and pipe fittings.
12. ANSI/ASME B16.3 – Malleable-iron threaded fittings.
13. ANSI/ASME B16.4 – Cast iron threaded fittings Class 125 and 250.
14. ANSI/ASME B16.5 – Pipe flanges and flanged fittings.
15. ANSI B16.9 – Factory-made wrought steel butt welding fittings.
16. ANSI/ASTM B16.12 – Cast iron threaded drainage fittings.
17. ANSI/ASME B16.22 – Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings.
18. ANSI B16.25 – Butt welding ends for pipe, valves, flanges and fittings.
19. ANSI/ASME B16.29 – Wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder-joint
drainage fittings – DWV.
20. ANSI/ASTM B43 – Seamless red brass pipe, standard sizes.
21. ASTM B75 – Seamless Copper Tube.
22. ANSI/ASTM B306 – Copper drainage tube.
22 10 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 22 10 00
23. ASTM B813 – Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy
Tube
24. ASTM B828 – Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper
and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings
25. ANSI/AWWA C111 – Rubber gasket joints for ductile iron and gray iron pressure
pipe and fittings.
26. ANSI/AWWA C151 – Ductile iron pipe, centrifugally cast in metal molds or sand lined
molds, for water or other liquids.
27. ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement mortar lining.
28. ASTM C443 – Joints for circular concrete sewer and culvert pipe, using rubber
gaskets.
29. ASTM C564 – Rubber gaskets for cast iron soil pipe and fittings.
30. ASTM D2000 – Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive
Applications
31. ASTM D2235 – Solvent Cement for ABS Plastic Pipe and Fittings
32. ASTM D2661 – ABS Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
33. ASTM D2855 – Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with PVC
Pipe and Fittings
34. ASTM D4101 – Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials
35. ANSI Z49.1 – Safety in Welding and Cutting
36. CISPI No. 301 – Cast iron soil pipe and fittings for hubless cast iron sanitary system.
37. FS WW-P-521 – Pipe fittings, flange fittings, and flanges: Steel and malleable-iron
(threaded and butt welding) Class 150.
38. ASTM A234 – Seamless and welded wrought-steel welding fittings.
39. NSF 61 – Standard for Drinking Water System Components
1.4
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of Specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of Specification Section 22 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All grooved copper components (including couplings, fitting, valves and accessories) to
be supplied by one manufacturer.
B.
Grooving tools shall be equipped with roll sets specifically designed for grooving copper
tubing at copper-tube dimensions. (Flaring of tube fitting ends to accommodate IPS szied
couplings is not permitted)
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
PIPING SYSTEMS
All material in conformance with the standards listed in 1.03.
22 10 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 22 10 00
1. Domestic Water Piping (Above Ground):
a.
Pipe: Type L hard copper, ASTM B75.
b.
Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze soldered, ANSI/ASME B16.22
2. Soil/Waste Pipe (Above Ground):
a.
Pipe: Galvanized steel, Schedule 40, for piping 2½-inch and smaller. Service
weight coated cast iron, bell and spigot or no-hub for piping 3-inch and larger.
At Contractor's option and where code permits, ABS pipe or DWV copper
drainage tube may be used. ANSI/ASTM A120, A74, B306 and CISPI 301.
ASTM D2661-82
b.
Fittings: Black cast iron threaded drainage pattern for galvanized pipe.
Service weight coated cast iron bell and spigot or no-hub fittings, coupling,
shields and clamp assemblies. Wrought copper solder joint drainage fittings
for DWV tube. ANSI/ASTM A74, B16.12, ANSI/ASME B16.29 and CISPI
310. ABS fittings and solvent for ABS pipe ASTM D2661-82 and D2235.
3. Soil/Waste Piping (Below Ground):
a.
Pipe: Service weight coated cast iron, bell and spigot or cast iron no-hub
pipe, ANSI/ASTM A74 and CISPI 301. At Contractor’s option and where
code permits ABS pipe ASTM D2661-82
b.
Fittings: Service weight coated cast iron bell and spigot or no-hub fittings,
couplings and shield and clamp assemblies, ANSI/ASTM A74 and CISPI
310. ABS fittings and solvent for ABS pipe ASTM D2661-82 and D2235.
4. Vent Piping (Above Ground):
a.
Pipe: Galvanized steel, Schedule 40; or service weight coated cast iron, bell
and spigot no-hub pipe. At Contractor's option, ABS pipe or DWV copper
drainage tube may be used, ANSI/ASTM A53, A74, B306 and CISPI 310.
ASTM D2661-82
b.
Fittings: Black cast iron threaded drainage pattern for galvanized pipe.
Service weight coated cast iron bell and spigot or no-hub fittings, couplings,
shields and clamp assemblies. Wrought copper solder joint drainage fittings
for DWV tube, ANSI/ASTM A74, B16.12, ANSI/ASME B16.29 and CISPI
310. ABS fittings and solvent for ABS pipe ASTM D2661-82 and D2235.
5. Cooling Unit Condensate Drain Piping:
a.
Pipe: Type L hard copper tube 1-inch and smaller, ASTM B75. DWV copper
1¼-inch and larger, ANSI/ASTM B306.
b.
Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze solder pressure fittings for Type L tube,
ASTM B75. Wrought copper solder joint drainage fittings for DWV tube,
ANSI/ASME B16.29.
2.2
2.3
UNIONS
a.
b.
c.
d.
Copper tube, Sweat, Nibco #733, Grinnell-ITT #9730, EPC #4733.
Steel pipe, threaded 2-inch and under, malleable-iron 250-lb. ground joint.
Steel pipe, welded 2½-inch and over, flange unions 150-lb. forged steel.
Dielectric unions, soldered to threaded 2-inch and below, flanged 2½-inch
and above. Select gasket for pressure and temperature range of service.
Capitol Series CS or F, Epco “Dielectric Union.”
COUPLINGS FOR COPPER GROOVED TUBE
22 10 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
A.
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 22 10 00
Mechanical Couplings: 2"-8" for copper tubing consisting of ductile iron cast housings,
complete with a synthetic rubber gasket of a pressure-responsive design, with plated nuts
and bolts to secure unit together. Couplings shall be manufacturered to connect copper
tubing sized tube and fittings. (Flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not
allowed.)
1. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, coated
with copper colored slkyd enamel. Housing cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt
pads to provide rigidity.
2. Coupling Gaskets: Gasket shall be EPDM compound with red color code designed
for operating temperatures from -30°F to +250°F.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
GROOVED-END COPPER FITTINGS
Fittings shall be manufactured to copper tubing sizes, with grooves designed to accept
grooved end couplings of the same manufacturer. Fittings shall be wrought copper,
conforming to ASTM B-75 alloy C1220 or ASTM B-152 alloy C11000 and ANSI B16.22,
or bronze sand casting ANSI B16.18 and UNS-C89836.
PIPE FLANGE BOLTS
Domestic water shall be ASTM A307, Grade B.
PIPE SEALS
A.
Water tight seals shall be modular, mechanical, interlocking HDPE thermoplastic links in
accordance with ASTM D2000 M3 BA510. Pressure plates shall be molded glass
reinforced nylon. All fasteners shall be mild steel coated with both zinc dichromate and an
organic corrosion resistance coating. Seals shall be suitable for use in water direct ground
burial and atmospheric conditions form -40 to 250 deg F, PSI Thunderline Model “C” LinkSeal, or equal.
B.
Fire stopping seals shall be USG Interiors Inc. Thermafiber Safing insulation and
Thermafiber Smoke Seal, or equal.
2.7
PRESSURE GAUGES
A.
Trerice No. 600 series, Weksler, Miljoco or equal.
B.
4½-inch dial, cast aluminum case without back flange.
C. Scale shall be selected appropriate to the usage. For gauges serving unfired pressure
vessels, the scale shall be a minimum of 1¼ times the relief valve setting and a maximum
of 2 times the vessel rating in accordance with the ASME Code. For gauges serving
boilers, the scale shall be a minimum of 1½ times and a maximum of 3½ times the relief
valve setting in accordance with Section IV, HG 6 of the ASME Code.
D. Gauges for use on water services shall be installed with Trerice 735 needle valve and Ray
Model 1 snubber.
2.8
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS
22 10 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 22 10 00
A.
Sisco P/T Plugs.
B.
Valve core and body suitable for300 degrees F.
C. ½-Inch size.
D. Test Kit 2-2.5-2GA-2T complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.9
Two (2) dial face gauge.
Two (2) stainless steel gauge adapter, size to match valve core/body.
Two (2) dial face thermometer.
Select suitable temperature and pressure ranges for system requirements.
ESCUTCHEON RINGS
A.
Chrome-plated split ring type.
B.
Deep recessed type on pipes with sleeves through floor which extend above finished floor
line to conceal pipe sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Route piping to avoid interference with structure, ceiling supports and framing, lights and
work of other trades. Provide offsets as required.
B.
Keep openings in piping and ends of pipe closed during installation.
C. Provide for all expansion, locating offsets and spring pieces where necessary.
D. Ells shall be long-radius.
E.
Change size in piping with reducing couplings; bushings not acceptable.
F.
Install all piping parallel with the building and other piping.
G. Cut pipe accurately to measurement established on building and work into place without
springing or forcing.
H. Piping installed on fill, excavated areas and backfill shall be adequately supported on
beams supported by the building structure and undisturbed earth.
I.
Install piping concealed in finished rooms, unless indicated otherwise.
J.
Install exposed work neatly and workmanlike; run pipes parallel to the closest wall;
maintain maximum headroom; avoid light fixtures.
K.
Correct piping leaks immediately; use new materials; leak-sealing compounds or peening
not permitted.
3.2
A.
THREADED PIPING JOINTS
Ream all pipe to full diameter.
22 10 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 22 10 00
Use non-Mercury thread sealant on all compressed air threaded joints, Locktite #PSP 567,
or equal.
C. Use pipe dope or Teflon tape on male threads of all other threaded joints.
D. Close nipples not permitted.
E.
Full cut threads and make up joints with no more than three threads exposed.
F.
Do not caulk threaded joints to stop leaks.
3.3
COPPER PIPING JOINTS
Note:
Contractor to provide sweated joints in compliance with the method outlined in
ASTM B828.
A.
Ream thoroughly to remove all burrs.
B.
Polish contact surfaces of fittings and pipes with emery cloth, sandpaper or steel brush,
and wipe clean before fluxing male and female surfaces of joints.
1. Steel wool not permitted for polishing.
C. Apply a thin even coating of flux with a brush to both tube and fitting as soon as possible
after cleaning.
D. Insert the tube end into fitting cup, making sure that the tube is seated against the base of
the fitting cup. Employ a slight twisting motion while inserting tube. Remove excess flux
from the exterior of the joint with a cotton rag.
E.
Support the tube and fitting assembly to ensure a uniform capillary space around the entire
circumference of the joint.
F.
Preheat the fitting and tube evenly and Take care to avoid burning the flux.
G. Apply solder to the fitting while concurrently heating the fitting/tube.
1. Water flushable solder for all potable water systems in conformance with the UPC
and ASTM B813-93 "Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for
Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube".
H. Provide solder unions, ground joint or flanged joints where necessary for access to
equipment.
3.4
MECHANICAL PIPING JOINTS
A.
Groove pipe for mechanical grooved joints in accordance with the manufacturer’s
specifications contained in the latest published literature.
B.
Fabrication techniques for all mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations contained in the latest published literature.
C. The gasket style elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended
service as specified
D. Coupling installation shall be complete when visual metal to metal contact is reached.
22 10 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
E.
3.5
A.
3.6
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 22 10 00
Groove piping representative shall periodically visit the job site and review installation.
Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.
CAST IRON BELL AND SPIGOT PIPING JOINTS
Make joints up with double-sealed elastomeric compression-type gaskets conforming to
ASTM C564; or no-hub couplings, shields, and clamp assemblies.
UNIONS
A.
Provide unions at all connections to equipment and where necessary to disconnect for
repairs.
B.
Use union fittings wherever practicable to save joints.
C. Provide dielectric unions between iron and copper pipe.
3.7
PIPE SEALS AND ESCUTCHEON RINGS
A.
At exterior walls, walls below grade and floor slabs on grade, provide water tight seal.
Core drill round opening in existing concrete in accordance with seal manufacturer’s
recommendations. Install assembly to provide a penetration capable of withstanding a
20 psi differential pressure across the seal.
B.
At fire wall, floor and roof penetrations, seal annular space at pipes with fire stopping
insulation and 2-inch minimum coating of smoke seal.
C. Fill annular space at all other piping penetrations with fiberglass batt insulation to a
compressed fit.
D. Provide escutcheon rings for all exposed uninsulated pipes passing through walls, floors
and ceilings.
3.8
UNDERGROUND PIPE PROTECTIVE WRAP
A.
All piping not specifically rated for direct burial shall receive protective pipe wrapping. This
includes, but is not limited to, copper tubing, black steel pipe and galvanized steel pipe.
B.
The pipe wrap shall consist of a double wrapping of 100% lap, 7 mil thick, rubber based,
pressure sensitive adhesive backed, polyvinyl-chloride plastic tape. The tape shall
continuously cover the underground portion of the pipe to a point 6" above the floor level.
The tape shall conform to UL standard 510 and shall be “Tartan 1710” as manufactured
by 3M Corp. or other approved.
3.9
TESTING
A.
Upon completion of roughing-in and before setting fixtures, test hot and cold water system
at 150 psi hydrostatic. Hold test for a minimum of thirty (30) minutes.
B.
If a portion of piping is to be concealed before finishing, this portion shall be tested
separately.
22 10 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS
SECTION 22 10 00
C. If test shows leak or defect, repair by remaking with new material, and retest.
3.10
CLEANING AND CHLORINATION OF POTABLE WATER PIPING
A.
Initial Flushing: All domestic water piping shall be thoroughly flushed so that it is free from
scale, sediment, construction debris, etc. Minimum flushing velocity shall be 2.5-feet-per
second.
B.
Final Flushing: On completion of installation and testing of the potable water systems, preflush, chlorinate with Sodium Hypochlorite to AWWA C651-99 specifications and let stand
for 24 hours. Open and close valves to assure complete chlorination. Thoroughly flush
again until flush water meets AWWA standards and refill the pipe line.
C. Certificate: Submit to the Owner's Representative, a certificate from the testing firm,
stating that the chlorination and flushing have been successfully carried out.
END OF SECTION 22 10 00
22 10 00 – 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
SECTION 22 33 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Product Data: For each type of water heater indicated. Include selected fixture and trim,
fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate
materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
B.
Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related
components:
1. Electric domestic water heaters.
2. Related Sections include the following:
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings
specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads
and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty
valves are included where indicated.
C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
E.
1.5
Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-,
impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
category through one source from a single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, “Energy Policy Act,” for water flow
and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
22 33 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
SECTION 22 33 00
2. Comply with the requirements of the most recently adopted version of the Uniform
Plumbing Code (IAPMO) and as amended by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components – Health
Effects,” for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.
E.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
F.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings and components:
1. Instantaneous Electric Water Heaters: UL 499.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ELECTRICAL STORAGE-TYPE DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, shall be Rheed Ruud,
A.O. Smith, or Lochinvar.
1. Description: ASME or Non-ASME-code, steel horizontal or vertical arrangement
rated at 150 psig. Interior lining shall comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for
potable-water tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
2. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a.
Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
b.
Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.
c.
Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.
d.
Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
e.
Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
f.
Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type
g.
Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
h.
Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or
systems.
i.
Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and
stamped and complying with ASME PTC 25.3 and ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4,
for combination temperature and pressure relief valves. Include one or more
relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and
include pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating.
Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Assemble heaters and other components according to manufacturers’ written instructions.
B.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
22 33 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
SECTION 22 33 00
C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to
water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces
behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are
specified in Division 22 05 00.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and
vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding.”
1. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."
2. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water-tempering
equipment. Connect output form water-tempering equipment to emergency
plumbing fixtures.
3. Ground equipment.
a.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.3
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations
where installed.
1. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other
specified components.
2. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components.
3. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
4. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test
for compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities and
temperatures. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat
procedure until units operate properly.
5. Electrical-Component Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
a.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
6. Report test results in writing.
3.4
A.
ADJUSTING
Adjust equipment temperature settings.
22 33 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.5
A.
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
SECTION 22 33 00
CLEANING
Clean fixtures and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and
materials. Do the following:
1. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B.
3.6
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings,
inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
END OF SECTION 22 33 00
22 33 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and
trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate
materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.
1. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3
A.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related
components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
1.4
A.
Faucets.
Flushometers.
Toilet seats.
Protective shielding guards.
Fixture supports.
Disposers.
Water closets.
Urinals.
Lavatories.
Service sinks.
Water filters.
Manual water tempering valves.
Strainers.
Flashings.
Sleeve penetration systems.
Floor cleanouts.
Wall cleanouts.
Domestic HW circulating pumps.
Owner-furnished fixtures.
Related Sections include the following:
a.
Division 2 Section “Water Distribution” for exterior plumbing fixtures and
hydrants.
b.
Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories."
DEFINITIONS
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
1. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by
people with disabilities.
22 40 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
2. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes culturedmarble and solid-surface materials.
3. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.
4. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture.
Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts,
shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes.
Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.
5. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.
6. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.
7. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
8. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-,
impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each
category through one source from a single manufacturer.
1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with requirements in ICC/ANSI A117.1, “Accessible and Usable Buildings
and Facilities" and “Americans with Disabilities Act” for plumbing fixtures for people
with disabilities.
2. Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, “Energy Policy Act,” for water flow
and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
3. Comply with the requirements of the most recently adopted version of the Uniform
Plumbing Code (IAPMO) and as amended by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
a.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, “Drinking Water System Components
– Health Effects,” for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable
water.
b.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other
components that are compatible.
4. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
plumbing fixtures:
a.
Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.
b.
Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.
c.
Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
d.
Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5.
5. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
faucets:
a.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1.
b.
NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61.
c.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
d.
Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
e.
Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1.
f.
Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
22 40 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
z.
1.6
A.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald
Faucets: ASSE 1016.
Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444.
Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and
ASSE 1016.
Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.
Fixed Air-Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2
Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M or ASME A112.3.1
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: NFPA 70, Article 100
Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M
Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.
Pressure Vessels: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1.
Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.
Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.
Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.
Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
Point of use thermostatic water mixing valves: ASSE 1070 and/or CSA
B125.3
Thermostatic water mixing valves: ASTM F444 and ASSE 1017
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed, but no fewer than 2 of each type.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed, but no fewer than 2 of each type.
3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 5 of each type.
4. Toilet Seats: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than
5 of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
PUBLIC LAVATORY FAUCETS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Single-control or two-handle mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water
indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet
with non-integral spout, if applicable.
22 40 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
a.
b.
c.
2.2
A.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
Body Material: Solid brass.
Finish: Polished chrome plated.
Faucet shall conform to ASSE 1070 and/or CSA B125.3 or be provided with
an external thermostatic mixing valve in compliance with aforementioned
standards.
SINK FAUCETS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Single-control or two-handle mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water
indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet
with non-integral spout, if applicable.
a.
Body Material: Solid brass
b.
Finish: Polished or rough chrome plated.
2.3
A.
FLUSHOMETERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Flushometer for urinal or water-closet-type fixture. Include brass body
with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, control stop
with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chromeplated finish on exposed parts.
2.4
A.
TOILET SEATS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.
a.
Material: Molded, solid plastic.
2.5
A.
PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work are the following, or equal:
1. TRUEBRO, Inc.
2. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.
3. Make, model and additional components as indicated in the Plumbing Fixture
Schedule on the drawings, or equal.
4. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and
cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
22 40 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
2.6
A.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
FIXTURE SUPPORTS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Water-Closet Supports:
a.
Description: Combination carrier designed for accessible or standard
mounting height of wall-mounted, water-closet-type fixture. Include single or
double, vertical or horizontal, hubless waste fitting as required for piping
arrangement; faceplates; couplings with gaskets; feet; and fixture bolts and
hardware matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate,
and feet for installation in wide pipe space.
2. Urinal Supports:
a.
Description: Urinal carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal
and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture or with hanger and bearing
plates for accessible or standard mounting height of wall-mounting, urinaltype fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
3. Lavatory Supports:
a.
Description: Lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod or with hanger
plate and tie rod for accessible or standard mounting height of wall-mounted,
lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
4. Sink Supports:
a.
Description: Sink carrier with concealed arms and tie rod or with hanger plate
and tie rod for accessible or standard mounting height of wall-mounted, sinktype fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.
2.7
A.
WATER CLOSETS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description Accessible or standard, wall or floor-mounted, bottom or back-outlet,
vitreous-china fixture designed for close-coupled, gravity-type tank or flushometer
valve operation.
2.8
A.
URINALS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Accessible or standard, wall or floor-mounted, bottom or back-outlet,
vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation.
2. Description: Accessible or standard, wall-mounted, back-outlet dry, vitreous-china
fixture designed for liquid-trap-seal operation.
a.
Type: Without water supply.
b.
Trap-Seal Method: Proprietary cartridge or trap system.
c.
Trap-Sealing Liquid: Proprietary.
22 40 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
2.9
A.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
LAVATORIES
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Accessible or standard, wall or countertop-mounted, bottom-outlet,
vitreous-china fixture with integral overflow.
2.10
A.
KITCHEN SINKS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: One, two, or three-compartment, counter-mounted, enameled cast- iron
or stainless steel fixture.
2.11
A.
WATER FILTERS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Wall or floor-mounted cartridge-type assemblies suitable for potable
water with stainless steel or plastic housing, fittings, and pleated-polypropylene or
wound-fiber filter cartridge with 10 micron removable rating.
2.12
A.
WATER TEMPERING VALVES
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work are the following, or equal:
1. Sparco, Inc.
2. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B.
2.13
Description: Manually adjustable, thermostatically-controlled piston or disc water
tempering valve; rough bronze body with threaded inlet and outlet; and adjustable
temperature setting capable of limited antiscald protection.
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Stops: Chrome plated, ¼ turn, keyed, angle stop, compliant with ANSI 61-9. Fitting
connection to match size and type of upstream piping. For stops serving fixture faucets
with single control valve for mixed water: provide with in-line, chrome plated, check valve.
B.
Supplies: Braided stainless steel, fittings to match fixture and upstream connections;
length to match installation requirements to within 6". Compliant with ANSI 61-9.
C. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with bronze sleeve, packing and packing gland, of size
and end types to match connected piping.
22 40 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
2.14
A.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work are the following, or equal:
1. Manufacturers:
a.
ProSet Systems, Inc.
B.
Description: UL 1479, through-penetration firestop assembly consisting of sleeve and
stack fitting with firestopping plug.
1. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral
nailing flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
2. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye-branch stack fitting with
neoprene O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness in branch.
Include PVC protective cap for plug.
a.
Special Coating: Include corrosion-resistant interior coating on fittings for
plastic chemical waste and vent stacks.
2.15
A.
FLASHING MATERIALS
Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum
weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:
1. General Use: 4-lb/ft2, 0.0625-inch thickness.
a.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 3-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.
b.
Burning: 6-lb/ft2, 0.0938-inch thickness.
2. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses,
unless otherwise indicated:
a.
General Applications: 12 oz./ft2.
b.
Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./ft2.
3. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content
and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip
galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.
4. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil
minimum thickness.
5. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.
6. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar
accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being
installed.
7. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.
8. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.
2.16
A.
CLEANOUTS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Floor or wall cast-iron cleanout. Clamping device and adjustable
housing for floor installation. Outlet connection to match drainage piping.
22 40 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
2.17
A.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PUMP
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
1. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, closecoupled, in-line pump; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted
horizontally or vertically. Pump shall be rated for 150-psig minimum working
pressure and a continuous water temperature of 240°F and shall comply with the
requirements for circulating pumps as described by The Hydraulic Institute.
a.
Pump Construction:
b.
Casing: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet companion-flange
connections.
1)
Impeller: Polypropylene; statically and dynamically balanced and
keyed to shaft.
2)
Pump Shaft: Ceramic
3)
Pump Bearings: Self-lubricating carbon.
2. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated bearings, unless otherwise
indicated; and rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in
Division 22 Section “Motors.”
2.18
EXPANSION TANKS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on the drawings or equal.
B.
Description: Certified NSF 61 for domestic water use, ASME or non ASME rated, steel
pressure-rated tank with polypropylene liner and constructed with welded joints and
factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm rated for 150-psig minimum working pressure
and a continuous water temperature of 200 deg F.
1. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.
B.
Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
A.
INSTALLATION
Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to
manufacturers’ written instructions.
1. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.
22 40 00 – 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
a.
b.
c.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste
piping.
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible
fixtures.
2. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to
supports.
3. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or
building substrate.
4. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
5. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate
and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.
6. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
7. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
8. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected
to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe
spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached
for operation.
a.
Exception: Use ball valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.
Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Valves."
9. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly
connected to sanitary drainage system.
10. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected
to drainage system.
11. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle
mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are
easy for people with disabilities to reach.
12. Install toilet seats on water closets.
13. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if
required.
14. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at
stop valves.
15. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet
spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters
if required.
16. Install traps on fixture outlets.
a.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
b.
Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
17. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to
conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
18. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type,
one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants.”
22 40 00 – 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
19. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to fixture if piping and fixture connections are
constructed of different metals. Refer to Division 22 Section “Drainage and Vent
Piping” for piping.
20. Use chrome-plated brass or copper tube, fittings, and valves in locations exposed to
view. Plain copper tube, fittings, and valves may be used in concealed locations.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings
indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and
vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding.”
1. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Conductors and Cables.”
2. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water-tempering
equipment. Connect output form water-tempering equipment to emergency
plumbing fixtures.
3. Ground equipment.
4. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations
where installed.
1. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other
specified components.
2. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and
components.
3. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
4. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test
for compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities and
temperatures. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat
procedure until units operate properly.
5. Electrical-Component Testing: After electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
a.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
6. Report test results in writing.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures,
fittings, and controls.
B.
Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and
stream.
22 40 00 – 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
A.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.
Adjust equipment temperature settings.
CLEANING
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning
methods and materials. Do the following:
1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall
strainers and spouts.
2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.
B.
3.7
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings,
inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
END OF SECTION 22 40 00
22 40 00 – 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Work includes complete mechanical systems indicated on the drawings and specified. The
Bid and Contract Documents and General Requirements of the specification are a part of
this division of the specification. Where the word “provide” is used, it means “furnish and
install complete and ready for use”. Provide supervision, labor, material, equipment, and
machinery necessary to complete the mechanical systems. Provide finished work, tested
and ready for operation.
B.
Motors
1.2
DRAWINGS
A.
Drawings are diagrammatic, indicating the general arrangement of systems and work, and
do not attempt to show exact details or all offsets in piping and ductwork. Do not scale
drawings. Examine the architectural drawings for exact location of fixtures and equipment.
Where they are not definitely located, obtain this information from the Architect.
B.
Follow drawings in laying out work and check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in
which work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom. If space conditions appear
inadequate, notify the Architect before proceeding with the work. Make reasonable
modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent conflict with work of
other trades and for proper execution of the work.
1.3
EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS
A.
Specific manufacturers and model numbers are noted to indicate a standard of design and
are not intended to be restrictive.
B.
Where the term “or approved equal” is used, alternative and/or substitute products will be
considered only prior to the bid date (Prior Approval). Where the term “or equal” is used,
approval of alternative and/or substitute products may be requested by the contractor after
the bid date. Submittal, review and potential approval of alternative and/or substitute
products will be considered and executed only under terms and conditions specified in
Division 1.
C. When submitting an alternative and/or substitute product, Contractor shall include
complete product literature of original specified item.
D. Provide redesign to any part of the work resulting from the use of equipment and material
other than specified or indicated on the drawings. Obtain approval of redesign from the
Architect. Redesign cost and additional construction cost resulting from the redesign shall
be at the Contractor's expense.
1.4
A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOP DRAWING AND SUBMITTAL DATA
Provide shop drawings and product submittals as required in each of the following
specification sections. Check and verify field measurements and requirements. Submit
promptly, so as not to delay the work, three copies, checked and approved by the
23 05 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
Contractor, of all shop drawings, submittal data, and layout drawings. At the discretion of
the Architect, the Contractor may submit PDF submittals in leiu of paper copies. Confirm
with the Architect prior to submitting. The Architect will check and review with reasonable
promptness the shop drawings and submittal data only for conformance with the design
concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract
Documents. Make corrections required by the Architect and re-submit to the Architect one
corrected copy. The Architect’s review of the shop drawings and submittal data shall not
relieve the Contractor from responsibilities for deviation from the Contract Documents
unless the Contractor has in writing called to the Architect’s attention deviation at the time
of submission and secured the Architect’s written approval, nor shall it relieve the
Contractor from responsibility for errors in the shop drawings and submittal data.
B.
The shop drawings and submittal data for the material and equipment may be submitted
at separate times as follows:
1. Shop Drawings – a minimum of four (4) weeks prior to fabrication or installation.
2. Control Drawings and Submittal Data – a minimum of four (4) weeks prior to
installation.
3. All other Submittal Data – a minimum of four (4) weeks prior to purchase.
C. Each of the above groups of submittal information shall be in three-ring binders, indexed,
and properly labeled with the specification section and paragraph number relating to the
submitted item and shall indicate the specific material or equipment for which it is to be
used. At the discretion of the Architect, PDF Submittals may be allowed. If PDF are
allowed, all groups of submittal information shall be electronically indexed and labeled in
one PDF. Submittals not submitted in this manner, or incomplete submittals, will be
returned unreviewed for resubmittal in compliance with the above.
D. Review, approve, and stamp shop drawings and submittal data before submission to the
Architect. Notify the Architect in writing of any deviation from the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
E.
Failure to submit shop drawings and submittal data in ample time for checking and review
shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of contract time.
F.
See individual specification sections for required submittal data.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA FOR THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION
Motors
CODES AND STANDARDS
Give necessary notices, obtain permits and pay taxes, fees and other costs, including
utility connections or extensions for the work. File necessary drawings, prepare
documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental departments having
jurisdiction. Include all costs associated with notices, permits, taxes, fees, utility
connections or extensions, government approvals, and other related costs in original bid.
Obtain required certificates of inspection for work and deliver to the Architect before
request for acceptance and final payment for the work.
23 05 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority
bearing on the performance of the work. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract
Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Architect
in writing and any necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate modification.
If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances,
rules, and regulations, and without notice to the Architect, he shall assume full
responsibility, and shall bear all costs.
C. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall be
listed by the Underwriters’ Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall
bear their listing mark.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
SINGLE SPEED MOTORS UNDER 7½ HP
A.
Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA and as specified.
Motors shall be tested in accordance with the standards of IEC 60034 and conform for
insulation resistance and dielectric strength. Each motor shall be provided with conduit
terminal box, adequate starting and protective equipment as specified or required. The
capacity shall be sufficient to operate associate driven devices under all conditions of
operation and load and without overload, and at the horsepower indicated or specified.
Each motor shall be selected for quiet operation.
B.
Overload capacity shall be 110 percent (service factor 1.15 minimum) for motors. Sizing
of motors shall not include the overload factor.
C. Motor types shall be as follows:
1. Three-phase motors: Induction-type, single-speed, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Single-phase motors: Split-phase or capacitor-start type as recommended by the
manufacturer for the particular piece of equipment, single-speed unless indicated
otherwise.
D. Motors shall be General Electric, Westinghouse, Allis-Chalmers, Reliance, Century, or
equal.
E.
Motors and equipment shall be provided for current characteristics as indicated on the
electrical drawings.
F.
Motors shall be copper wound, premium efficiency in accordance with NEMA MG1.
2.2
SINGLE SPEED MOTORS 7½ AND OVER AND VARIABLE SPEED MOTORS
A.
Scope: This specification details the mechanical and electrical requirements for energyefficient, totally enclosed fan-cooled and totally enclosed non-ventilated squirrel-cage
induction motors, NEMA frame size 182T through 449T.
B.
General:
1. All motors covered by this specification shall conform to the latest applicable
requirements of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and NEC standards, including IEEE Std 841.
23 05 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
2. Motors are to be designed for continuous duty for 3-phase, 60HZ, 200, 230, 230/460
or 575 operation, NEMA design B.
3. Ratings to be based on a 40 degree C. ambient, 3,300 foot (1000m) altitude or lower
operation, with a maximum temperature rise of 80°C by resistance at 1.0 service
factor, and 90°C rise at 1.15SF thru 150HP.
4. Motors V shall be furnished with Class F insulation, 1.15 service factor but shall be
selected for operation within their full load rating without applying the service factor.
5. Motors shall be of a premium efficient design and shall be different from the
manufacturer's standard efficient product.
C. Bearings and Lubrication:
1. Bearings shall be ball, open, single row, deep groove. Conrad type, and shall have
a Class 3 internal fit conforming to AFBMA Std. 20. For Belted duty applications,
drive end bearings may be cylindrical roller type.
2. Bearing shall be selected to provide L10 rating life of 17,500 hours minimum for
belted applications. 100,000 hours minimum for flexible direct coupled applications.
Calculations shall be based on external loads using NEMA belted applications limits
per MG1-14.07 and typical sheave weights and internal loads defined by the
manufacturer including magnetic pull and rotating assembly weight.
3. Bearing temperature rise at rated load shall not exceed 60°C at 3600 rpm or 50°C
at 1800 rpm and slower. Temperature rise is to be measured by RTD or
thermocouple at bearing outer race.
4. Bearing AFBMA identification number shall be stamped on motor nameplate.
5. Motor lubrication system shall consist of a grease inlet on motor bracket with capped
grease fitting on inlet, grease relief plug 180 degrees from inlet, grease reservoir in
cast inner cap.
6. Motor to be greased by manufacturer with a premium moisture resistant polyurea
thickened grease containing rust inhibitors and suitable for operation over
temperature from -25°C to 120°C.
7. Bearings shall be protected by INPRO/SEAL bearing isolators on both ends of the
motor.
D. Enclosures:
1. Motor enclosure including frame with integrally cast feet, end brackets, locking
bearing inner caps, fan guards, conduit box and cover shall be cast iron, ASTM
Type A-48, Class 25 or better.
2. Motor conduit box shall be cast iron construction, rotatable in 90 degree increments,
diagonally split with tapped NPT threaded conduit entrance hole. Neoprene conduit
box cover gasket and neoprene lead seal gasket between box and motor frame shall
be furnished. Provision for grounding shall be provided in the conduit box utilizing a
mounted clamp-type ground lug.
3. External cooling fan shall be corrosion-resistant, non-sparking, bi-directional, keyed,
clamped and shouldered on the motor shaft.
4. Motor rotor construction shall be die cast aluminum or fabricated copper or their
respected alloys. Rotors on frames 213T and above shall be keyed to shaft and
rotating assembly dynamically balanced to 0.0005 inches peak to peak 182T-326T
frames, and 0.00075 inches peak to peak 364T-449T frames. Balanced weights, if
required, shall be secured to the rotor resistance ring or fan blades by rivets.
Machine screws and nuts are prohibited. The entire rotating assembly between
bearing inner caps shall be coated with a corrosion-resistant epoxy.
23 05 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
5. Stainless steel automatic breather drains shall be provided in the lowest part of both
front and back end brackets to allow drainage of condensation.
6. All mounting hardware shall be hex head, high strength, SAE Grade 5, plated for
corrosion protection. Screwdriver slot fasteners are prohibited. A forged steel
shouldered eyebolt shall be provided on all frames. Eyebolt receptacle shall be
threaded and designed to prevent moisture or foreign material from entering motor
when eyebolt is removed.
7. Corrosion-resistant stainless steel nameplate shall be affixed to motor frame with
stainless steel or brass drive pins. Nameplate(s) shall include all required NEMA
data and AFBMA bearing numbers, and connection diagram for dual voltage motors.
8. An external V-Ring shaft slinger shall be provided on both shaft extensions 254T
and larger, on the drive shaft only 182T-215T to minimize entrance of moisture or
foreign material into bearing cavity,
9. Frame to end bracket assembly of machined parts shall be protected and sealed by
application of thick corrosion-resistant material to the machine surfaces prior to
assembly.
10. All motor parts including frame, brackets, fan cover, and terminal box shall receive
a minimum of two coats of high grade USDA accepted epoxy paint. Motor assembly
shall satisfactorily withstand salt spray tests for corrosion per ASTM B-117 for 96
hours.
E.
Electrical:
1. All motors shall successfully operate under power supply variations per NEMA MG114.30.
2. All motors shall be NEMA Design B with torque and starting currents in accordance
with NEMA MG1-12.35 and 12.38 except in special applications requiring higher
starting torques where NEMA Design C is permitted.
3. Motors shall have copper windings.
4. Motor insulation system shall be Class F minimum, utilizing materials and insulation
systems evaluated in accordance with IEEE 117 classification tests.
5. Motor leads shall be non wicking type, Class F temperature rating or better and
permanently numbered for identification.
6. Entire wound and insulated stator shall receive additional coating of epoxy paint on
all air gap surfaces to protect against moisture and corrosion.
7. Each completed and assembled motor shall receive a routine factory test per NEMA
standards.
F.
Sound Transmission:
1. The no-load sound pressure level, based on the A-weighted scale at 3 feet when
measured in accordance with IEEE Std. 85 should not exceed 85 DBA.
G. Efficiency:
1. All motors shall be of an energy-efficient design, different from the manufacturer's
standard product through the use of premium materials, design and improved
manufacturing process. Energy efficient design shall reduce motor losses
approximately 40 percent from standard efficient designs, and minimum efficiencies
shall exceed NEMA Premium efficiencies listed in NEMA Table MG1-12.6C.
23 05 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
2. Motor efficiency shall be determined in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1-12.54
and full load efficiency labeled on motor nameplate in accordance with NEMA
standard MG1-12.55.
H. Manufacturer:
1. Motor shall be Reliance XE or equal of Toshiba, G.E. or Siemens.
I.
Motors and equipment shall be provided for current characteristics as indicated on the
electrical drawings.
J.
Furnish wiring diagrams to the electrician for all line-voltage motor control systems.
Provide complete protection, including a thermal heater in each phase leg for all motor
starters.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A.
Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish in writing to other trades, with copies to
the Architect, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed
satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.
B.
Where mechanical work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of
other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If
work is installed before coordinating with other trades, or if it causes any interference with
work of other trades, make the necessary changes in the work to correct the conditions
and bear all costs.
C. Furnish to other trades necessary templates, patterns, setting drawings and shop details
for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.
3.2
A.
3.3
SAFETY
The Architect has not been retained to provide design and construction services relation
to the Contractor’s safety precautions, or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor is solely and
completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of persons and
property during performance of work. This requirement applies continuously and is not
limited to normal working hours. Comply with “Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction”, Volume 36, No. 75, of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of
Labor. Provide required safety measures and consult with the state or federal safety
inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not
exist or whether compliance with state or federal regulations exists.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work and material from damage and be liable for damage.
B.
Be responsible for work and equipment until finally inspected, tested and accepted; protect
work against theft, injury or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received
23 05 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
on site which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary
covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material.
3.4
A.
3.5
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING
Provide ladders, scaffolding, rigging, hoisting and services necessary for delivery into the
premises and erection of any equipment and apparatus and execution for the work.
Remove same from premises when no longer required.
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
Materials and equipment required for the work shall be new and shall be furnished,
delivered, erected, installed, connected and finished in every detail; and shall be selected
and arranged to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of
material is given, an article as approved by the Architect shall be provided.
B.
Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge
of the work.
C. Equipment and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Architect in accordance
with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such
tests as the manufacturer recommends.
D. Provide equipment in the mid- range of written performance documentation to allow for
adjustment.
3.6
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Install the work with adequate clearances throughout the project, including being
responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts, chases, double partitions and
suspended ceilings. Cooperate with other trades where work is in the same space. Such
spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.
B.
Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible
positions. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility
and any change shall be approved by the Architect.
C. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide the General Contractor the exact locations of
access panels for each concealed valve, control damper or other device requiring service.
Access panels will be provided and installed by the General Contractor and as specified
in the other divisions of the specifications. Submit locations of these panels to the General
Contractor in sufficient time to be installed in the normal course of work.
3.7
A.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide wiring, except temperature control wiring,
equipment control wiring and interlock wiring. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide
power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box, including
power wiring through starters. Electrical Subcontractor shall provide starters and
disconnect switches not factory-mounted on equipment
23 05 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
The Mechanical Subcontractor shall, regardless of voltage, provide temperature control
wiring, interlock wiring and equipment control wiring for the equipment that the Mechanical
Subcontractor furnishes or installs.
C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for power wiring. Control wiring shall be
the responsibility of the Mechanical Subcontractor. Motors and equipment shall be
provided for current characteristics as indicated on the electrical drawings.
3.8
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Provide drilling, coring, cutting and patching necessary to install the work specified in this
division. Patching shall match adjacent surfaces.
B.
No structural members shall be cut without the approval of the Architect, and cutting shall
be done in a manner directed by him. Do not damage or endanger any portion of the
project or work of the Owner or any other separate contractor by drilling, coring, cutting,
patching, excavating and backfilling.
C. Inform the General Contractor and other subcontractors affected of requirements for
cutting and patching.
3.9
A.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
TEMPORARY HEAT
Provide inlet air filters on building fan equipment and return duct openings used for
temporary heat. Clean the equipment and replace filters before heating systems and the
project are put into regular operation.
BOXES, SLEEVES AND CHASES
Inform the General Contractor of requirements for boxes, sleeves and chases. The
General Contractor shall set boxes, sleeves and chases. Furnish General Contractor with
the boxes and sleeves and be responsible for informing General Contractor of required
location.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Upon completion of the work, furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for operating
the systems and equipment for a period of three (3) days of eight (8) hours each, or as
otherwise specified. Give at least forty-eight (48) hours notice to the Owner in advance of
this period. During this period, instruct the Owner or his representative fully in the
operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment furnished. The training of the
appropriate maintenance staff for each equipment type and/or system shall include, as a
minimum, the following:
1. System/Equipment overview (what it is, what it does and which other systems and/or
equipment does it interface with).
2. Review of the available O&M materials.
3. Review of the Record Drawings on the subject system/equipment.
4. Hands-on demonstration of all normal maintenance procedures, normal operating
modes, and all emergency shutdown and startup procedures.
23 05 00 – 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.12
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT MANUALS
A.
Upon completion of the work and prior to acceptance of the mechanical work, prepare
servicing manuals in accordance with industry accepted standards describing the
requirements of mechanical equipment provided under this division of the specification.
B.
As a minimum, include in the manuals:
1. Submittal data stating equipment size and selected options for each piece of
equipment requiring maintenance.
2. Maintenance schedules
3. Manufacturers’ operation and maintenance instructions with parts list specific to the
equipment installed, with extraneous matter removed or neatly marked out. Routine
maintenance actions shall be clearly identified together with supplementary
drawings and information where necessary to describe and itemize servicing.
4. Provide a table of contents with all contents listed in an orderly presentation.
5. Manufacturers’ printed warranties
6. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of General Contractor, Mechanical
Subcontractor(s) and all other related Subcontractors.
7. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of equipment suppliers.
8. Names, addresses, and phone numbers of at least two service agencies.
9. HVAC controls system maintenance and calibration information, including wiring
diagrams, schematics, and control sequence descriptions. Desired or field
determined setpoints shall be permanently recorded on control drawings at control
devices, or for digital control systems, in programming comments.
10. A complete narrative of how each system is intended to operate. A Sequence of
Operation is not acceptable as a narrative for this requirement. Narrative shall
include:
a.
A detailed explanation of the original design intent.
b.
The basis of design (how the design was selected to meet the design intent).
c.
A detailed explanation of how new equipment is to interface with existing
equipment or systems (where applicable).
d.
Suggested set points.
C. Data in manuals shall be neat, clean copies. Drawings shall be accordion-folded.
Manufacturers' advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and
maintenance instruction.
D. Place data for the manual in hardcover 3-ring loose-leaf notebooks. Label bound edge of
notebooks with the name of the building, Owner, name of the project, year of completion,
and the words “Mechanical Equipment”. Label front of notebooks with the name of the
Owner, name of the building, name of the project, Owner’s project number, date, General
Contractor, Mechanical Subcontractor, Architect, and Mechanical Engineer.
E.
Submit one copy of the data in a preliminary draft form to the Architect for approval prior
to preparing finished copies.
F.
Provide two (2) copies of the finished manuals to the Architect.
23 05 00 – 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.13
A.
3.14
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
RECORD DRAWINGS
Within 90 days after the date of system acceptance, provide record drawings of all
buildings and plot plans. Record drawings shall include as a minimum the location and
performance data on each piece of equipment, general configuration of duct and pipe
distribution system, including sizes, and the terminal air and water design flow rates of the
actual installation. Record drawings shall also incorporate any mechanical work which
deviates from the contract drawings, including changes resulting from addenda, Requests
for Information and Change Orders. Neatly draft changes on clean “hard copy” drawings
to show the work clearly in the actual locations as built.
CLEANING
A.
Promptly remove waste material and rubbish caused by the work. At Completion of the
work, clean dirt and debris from the mechanical installation, including equipment, piping,
ductwork, and plumbing fixtures.
B.
Upon completion of the project and after cleaning is complete and before project is air
balanced, provide clean air filters throughout.
3.15
WARRANTY
A.
All work, material and equipment to be free from defects. Correct all defects and failures
occurring within one year from date of substantial completionwithout cost to the Owner
except when such failure is due to neglect or carelessness by the Owner, as determined
by the Architect.
B.
The warranty disregards shorter time limits by any manufacturer of equipment provided.
C. Make all necessary adjustments and corrections during first year of operation. The fact
that the Architect was present during any construction does not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for defects discovered after completion of the work.
3.16
A.
3.17
ASBESTOS
This project is not expected to require work in the presence of asbestos fibers. These
Division 23 Bid Documents do not provide for or cover the identification, removal,
encapsulation, or disposition of such materials. The Contractor is cautioned that should
he encounter suspicious material, to obtain all instructions relative to proceeding with the
execution of the work directly from the Owner.
MOTORS
A.
Provide motors for all variable speed applications and for constant speed applications for
motors 7-12/ HP and greater with “inverter duty” rating as specified herein per the
WSNREC and the SEC.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide variable speed drives for all variable speed
applications and for constant speed applications for motors 7-12/ HP and greater.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
23 05 00 – 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
SECTION 23 05 23
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
WORK INCLUDED
Valves
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
Valves
CODES AND STANDARDS
UL approval for gas and fire protection valves.
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Provide valves of same manufacturer throughout where possible.
B.
Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside
of body.
C. Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe joints. Use pipe
size valves, unless indicated otherwise.
D. Thread pipe sizes 2-inches and smaller.
E.
Flange pipe sizes 2½-inches and larger.
F.
Solder or thread-to-solder adapters for copper tubing.
G. Use valves with factory installed press ends with press copper piping.
H. Grooved end valves may be used in limited applications as specified herein.
2.2
REFRIGERANT LINE VALVES
A.
Provide diaphragm packless-type for sizes ⅞-inch and smaller, Superior, Henry, Kerotest,
Meller, or equal.
B.
For larger sizes, at Contractor’s option, provide either diaphragm packless type or valve
with Metrex O-ring, Teflon seat and seal cap.
23 05 23 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
2.3
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
SECTION 23 05 23
VALVE OPERATORS
A.
Provide suitable handwheels for valves.
B.
Provide one (1) plug cock wrench for every ten (10) plug cocks sized 2-inches and smaller,
minimum of one wrench. Provide wrench with set screw for each plug cock sized
2½-inches and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
GENERAL
Install all valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
REFRIGERANT VALVES
Provide valve where indicated on the drawings and where required by codes and
ordinances. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid damage to
valves.
ACCESS
A.
Install valves in accessible location to allow for maintenance and removal.
B.
Provide chain-guides and chains for valves 4-inch and larger with horizontal centerline of
the valve more than 7-feet above the floor. Mount valve horizontally with chain long
enough to terminate 4-feet above the floor. Chain operators shall be same manufacturer
as the valve.
END OF SECTION 23 05 23
23 05 23 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING &
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 05 29
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Pipe hangers and supports.
B.
Seismic protection of piping and equipment.
1.2
A.
1.3
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
None
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
SMACNA publication “Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”
for seismic protection of piping.
B.
The International Building Code for seismic protection of equipment.
1.4
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Pipe hangers and supports:
1. Anvil, Erico, Grabler, Fee & Mason, Unistrut, Superstrut or equal.
2.2
A.
STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS
Steel Structural Clamps:
1. Beam clamps, brackets, channel clamps and bar joist clips select to suit structural
system and meet loading recommendations of manufacturer.
B.
2.3
A.
Attachment into existing concrete or masonry wall: Self-drill type Red Head, Phillips
Anchors or equal. Do not use powder driven inserts.
INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS
Hanger Rods:
1. Continuous threaded steel rod, do not use chain, wire or perforated strap.
23 05 29 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING &
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 05 29
2. Maximum hanger rod loading as follows:
3. Rod Size, Maximum Load,
Diameter in Inches
Pounds
⅜
610
½
1130
B.
Trapeze Pipe Racks: Fabricate from structural angles or channels or Unistrut channels to
suit weight of piping to be supported. Size for a minimum safety factor of 5.
C. Hanger Straps: Galvanized bar steel; ¾-inch wide by 18 gauge for 2½-inch and smaller
pipe; ⅞-inch wide by 16 gauge for 3-inch to 4-inch pipe; 1⅛-inch wide by 12 gauge for
6-inch pipe size.
2.4
A.
PIPE ATTACHMENTS
Pipe Rings:
1. Steel pipe and cast iron soil pipe: 2-inch and smaller, adjustable ring Anvil #69.
2½-inch and larger, adjustable clevis Anvil #260.
2. Copper Pipe: 2-inch and smaller, adjustable ring Anvil #CT-69. 2½-inch and larger,
adjustable clevis Anvil #CT-65.
3. Finish: Copper plated where ring comes in contact with copper pipe; galvanized for
contact with galvanized steel pipe; black for all other applications.
4. Application: Use only on piping systems where axial movement from thermal
expansion is less than ½-inch.
5. For Hanger Straps: Elcen Figure 94 or Anvil Figure 97 with flattened-end bolt through
cast iron socket; or hinged type, Modern Hanger Corporation No. 20, Elcen Figure
104, or Anvil Figure 108. Pipe rings shall be electro-galvanized, prime painted or
cadmium-plated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER SPACING FOR PIPING
A.
Horizontal Steel Pipe: Maximum hanger spacing and minimum hanger rod diameters as
follows:
½ and ¾-inch pipe
5-foot span
⅜-inch rod
1 and 1¼-inch pipe
7-foot span
⅜-inch rod
1½-inch pipe
9-foot span
⅜-inch rod
2-inch pipe
10-foot span
⅜-inch rod
B.
Horizontal Copper Pipe: Maximum hanger spacing and minimum hanger rod diameters as
follows:
½-inch pipe
5-foot span
⅜-inch rod
1-inch pipe
6-foot span
⅜-inch rod
1¼ and 1½-inch
6-foot span
⅜-inch rod
2 and 2½-inch pipe
9-foot span
½-inch rod
C. Provide continuous support for plastic tubing.
23 05 29 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING &
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 05 29
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
D. Provide additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as valves, to maintain
alignment and prevent sagging.
E.
Vertical Piping Supports:
1. Support piping at each floor.
2. Provide intermediate supports to prevent excessive pipe movement.
F.
3.2
Provide a minimum of 2 hangers per pipe section for grooved joint pipe.
INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide piping supports and hangers with a means of adjustment for leveling, grading of
piping and cold spring movements.
B.
Provide sufficient hanger rod lengths to limit rod displacement from thermal expansion to
4 degrees from vertical.
C. Size pipe rings and clamps to pass around the pipe, except on piping with a vapor barrier
on the insulation, then size rings and clamps to pass around the outside of the insulation
utilizing insulation protection shields Anvil Fig. 167. Provide rigid inserts as required to
prevent crushing of insulation.
D. Install vertical piping supports to allow for pipe movement due to thermal expansion and
contraction.
E.
Do not support any pipe from any other pipe.
F.
Install steel backing in walls as required to support piping hung from steel stud walls.
G. Provide bored, drilled or reamed holes for all bolting to miscellaneous structural metals,
frames or for mounts or supports. Flame cut, punched or hand sawn holes will not be
accepted.
H. Install anchor bolts for all mechanical equipment and piping as required. Tightly fit and
clamp base-supported equipment anchor bolts at all equipment support points. Provide
locknuts where equipment is hung.
3.3
EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide supports, pads, bases and their attachments for mechanical work to be furnished
or installed.
B.
Provide concrete pads for pumps, compressors, other rotating mechanical machinery,
boilers, expansion tanks, and for equipment where indicated on the drawings. Insert #4
6-inch-long steel dowel rods into floors to anchor pads.
3.4
A.
SEISMIC PROTECTION OF PIPING
Seismic Restraints:
23 05 29 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HANGERS & SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING &
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 05 29
1. Provide seismic protection for all piping in accordance with the most current edition
of the SMACNA publication “Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for Mechanical
Systems,” Hazard Level A.
3.5
SEISMIC PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide seismic protection for all equipment in accordance with ASHRAE 2003 Handbook,
“HVAC Applications,” Chapter 54, “Seismic and Wind Restraint Design”.
B.
Most recently adopted by the authority having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
23 05 29 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
PIPING & EQUIPMENT
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 48
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Mechanical Equipment Isolators
B.
Flexible Pipe Connectors
C. Pipe and Duct Isolators
1.2
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Mechanical Equipment Isolators
B.
Equipment Vibration Isolation Bases
C. Seismic Snubbers
1.3
A.
1.4
CODES AND STANDARDS
ASHRAE Handbook “HVAC Applications”, latest version.
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
Kinetics Peabody Noise Control, Mason Industries, Amber-Booth, Vibrex, Flexonics, or
equal.
FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS
A.
Braided type, threaded ends for 2-inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch and larger.
B.
Stainless steel for steel pipe Flexonics #PCS.
C. Bronze for copper pipe Flexonics #PCB.
2.3
A.
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATORS
Rubber Pads
1. Single layer Kinetics Type NPS or NPD.
23 05 48 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
PIPING & EQUIPMENT
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 48
2. Multi-layer Mason Industries Type WMW.
3. Multi-layer to receive leveling bolts Mason Industries Type WML.
4. Multi-layer requiring equipment anchoring Mason Industries Type WM.
B.
Glass fiber pad Kinetics Type KIP.
C. Seismic snubber: non-contact type welded steel Kinetics KSS
2.4
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT BASES
A.
Structural steel rails Kinetics SBB.
B.
Integral steel bases Kinetics SFB, SBB or KFB.
C. Concrete inertia base Kinetics CIB-L for fan rooms and CIB-H for other locations.
D. Rooftop equipment bases Kinetics ASR with restrains.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
BASE, ISOLATOR AND DEFLECTION FOR EQUIPMENT
A.
Unless indicated otherwise, internally-isolated equipment need not receive additional
isolation.
B.
Except as indicated otherwise, isolate all rotating mechanical equipment without internal
isolation with bases and isolators. Provide bases and isolators as indicated in Part 2
Product above and as required and recommended in the latest version of the ASHRAE
Applications Handbook, Noise and Vibration Control Chapter, “Selection Guide for
Vibration Isolation” Table and accompanying notes. Click here and take a look so you
know what you're specifying
1. Select base, isolators and deflection for floor-mounted, ceiling hung or roof-mounted
equipment from the “Floor Span” column most closely matching the building
structure.
2. Select base, isolators and deflection for equipment mounted on grade support slabs
from the “Slab on Grade” column.
C. Install bases and isolators as recommended by the manufacturer, aligned to avoid “short
circuiting” or reducing in the efficiency of the isolators.
3.2
A.
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Flexible Connectors
1. Provide flexible pipe connectors at piping connections to equipment mounted or
suspended with external vibration isolators and where indicated on the drawings.
2. Systems with grooved piping may use 3 flexible couplings in place of flex connectors.
Flexible couplings for vibration isolation shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 177, Gruvlock
Style 7001, or equal.
23 05 48 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
PIPING & EQUIPMENT
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 48
3. Align bolt holes on flanged flexible connectors with bolt holes in companion flanges
to prevent twisting of connector and install threaded flexible connectors to avoid
twisting.
4. Do not use flexible connectors to compensate for misalignment of piping.
5. Install flexible connections at right angles to the direction of the vibration to avoid
compression and extension of the connector from equipment motion.
B.
Equipment Bases
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide prelocated equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves.
Pour inertia bases full of structural grade concrete.
Install bases dead level.
Install inertia bases with a minimum clearance of 2-inches under base, other bases
with a minimum clearance of 1-inch under base.
END OF SECTION 23 05 48
23 05 48 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
PIPING, DUCTS, & EQUIPMENT
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PAINTING
&
IDENTIFICATION
FOR
HVAC
SECTION 23 05 53
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Mechanical systems painting
B.
Mechanical systems identification and flow arrows
C. Repainting of factory finished equipment
D. Valve tags
1.2
A.
1.3
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
None.
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
“Concealed” work is defined as work installed within pipe shafts, duct spaces, above furred
or hung ceilings, or otherwise built into the building and not exposed to view.
B.
“Exposed” work is defined as work in walkway tunnels, Mechanical and Fan Rooms,
exterior to building (including rooftops), all occupied areas, and all other areas not defined
as “concealed”.
1.5
A.
MANUFACTURERS
General: Acceptable manufacturers are Quigley, Cowman and Campbell, Fuller, General
Paint, Sherwin-Williams, Glidden Manufacture, or equal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT
A.
Industrial Enamel: Paint shall be Alkyd base, Quigley AAA, Sherwin-Williams “KemLustral,” Glidden “Daylite” enamel, or equal.
B.
Primer for Steel Surfaces: Zinc-chromate primer, Cowman & Campbell No. 1134 or equal.
C. Primer for zinc-coated surfaces: Metallic zinc-zinc oxide primer, W.P. Fuller No. 7747,
Glidden “Rustmaster” or Dupont “Dulux.”
23 05 53 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
PIPING, DUCTS, & EQUIPMENT
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PAINTING
&
IDENTIFICATION
FOR
HVAC
SECTION 23 05 53
D. Primer for Asphalt-Coated Surfaces: Bishop-Conklin Caladium.
E.
Primer-Sealer for Insulated Surfaces: Resin-type primer sealer.
F.
Heat Resistant Paint: Quigley AAA high temperature paint.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION BANDS AND FLOW ARROWS
Snap-around markers with UV resistant inks and vinyl. Marker construction, size, color,
letter type and wording shall be in conformance with ANSI standard “Scheme for the
Identification of Piping Systems”. Provide custom markers for unique service and where
pressure, temperature or other conditions of the service vary in the project. Manufacturer
shall be Seton, Zeston, or equal.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION BANDS AND FLOW ARROWS
Seton contact type adhesive backed, Zeston or approved equal. 1⅛-inch wide for lines up
through 3-inch, 2-inch wide for larger pipes.
VALVE TAGS
Seton 1½-inch round brass with stamped characters with brass “S” hooks.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PAINTING
A.
Paint all exposed mechanical equipment including uninsulated ducting. Undamaged
factory-finished equipment need not be repainted.
B.
Color of paint shall be a standard manufacturer’s color as selected by Architect.
C. Repaint damaged factory finished equipment.
D. Paint all visible surfaces behind grilles dull black.
E.
Use skilled painters; paints, well mixed; each coat to have slight variation in color from the
preceding, for ready identification.
F.
Clean grease, dirt, wax, and scale from surfaces before painting.
G. Cleaning Solvents: Mineral Spirits; remove cleaning solvent cloths from building each day.
H. Metal Surfaces:
1. In General: 3 mils minimum dry film thickness; apply one priming coat and one finish
coat of acrylic base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film
thickness.
2. Outside Building: 4 mils minimum thickness; apply prime coat and two finish coats
of acrylic base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry film
thickness.
23 05 53 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
PIPING, DUCTS, & EQUIPMENT
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
PAINTING
&
IDENTIFICATION
FOR
HVAC
SECTION 23 05 53
I.
Insulation Surfaces: 3 mils minimum dry film thickness; apply one coat of primer-sealer,
and one coat of acrylic base paint and additional coats as required to obtain minimum dry
film thickness.
J.
Grilles, Convector and Finned Radiation Covers: 3 mils minimum thickness; apply spray
paint; one primer coat and two coats of industrial enamel.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION AND FLOW ARROWS
A.
Identify and provide flow direction arrows on all all piping and equipment only in
Mechanical Rooms, Janitor’s Closets, Fan Rooms, and Boiler Rooms.
B.
Apply piping identification bands and flow arrows on 10-foot centers in general, 20-foot
centers in open areas where pipe is exposed, and wherever a pipe leaves or enters any
wall, floor, ceiling or foundation. Place the proper band on pipe at each valve, branch
connection, manifold, entrance and exit from a tank, vessel, or piece of equipment. Apply
after paint work is completed.
C. Label each piece of mechanical equipment and system with equipment or system name
lettered thereon with 2-inch high block style black paint letters.
D. Provide tag on each valve. Tag shall be provided with an identifying number. Post a
plastic-laminated Valve Index where directed by Architect. Index shall identify location,
service and identification number of each tagged valve.
END OF SECTION 23 05 53
23 05 53 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 93
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Air Systems Balancing
B.
Balancing Reports
1.2
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Proposed Systems Balancing Contractor Name and Certification
B.
Balancing Agenda
1.3
A.
SYSTEMS BALANCING CONTRACTOR
Systems balancing contractor shall be qualified to perform the testing and balancing work
as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Qualifications include:
1. A minimum five (5) years experience record in systems balancing of projects of
similar scope and complexity, and
2. Contractor shall be independent of the installing contractors or equipment suppliers
for this project
B.
Qualified systems balancing contractors: Neudorfer Engineers, AirTest Inc., United Test
& Balance, TAC Systems, Hardin and Sons, or approved equal.
C. To be considered for consideration as an approved equal, company shall submit a list of
recent past similar projects including a description of the size and scope of the project,
name of the principal technician and references including current phone numbers; and
maintain association with AABC or NEBB as follows:
1. Membership in the AABC, or
2. Certification by the NEBB
D. Within 60 days after contract award, submit the name of the proposed systems balancing
contractor along with the name of the principal technician along with past similar projects
including a description of the size and scope of the project.
1.4
A.
1.5
COORDINATION WITH COMMISSIONING
Upon completion of the work, provide the necessary skilled labor, helpers, materials, and
equipment to support the commissioning work. During the commissioning, coordinate with
the commissioning company and make all adjustments required to demonstrate systems
are working properly.
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions, latest adopted version.
B.
NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems (PSTABES) 7th Edition 2005.
23 05 93 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
1.6
A.
1.7
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 93
PROCEDURES
Perform TAB in accordance with Procedural Standards of organization certifying TAB firm.
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
BALANCING REPORT
A.
When requested, provide a preliminary balancing report to the mechanical or General
Contractor to indicate to the building inspector that balancing is in progress.
B.
When balancing is nearly complete, provide a “95% complete” balancing report for the
review by the Architect. When acceptable to the Architect, provide an electronic version
of the report in .pdf format.
C. Provide three (3) sets of final balancing reports incorporating comments made on the
preliminary report, two (2) for the Owner and one (1) for the Architect. Alternately, when
acceptable to the Architect, provide an electronic version of the report in .pdf format.
D. Include in report: Project Name, Owner, Engineer, Systems Balancing Subcontractor,
other data necessary to describe activity and the status of the systems plus the following
data:
1. Fans:
a.
Installation data:
1)
Manufacturer and model
2)
Size
3)
Arrangement, discharge and class
4)
Motor HP, voltage, phase, Hz and full load amps
5)
Identification data
6)
Type of Service
b.
Design data:
1)
Total CFM
2)
Unit inlet, unit outlet and fan total static pressures
3)
Motor HP, rpm and amp
4)
Fan rpm
5)
Fan BHP
c.
Fan recorded data:
1)
Total CFM
2)
Static pressure (suction, discharge, and total)
3)
Fan rpm
4)
Fan motor rpm
5)
Fan motor rated voltage and amperage
23 05 93 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
6)
7)
8)
9)
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 93
Fan motor operating voltage and amperage
Motor calculated BHP
Drive sizes (sheaves, belts, and shaft)
Serial number
2. Air Handling Unit:
a.
Use fan report data
b.
Use heating/cooling coil data
c.
Supply andreturn flow
d.
OSA A and OSA A+P minimum positions
3. Fan Powered Terminal:
a.
Design data and recorded data
1)
Identification data
2)
Manufacturer’s identification
3)
Size
4)
Primary maximum airflow
5)
Primary minimum airflow
6)
Fan airflow
4. Individual air terminals:
a.
Supply return or exhaust terminal identification (location and number
designation)
b.
Manufacturer's catalog identification and type
c.
Applicable factors for application, velocity, area, etc., and designated area
d.
Design and recorded quantities – CFM
e.
Box inlet static pressure (only required for boxes not achieving design
primary airflow)
5. Pitot traverse in duct systems (where individual air terminals are not accessible or
measurable):
a.
Duct CFM – mains, branches, (maximum and minimum):
1)
Duct size(s)
2)
Number of pressure readings
3)
Sum of velocity measurements
4)
Average velocity
5)
Duct recorded CFM
6)
Duct design CFM
6. Variable Volume Terminal (Existing and New):
a.
Design data and recorded data
1)
Identification data
2)
Manufacturer’s identification
3)
Size
4)
Maximum air flow
5)
Minimum design cooling airflow
6)
Heating design airflow
7. Pumps:
a.
Installation data:
1)
Manufacturer and model
2)
Size
23 05 93 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
b.
c.
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 93
3)
Impeller size
4)
Motor HP, voltage, phase, Hz and full load amp
5)
Identification data and service
Design data:
1)
Gpm
2)
Head
3)
Motor and pump rpm
4)
HP and amp
Recorded data:
1)
Discharge pressure (full-flow and no-flow)
2)
Suction pressure (full-flow and no-flow)
3)
Operating head (full-flow and no-flow)
4)
Operating gpm (from pump curves if metering is not provided)
5)
Motor and pump rpm
6)
GPM
7)
Motor operating voltage
8)
Motor rated and running load amperages
9)
Motor calculated BHP
10) Impeller diameter
8. DX heating and cooling coils:
a.
Design data and recorded data for all stages:
1)
MBH
2)
Entering and leaving air temperature
3)
CFM
4)
Identification data
5)
Air pressure drop (for all units with factory-installed pressure ports)
6)
System served
7)
Coil location
9. Electric heating coils for all stages:
a.
Design data and recorded data:
1)
KW
2)
MBH
3)
Voltage, phase, amperage (simultaneously with air temps)
4)
CFM
5)
Entering and leaving air temperature (simultaneously with amperage)
6)
Air pressure drop
7)
Identification data
8)
System served
9)
Coil location
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
PROCEDURES
Obtain confirmation from mechanical contractor that systems to be balanced are complete
and functioning per design intent prior to commencing balancing.
23 05 93 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.2
A.
3.3
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 93
INSTRUMENTS
Use accurate and recently calibrated instruments. Provide instrument calibration history if
requested by the Architect.
BALANCING AGENDA
A.
Submit balancing agenda prior to start of work. Include the following in the agenda:
B.
A complete listing of all flow (air and water) and air terminal measurements to be
performed.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES
A.
Perform TAB in accordance with Procedural Standards of organization certifying TAB firm
and generally accepted engineering standards.
B.
Air and water flow rates shall be measured and adjusted to deliver final flow rates within
10% of design rates, except variable flow distribution systems need not be balanced
upstream of the controlling device (for example, VAV box or control valve). Provide a
written balance report to the owner as specified herein.
3.5
A.
ADDITIONAL AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
Air systems shall be balanced in a manner to minimize throttling losses. Regardless of
whether fan is constant or variable speed, belt-driven fan speed shall be adjusted to meet
design flow conditions. Exceptions follow:
1. Fans with motors of 1 hp or less and not noted for a second set of sheaves on the
fan schedule.
2. When throttling results in no greater than 5% of the nameplate horsepower draw
above that required if the sheaves were replaced.
B.
Following fan installation and initial balancing, provide direction for sheave replacement
necessary to balance the systems. Following sheave change, make final measurements
to confirm design flow conditions.
C. Prior to balancing systems with filters racks, install temporary filter media in all filter
housings of constant-volume systems. Blank-off enough filter sections with cardboard or
other material to create an additional 0.4" w.g. across all of the filters (to simulate loaded
filter condition).
D. Volume control devices to regulate air quantities of air terminals only to the extent that
adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Volume control by
means of air terminal adjustment or duct internal devices other than dampers is not
permitted.
E.
Adjust and balance the air system as necessary to accommodate field conditions and
occupant comfort. Provide necessary fan adjustments, pulley changes and damper
adjustments.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
23 05 93 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Pipe Insulation
B.
Duct Insulation
C. Equipment Insulation
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
Equipment insulation
CODES AND STANDARDS
General
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
NFPA 90A and 90B, UL-181 (Class 1) and UL-723
Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions, latest adopted version.
For Elastomeric Material
ASTM E-84-75
For Flame Spread and Fuel Contributed and Smoke
1. UL Standard No. 723, NFPA Standard No. 255 and ASTM Standard No. E-84
C. Red List
1. Materials as defined by the Living Building Challenge Rating System known to have
a hazardous effect on human health.
1.4
A.
1.5
DEFINITIONS
“Conditioned space” is defined as a cooled space, heated space (fully heated), heated
space (semi-heated), or indirectly conditioned space.
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
GENERAL
Materials shall be of the highest grade. Adhesives, sealers, vapor coatings, etc., shall be
compatible with the materials to which they are applied; shall not corrode, soften, or
23 07 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 00
otherwise attack such material in either the wet or dry state; and shall not emit volatile
organic compounds. Scrap pieces of insulation shall not be used where a full section will
fit. Glass fiber materials which become wet or damaged during installation shall be
removed and replaced with new materials. Acceptability of a manufacturer is not to be
taken as acceptability of his “usual” or “regular” accessory materials such as facings,
adhesives, etc.
B.
Unless specified otherwise, all facings, coatings, PVC covers and other accessories shall
have a fire hazard rating not to exceed 25 for Flame Spread and 50 for Fuel Contributed
and Smoke Developed; ratings determined by UL Standard No. 723, NFPA Standard
No. 255 or ASTM Standard No. E-84. Grease duct insulation and enclosure shall meet the
requirements of ASTM E2336-04. UL label or listing, or satisfactory test results from the
approved testing laboratory, shall be available to indicate that fire hazard ratings for
materials do not exceed the above amounts.
C. Product used shall emit no volatile organic compounds when applied, and shall not contain
phenol, formaldehyde, or acrylics.
D. Product used shall not contain Red List Materials.
E.
2.2
Insulation shall comply with the latest adopted version of the Washington State Energy
Code Commercial Provisions.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Product name and numbers listed are Owens-Corning Fiberglas, Armstrong Cork
Company, and Childers.
B.
Other acceptable manufacturers are Manville, Certain-Teed, Knauf, or equal.
2.3
PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Provide insulation material and cover as follows. Provide metal jacketing as indicated in
paragraph “PIPE AND DUCT METAL JACKETING” below:
Service
Insulation Material
Insulation Cover
Jacketing
REFRIGERATING
Armstrong II/Armaflex
Seam joint adhesive See paragraph
PIPING
flexible closed-cell
Armstrong Adhesive “PIPE AND
DUCT METAL
elastomeric unslit
#520, insulation
JACKETING“
tubing.
coating WB
below
Armstrong Armaflex
Finish
See paragraph
Two-Piece Fiberglas
Fiberglas ASJ/SSLMISCELLANEOUS:
“PIPE AND
ASJ/SSL-II
II, or at contractor's
REFRIGERATION
DUCT METAL
option Armstrong
CONDENSATE DRAIN
½-inch thick self-seal JACKETING“
PIPING, SPRAY WATER
below
Armaflex 2000 on
PIPING
piping ½-inch thru
2-inch pipe size
2.4
PIPING INSULATION THICKNESS
23 07 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 00
A.
All domestic cold water piping, including all piping installed in concealed spaces, shall be
insulated per the following table, and in accordance with all requirements of the
Washington State Plumbing Code, and shall be sealed vapor tight to prevent condensation
from forming on the pipe or insulation.
B.
Insulate all piping with the materials specified in the preceding table to the thicknesses
required in the Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions, and in accordance
with the following table, except:
1. Piping installed within unitary HVAC equipment need not be insulated
2. Specified insulation that has a conductivity outside the range indicated in the
following table shall be provided with the minimum thickness required in the
“Alternative Insulation Types” portion of the Washington State Energy Code
Commercial Provisions.
Insulation
Nominal Pipe Diameter (Inches)
Conductivity
<1
1 to
1½ to 4 to ˂8 >8
Conductivity Mean
Design
˂1½
˂4
Operating Range (Btu- Rating
in/(h-ft2-deg Temp
Temp
(deg F)
Range
F)
(deg F)
Cooling and Refrigerant Systems
40-60
0.22-0.28
100
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
Below 40 0.22-0.28
100
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
Miscellaneous Systems
All
0.22-0.28
100
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.5
DUCTS
A.
Ducts and plenums shall be insulated with Fiberglas FRK-25 faced duct wrap. Ducts
carrying mechanically cooled air (and required to be insulated in the table below) shall be
provided with a vapor retarder with a perm rating not greater than 0.5 and all joints shall
be sealed. Minimum densities and out-of-package thicknesses in accordance with the
latest adopted versions of the Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions and
the International Energy Conservation Code to provide an installed nominal R-value
(excluding air film resistance) are as follows:
Type
Location/Situation
Installed Other
Jacketing
R-value
Requirements
R-7
Approved
See paragraph “PIPE
Supply, Return
Not within conditioned
weather proof
AND DUCT METAL
space: On exterior of
barrier
JACKETING” below
building, on roof, in
attic, in enclosed
ceiling space, in walls,
in garage, in crawl
spaces
See paragraph “PIPE
Same as See Section
Outside air intake
Not within conditioned
C403.2.7.1 of the AND DUCT METAL
building
space, upstream of
JACKETING” below
Energy Code for
exterior
auto shut-off damper
complying with Section insulation exceptions and
requirem additional
1412.4.1 and carrying
requirements
ents
more than 2,800 cfm
23 07 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 00
Type
Location/Situation
Outside air intake
Within conditioned
space
Supply duct
Within conditioned
space carrying air
between 55°F and
105°F in the space
being served
2.6
A.
Installed
R-value
R-7
Other
Requirements
See Section
C403.2.7.1
None
Jacketing
See paragraph “PIPE
AND DUCT METAL
JACKETING” below
See paragraph “PIPE
AND DUCT METAL
JACKETING” below
PIPE AND DUCT METAL JACKETING
Indoors:
1. Childers Strap-On aluminum jacket, 0.016-inch minimum thickness and ½-inch wide
aluminum bands, 0.02-inch minimum thickness for pipe and ducts.
2. Childers aluminum jacket, 0.02-inch minimum thickness for pipe fittings.
B.
Outdoors:
1. Piping, fittings, valves and accessories, and ductwork shall be insulated and jacketed
with a durable, thermal and impermeable jacketing. At Contractor’s option, this may
be a single layer of insulated jacketing that meets the insulation requirements in the
table above, or may be a combination of an inner insulation covered by a layer of
insulated jacketing.
2. The insulated jacketing shall be puncture-resistant metal cladding, maintenance-free
white metal surface not needing painting in the future with zero permeability.
Insulated jacketing shall be ArmaTuff as manufactured by Armacell LLC or approved
equal.
3. Should an inner insulation layer be required, it shall be a single layer with 50%
overlap. The insulation shall be flexible elastomeric, closed-cell material to of a
thickness to meet the insulation requirements in the table above when combined
with the insulated jacketing. Insulation shall comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for
sheet materials. Field applied adhesive shall comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II,
Class 1. Insulation shall be ArmaFlex as manufactured by Armacell LLC or approved
equal.
2.7
A.
RIGID INSERTS
Manville Thermo-12 pipe insulation, cork, or shaped wood.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Install covering after piping, ductwork, and equipment have been tested and approved.
B.
Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and
during application.
23 07 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 00
C. Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls except at firewalls.
D. Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, with manufacturer's
labels.
E.
3.2
Perform work at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the
manufacturer.
PIPING
A.
Apply insulation to connections, joints, welds, flanges, or threaded joints after pipe tests
are completed.
B.
Apply insulation over flanged joints after piping has been brought up to operating
temperature and flange bolts have been fully tightened.
C. Insulate flanges, unions, strainers, flexible connections and expansion joints only on
domestic cold water systems.
D. Provide rigid inserts where piping supports pass around the outside of insulation with a
vapor barrier. Repair damage to vapor barrier resulting from installation of the inserts by
sealing with a vapor barrier pressure-sensitive tape.
E.
Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
F.
Provide adequate support for insulation on vertical pipe to prevent slipping.
G. Insulate thermometer and pressure/temperature test wells over their exterior length.
Insulate wells protruding above finish pipe or equipment insulation. Neatly taper insulation
away from top of well.
H. Insulate pressure gauge lines up to first shutoff valve in gauge lines.
I.
Insulate refrigeration liquid piping in the building, and refrigeration suction piping in the
building and outside the building. Apply insulation coating on refrigeration piping insulation
outside the building not covered with metal jacket. Do not insulate hot gas pipe.
J.
Seal butt joints of insulation with pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape. Seal exposed ends
of insulation with Benjamin-Foster 30-36, and at 21-foot intervals on continuous runs of
pipe. Use Armstrong #520 adhesive on Armaflex II and Armstrong 2000 products. Apply
insulation with all sides and end joints butted tightly.
K.
Valves, fittings and accessories:
1. Except as specified otherwise, insulate with covering same as pipe insulation
material or equal in temperature resistance and thickness to that of connecting pipe.
2. Fittings, valves and accessories exposed in rooms cover with Zeston PVC covers,
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
L.
Calcium silicate insulation:
1. Wire in place with 16-gauge black annealed wire, 12-inches on center. Stagger joints
on multi-layered applications.
2. Field apply jackets in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
23 07 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.3
HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 00
DUCTS
A.
Insulate supply, return and outside air ducts inside and outside the conditioned space as
indicated in Part 2 of this specification and as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Adhere insulation to metal with 4-inch wide strips of insulation bonding adhesive at
8-inches o.c. Additionally, secure insulation to the bottom of rectangular ductwork wider
than 24-inches with Miracle surface anchors or metal stick clips 18-inches on center.
Round duct over 12-inches in diameter spiral wind over insulation 16-gauge black
annealed wire. Wrap insulation firmly on the ductwork with all circumferential joints butted
and longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2-inches. Secure overlap and 2-inch
facing flange with 9/16 flare-door staples 6-inches o.c. Tape with 3-inch-wide foil
reinforced Kraft tape. Tape all pin penetrations or punctures in facing.
C. Insulate all access panels in ducts with vapor barrier insulation same as duct insulation.
Seal edges of insulation on access panel and finish openings to assure accessibility.
D. Lined ducts need only be insulated as required to meet the thermal criteria indicated in
Part 2 of this specification.
3.4
PIPE AND DUCT METAL JACKETING
A.
Cover piping, fittings, valves and accessories, and ductwork above the roof and elsewhere
where exposed to weather with durable, thermal and impermeable jacketing.
B.
Cover insulated piping, fittings, valves and accessories in utility tunnels and where
indicated on the drawings with metal jacketing.
C. All jacket joints to overlap 2-inch minimum. Provide aluminum straps at all joints and on
18-inch maximum centers with straps tightened to hold jacket tightly to insulation surfaces.
At the Contractor’s option, install aluminum pop rivets for all transverse and longitudinal
jacket joints on 9-inch maximum centers with aluminum straps installed between
transverse jacket joints at not more than 18-inch spacing between straps and joints or
between straps.
END OF SECTION 23 07 00
23 07 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
SECTION 23 08 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
HVAC Systems Commissioning.
B.
Coordination with Systems Balancing.
1.2
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
HVAC Systems Commissioning Plan
B.
Preliminary and Final Commissioning Reports, submitted during construction
C. Commissioning Agent Qualifications
1.3
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
1.4
A.
CODES AND STANDARDS
Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions, latest adopted version.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
INSTRUMENTS
When instruments are used, they shall be accurate and recently calibrated. Provide
instrument calibration history if requested by the Architect. Use instrumentation application
methods in accordance with A.A.B.C. or N.E.B.B. procedures.
COMMISSIONING PLAN
Submit commissioning plan prior to start of work. As a minimum, include the following in
the plan:
1. General description of each air and water system with its associated equipment and
operating cycles for heating and cooling.
2. A detailed explanation of the original design intent,
3. Equipment and systems to be tested, including the extent of sampling tests.
4. Functions to be tested (for example, calibration, economizer controls, etc.)
5. Conditions under which the test shall be performed (for example, winter design
conditions, full outside air, etc.)
6. Measurable criteria for acceptable performance.
7. Schedule of activities
23 08 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
SECTION 23 08 00
8. Roles and responsibilities of Commissioning Team
9. Include in agenda sample forms showing application of procedure to typical systems.
2.3
A.
PRELIMINARY AND FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORTS
Provide four (4) sets of commissioning reports:
1. One (1) submitted in preliminary form to the Architect
2. Three (3) sets in final form incorporating comments made by the Architect on the
preliminary report.
2.4
A.
COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Commissioning shall include, as a minimum:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.5
A.
A Commissioning Plan,
System Testing and Balancing,
Equipment/System Functional Performance Testing,
Mechanical and Lighting Controls Functional Performance Testing,
Energy Metering Functional Performance Testing,
Domestic Water Functional Performance Testing,
A Preliminary Commissioning Report,
Post Construction Documentation (all), and
A Final Commissioning Report.
SYSTEMS TESTING AND BALANCING
All HVAC systems shall be balanced in accordance with generally accepted engineering
standards, in compliance with the latest adopted version of the Washington State Energy
Code Commercial Provisions and in accordance with specification section Balancing Air
and Water Systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FUNCTIONAL PREFORMANCE TESTING
A.
Equipment/Systems Testing: Functional Performance Testing shall demonstrate the
correct installation and operation of each component, system, and system-to-system
intertie relationship in accordance with approved plans and specifications. This
demonstration is to prove the operation, function, and maintenance serviceability for each
of the Commissioned systems.
B.
Testing shall include all modes of operation, including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
All modes as described in the Sequence of Operation,
Redundant or automatic back-up mode,
Performance of alarms, and
Mode of operation upon a loss of power and restored power.
Controls Testing: HVAC control systems shall be tested to ensure that control devices,
components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in accordance
23 08 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
SECTION 23 08 00
with approved plans and specifications. Sequences of operation shall be functionally
tested to ensure they operate in accordance with approved plans and specifications.
3.2
POST CONSTRUCTION COMMISSIONING
A.
General: Construction documents shall require post construction commissioning be
provided to the building owner. Drawing notes may refer to specifications for further
commissioning requirements. Post construction commissioning shall include, as a
minimum, review and approval of Operation and Maintenance Materials, Record
Drawings, and Systems Operational Training.
B.
Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals: The O & M manual shall be in accordance
with industry accepted standards, in compliance with the Washington State Energy Code
Commercial Provisions and in accordance with Specification Section 23 05 00 General
Provisions.
C. Record Drawings: Provide Record (“As-Built”) drawings in accordance with industry
accepted standards, in compliance with the Washington State Energy Code Commercial
Provisions and in accordance with specification section 23 05 00 General Provisions.
D. Provide completed Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions Figure
C408.1.2.1 “Commissioning Compliance Checklist” to the owner and Architect.
E.
Systems Operational Training: The training of the appropriate maintenance staff for each
equipment type and/or system shall include, as a minimum, the following:
1. System/Equipment overview (what it is, what it does and which other systems and/or
equipment does it interface with).
2. Review of the available O&M materials.
3. Review of the Record Drawings on the subject system/equipment.
4. Hands-on demonstration of all normal maintenance procedures, normal operating
modes, and all emergency shutdown and start-up procedures.
3.3
COMMISSIONING REPORTS
A.
General: The reports shall include Project Name, Owner, Owner's Project Number, Year,
Engineer, and the Systems Commissioning Company. The report shall include all
observed and measured data to document whether systems are operating to the full intent
of the contract documents. As a minimum, the reports shall include the following
information.
B.
Preliminary Commissioning Report: A preliminary report of commissioning test procedures
and results shall be completed and provided to the Owner. The preliminary commissioning
report shall identify:
1. Deficiencies found during testing required by this section which have not been
corrected at the time of report preparation and the anticipated date of correction.
2. Deferred tests which cannot be performed at the time of report preparation due to
climatic conditions.
3. Climatic conditions required for performance of the deferred tests, and the
anticipated date of each deferred test.
23 08 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
SECTION 23 08 00
C. Final Commissioning Report: A complete report of test procedures and results shall be
prepared and filed with the owner. Tests which cannot be performed at the time of report
preparation due to climatic conditions may be deferred until climatic conditions allow and
may be submitted separately. The Final Commissioning Report shall identify:
1. Results of all Functional Performance Tests.
2. Disposition of all deficiencies found during testing, including details of corrective
measures used or proposed.
3. All Functional Performance Test procedures used during the commissioning process
including measurable criteria for test acceptance, provided herein for repeatability.
3.4
PROCEDURES
A.
Commissioning shall be performed following installation, cleanup, controls checkout, and
system startup to verify proper operation of all features of the systems installed.
B.
Use procedures in accordance with the Associated Air Balance Council’s “National
Standard for Field Measurements and Instrumentation – Total System Balance,” Volume
One, No. 81366.
3.5
A.
COORDINATION
Prior to the start of the commissioning, confirm notify and coordinate with the piping, sheet
metal, controls, balancing, electrical and other related contractors. Obtain the support of
these contractors. Upon discovery of a system or portion of a system that is suspected of
improper function, notify the appropriate contractor. Allow for a minimum of one repair by
the contractor(s) and provide a re-test of the suspected system at no additional cost to the
Owner. Document both the initial and final measurements as outlined in PART 2 –
PRODUCT.
END OF SECTION 23 08 00
23 08 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Connect to existing Delta Building Automation Control System.
B.
Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system.
C. Functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
(PICS) for Windows-based control software and every controller in system, including
unitary controller.
D. Prepare individual hardware layouts,
configuration from project design data.
interconnection
drawings,
and
software
E.
Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases,
graphic displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic
drawings, configuration data, and bid documents.
F.
Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication
network cables needed, and all associated hardware.
G. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application
controllers, and input/output devices.
H. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator’s terminals and
peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section.
I.
Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include
vendor name of every item supplied.
J.
Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of
system installation, startup, and commissioning.
K.
Provide a comprehensive operator and technician-training program as described herein.
L.
Provide as-built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other
associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved
media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system.
M. Provide new sensors, dampers, valves, and install only new electronic actuators. No used
components shall be used as any part or piece of installed systems
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware functions shall
be provided and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 1 35-2001, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical equipment,
including all unitary equipment such as heating coils, AC units, etc. and all air handlers,
boilers, and any other listed equipment using native BACnet-compliant components.
B.
The entire control system shall be in complete compliance with the BACnet standard:
ANSI/ASHRAE 1 35-2001. The system shall use BACnet protocols and LAN types
throughout and exclusively.
23 09 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
C. Building controllers shall include complete energy management software, including
scheduling building control strategies and logging routines. All energy management
software and firmware shall be resident in field hardware and shall not be dependent on
the operator's terminal. Operator's terminal software is to be used for access to field-based
energy management functions only. Provide zone-by-zone direct digital logic control of
space scheduling, runtime accumulation, equipment alarm reporting, and override timers
for after-hours usage.
D. All application controllers for every terminal unit (VAV, HP, UV, etc.) air handler, and any
other piece of controlled equipment shall be fully programmable. Application controllers
shall be mounted next to controlled equipment and communicate with building controller
via BACnet LAN.
E.
1.3
A.
1.4
Room sensors shall be provided with digital readout that allow the user to view room
temperature, view outside air temperature, adjust the room Setpoint within preset limits
and set desired override time. User shall also be able to start and stop unit from the digital
sensor. Include all necessary wiring and firmware such that room sensor includes field
service mode.
APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Delta Controls by ESC Automation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Responsibility: The supplier of the EMCS shall be responsible for inspection and Quality
Assurance (QA) for all materials and workmanship furnished.
B.
Component Testing: Maximum reliability shall be achieved through extensive use of
high-quality, pre-tested components. Each and every controller, sensor, and all other
DDC components shall be individually tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment.
C. Tools, Testing, and Calibration Equipment: The EMCS supplier shall provide all tools,
testing, and calibration equipment necessary to ensure reliability and accuracy of the
system.
D. The systems control contractor shall have been in business a minimum of five years and
be the authorized installing contractor for the manufacturer of the BACnet components.
E.
1.5
A.
Control system shall be engineered, programmed, and supported completely by
representative’s local office that must be within 100 miles of project site.
REFERENCE STANDARD
The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of
supplier's proposal date, and any applicable subsections thereof, shall govern design and
selection of equipment and material supplied:
1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE).
2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 1 35-2001, BACnet.
3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), including local amendments.
23 09 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
4. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment.
Canada and the US
5. National Electrical Code (NEC
6. FCC Part 1 5, Subpart J, Class A
7. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark)
B.
City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of contract date.
C. Except as otherwise indicated the system supplier shall secure and pay for all permits,
inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for necessary approvals
by the governing authorities.
1.6
A.
SUBMITTALS
Drawings
1. The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill of
materials for approval.
2. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 8.5" x 11" (ANSI A).
3. One complete sets (copies) of submittal drawings shall be provided.
4. Drawings shall be available electonically.
B.
System Documentation – Include the following in submittal package:
1. System configuration diagrams in simplified Eng Tool forms.
2. All input/output object listings and an alarm point summary listing.
3. Electrical drawings that show all system internal and external connection points,
terminal block layouts, and terminal identification.
4. Complete bill of materials and damper schedule.
5. Manufacturer's instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance, and
operation of all purchased items.
6. Overall system operation and maintenance instructions—including preventive
maintenance and troubleshooting instructions.
7. For all system elements – operator's workstation(s), building controller(s),
application controllers, routers, and repeaters – provide BACnet Protocol
Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) as per ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 1
35-2001.
8. Provide complete description and documentation of any proprietary (non-BACnet)
services and/or objects used in the system.
C. Scheduling
1. The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time
markings and details for hardware items and software development phases.
Schedule shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and
documents and shall indicate timing and dates for system installation, debugging,
and commissioning.
1.7
A.
WARRANTY
Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period
of one year from completion of system acceptance.
23 09 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide onsite or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The
maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours
Monday through Friday, 48 hours on Saturday and Sunday.
C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.
1.8
RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Refer to Division 0 and Division 1 for related contractual requirements.
B. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for General Mechanical Provisions.
C. Refer to Section 26 05 00 for General Electrical Provisions.
D.
Refer to Section 23 08 00 Commissioning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TERMINAL UNIT APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (HEAT PUMPS, AC UNITS, FAN
COILS)
A.
Provide one native BACnet application controller for each piece of unitary mechanical
equipment that adequately covers all objects listed in object list for unit. All controllers shall
interface to building controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No gateways shall
be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic program as
needed for complete control of unit.
B.
BACnet Conformance
1. Application controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They
shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 1 9.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps,
as a native BACnet device. Application controllers shall be of BACnet conformance
class 3 and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet
functional groups:
a.
Files Functional Group
b.
Reinitialize Functional Group
c.
Device Communications Functional Group
2. Please refer to Section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups in the BACnet standard for
a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the
functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall
be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data.
3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum-Analog Input,
Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File
and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall
be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data.
4. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can
accept 1OK Thermistors, 0-5 VDC, 4-20 mA, and dry contact signals . Any input on
controller may be either analog or digital. Controller shall also include support and
modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor. Controller shall
include binary outputs on board with analog outputs as needed.
23 09 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
5. All program sequences shall be stored on board controller in EEPROM. No batteries
shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed
by controller 10 times per second and shall be capable of multiple PID loops for
control of multiple devices. Programming of application controller shall be completely
modifiable in the field over installed BACnet LANs or remotely via modem interface.
6. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section
2.9.B.) Display on room sensor shall be programmable at controller and include an
operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall
be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which
button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display
requirements at intelligent room sensor.
2.2
A.
SENSORS AND MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
Temperature Sensors
1. All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory-calibrated to within 0.5
degrees F, totally interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Wall
sensors to be installed as indicated on drawings. Mount 48 inches above finished
floor. Duct sensors to be installed such that the sensing element is in the main air
stream. Immersion sensors to be installed in wells provided by control contractor,
but installed by mechanical contractor. Immersion wells shall be filled with thermal
compound before installation of immersion sensors. Outside air sensors shall be
installed away from exhaust or relief vents, not in an outside air intake and in a
location that is in the shade most of the day.
B.
Intelligent Room Sensor with LCD Readout
1. Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with
temperature sensor. Controller shall function as room control unit, and shall allow
occupant to raise and lower Setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override use-all
within limits as programmed by building operator. Sensor shall also allow service
technician access to hidden functions as described in sequence of operation.
2. The Intelligent Room Sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room
outside, and fan status (if applicable) at each controller. This unit shall be
programmable, allowing site developers the flexibility to configure the display to
match their application. The site developer should be able to program the unit to
display time-of-day, room humidity and outdoor humidity. Unit must have the
capability to show temperatures in Fahrenheit or Centigrade.
3. Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. Override time count
down shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero by occupant from the sensor.
Time remaining shall be displayed. Display shall show the word “OFF” in unoccupied
mode unless a function button is pressed.
4. See sequence of operation for specific operation of LCD displays and function keys
in field service mode and in normal occupant mode. Provide intelligent room sensors
as specified in point list.
5. Field service mode shall be customizable to fit different applications. If intelligent
room sensor is connected to VAV controller, VAV box shall be balanced and all air
flow parameters shall be viewed and set from the intelligent room sensor with no
computer or other field service tool needed.
C. Wall Sensor
23 09 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
1. Standard wall sensor shall use solid-state sensor identical to intelligent room sensor
and shall be packaged in aesthetically pleasing enclosure. Sensor shall provide
override function, warmer/cooler lever for set point adjustment and port for plug-in of
Field Service Tool for field adjustments. Override time shall be stored in controller
and be adjustable on a zone-by-zone basis. Adjustment range for warmer/cooler
lever shall also be stored in EEPROM on controller. All programmable variables shall
be available to Field Service Tool through wall sensor port.
D. Network Connection Tool
1. Network connection tool shall allow technician to connect a laptop to any MS/TP
network or at any MS/TP device and view and modify all information throughout the
entire BACnet network. Laptop connection to tool shall be via Ethernet or PTP.
2. Provide quick connect to MS/TP LAN at each controller. Tool shall be able to adjust
to all MS/TP baud rates specified in the BACnet standard.
3. Provide one Network Connection Tools for this project.
E.
Duct and Immersion Sensors
1. Temperature sensors shall be 10K OHM resistance type, providing a linear OHM per
degree Fahrenheit characteristic change and shall be housed as required for the
specific application. Averaging Sensors of five feet in length and shall be installed in
such a manner, so as to sense a representative sample of the medium being
controlled.
F.
Differential Pressure Transmitters
1. Differential air pressure type, adjustable 0.1" w.g. to 2.0" neoprene diaphragm.
G. Outdoor Temperature Sensors
1. Temperature sensors shall be 10K OHM resistance type for outdoor use and with a
conduit connector.
H. Differential Pressure Transmitters
1. Differential pressure transmitters shall be pre-spanned for the medium being
measured yielding a 4 to 20mA output signal. Submit chosen spans for review.
Transmitter element shall be equipped with barbed fittings for 1 /4" plastic tubing.
2.3
CURRENT SENSING RELAYS
A.
Current sensing relays for status of fans or pumps as called out in sequences or
input/output summary. Provide with field adjustable current setpoint range.
B.
Veris, Nielsen-Kuljian, or approved substitute.
2.4
DUCT STATIC OR VELOCITY PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
A.
Integral pressure transducer and transmitter in enclosure suitable for external duct
mounting. 4-20ma output proportional to the input pressure pan.
B.
Select transmitter range so that the normal operating Setpoint is midway between the
upper and lower range of the transmitter.
23 09 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
C. Each transmitter with field adjustable span and zero adjustments for field calibration.
Accuracy ±1.0% of full scale. Linearity ±0.1%. Setra, Ashcroft or approved substitute.
2.5
INTERPOSING RELAYS
A.
Track mounted SPDT relays, or as required, for all interposing applications.
B.
IDEC or approved substitute.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
2.8
ENCLOSURES
Enclosures UL listed. Controls and instruments logically assembled at one or more panels.
Panels with hinged doors. Locate panels accessible, and labeled in accordance with the
wiring diagrams.
DIFFERENTIAL AIR PRESSURE SWITCHES
Diaphragm operated which actuate a SPDT snap action switch. A field adjustable pressure
set point with a range of .1 5 to 4.0 inches W.C. allows switch operation suitable for air
flow status applications. The switch voltage and current rating double the load
requirements. Provide sensing tubes connected to tips with multiple holes and bulkhead
fittings specifically designed for air flow sensing.
CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) SENSORS
A.
CO2 sensor measures the CO2 content of the air in the range of 0 to 2000 ppm.
B.
Provide 0-10vdc output signal which correspondence linearly to 0 to 2000 ppm of CO2.
C.
Provide activation of an adjustable contact closure relay when the user-defined CO2 levels
is reached for alarm.
D. Provide non-dispersive CO2 sensing technology.
E.
2.9
A.
2.10
Provide duct mounting application kit
TRANSFORMERS
Provide control transformers required for the operation of the system. Provide each
transformer with a resettable circuit breaker, with the circuit breakers trip free. The circuit
breakers eliminate the possibility of a short destroying the transformer.
CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Relays and Signal Transmitters
B.
All necessary relays, contacts, and interface devices shall be furnished to make a full and
operable system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23 09 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.1
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
EXAMINATION
A.
Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such
work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
B.
Notify the owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work.
C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.
3.2
INSTALLATION (GENERAL)
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and
programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the
sequences of operation and point schedules.
3.3
LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS
A.
Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 48 inches above
floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on locations
from owner's representative prior to installation
B.
All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to protect
them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures.
C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels.
D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermo wells suitable for respective application and for
installation under other sections – sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow.
3.4
INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING
A.
Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and
professionally, in accordance with Specification Division 16 and all national, state and local
electrical codes.
B.
Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment
manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance wire
for all communications trunks.
C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and
disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes
as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the owner's
representative prior to rough-in.
D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function
E.
Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as
indicated on the electrical drawings—coordinate with electrical contractor.
F.
All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed
in raceways. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code
23 09 00 – 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be
run with plenum rated cable (without conduit).
3.5
DDC OBJECT TYPE SUMMARY
A.
Provide all database generation.
B.
Displays
1. System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system.
They shall be logically laid out for easy use by the owner.
C. Runtime Totalization
1. At a minimum, runtime totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply
fan, return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and chilled water pumps. Warning limits for
each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes.
D. Trend log
1. All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability to be
automatically trended.
E.
Alarm
1. All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall be
prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per owner’s
requirements.
F.
Database Save
1. Provide backup database for all standalone application controllers on disk.
3.6
FIELD SERVICES
A.
Prepare and start logic control system under provisions of this section.
B.
Startup and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for startup and commissioning prior
to placing control systems in permanent operation.
C. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at control contractor’s local or main office. At
a minimum, offsite facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software download.
Owner shall provide phone line for this service for one (1) year or as specified.
D. Provide Owner’s Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to
maintaining the integrity of the operating system.
3.7
A.
3.8
A.
AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED
See Specification Section 23 05 00 for requirements
TRAINING
Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment.
23 09 00 – 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
B.
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 09 00
Provide system operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as the
following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data,
execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of three
(3) people.
C. Provide onsite training above as required, up to 24 hours as part of this contract, in at least
three (3) separate periods.
D. Provide tuition for at least two (2) individuals for a one-week factory training class. If
applicable, costs for travel, lodging, and meals will be the responsibility of the Owner.
3.9
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B.
Demonstrate complete operating system to Owner’s representative.
C. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper
operation
3.10
GENERAL
A.
The entire building control system installed by skilled electricians and control mechanics,
all of whom are properly trained and qualified for the work.
B.
Electric wiring
1. Provide wiring in connection with the automatic control system. Electric wiring in
conduit or plenum rated cable where approved by code and local authorities, and
installed in accordance with local and state codes and the Electrical Division 1 6000
of this specification.
2. Conceal wiring and conduit except in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, and
penthouses.
3. Fully coordinate the interconnection of factory assembled portions of system
controls, field installed control systems, and the electrical power system to provide
a complete working installation.
4. Do not take power for temperature control equipment from equipment motor leads;
power from circuits dedicated for controls only.
5. Install conduits in a neat manner. Replace unacceptable installation relocated with
no additional cost and to contract amount and as approved by the Architect.
6. Provide any power required for the control systems, but not provided by Division 16.
See electrical drawings for coordination and provision.
C. Labels and identification
1. Identify equipment and panels. Identification labels describing equipment and panel
use and function.
2. Labels engraved with contrasting text using bakelite, plastic or metal material. Labels
permanently glued or mechanically fastened.
3. Identify wires and cables with permanent markers at each end.
END OF SECTION 23 09 00
23 09 00 – 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC PIPING
SECTION 23 20 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
WORK INCLUDED
Piping and fittings.
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
None
CODES AND STANDARDS
All standards refer to the current edition.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
ASTM A47 – Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A518 – Corrosion-resistant high silicon iron castings, pipe fitting.
ANSI B9.1 – Mechanical refrigeration pipe.
ANSI/ASME B16.4 – Cast iron threaded fittings Class 125 and 250.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 – Pipe flanges and flanged fittings.
ANSI/ASME B16.22 – Wrought copper and bronze solder-joint pressure fittings.
ANSI B16.25 – Butt welding ends for pipe, valves, flanges and fittings.
ANSI/ASME B16.29 – Wrought copper and wrought copper alloy solder-joint
drainage fittings – DWV.
Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions, latest adopted version.
ASME B31.1 – Power piping
ASME B31.9 – Building services piping
ANSI/ASTM B43 – Seamless red brass pipe, standard sizes.
ASTM B75 – Seamless Copper Tube.
ANSI/ASTM B306 – Copper drainage tube.
ASTM B813 – Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy
Tube
ASTM C14 – Non-reinforced concrete sewer, storm drain and culvert pipe.
ANSI/AWWA C111 – Rubber gasket joints for ductile iron and gray iron pressure
pipe and fittings.
ANSI/AWWA C151 – Ductile iron pipe, centrifugally cast in metal molds or sand lined
molds, for water or other liquids. ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 Cement mortar lining.
ASTM C443 – Joints for circular concrete sewer and culvert pipe, using rubber
gaskets.
ASTM C564 – Rubber gaskets for cast iron soil pipe and fittings.
ANSI/AWWA C606 – Grooved and shouldered type joints.
ANSI Z49.1 – Safety in Welding and Cutting
FS WW-P-521 – Pipe fittings, flange fittings, and flanges: Steel and malleable-iron
(threaded and butt welding) Class 150.
ASTM A234 – Seamless and welded wrought-steel welding fittings.
NFPA 13 – Installation of Sprinkler Systems
GE GAP (Formerly Industrial Risk Insurers)
IBC (International Building Code)
IMC (International Mechanical Code)
IFGC (International Fuel Gas Code)
23 20 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC PIPING
SECTION 23 20 00
30. NEC (National Electrical Code)
31. UL 1738
32. ULC S636
1.4
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved end piping
systems, all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
PIPING SYSTEMS
All material in conformance with the standards listed in 2.01.
1. Mechanical Refrigeration Piping:
a.
Pipe: ACR Type L hard copper, cleaned, dehydrated, and seal ends, ANSI
B9.1.
b.
Fittings: Wrought copper or bronze solder fittings, except refrigerant flare
fittings may be used for connections to equipment with flare connections,
ANSI/ASME B75.
2.2
UNIONS
A.
Copper tube, Sweat, Nibco #733, Grinnell-ITT #9730, EPC #4733.
B.
Steel pipe, threaded 2-inch and under, malleable-iron 250-lb. ground joint.
C. Steel pipe, welded 2½-inch and over, flange unions 150-lb. forged steel.
D. Dielectric unions, soldered to threaded 2-inch and below, flanged 2½-inch and above.
Select gasket for pressure and temperature range of service. Capitol Series CS or F, Epco
“Dielectric Union.”
2.3
A.
PIPE SEALS
Water tight seals shall be modular, mechanical, interlocking HDPE thermoplastic links in
accordance with ASTM D2000 M3 BA510. Pressure plates shall be molded glass
reinforced nylon. All fasteners shall be mild steel coated with both zinc dichromate and an
organic corrosion resistance coating. Seals shall be suitable for use in water direct ground
23 20 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC PIPING
SECTION 23 20 00
burial and atmospheric conditions form -40° to 250°F, PSI Thunderline Model “C” LinkSeal, or equal.
B.
2.4
Fire stopping seals shall be USG Interiors Inc. Thermafiber Safing insulation and
Thermafiber Smoke Seal, or equal.
ESCUTCHEON RINGS
A.
Chrome-plated split ring type.
B.
Deep recessed type on pipes with sleeves through floor which extend above finished floor
line to conceal pipe sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Route piping to avoid interference with structure, ceiling supports and framing, lights and
work of other trades. Provide offsets as required.
B.
Keep openings in piping and ends of pipe closed during installation.
C. Provide for all expansion, locating offsets and spring pieces where necessary.
D. Ells shall be long-radius.
E.
Change size in piping with reducing couplings; bushings not acceptable.
F.
Install all piping parallel with the building and other piping.
G. Cut pipe accurately to measurement established on building and work into place without
springing or forcing.
H. Piping installed on fill, excavated areas, and backfill shall be adequately supported on
beams supported by the building structure and undisturbed earth.
I.
Install piping concealed in finished rooms, unless indicated otherwise.
J.
Install exposed work neatly and workmanlike; run pipes parallel to the closest wall;
maintain maximum headroom; avoid light fixtures.
K.
Correct piping leaks immediately; use new materials; leak-sealing compounds or peening
not permitted.
3.2
THREADED PIPING JOINTS
A.
Ream all pipe to full diameter.
B.
Use non-Mercury thread sealant on all compressed air threaded joints, Locktite #PSP 567,
or equal.
C. Use pipe dope or Teflon tape on male threads of all other threaded joints.
D. Close nipples not permitted.
23 20 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC PIPING
SECTION 23 20 00
E.
Full cut threads and make up joints with no more than three threads exposed.
F.
Do not caulk threaded joints to stop leaks.
3.3
COPPER PIPING JOINTS
Note: Contractor to provide sweated joints in compliance with the method outlined in ASTM B828.
A.
Ream thoroughly to remove all burrs.
B.
Polish contact surfaces of fittings and pipes with emery cloth, sandpaper or steel brush,
and wipe clean before fluxing male and female surfaces of joints.
1. Steel wool not permitted for polishing.
C. Apply a thin even coating of flux with a brush to both tube and fitting as soon as possible
after cleaning.
D. Insert the tube end into fitting cup, making sure that the tube is seated against the base of
the fitting cup. Employ a slight twisting motion while inserting tube. Remove excess flux
from the exterior of the joint with a cotton rag.
E.
Support the tube and fitting assembly to ensure a uniform capillary space around the entire
circumference of the joint.
F.
Preheat the fitting and tube evenly and take care to avoid burning the flux.
G. Apply solder to the fitting while concurrently heating the fitting/tube.
1. Water flushable solder for all potable water systems in conformance with the UPC
and ASTM B813-93 “Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for
Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube.”
a.
95-5 solder, lead free Bridgit, or Silvabrite solder for above ground joints.
b.
Sil-fos or Sil-braz on all underground work.
H. Provide solder unions, ground joint or flanged joints where necessary for access to
equipment.
I.
3.4
Coordinate installation of unslit insulation with piping installation for refrigeration piping.
See section Mechanical Systems Insulation.
UNIONS
A.
Provide unions at all connections to equipment and where necessary to disconnect for
repairs.
B.
Use union fittings wherever practicable to save joints.
C. Provide dielectric unions between iron and copper pipe.
3.5
A.
PIPE SEALS AND ESCUTCHEON RINGS
At exterior walls, walls below grade, and floor slabs on grade, provide watertight seal.
Core drill round opening in existing concrete in accordance with seal manufacturer’s
23 20 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC PIPING
SECTION 23 20 00
recommendations. Install assembly to provide a penetration capable of withstanding a
20 psi differential pressure across the seal.
B.
At firewall, floor, and roof penetrations, seal annular space at pipes with firestopping
insulation and 2-inch minimum coating of smoke seal.
C. Fill annular space at all other piping penetrations with fiberglass batt insulation to a
compressed fit.
D. Provide escutcheon rings for all exposed uninsulated pipes passing through walls, floors
and ceilings.
END OF SECTION 23 20 00
23 20 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Duct Systems
B.
Plenums, Casings and Equipment
C. Hangers and Supports
D. Hardware and Accessories
E.
Air terminal units.
F.
Grilles, Register, and Diffusers
G. Air Duct Cleaning
H. Seismic protection of ductwork
1.2
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Turning vanes
B.
Wall Louvers
C. Sound Cells (Duct Silencers)
D. Air terminal units.
E.
Grilles, Register, and Diffusers
F.
Roof Caps
G. Drawing indicating seismic protection requirements of ductwork
H. Pressure Testing Agenda, Blower Certification, and Test Results
1.3
A.
CODES AND STANDARDS
Comply with the current editions of the following standards unless specified or indicated
otherwise:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
ASHRAE Guide Equipment Volume: Duct Construction, Chapter 1
“SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards”
“SMACNA Industrial Duct Construction Standards”
“SMACNA Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems”
“SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for Mechanical Systems”
NFPA-90A
NFPA-90B
NFPA-96
Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions,
Insulation shall comply with UL 181 and NFPA 90A
23 30 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
11. All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the
National Electric Code.
12. Attachments to the ceiling system shall be in accordance with UBC.
13. The entire assembly of all electrically-driven devices (including air terminal units)
shall be UL or ETL listed.
14. ASTM A525 – Steel Sheet, Zince- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
1.4
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT and FABRICATION
2.1
A.
DUCT AND PLENUM MATERIAL
For material, gauges, fabrication, and installation, select from the SMACNA options that
will result in a composite assembly that will be serviceable within the following criteria:
1. Systems with terminal boxes:
a.
Supply duct systems upstream of terminal boxes use 2-inches w.g. basis of
compliance.
b.
Supply duct systems downstream of terminal boxes use 1-inch w.g. basis of
compliance.
c.
Return duct systems use 1-inch w.g. negative basis of compliance.
2. Systems without terminal boxes:
a.
Supply duct systems use 1-inch w.g. basis of compliance.
b.
Return systems use ½-inch w.g. negative basis of compliance.
3. Exhaust duct systems use ½-inch w.g. negative basis of compliance
B.
G-90 coated galvanized steel of lock forming grade ASTM A-525 and A-527, unless
indicated on the drawings or specified otherwise.
C. Duct sealant shall be no/low VOC vinyl acetate water based duct sealer; Ductmate
PROseal, Ductmate FIBERseal, or approved equal.
2.2
HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS
A.
Comply with “SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards” and with the following
exceptions, selections or deviations.
B.
Duct Sealing: Supply ducts upstream of terminal boxes and aluminum duct seal per Class
“A” requirement in Table No. 1-2, “Duct Sealing Requirements.”
23 30 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
C. Fittings:
1. Square throat elbows in rectangular ducts shall have double wall, airfoil type, turning
vanes with positive attachment to the side rails. “Tabbed” or “dimpled” side rail
attachment is not permitted.
a.
Factory fabricated, double wall, airfoil type vanes. Aero-Dyne “H-E-P,” or
equal.
2. Where space allows, elbows in rectangular ducts may be full throat elbow type. For
velocities 1500 fpm and higher, use 1.5 radius. For velocities lower than 1500 fpm,
use 1 radius.
3. Do not use straight tap for branch connections in rectangular duct.
4. Round branch connection to rectangular ducts shall be notch spin-in type. Dovetail
joints for round branch connection to rectangular ducts are an acceptable option for
round taps for flexible connections to diffusers and grilles.
5. Do not use adjustable type elbows in duct systems upstream of terminal boxes and
in systems operating greater than 0.5" positive or negative pressure.
6. Provide conical fittings in supply duct systems upstream of terminal boxes. 90
degree tee with oval to round tap may be used.
7. Terminal box upstream duct connection:
a.
Provide the greater of 18" or three box inlet diameter lengths of straight
sheetmetal duct of the same diameter as the branch connection to the box.
Where duct sizes on the drawing indicate larger size, provide reducer fitting
ahead of straight length.
b.
Provide flexible duct 15-inches in length with 1" maximum offset. Tape ends
of insulation where duct and insulation are cut.
c.
Make connections with Mastic and Ideal stainless steel clamps.
8. Provide airtight stuffing boxes in supply ducts upstream of terminal boxes at
penetrations, such as thermostats, thermometers, and pipes. Use rubber grommets
or U-channel rubber extrusions of Rubbercraft Manufacturer to create airtight seal.
D. Access Doors and Panels:
1. Access panel 16-gauge single wall type with screws at 4-inches maximum spacing,
and with Ventlok #299 gasketing material all round perimeter.
2. Provide access doors where indicated as follows:
a.
Double sheetmetal panel type construction, tight fitting, hinged, with latch;
insulated or acoustic-lined equivalent to duct; steel angle frame.
b.
18-inch × 24-inch minimum size. General, 24-inch × 72-inch minimum for
access into main plenum spaces; 12-inch × 16-inch size, or maximum
possible size where duct dimensions do not permit this size, for access to
duct-mounted coils, automatic dampers or humidifiers, which are less than
3-feet maximum.
c.
Special access doors for plenums and between filters and supply fan shall
be 24-inch × 72-inch minimum size; double construction; Buenstod Stacey
Type F-1, or C.E. Sparrow “Cesco” manufacturer or acoustical panel casing
type as specified elsewhere.
d.
Die-cast latches; Ventfabrics Manufacturer.
Catalog No.
Door Sizes
100
2-feet-0-inches high or less
260
3-feet-0-inches high or less
23 30 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
Catalog No.
310
E.
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
Door Sizes
3-feet-0-inches or higher (2 latches required)
Volume Dampers:
1. Do not use splitter dampers.
2. Do not use orifice plates or perforated metal in lieu of volume dampers unless
indicated on the drawings.
3. Provide plate damper for standard use, Durodyne HDJD or equal.
4. Do not use fire dampers for volume adjustment or control.
5. Use square damper rod.
6. Size dampers to obstruct approximately 95 percent of the duct area when in the
closed position.
7. Duro-Dyne or equal damper quadrants.
a.
#KS 145 for dampers maximum 10-inches long.
b.
#KS-385 for dampers maximum 80-inches long.
c.
K-7 with bearings for dampers longer than 80-inch.
d.
Quadrants in finished spaces where dampers in ducts are concealed in
finished walls or ceilings provide with Duro-Dyne Series SRC, sizes as listed
for accessible ducts, or Young Regulator Series 301 or Ventlock Series 666
concealed damper operators.
8. Set and lock dampers in the “open” position.
9. Damper quadrant stand-offs for insulated ducts shall be 16 gauge galvanized steel
damper quadrant stand-offs; 1½-inch height above duct surface; sized to permit
secure attachment of damper quadrant; pop rivet connections to duct.
F.
Flexible Connections:
1. Provide at duct connections to fan inlets and outlets, minimum clear length of 8-inch.
2. Duro-Dyne “DDFDC,” Ventfabrics “Ventglas,” or equal.
G. Duct and Plenum Liner:
1. 1.5 lb. density inorganic glass fiber lining bonded with a thermosetting resin, OwensCorning Fiberglass, Armstrong, Knauf, or equal.
2. Provide 2-inch-thick liner throughout. Sizes indicated for acoustic-lined ducts shall
be net dimensions inside of the lining.
3. The product shall not exceed a 25 flame spread rating or a 50 smoke developed
rating as tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
4. The product shall be treated with an EPA registered, anti-microbial agent complying
with the testing requirements of ASTM C1338 and G21 for fungal growth and
resistance.
H. Flexible Duct:
1. Thermaflex #G-KM, Wiremold Co., or equal.
2. Use notch spin-in cuffs for connection of flexible duct to rigid duct.
3. Secure flexible duct to spin-in cuffs and diffusers with ½-inch wide positive locking
steel clamps.
4. Install flexible duct in a fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using only
the minimum length required to make the connection, no greater than 15" for terminal
23 30 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
unit connection, no more than 48" for a GRD connection. Support flexible duct on
18-inch centers with a minimum of 1-inch-wide flat banding material.
I.
Hanging and Supporting System:
1. Do not use powder actuated fastening devices. Use steel expanding concrete
anchors placed in drilled holes, Red-Head, Phillips Anchors or equal.
2. Select upper attachments using a safety factor of 5.
3. Exposed duct in finished spaces:
a.
Rectangular and flat oval ducts provide trapeze hangers with minimum
⅜-inch electro galvanized threaded rod and angle iron or Unistrut channel.
b.
Round ducts provide 1-inch by 16-gauge split rings with minimum ⅜-inch
electrogalvanized threaded rod.
4. Install ducts so that the ducts and hangers do not touch moving equipment or
equipment supports, conduit or piping subject to vibration.
2.3
A.
MISCELLANEOUS
Sound Cells (Duct Silencer):
1. General Requirements:
a.
Silencers shall be of the size, configuration, capacity and acoustic
performance as scheduled on the drawings. All silencers shall be factory
fabricated and supplied by the same manufacturer.
b.
Silencer inlet and outlet connection dimensions must be equal to the duct
sizes shown on the drawings. Duct transitions at silencers are not permitted
unless shown on the contract drawings
c.
Silencers shall be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA
standards for the pressure and velocity classification specified for the air
distribution system in which it is installed. Material gauges noted in other
sections are minimums. Material gauges shall be increased as required for
the system pressure and velocity classification. The silencers shall not fail
structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8 inches water
gauge.
d.
All casing seams and joints shall be lock-formed and sealed or stitch welded
and sealed except as noted in Section G below, to provide leakage-resistant
construction. Airtight construction shall be achieved by use of a duct-sealing
compound supplied and installed by the contractor at the jobsite
e.
All perforated steel shall be adequately stiffened to insure flatness and form.
All spot welds shall be painted
f.
Fire-Performance Characteristics: Silencer assemblies, including acoustic
media fill, film liner, sealants, and acoustical spacer, shall have flame-spread
index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50 when
tested according to ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723
g.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007
2. Rectangular Silencers: Outer casing shall be ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 galvanized
sheet steel, 22 gauge
3. Inner perforated metal liner: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 galvanized sheet steel
a.
Rectangular Silencers: 26 gauge
23 30 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
4. Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism:
a.
Dissipative and Film Lined silencers:
1)
Media shall be of acoustic quality, shot-free glass fiber insulation with
long, resilient fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Glass fiber
density and compression shall be as required to insure conformance
with laboratory test data. Glass fiber shall be packed with a minimum
of 15% compression during silencer assembly. Media shall be resilient
such that it will not crumble or break, and conform to irregular surfaces.
Media shall not cause or accelerate corrosion of aluminum or steel.
Mineral wool will not be permitted as a substitute for glass fiber.
5. Source Quality Control: Test according to ASTM E 477-06a.
a.
The manufacturer shall test the silencer(s) as indicated in the silencer
schedule. Test shall show compliance with the project criteria and is subject
to engineer approval.
B.
Wall Openings:
1. Seal space around ducts where ducts pass through walls, ceilings or floors.
2. Densely pack void space with loose fill fiberglass Insulation. Install galvanized iron
frame at each side of opening to cover edges of duct openings.
C. Duct Smoke Detectors:
1. Detectors: Pyrotronics “Pyr-A-Larm”, Model CDA-2; UL approved and designed for
detection of smoke in duct per NFPA 90A; self-contained with sampling tubes
extending across the air duct or air handling unit to sample a cross sectional area;
maximum 120 volt A-C power supply; supplies power to neon alarm indicators;
auxiliary contacts for remote alarms; key operated reset switch; remote alarm lamp
with round coverplate, Pyr-A-Larm No. RAL.
2. Smoke Detector Function: Shall sense smoke or products of combustion and supply
24 volt current to alarm indicator and auxiliary contacts.
3. Wiring (Connections between Detector and Remote Indicating Lamp): unless
specified otherwise, 18 gauge minimum; 250 volt; installed in electrical raceways.
D. Duct Access Panels: Sheetmetal, gasketed; 12-inch × 16-inch minimum size or maximum
possible size where duct dimensions do not permit this size, for fire and fire-smoke
dampers for access into duct as required to replace fusible link and reset damper.
E.
Pressure Testing:
1. Test supply duct systems upstream of terminal boxes.
2. Leakage not to exceed 10 percent of the total design air flow when tested under a
pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure. When partial sections of the duct system
are tested, the summation of the leakage for all sections not to exceed the total
allowable leakage.
3. Test method in accordance with “SMACNA Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment
of Air Distribution Systems.”
4. Notify Engineer at least 24-hours in advance of test.
2.4
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 30 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
A.
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
Fan Powered Constant Volume Series Flow Units:
1. Envirotec CFR Fan Powered Terminal Units of the size and capacities indicated on
the drawings; Titus, Anemostat, Trane, Nailor-Hart, or equal.
2. The entire unit shall be built as a single unit with a primary variable air damper that
controls primary air flow and an integral induced air inlet attenuator section. The
primary air flow shall be pressure independent and reset for air flows between zero
and maximum cataloged CFM. Air flow limiters will not be accepted. A flow sensor
and capped tees for field pressure readings shall maintain flow accuracy within 5
percent with same size inlet duct in any configuration connected to primary inlet.
3. Fan blowers shall be constructed of steel with forward curved blades, dynamically
balanced wheels and direct drive motor.
4. Fan motor shall be ECM. Motor shall be brushless DC controlled by an integral
controller / inverter that operates the wound stator and senses rotor position to
electronically commutate the stator. Motor shall be permanent magnet type with
near-zero rotor losses designed for synchronous rotation. The motor shall utilize
permanently lubricated ball bearings. Motor shall maintain minimum 70% efficiency
over the entire operating range. Motor speed control shall be accomplished through
a PWM (pulse width modulation) controller specifically designed for compatibility
with the ECM. Motor shall be provided with with the electrical characteristics as
indicated on the electrical drawings.
5. Unit casing to be minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel and fully lined with 3/4-inch,
1-1/2 lb. density insulation, coated to prevent air erosion. insulation to comply with
UI standard 181 for erosion and NFPA 90A and 90B for fire resistivity and approved
sealant. Unit casing shall have bottom access door to allow removal of fan and
servicing without disturbing duct connections. Casing to be designed for hanging by
sheet metal straps.
6. The primary air damper shall have built-in stop to prevent over-stroking and seal to
limit leakage to less than 2 percent at maximum capacity of 6.0-inch inlet static
pressure.
7. Units shall incorporate a single point electrical and *pneumatic* *electronic* control
connections for the entire unit. All electrical components shall be UL listed and
installed in accordance with the National Electric Code. All line voltage electrical
components shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure. The entire assembly shall
be UL or ETL listed.
8. Sound ratings not to exceed NC scheduled on the drawings.
B.
Air Terminal Unit Zone Coil:
1. Electric heating coils specifically designed for use with variable air volume terminal
units, factory mounted in an extended plenum section with diffuser plate. The
heating elements are nickel chrome, designed and derated to minimize hot spots
and premature tripping of the thermal cutouts.
2. Integral control panel factory wired containing:
a.
Primary automatic reset thermal cutout, one per coil;
b.
Secondary thermal cutouts, one per element;
c.
Air flow switch, differential pressure type;
d.
Line terminal block;
e.
Control terminal block;
f.
Class II, 24 volt control transformer;
g.
Mercury contactors;
23 30 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
h.
i.
j.
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
Manual reset thermal cutout;
Door interlock disconnect switch, and
Main supply fuses.
3. Size and capacity as scheduled on the drawings.
2.5
A.
GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
General:
1. Units shall be number, type, performance, and size as indicated on the drawings.
Units have been selected based on the manufacturer indicated on the drawings.
Other units may be provided by the manufacturer of Titus, Carnes, Anemostat,
Krueger, or equal. If an approved equal manufacturer is provided, select and size
units to obtain same performance and quality as unit scheduled.
2. Sizes indicated on drawings give the “seen” dimension first, second dimension is the
dimension “into the drawing”. Sizes indicated do not include borders.
3. Provide frame style to accommodate installation condition. Where the unit is installed
against building construction, borders shall be 1¼ -inch width to cover the embedded
frame. Where installed against exposed sheetmetal, borders shall be ⅝-inch or
¾-inch width; fitted with air seal of cellular plastic or rubber.
4. Where blank-offs are indicated; diffuser sections shall be blanked-off with
sheetmetal baffles on top of diffuser vanes. Attach blank-offs to diffuser interior.
Blank-offs shall be the same manufacturer as diffuser.
5. Finish (unless noted otherwise):
a.
Ceiling Units: White Baked Enamel
b.
Wall Units: Prime-Coat
2.6
AIR DUCT CLEANING
A.
Thoroughly clean all new and existing ductwork systems are complete and before the
project is balanced, including plenums, fans and coils.
B.
Execution:
1. Cleaning shall be done with equipment utilizing compressed air for loosening and
dislodging the dirt and power vacuum systems for collecting the dirt in the systems.
2. Access panels shall be provided so the duct cleaning equipment can reach all
portions of the ductwork to be cleaned.
C. Cleaning shall be by Power Vacuum and Air Blast Method by Ventilation Power Cleaning,
Inc., Innovative Vacuum Services, Inc. (Innovac), or approved equal.
D. General:
1. Cleaning shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect.
2. Care shall be taken not to damage in any way duct lining and plenum lining. Any
damaged lining will be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. A letter shall be submitted to the Architect by the cleaning contractor certifying that
all systems have been completely cleaned.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
23 30 00 – 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
3.1
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
INSTALLATION
A.
Route ductwork to avoid interference with structure, ceiling supports and framing, lights,
and work of other trades. Provide offsets as required.
B.
Ductwork in General:
1. Elbows:
a.
Supply Ducts: Standard radius elbows per SMACNA Standards. Square
elbows with vanes are allowed only where indicated.
b.
Exhaust Ducts: Minimum elbow radius equal to ½ duct width. Square corner
elbows allowed only where indicated.
2. Round or Flat Oval Ducts: Spiral seam ducts as specified.
3. Duct Collars: Provide where exposed ductwork passes through walls, slabs or
ceilings.
4. Seams: Formed and sealed per SMACNA recommendations for 10 percent
maximum leakage; standing seams are not acceptable on ducts other than plenums.
5. Joints: Formed and sealed per SMACNA recommendations for 10 percent maximum
leakage; Ductmate system or equivalent. Field fabricated joints are not allowed.
C. Provide steel angle framing on 18-inch centers to support plenums and large ducts. Fasten
lapped type seams to framing on 4-inch centers or standing type seams to framing on
12-inch centers. Provide supplementary bracing on horizontal surfaces to prevent
deformation under system operating and “upset” pressures. Fasten sheetmetal to backing
with steel screws.
D. Duct and Plenum Sealing
1. Seam and Joint Construction: Fill sheetmetal seams and joints with fire-retardant
mastic prior to their assembly; construct seams and joints to retain mastic after
assembly.
2. Application of sealant: Brush, trowel, or otherwise spread sealant to all transverse
and longitudinal ductwork seams and joints, except longitudinal Pittsburgh and
grooved seams. Comply with sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Clean
ductwork surface before application. Do not apply sealant to damp or wet duct
surfaces. Reapply sealant to all duct seams where adhesion is incomplete, or as
directed.
3. Sealing around Filters: Seal between the base of the filter casing and the floor
surfaces with a polysulphide base mastic. Seal filter casing to walls with sheetmetal.
4. Pipe Penetrations: Seal per Figure 6-10, SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, 1985.
5. Flexible Connections at Fans: Provide flexible connections to connecting ductwork
at fans and at air handling units with non-internal spring isolated fans and at other
locations as indicated. Install flexible materials, with sufficient slack to permit
2-inches of horizontal or vertical movement of the fan or air handling unit, without
stretching the flexible fabric. Support ductwork at flexible connection from the
building structure.
E.
Provide transitions to rectangular where fire dampers or control dampers are installed in
circular and flat oval ducts.
23 30 00 – 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
F.
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
Remove construction debris and dirt in ducts and plenum interiors at end of work; no
additional cost to the Owner.
G. Mitered Ducts and Fittings: Use radius ells and connections.
H. Adjustable or pleated elbows shall not be used.
I.
3.2
½-inch mesh galvanized wire bird screen to protect all openings to the outside air including
but not limited to air intakes, exhaust fan outlets, and relief openings.
SUPPORT
A.
Construct and install per recommended practices of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, with the following additions and exceptions.
B.
All hangers shall support the weight of installed ductwork and insulation. All ducting over
5 square feet in cross-sectional area shall support the weight of the ductwork, insulation
and the weight of a 200 pound person.
C. Continuously threaded type steel rods ¼-inch minimum diameter shall be allowed only if
electroplated.
D. Support terminal boxes with rod hangers or with non-perforated strap hangers. Supports
shall be attached to inserts in the slab, where possible.
E.
Provide hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of horizontal duct, at the following
locations.
1. Close to transverse joints of main ducts and branches, and for branch connections
3-feet or greater in length.
2. Adjacent to fire dampers and to ducts penetrating walls and partitions.
3. Square corner elbows at not over 24-inch intervals measured along the elbows.
4. At the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal radius elbows greater than
20 degrees change in direction.
5. One or more supplementary hangers, as necessary, along the radius elbows of any
angle whenever the lengths of these arcs exceed the maximum hanger spacing
length for that particular size duct.
F.
Vertical Ducts: Angles riveted to the sides; size, same as bracing; for ducts under 24-inch
dimension, 1-inch × ⅛-inch; shall rest on each floor slab.
G. Provide support for vertical ducts at the following locations.
1. Provide duct supports from floors and walls when necessary.
2. Provide each duct riser with a minimum of two supports completely spanning the
shaft opening at each floor. One pair of supports may be used to support more than
one duct riser, provided that the strength of the supports is increased appropriately
and proper additional supplementary steel is used at the extra risers.
3. Support duct risers located between floors that are more than 15 feet high, at each
floor and halfway points between floors. The distance between intermediate
supports on very high floors should not exceed 12 feet. (Intermediate hangers may
be supported from an adjacent wall or hung by rods from supports on the floor
above).
23 30 00 – 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
H. Anchor structure shall be provided; made of welded structural steel, attached to embedded
anchor bolts, shall be provided at base of the vertical riser.
I.
Vertical Ducts Exposed in Accessible Areas Subject to Damage: No. 14 gauge welded
galvanized steel; full length welds, silicon-copper weld metal. Provide forged steel bar
supports on both sides of duct, attached to anchor bolts in wall, 4-feet-0-inches on centers,
full height of duct. Paint over welds and adjacent surfaces affected by heat, with a high
zinc paint.
J.
Support of Ducts above Roof: Provide hot dip galvanized steel angle frames at spacing
indicated, made of 1¼-inch × 1¼-inch × ¼-inch minimum steel angles, all welded, hot dip
galvanized.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
SUPPORT FOR EQUIPMENT
Provide one or more sets of hangers for heating coils, VAV units, terminal boxes, and all
other equipment in duct runs, as recommended by their manufacturers.
SEISMIC PROTECTION OF AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Provide seismic protection for all ductwork and accessories in accordance with the most
current edition of the SMACNA publication “Seismic Restraint Manual – Guidelines for
Mechanical Systems”, Hazard Level B.
MAXIMUM PERMITTED DUCT HANGER SPACING
A.
Ducts with areas up to 4 square feet shall have their hangers spaced up to 8 feet apart.
B.
Ducts with areas 4.1 to 10 square feet shall have their hangers spaced not more than
6 feet apart.
3.6
ACOUSTIC LINING
A.
General: Provide on all 4 interior surfaces of the duct, for extent indicated.
B.
Sizes indicated for acoustic-lined ducts shall be net dimensions, inside of the lining.
C. Lining Application: Per “Installation Standards for Rectangular Ducts Using Flexible Liner,”
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, with materials as specified herein before;
12-inch by 18-inch maximum spacing for insulation fasteners; insulation edge and seam
sealing shall completely bond all fibers for full insulation thickness and prevent raw edges.
D. Provide in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Where indicated on the drawings.
All ducts exposed to weather.
Ducts inside the building conveying outside air.
Plenums, supply air, return air, outside air and mixed air.
E.
Use non-flammable adhesive, applied per the requirements of ASTM C916
F.
Repair all cuts, tears and damage by coating with adhesive.
23 30 00 – 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
G. Longitudinal joints shall only occur at the corners of the duct and all joints shall be coated
with adhesive.
H. Provide hat section build-outs at turning vanes, dampers or other devices and nosings at
any liner raw edge.
3.7
A.
3.8
A.
3.9
DUCT SILENCER
Install silencer according to manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
Provide access doors where access to equipment in ducts or plenums is necessary.
Provide special access doors between first air filter on intake airstreams and supply fans.
INSTALLATION OF TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Coordination: Coordinate depths of terminal units with clearances available above
suspended ceilings and with other items in the ceiling space.
B.
Hangers: Install each unit on electro-galvanized, prime painted or cadmium-plated steel
hanger rods or galvanized bar steel strap hangers from the slab above with anchor
(expansion) bolts or concrete inserts.
3.10
INSTALLATION OF REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS
A.
Provide flexible or hard duct connections as indicated on drawings. Flexible duct shall be
48-inch maximum length, maximum total turn of 45-degrees. Tightly clamp ends of flexible
ducts to sheetmetal connection. For double wall flexible duct, clamp interior liner and tape
exterior liner to sheetmetal connection.
B.
Diffusers and grilles shall be appropriate frame style for location and be well fitted to the
ceiling or trim of ceiling.
C. Grilles and registers shall be appropriate frame style for location and be well fitted to the
building construction and/or ductwork.
D. Support of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be concealed attachments wherever
possible. Supports and attachments for ceiling mounted diffusers and grilles shall be from
structure of the duct or from the ceiling. Diffusers and grilles in lay-in ceilings shall be
positively attached to the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the
same carrying capacity as the main runner per IBC.
E.
Screened Opening: Provide angle frame and screened cover over duct opening.
F.
Interior of Ducts (Where visible through Grilles): Apply one coat of black paint.
3.11
A.
VOLUME DAMPERS AND QUADRANTS
Damper Locations: Provide in the duct to each supply opening and exhaust opening.
Provide branch volume dampers in all trunk ducts at each shaft penetration and in each
branch duct from a main trunk duct and in each branch duct with 3 or more supply or
23 30 00 – 12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION
SECTION 23 30 00
exhaust openings. Provide additional dampers as indicated on drawings. Locate dampers
as far upstream from the outlets as possible and in accessible areas.
B.
Acoustic Performance: Noisy dampers as determined by the Architect shall be replaced.
C. Ducts Concealed in Walls or Non-Removable Ceilings: Install flush mounted concealed
type damper quadrants at all such locations.
D. Damper Quadrants on Insulated Ductwork: Install a damper quadrant standoff for each
volume damper on insulated ductwork. Attach standoff to duct and quadrant to standoff
with pop-rivets.
E.
3.12
Damper Positions: Set and lock all volume dampers in the “Full Open” position prior to
commencement of balancing work on the system.
TESTING
A.
Pressure Testing of Medium Pressure Ductwork and Plenums: Test all ductwork and
plenums before insulation is installed to determine system tightness.
B.
Test Method: Provide temporary caps at each end of each plenum or duct section to be
tested. Furnish portable blower with volume adjustment and a calibrated orifice for
determining cfm of air being added to ductwork. Submit certified performance data on
blower and orifice. Include diameter of orifice and calculation of air flow through orifice at
three differential pressures to verify performance curve of test unit. Maintain pressure
equal to the rating stated in Section 23 30 00. In duct; make sufficient preliminary tests
and examinations of each section at this pressure, and seal all observable leaks so that
leakage during final testing will be at or below maximum permissible leakage.
C. Permissible Leakage: Add up the lengthwise cross-sectional area in a plane through the
duct centerline, which shall be calculated by multiplying the duct length by the duct
diameter for all circular duct sections to be tested. For oval ducts, reinstate rectangular
diameter; and for transition sections, use average diameter. For rectangular ducts and
plenums, use the duct or plenum width plus height divided by two to obtain an equivalent
diameter. Maximum permissible leakage shall not exceed 1½ CFM, for each 4,200 square
inches of total cross-section area of all ducts under each test. Final test of each section
will be witnessed by the Architect. Give at least seven (7) days’ prior notice before such
test.
D. Test Data: Record data of test results of final test only, including sketch or diagram of
testing section showing all dimensions in inches, computation of total lengthwise crosssection area and actual leakage found during the test. Upon completion of testing, submit
data to the Architect.
3.13
A.
DUCT AND AIR HANDLING UNIT SMOKE DETECTORS
Smoke Detectors: Mounted directly on outside of duct or air handling equipment. Provide
weathertight enclosure where exposed to building exterior. Unless directed otherwise,
install remote alarm lamp and coverplate in ceiling directly below the unit.
END OF SECTION 23 30 00
23 30 00 – 13
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC FANS
SECTION 23 34 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
WORK INCLUDED
Inline, Wall and Cabinet Fans
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
Inline, Wall and Cabinet Fans
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Vibration isolation shall conform to the criteria set in the 2003 ASHRAE Applications
Handbook, Chapter 47.
B.
Electrical panels shall be in accordance with the NEMA standards.
C. All units shall meet Washington State Energy Code performance requirements.
D. Fan performance shall be per AMCA standard 210.
E.
Fan noise limit tests shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Reverberant
Method for Sound Testing of Fans”.
F.
Fan drive guards shall be per WAC 296-24-205 “General Safety and Health Standards,”
State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries.
G. AMCA 301 – Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
H. ANSI/AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
I.
ARI 260 – Standard for Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment
J.
ASHRAE 68 – Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement
Procedure for Fans.
K.
ASTMB 117 – Standard Practice for Operation Salt Spray Apparatus
L.
NEMA MG1 – Motors and Generators
M. NFPA 90 A & B – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and Installation
of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
N. SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
1.4
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
23 34 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC FANS
SECTION 23 34 00
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
INLINE FANS
A.
Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of the centrifugal belt driven inline
type. The fan housing shall be of the square design constructed of heavy gauge
galvanized steel and shall include square duct mounting collars.
B.
Fan construction shall include two removable access panels located perpendicular to the
motor mounting panel. The access panels must be of sufficient size to permit easy access
to all interior components.
C. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall
include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances.
Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
D. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and
furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be
mounted out of the airstream. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance.
E.
Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed,
lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life
in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed.
F.
Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.
G. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the
wheel and motor shafts.
H. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. Factory wiring shall be
provided from motor to the handy box.
I.
All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance.
J.
Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer’s nameplate containing the model
number and individual serial number for future identification.
K.
Provide with:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
NEMA-1 toggle switch, mounted and wired
External inlet vane damper
Grease fittings on bearings
Two-groove pulley an belt system
Higher efficiency motors to meet EPACT and NEMA 1210
Unit size and capacity as indicated on the drawings, Greenheck, Twin City, or Cook, or
approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INLINE FANS
23 34 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
HVAC FANS
SECTION 23 34 00
A.
Furnish and install all accessories shipped with unit
B.
Install fan per manufacturers instructions
END OF SECTION 23 34 00
23 34 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Air Handling Units
B.
Packaged Air Conditioning Units
C. Roof Top Condensing Heat Pump UNits
1.2
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Air Handling Units
B.
Packaged Air Conditioning Units
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Air handling units shall conform to the AMCA Standards Handbook Publication No. 99.
B.
Vibration isolation shall conform to the criteria set in the 2003 ASHRAE Applications
Handbook, Chapter 47.
C. Electrical panels shall be in accordance with the NEMA standards.
D. Packaged air conditioning units shall be UL listed, labeled and rated in accordance with
A.R.I. Standards.
E.
All units shall meet Washington State Energy Code performance requirements.
F.
Fan performance shall be per AMCA standard 210.
G. Fan noise limit tests shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Reverberant
Method for Sound Testing of Fans”.
H. Fan drive guards shall be per WAC 296-24-205 “General Safety and Health Standards,”
State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries.
I.
AMCA 301 – Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
J.
ANSI/AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
K.
ANSI/UL 900 – Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
L.
ARI 260 – Standard for Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment
M. ARI 410 – Standard for Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
N. ARI 430 – Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units.
O. ARI 1060 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment
P.
ASHRAE 68 – Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement
Procedure for Fans.
Q. ASTMB 117 – Standard Practice for Operation Salt Spray Apparatus
23 70 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
R. NEMA MG1 – Motors and Generators
S.
NFPA 90 A & B – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and Installation
of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
T.
SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
U. UL 1995 – Heating and Cooling Equipment
1.4
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNIT (RTU 1&2)
MANUFACTURERS – Trane or approved equal
1. GENERAL
a.
Manufacturer of packaged unitary rooftop products shall have had a
minimum of five years of successful experience in the manufacture and
service support of the rooftop packages specified herein. Manufacturers with
less than five years of experience in the production of rooftop units of the
sizes and types specified shall not be acceptable.
B.
GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION
1. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be cooling only packaged rooftops as specified
on the contract documents and within these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings
shall be based upon AHRI Standard 360. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated
weathertight casing with compressors, air cooled condenser coil, condenser fans,
evaporator coil, filters, supply and/or exhaust fan motors and drives, and unit
controls.
2. Unit(s) shall be single piece construction as manufactured at the factory. [Site
assembled subassemblies will not be allowed.] Package units shall be constructed
for installation on a roof curb providing full perimeter support under air handler
section and pedestal support under condenser section.
3. Unit(s) shall be factory run tested to include the operation of all fans, compressors,
and control sequences.
4. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and
indicate caution areas.
C. UNIT CASING
1. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating
durable enough to withstand a minimum of 500 consecutive-hour salt spray
application in accordance with standard ASTM B 117. Structural members shall be
23 70 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
heavy gauge with access doors and removable panels of heavy gauge steel. Roof
panels shall be sloped to provide positive drainage of rain water/melting snow away
from the cabinet.
2. Access Doors: Fully gasketed hinged doors with fluted knob fasteners and chained
“tie-backs” to provide access to filters, heating section, return/exhaust air fan section,
supply air fan section and evaporator coil section.
3. Insulation: Provide ½-inch thick coated fiberglass internal liner on all exterior panels
in contact with the conditioned air stream.
D. AIR FILTERS
1. Air Filters: Filters shall mount integral within unit casing and be accessible via hinged
access panels. Filters shall be 2" High Efficiency MERV8 Type
E.
FANS – SUPPLY AND EXHAUST
1. Provide Direct Drive Plenum type supply fan.
2. Provide forward curved exhaust fans with fixed-pitch sheave drive assemblies.
3. Dynamically balance all fans and the unit’s running fan assembly (fan mounted on
actual shaft, bearings and in scroll housing) to assure smooth operation of the fan
and its associated assembly. Balancing of the fan only shall not be acceptable.
4. Mount fan motor(s) and fan on a common base assembly and isolated from unit with
2" Deflection Spring Isolators. Provide thrust restraint isolation on the fan
housing/fan board to assure smooth fan startup transition and operation.
5. Fan shaft shall be mounted on grease lubricated ball bearings and include shaft
grounding rings.
6. Motor shall be Premium Efficiency ODP. Motor shall have a standard T-frame and a
minimum service factor of 1.15. All drive components shall be accessible without the
use of scaffolds or ladders, to facilitate periodic maintenance checks and for operator
safety.
F.
EVAPORATOR COIL SECTION
1. Provide heavy duty aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Evaporator
coil shall be inter-circuited to maintain active coil face area at part load conditions.
Coil shall also utilize internally enhanced tubing for maximum efficiency.
2. Provide a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) for each refrigerant circuit. Factory
pressure and leak test coil.
3. Provide pitched drain pan to assure positive drainage of condensate from the unit
casing.
G. AIR-COOLED CONDENSER SECTION
1. Condenser coils shall have all Aluminum Microchannel coils. All coils shall be leak
tested at the factory to ensure pressure integrity. The condenser coil is pressure
tested to 650 psig. Subcooling circuit(s) shall be provided as standard.
2. Provide subcooling circuit(s) integral with condenser coils to maximize efficiency and
prevent premature flashing of liquid refrigerant, to a gaseous state, ahead of the
expansion valve.
3. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with steel blades, and three phase
motors. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Motors shall be
permanently lubricated, with built-in current and thermal overload protection and
weathertight slinger over motor bearings.
23 70 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
4. Furnish unit with factory-installed electronic low ambient option to allow for operation
down to 0°F.
5. Provide factory-installed louvered steel coil guards around perimeter of condensing
section to protect the condenser coils, refrigerant piping and control components.
Louvered panels shall be fabricated from heavy gauge galvanized steel and be rigid
enough to provide permanent protection for shipping and pre-/post- installation.
Course wire mesh is not an acceptable material for coil guards.
H. REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
1. Compressor: shall be industrial grade, energy efficient direct drive 3600 RPM
maximum speed reciprocating or scroll type. The motor shall of a suction gas cooled
hermetic design. Compressor shall have centrifugal oil pump with dirt separator, oil
sight glass, and oil charging valve.
2. Lead Circuit to Include Variable Speed Compressor –Variable speed compressor
shall be capable of speed modulation from 25 Hz to a maximum of 100 Hz. The
minimum unit capacity shall be 15% of full load or less. The compressor motor shall
be a permanent magnet type. Each compressor shall have a crankcase heater
installed, properly sized to minimize the amount of liquid refrigerant present in the oil
sump during off cycles. Compressors shall be equipped with a thrust bearing oil
injection system that optimizes scroll set lubrication and controls the oil circulation
rate. Optimal bearing lubrication shall be provided by a gear rotor oil pump. Each
variable speed compressor shall be matched with a specially designed variable
frequency drive which modulates the speed of the compressor motor and provides
several compressor protection functions. Control of the variable speed compressor
and inverter control shall be integrated with the unit controller to ensure optimal
equipment reliability and efficiency. Provide with thermostatic motor winding
temperature control to protect against excessive motor temperatures resulting from
over-/under-voltage or loss of charge. Provide high and low pressure cutouts, and
reset relay.
3. Provide factory-installed compressor lockout thermostat to prevent compressor
operation at low ambient conditions.
4. Provide coil frost protection compressor unloading based on refrigerant circuit
suction temperature to
I.
EXHAUST SECTION
1. Two (2), double-inlet, forward-curved fans shall be mounted on a common shaft with
fixed sheave drive. All fans shall be dynamically balanced and tested in factory
before being installed in unit. Exhaust fan shall be test run as part of unit final run
test. Unit shall reach rated rpm before fan shaft passes through first critical speed.
Fan shaft shall be mounted on two grease lubricated ball bearings designed for
200,000-hour average life. Optional extended grease lines shall be provided to allow
greasing of bearings from unit filter section. Fan motor and assembly shall be
mounted on common base to allow consistent belt tension with no relative motion
between fan and motor shafts. Entire assembly shall be completely isolated from
unit and fan board by double deflection, rubber in shear isolators or spring isolation
on motor sizes larger than five hp.
2. For VAV rooftops, the 100 percent modulating exhaust discharge dampers & VFD
shall be modulated in response to building pressure. A differential pressure control
system, (Statitrac™), shall use a differential pressure transducer to compare indoor
building pressure to outdoor ambient atmospheric pressure. The FC exhaust fan
23 70 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
shall be turned on when required to lower building static pressure setpoint. The
(Statitrac™) control system shall then modulate the discharge dampers & VFD to
control the building pressure to within the adjustable, specified dead band that shall
be adjustable at the human interface panel.
J.
OUTDOOR AIR SECTION
1. Provide 100% modulating dry bulb-based economizer system fully integrated with
unit return and exhaust air dampers. Unit operation is through primary temperature
controls that automatically modulate dampers to maintain desired space
temperature conditions.
2. Provide adjustable minimum position control through the BACnet Interface.
3. Provide spring-return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown or
power interruption.
K.
DAMPERS
1. Provide Low leak 4cfm/sqft of nominal airflow at one inch W.C. static pressure
dampers.
2. Leakage rate shall be determined in accordance with AMCA Standard 575.
L.
DDC MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLS
1. General – Each unit shall be provided with a factory-installed, programmed and runtested, stand-alone, microprocessor control system suitable for CV or VAV control
as required. This system shall consist of temperature and pressure (thermistor and
transducer) sensors, printed circuit boards, and a unit-mounted Human Interface
Panel. The microprocessor shall be equipped with on-board diagnostics to indicate
that all hardware, software, and all interconnected wiring and sensors are in proper
operating condition. The microprocessor's memory shall be non-volatile EEPROM
type, thus requiring no battery or capacitive backup to maintain all data during a
power loss.
2. The Human Interface Panel shall be readily accessible for service diagnosis and
programming without having to open the main control panel on the rooftop unit.
Alphanumeric coded displays shall not be acceptable.
3. Human Interface (HI) Panel – shall be a 16 key touch-sensitive membrane key switch
panel, password protected to prevent use by unauthorized personnel. The Human
Interface Panel display shall consist of a 2 line by 40 characters per line clear English
display. The display shall be Supertwist Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) with blue
characters, 5 × 7 dot matrix with cursor, on a gray-green background for high visibility
and reading ease.
4. Anti-recycle Protection – shall be provided to prevent excessive cycling, and
premature wear, of the compressors, contactors and related components.
M. MISCELLANEOUS FEATURES
1. Remote Set Point: Provide BACnet Interface for units to allow for remote setting of
the discharge air set point.
2. Phase and Voltage Monitor – Protects 3-phase equipment from phase loss, phase
reversal, and low voltage. Any fault condition will produce a Failure Indicator LED,
and send the unit into an emergency stop condition. cULus approved.
3. Roof curb
23 70 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
a.
b.
2.2
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
Contractor shall provide seismically rated curbs engineered to match
existing openings for duct penetrations. With supply and return air gasketing
and wood nailer strips.
Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing
Contractors Association guidelines.
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNIT (RTU 3 & 7)
A.
MANUFACTURERS – Trane or approved equa
B.
GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION
1. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be Heat Pump packaged rooftop (s) as
scheduled on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings
shall be based on AHRI Standards. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weather-tight
casing with compressor(s), air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator
coil, return-air filters, supply motors and unit controls.
2. Unit(s) shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A.
3. Units shall be dedicated downflow or dedicated horizontal airflow as manufactured.
C. UNIT CASING
1. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating
with removable access panels. Structural members shall be 16 gauge with access
doors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.
2. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance with
ASTM B117.
3. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be
double-hemmed and gasket-sealed.
4. Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to
filters, heating section, return air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil
section, and unit control section.
5. Downflow unit's base pans shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply
and return openings for water integrity.
6. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick coated fiberglass insulation on all exterior panels
in contact with the return and conditioned air stream.
7. Provide openings either on side of unit or thru the base for power, control and gas
connections.
D. FANS AND MOTORS
1. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet,
centrifugal type fan.
2. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent
lubrication fittings.
3. Provide units 12 1/2 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable
motor sheaves.
4. Outdoor and Indoor Fan motors shall be permanently lubricated and have internal
thermal overload protection.
5. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through
in the vertical discharge position.
23 70 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
6. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, and protectively coated with lubricating oil.
E.
SINGLE ZONE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME
1. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent
lubrication fittings.
2. Unit shall be provided with VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) on Indoor fan motor.
VFD shall change fan speed according to mode of operation. During cooling mode,
fan shall modulate to maintain space temperature. the compressor shall operate to
control discharge air temperature. This operation shall be standard with SZVAV
offering. Heat operations shall be as constant volume heating control.
3. Unit shall be provided with bypass mode operation. This operation is field wired to
bypass VFD in the event of VFD failure.
4. Unit shall be provided with optional shaft grounding rings for electrical protection.
Shaft grounding rings provide long term motor/VFD bearing reliability.
F.
ELECTRIC HEATING SECTION
1. Provide heavy duty nickel chromium heating elements internally wired. Heater shall
have pilot duty or automatic reset line voltage limit controls and any circuit carrying
more than 48 amps shall have fuse protection in compliance with N.E.C.
2. Heater shall be internal to unit cabinet.
3. Heater shall be UL and CSA listed and approved and provide single point power
connection.
G. EVAPORATOR COIL
1. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil.
2. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory
pressure test at 450 psig and leak test at 200 psig.
3. Provide drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC or galvanized steel
with external connections.
H. CONDENSER SECTION
1. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be
statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal
overload protection in a weather tight casing.
I.
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
1. Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm.
Integral centrifugal oil pump. Provide suction gas cooled motor with winding
temperature limits and compressor overloads.
2. Units shall have cooling capabilities down to 0 degree F as standard. For fieldinstalled low ambient accessory, the manufacturer shall provide a factory-authorized
service technician that will assure proper installation and operation.
3. Provide each unit with 2 refrigerant circuit(s) factory-supplied completely piped with
liquid line filter-drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports.
4. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, discharge muffler, flow control check
valve, and electronic time initiated, temperature terminated defrost control.
J.
EXHAUST/RETURN SECTION
23 70 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
1. Provide 100% Modulating Powered exhaust capable of the scheduled full supply
CFM. Powered exhaust shall have separate point power connection and space
pressure controls. Pneumatic tubing shall be field installed by installing contractor to
the controlled space.
K.
OUTDOOR AIR SECTION
1. Provide economizer with Dry Bulb Control & Low Leak Dampers.
2. Provide adjustable minimum position control located in the economizer section of
the unit.
3. Provide spring return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown or
power interruption.
L.
OPERATING CONTROLS
1. Provide factory-wired roof top units with 24 volt control circuit with control
transformers, contactor pressure lugs or terminal block for power wiring. Contractor
to provide Fused Disconnect. Units shall have single point power connections. Field
wiring of zone controls to be NEC Class II.
2. Provide microprocessor unit-mounted control which when used with an electronic
zone sensor provides proportional integral room control. This UCM shall perform all
unit functions by making all heating, cooling and ventilating decisions through
resident software logic.
3. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor
slugging by interrupting compressor operation.
4. Provide a anti-cycle timing and minimum on/off between stages timing in the
microprocessor.
5. Economizer Preferred Cooling
- Compressor operation is integrated with
economizer cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is not adequate to
satisfy zone requirements. Compressors are enabled if space temperature is
recovering to cooling setpoint at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees per minute.
Compressor low ambient lockout overrides this function.
M. STAGING CONTROLS
1. Provide programmable electronic microcomputer based zone control.
a.
Zone control shall incorporate:
1)
Automatic changeover from heating to cooling.
2)
Set-up for at least 2 - sets of separate heating and cooling
temperatures per day.
3)
Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one
hour to 31 days.
4)
Switch selection features including Fahrenheit display, 12 or 24 hour
clock, keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto.
N.
ROOF CURB
1. Contractor shall provide seismically rated adapter curbs engineered to match
existing openings for duct penetrations. With supply and return air gasketing and
wood nailer strips.
2. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors
Association’s guidelines.
23 70 00 – 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
2.3
A.
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNIT (RTU 4, 5, 6, 8, & 9)
SUMMARY
1. The contractor shall furnish and install package rooftop unit(s) as shown and
scheduled on the contract documents. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance
with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.
B.
MANUFACTURERS – Trane or approved equal
1. GENERAL
a.
Manufacturer of packaged unitary rooftop products shall have had a
minimum of five years of successful experience in the manufacture and
service support of the rooftop packages specified herein. Manufacturers with
less than five years of experience in the production of rooftop units of the
sizes and types specified shall not be acceptable.
C. GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION
1. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be heat pump packaged rooftop(s) as scheduled
on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be
based on AHRI Standards. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weather-tight casing with
compressor(s), air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, return-air
filters, supply motors, and unit controls.
2. Unit(s) shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A.
3. Units shall be convertible airflow design as manufactured.
D. UNIT CASING
1. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating
with removable access panels. Structural members shall be 18 gauge with access
doors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.
2. Unit’s cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance with
ASTM B117.
3. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be
double-hemmed and gasket-sealed.
4. Access Panels: Water- and air-tight panels with handles shall provide access to
filters, heating section, exhaust air fan section, supply air fan section, evaporator coil
section, and unit control section.
5. Unit’s base pan shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and return
openings for water integrity.
6. Insulation: Provide ½-inch thick fiberglass insulation with foil face on all exterior
panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream. All edges must be
captured so that there is no insulation exposed in the air stream.
7. Provide openings either on side of unit or through the base for power, control, and
condensate connections.
E.
AIR FILTERS
1. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the unit and shall be
accessible through access panels. One-inch thick glass fiber disposable media filters
shall be provided with the provisions within the unit for 2-inch thick filters to be fieldprovided and installed.
23 70 00 – 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
F.
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
FANS AND MOTORS
1. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet,
centrifugal type fan.
2. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent
lubrication fittings.
3. Provide units 5 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed, dynamically
balanced supply fans.
4. Provide units 6 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor
sheaves.
5. Outdoor and indoor fan shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal
overload protection.
6. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through
in the vertical discharge position.
7. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, and protectively coated with lubricating oil.
G. ELECTRIC HEATING SECTION
1. Provide heavy duty nickel chromium heating elements internally wired. Heater shall
have pilot duty or automatic reset line voltage limit controls and any circuit carrying
more than 48 amps shall have fuse protection in compliance with N.E.C.
2. Heater shall be factory installed internal to unit cabinet.
3. Heater shall be UL and CSA listed and approved and provide single point power
connection.
H. EVAPORATOR COIL
1. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil.
2. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory
pressure tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig.
3. Provide a removable, reversible, cleanable double sloped drain pan for base of
evaporator coil constructed of PVC.
I.
CONDENSER SECTION
1. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be
statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal
overload protection in a weather tight casing.
J.
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
1. Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm.
Integral centrifugal oil pump. Provide suction gas cooled motor with winding
temperature limits and compressor overloads.
2. Units shall have cooling capabilities down to 0°F as standard. For field-installed low
ambient accessory, the manufacturer shall provide a factory-authorized service
technician that will assure proper installation and operation.
3. Provide each unit with refrigerant circuit(s) factory-supplied completely piped with
liquid line filter-drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports.
4. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, discharge muffler, flow control check
valve, and electronic adaptive demand defrost control on all units.
23 70 00 – 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
K.
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
EXHAUST/RETURN SECTION
1. Provide 100% Modulating Powered exhaust capable of the scheduled full supply
CFM. Powered exhaust shall have separate point power connection and space
pressure controls. Pneumatic tubing shall be field installed by installing contractor to
the controlled space.
L.
OUTDOOR AIR SECTION
1. Provide economizer with dry bulb controls.
2. Provide adjustable minimum position control located in the economizer section of
the unit.
3. Provide spring return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown or
power interruption.
M. OPERATING CONTROLS
1. Provide microprocessor unit-mounted DDC control which when used with an
electronic zone sensor provides proportional integral room control. This UCM shall
perform all unit functions by making all heating, cooling, and ventilating decisions
through resident software logic.
2. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor
slugging by interrupting compressor operation.
3. Provide an anti-cycle timing and minimum on/off between stages timing in the
microprocessor.
4. Economizer Preferred Cooling – Compressor operation is integrated with
economizer cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is not adequate to
satisfy zone requirements. Compressors are enabled if space temperature is
recovering to cooling setpoint at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees per minute.
Compressor low ambient lockout overrides this function.
5. Provide all units with Factory mounted and wired BACnet interface for integration to
building BMS System.
6. Unit Sound Rating Number shall be maximum 89 dBA based on AHRI 270 and
AHRI 370.
N. ROOF CURB
1. Contractor shall provide seismically rated adapter curbs engineered to match
existing openings for duct penetrations. With supply and return air gasketing and
wood nailer strips.
2. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors
Association guidelines.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
A.
Furnish roof curb and turn over to General Contractor for installation.
B.
Furnish and install all accessories shipped with unit including filter frame, economizer and
thermostat.
C. Disable any internal control points that the building automation system (BAS) is controlling.
23 70 00 – 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
CENTRAL HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 70 00
D. Connect to cooling coil drip pan outlet. Provide 2" deep trap, discharge to roof.
END OF SECTION 23 70 00
23 70 00 – 12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Split System Heat Pumps
B.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners
C. Computer Room Cooling Units
1.2
REQUIRED SUBMITTAL DATA
A.
Split System Heat Pumps
B.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners
C. Computer Room Cooling Units
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Air handling units shall conform to the AMCA Standards Handbook Publication No. 99.
B.
Vibration isolation shall conform to the criteria set in the 2003 ASHRAE Applications
Handbook, Chapter 47.
C. Electrical panels shall be in accordance with the NEMA standards.
D. Packaged air conditioning units shall be UL listed, labeled and rated in accordance with
A.R.I. Standards.
E.
All units shall meet Washington State Energy Code performance requirements.
F.
Fan performance shall be per AMCA standard 210.
G. Fan noise limit tests shall be in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 “Reverberant
Method for Sound Testing of Fans”.
H. Fan drive guards shall be per WAC 296-24-205 “General Safety and Health Standards”,
State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries.
I.
AMCA 301 – Method for Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
J.
ANSI/AFBMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
K.
ANSI/UL 900 – Test Performance of Air Filter Units.
L.
ARI Standard 240
M. ARI 260 – Standard for Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment
N. ARI Standard 270
O. ARI 410 – Standard for Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
P.
ARI 430 – Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units.
23 80 00 – 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
Q. ARI Standard 590
R. ARI 1060 Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment
S.
ANSI/ASHRAE 15
T.
ASHRAE 68 – Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement
Procedure for Fans.
U. ASHRAE Standard 90.1
V.
ASME Section VIII
W. Washington State Energy Code Commercial Provisions, latest adopted version
X.
ETL
Y.
National Electrical Code
Z.
NEMA MG1 – Motors and Generators
AA. NFPA 90 A & B – Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems and Installation
of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
BB. OSHA
CC. SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
DD. UL 1995 – Heating and Cooling Equipment
1.4
RELATED WORK
A.
All portions of specification Division 1 apply to this work.
B.
All portions of specification Section 23 05 00 apply to this work.
C. Additional sections of the mechanical specifications may be required to provide a fully
functional system. Refer to the specifications index.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1
A.
SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP
1-1/2 to 4 Tons (AHU 3):
1. Outdoor unit:
a.
Provide an air-to-air electric heat pump (outdoor unit). Brass service valves
with refrigerant line fittings and service ports shall be located on exterior of
unit. Mounting legs shall be provided.
b.
Outdoor coil shall be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically
bonded to aluminum tubing with all joints brazed. Coil shall be protected by
a vinyl coated grille. Factory-installed coil refrigerant metering device shall
be mounted on unit liquid service valve.
23 80 00 – 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
Metering device internal components shall be removable for cleaning or
replacement.
Outdoor unit fan shall be propeller type, direct driven and arranged for
vertical air discharge. Fan motor shall be factory-lubricated and internally
protected.
Compressor shall be of the welded hermetic type with internal vibration
isolation. Compressor motor shall have both thermal and current sensitive
overload device and start assist device shall be standard on one phase units
if required. Compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater and have
internal high-pressure protection.
Controls and protective devices shall include a liquid line low pressure
switch, suction line accumulator and pressure relief device. An automatic
defrost control shall be included to accomplish defrosting (only if coil
saturated suction temperature indicates freezing temperatures) every
90 minutes for a period of not more than 10 minutes. Control wiring terminal
board shall be designed to match indoor (40AQ) unit terminal board and
accessory thermostat terminals for standardized point-to-point connectors.
Provide outdoor thermostat, emergency heat relay, solid state time guard,
liquid line filter drier, flare to compatible coupler, precharged and
preinsulated tubing packages.
2. Air handling unit:
a.
Provide heat pump fan section equipped with direct expansion cooling coil
and electric heater. Assembled unit shall operate properly in upflow position
and is to be installed with ductwork.
b.
Fan section enclosure shall be insulated and constructed of galvanized steel,
bonderized and finished with baked enamel. The multispeed fan motor shall
be factory lubricated, have internal overload protection and be resiliently
mounted. Fan motor assembly shall slide out for service. Reversible filter
rack shall have duct connection flanges and be equipped with permanent
type filter that slides out for maintenance.
c.
Cooling coil shall be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically
bonded to nonferrous tubing with all joints brazed. Coils shall have a factory
installed refrigerant metering device and be equipped with refrigerant line
fittings which permit mechanical connections. Provide coils with factoryinstalled pressure ports for testing and balancing. Coil casing shall be
insulated and constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with
baked enamel.
d.
Electric heater enclosure shall be insulated and have large front service
access door. Heating elements shall be sequenced on and off in 5-kw
increments. Heater shall be equipped with both thermal and current overload
devices and the required heating and cooling system controls, including
control circuit 24-volt transformer.
e.
Provide return air plenum.
2.2
A.
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (AHU 1 & 2 / ACU 1 & 2)
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
1. Approved manufacturer shall be Trane, with pre-approved alternates considered.
Manufacturers not pre-approved, must obtain pre-approval in writing from consulting
23 80 00 – 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
engineer prior to bid day. Alternates must comply with all performance and features
as called for in this specification. Job awarded on basis of specified equipment.
Alternate will be evaluated and considered after job is awarded.
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a.
Trane Performance Climate Change
B.
INDOOR MODULATE AIR HANDLER
C. General
1. Manufacturer to provide a full perimeter integral base frame for either ceiling
suspension of units or to support and raise all sections of the unit for proper
trapping. Base frame will either be bolted construction or welded construction.
Refer to schedule for base height and construction type. Contractor will be
responsible for providing a housekeeping pad when unit base frame is not of
sufficient height to properly trap unit. Unit base frames not constructed of
galvanized steel shall be chemically cleaned and coated with both a rustinhibiting primer and finished coat of rust-inhibiting enamel. Unit base height to
be included in total height required for proper trap height.
D. Unit Casing
1. Unit manufacturer shall ship unit in segments as specified by the contractor for
ease of installation in tight spaces. The entire air handler shall be constructed
of galvanized steel. Casing finished to meet ASTM B117 250-hour salt-spray
test. The removal of access panels or access doors shall not affect the structural
integrity of the unit. All removable panels shall be gasketed. All doors shall have
gasketing around full perimeter to prevent air leakage. Contractor shall be
responsible to provide connection flanges and all other framework that is
needed to properly support the unit.
2. Casing performance – Casing air leakage shall not exceed leak class 6 (CL =
6) per ASHRAE 111 at specified casing pressure, where maximum casing
leakage (cfm/100 ft2 of casing surface area) = CL × P0.65.
3. Air leakage shall be determined at 1.00 times maximum casing static pressure
up to 8 inches w.g. Specified air leakage shall be accomplished without the use
of caulk. Total estimated air leakage shall be reported for each unit in CFM, as
a percentage of supply air, and as an ASHRAE 111 Leakage Class.
4. Under 55°F supply air temperature and design conditions on the exterior of the
unit of 81°F dry bulb and 73°F wet bulb, condensation shall not form on the
casing exterior. The AHU manufacturer shall provide tested casing thermal
performance for the scheduled supply air temperature plotted on a
psychrometric chart. The design condition on the exterior of the unit shall also
be plotted on the chart. If tested casing thermal data is not available, AHU
manufacturer shall provide, in writing to the Engineer and Owner, a guarantee
against condensation forming on the unit exterior at the stated design conditions
above. The guarantee shall note that the AHU manufacturer will cover all
expenses associated with modifying units in the field should external
condensate form on them. In lieu of AHU manufacturer providing a written
guarantee, the installing contractor must provide additional external insulation
on AHU to prevent condensation.
23 80 00 – 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
5. Unit casing (wall/floor/roof panels and doors) shall be able to withstand up to
1.5 times design static pressure, or 8-inch w.g., whichever is less, and shall not
exceed 0.0042 per inch of panel span (L/240).
6. Unit casing panels shall be 2-inch double-wall construction, with solid
galvanized exterior and solid galvanized interior, to facilitate cleaning of unit
interior.
7. Unit casing panels (roof, walls, floor) and doors shall be provided with a
minimum thermal resistance (R-value) of 13 Hr*Ft2*°F/BTU.
8. Unit casing panels (roof, walls, and floor) and external structural frame members
shall be completely insulated filling the entire panel cavity in all directions so that
no voids exist. Panel insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A.
9. Casing panel inner liners must not extend to the exterior of the unit or contact
the exterior frame. A mid-span, no-through-metal, internal thermal break shall
be provided for all unit casing panels.
10. Access panels and/or access doors shall be provided in all sections to allow
easy access to drain pan, coil(s), motor, drive components and bearings for
cleaning, inspection, and maintenance.
E.
Access Doors
1. Access doors shall be 2-inch double-wall construction. Interior and exterior shall
be of the same construction as the interior and exterior wall panels.
2. All doors downstream of the cooling coil shall be provided with a thermal break
construction of door panel and door frame.
3. Gasketing shall be provided around the full perimeter of the doors to prevent air
leakage.
4. Door hardware shall be surface-mounted to prevent through-cabinet
penetrations that could likely weaken the casing leakage and thermal
performance.
5. Hinges shall be interchangeable with the door handle hardware to allow for
alternating door swing in the field to minimize access interference due to
unforeseen job site obstructions. Hinges shall be constructed of galvanized
steel.
6. All doors shall be a 60-inch high when sufficient unit height is available, or the
maximum height allowed by the unit height.
7. Multiple door handles shall be provided for each latching point of the door
necessary to maintain the specified air leakage integrity of the unit.
F.
Primary Drain Pans
1. All cooling coil sections shall be provided with an insulated, double-wall,
galvanized drain pan.
2. The drain pan shall be designed in accordance with ASHRAE 62.1 being of
sufficient size to collect all condensation produced from the coil and sloped in
two planes, pitched toward drain connections, promoting positive drainage to
eliminate stagnant water conditions when unit is installed level and trapped per
manufacturer's requirements. See Section 2.07, paragraph F through H for
specifications on intermediate drain pans between cooling coils.
3. The outlet shall be located at the lowest point of the pan and shall be sufficient
diameter to preclude drain pan overflow under any normally expected operating
condition.
23 80 00 – 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
4. Drain connections shall be of the same material as the primary drain pan and
shall extend a minimum 2½-inch beyond the base to ensure adequate room for
field piping of condensate traps.
5. The installing contractor is responsible to ensure the unit is installed level,
trapped in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, and visually
inspected to ensure proper drainage of condensate.
6. Coil support members inside the drain pan shall be of the same material as the
drain pan and coil casing.
7. If drain pans are required for heating coils, access sections, or mixing sections
they will be indicated in the plans.
G. Fans
1. Fan sections shall have a minimum of one hinged and latched access door
located on the drive side of the unit to allow inspection and maintenance of the
fan, motor, and drive components. Construct door(s) per Section 2.04.
2. Provide fans of type and class as specified on the schedule. Fan shafts shall be
solid steel, coated with a rust-inhibiting coating, and properly designed so that
fan shaft does not pass through first critical speed as unit comes up to rated
RPM. All fans shall be statically and dynamically tested by the manufacturer for
vibration and alignment as an assembly at the operating RPM to meet design
specifications. Fans that are selected with inverter balancing shall first be
dynamically balanced at design RPM. The fans then will be checked in the
factory from 25% to 100% of design RPM to insure they are operating within
vibration tolerance specifications, and that there are no resonant frequency
issues throughout this operating range. Inverter balancing that requires lockout
frequencies inputted into a variable frequency drive to in order to bypass
resonant frequencies shall not be acceptable. If supplied in this manner by the
unit manufacturer, the contractor will be responsible for rebalancing in the field
after unit installation. Fans selected with inverter balancing shall have a
maintenance free, circumferential conductive micro fiber shaft grounding ring
installed on the fan motor to discharge shaft currents to ground.
3. Belt-driven fans shall be provided with grease lubricated, self-aligning, and
antifriction bearings selected for L-50 200,000-hour average life per
ANSI/AFBMA Standard 9. Lubrication lines for both bearings shall be extended
to the drive side of the AHU and rigidly attached to support bracket with zerk
fittings. Lubrication lines shall be a clear, high-pressure, polymer to aid in visual
inspection. If extended lubrication lines are not provided, manufacturer shall
provide permanently lubricated bearing with engineering calculations for proof
of bearing life.
4. All fans, including direct drive plenum fans, shall be mounted on isolation bases.
Internally-mounted motor shall be on the same isolation base. Fan and motor
shall be internally isolated with spring isolators. A flexible connection shall be
installed between fan and unit casing to ensure complete isolation. Flexible
connection shall comply with NFPA 90A and UL 181 requirements. If fans and
motors are not internally isolated, then the entire unit shall be externally isolated
from the building, including supply and return duct work, piping, and electrical
connections. External isolation shall be furnished by the installing contractor in
order to avoid transmission of noise and vibration through the ductwork and
building structure.
23 80 00 – 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
H. Motors And Drives
1. All motors and drives shall be factory-installed and run tested. All motors shall
be installed on a slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension. Slide base shall
be designed to accept all motor sizes offered by the air-handler manufacturer
for that fan size to allow a motor change in the future, should airflow
requirements change. Fan sections without factory-installed motors shall have
motors field installed by the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for
all costs associated with installation of motor and drive, alignment of sheaves
and belts, run testing of the motor, and balancing of the assembly.
2. Motors shall meet or exceed all NEMA Standards Publication MG 1 – 2006
requirements and comply with NEMA Premium efficiency levels when
applicable. Motors shall comply with applicable requirements of NEC and shall
be UL Listed.
3. Fan motors shall be heavy duty, open drip-proof operable at 460 volts, 60Hz, 3phase. If applicable, motor efficiency shall meet or exceed NEMA Premium
efficiencies.
4. Belt driven fans shall use 4-pole, 1800 rpm, motors, NEMA B design, with Class
B insulation, capable to operate continuously at 104°F (40°C) without tripping
overloads.
5. V-Belt Drive shall be fixed pitch rated at 1.5 times the motor nameplate. Drives
20 hp and larger or any drives on units equipped with VFDs shall be fixed pitch.
6. Manufacturer shall provide for each belt driven fan a nameplate with the
following information to assist air balance contractor in start up and service
personnel in maintenance:
a.
Fan and motor sheave part number
b.
Fan and motor bushing part number
c.
Number of belts and belt part numbers
d.
Fan design RPM and motor HP
e.
Belt tension and deflection
f. Center distance between shafts
I. Coils
1. Coils section header end panel shall be removable to allow for removal and
replacement of coils without impacting the structural integrity of the unit.
2. Install coils such that headers and return bends are enclosed by unit casing to
ensure that if condensate forms on the header or return bends, it is captured by
the drain pan under the coil.
3. Coils shall be manufactured with plate fins to minimize water carryover and
maximize airside thermal efficiency. Fin tube holes shall have drawn and belled
collars to maintain consistent fin spacing to ensure performance and air
pressure drop across the coil as scheduled. Tubes shall be mechanically
expanded and bonded to fin collars for maximum thermal conductivity. Use of
soldering or tinning during the fin-to-tube bonding process is not acceptable due
to the inherent thermal stress and possible loss of bonding at that joint.
4. Construct coil casings of galvanized steel. End supports and tube sheets shall
have belled tube holes to minimize wear of the tube wall during thermal
expansion and contraction of the tube.
5. All coils shall be completely cleaned prior to installation into the air handling unit.
Complete fin bundle in direction of airflow shall be degreased and steam
23 80 00 – 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
cleaned to remove any lubricants used in the manufacturing of the fins, or dirt
that may have accumulated, in order to minimize the chance for water carryover.
6. When two or more cooling coils are stacked in the unit, an intermediate drain
pan shall be installed between each coil. The intermediate drain pan shall be
designed being of sufficient size to collect all condensation produced from the
coil and sloped to promote positive drainage to eliminate stagnant water
conditions. The intermediate drain pan shall be constructed of the same material
as the sections primary drain pan.
7. Intermediate drain pan shall include downspouts to direct condensate to the
primary drain pan. The intermediate drain pan outlet shall be located at the
lowest point of the pan and shall be sufficient diameter to preclude drain pan
overflow under any normally expected operating condition.
J.
Filters
1. Provide factory-fabricated filter section of the same construction and finish as
unit casings. Filter section shall have side access filter guides and access
door(s) extending the full height of the casing to facilitate filter removal.
Construct doors in accordance with Section 2.04. Provide fixed filter blockoffs
as required to prevent air bypass around filters. Blockoffs shall not need to be
removed during filter replacement. Filters to be of size, and quantity needed to
maximize filter face area of each particular unit size.
2. Filter type, MERV rating, and arrangement shall be provided as defined in
project plans and schedule
3. Manufacturer shall provide one set of startup filters.
K.
Dampers
1. Dampers shall be premium ultra low leak and located as indicated on the
schedule and plans. Blade arrangement (parallel or opposed) shall be provided
as indicated on the schedule and drawings. Dampers shall be Ruskin CD60
double-skin airfoil design or equivalent for minimal air leakage and pressure
drop. Leakage rate shall not exceed 3 CFM/square foot at one inch water gauge
complying with ASHRAE 90.1 maximum damper leakage and shall be AMCA
licensed for Class 1A. All leakage testing and pressure ratings shall be based
on AMCA Standard 500-D. Manufacturer shall submit brand and model of
damper(s) being furnished, if not Ruskin CD60.
L.
OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNITS
1. General Unit Description
a.
Provide self-contained, packaged, factory-assembled and pre-wired units
suitable for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressor(s), condensing
coil and fan(s), integral subcooling circuit(s), filter drier(s), and controls.
Provide expansion valve(s) and check valves for split system heat pump
unit(s).
b.
Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) [and Coefficient of
Performance (COP)] not less than prescribed by the equipment schedule.
2. Casing
a.
House components in 18 gauge zinc-coated galvanized steel frame and
panels with weather resistant, baked enamel finish. Unit’s surface shall be
tested 500 hours in salt spray test.
23 80 00 – 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
b.
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
Mount controls in weatherproof panel provided with removable panels and/or
access doors with quick opening fasteners.
3. Condenser Coils
a.
Coils: Microchannel-Parallel flow aluminum tubes that are mechanically
brazed to enhanced aluminum fins. Provide subcooling circuit(s). Factory
leak test under water to 450 psig, and vacuum dehydrate. Seal with holding
charge of nitrogen.
4. Fans And Motors
a.
Vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard
on discharge. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
b.
Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, with permanently lubricated
totally enclosed or open construction motors shall be provided and shall have
built in current and thermal overload protection. Motors shall be either sleeve
or ball bearing type.
5. Compressors
a.
Compressor(s): Provide direct-drive hermetic, reciprocating type
compressor(s) with centrifugal oil pump providing positive lubrication to
moving parts and automotive type pistons, rings to prevent gas leakage,
internal suction and discharge valves and crankcase heater. Motor shall be
suction gas-cooled with internal temperature and current sensitive motor
overloads. Internally isolated motors on springs. External high and low
pressure cutout devices shall be provided.
6. Controls
a.
Provide factory-wired condensing units with 24 volt control circuit with
internal fusing and control transformers, contactor pressure lugs and/or
terminal block for power wiring. Contractor to provide field installed unit
mounted disconnect switch. Units shall have single point power connections.
b.
Provide factory-wired units with 24-volt electro-mechanical control circuit
with control transformers, contactors pressure lugs or terminal block for
power wiring. Contractor to provide disconnect. Units shall have single point
power connection as standard. Field wiring of zone controls to be NEC Class
II.
1)
Provide factory installed evaporator defrost control to prevent
compressor slugging by interrupting compressor operation when low
evaporator coil temperatures are encountered.
2.3
A.
DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEMS
Summary:
1. The contractor shall furnish and install split system air conditioners as shown and
scheduled on the contract documents. The units shall be installed in accordance with
this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.
B.
Approved Manufacturers:
1. Trane, or approved equal
C. General Unit Description:
23 80 00 – 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
1. The air conditioner system shall be a ductless split system with Variable Speed
Inverter Compressor technology. The system shall consist of a wall mounted indoor
section with wired, wall mounted controller and a horizontal discharge, single phase
outdoor unit.
2. Unit(s) shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A in the field
per manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at 0°F (-18°C) ambient temperature
without additional low ambient controls (optional wind baffle may be required).
4. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of
100 feet indoor unit to outdoor unit.
5. System shall have a maximum refrigerant tubing length of 100 feet between indoor
and outdoor units without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil.
6. Outdoor units shall be pre-charged for a refrigerant line length of 70 feet.
7. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit
must be test run at the factory.
D. Indoor Unit Cabinet
1. The indoor unit cabinet shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied
mounting plate.
2. The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with front panel
access for filter.
3. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. Contained within the
unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan motor.
4. The unit in conjunction with the wired, wall mounted controller shall have a selfdiagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a
test run switch.
5. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen before shipment
from the factory.
E.
Condensate Pump
1. Manufacturer’s condensate pump sized for condensate production of scheduled
equipment
F.
Indoor Fan:
1. The evaporator fan (s) shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct
drive sirocco fan with a single motor.
2. The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with
permanently lubricated bearings.
3. The fans shall have multiple speed settings.
G. Vane:
1. There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a
horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution.
2. The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease downward air resistance for lower
noise levels, and shall close the outlet port when operation is stopped.
3. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow
movement.
H. Filter:
23 80 00 – 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
1. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter.
I.
Evaporator Coil:
1. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre-coated aluminum
strake fins on copper tubing.
2. The multi-angled heat exchanger shall have a modified fin shape that reduces air
resistance for a smoother, quieter airflow.
3. All tube joints shall be brazed with PhosCopper or silver alloy.
4. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.
5. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.
6. The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, coated with a finished
with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating
for corrosion protection. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.
J.
Outdoor Cabinet:
1. The fan grille shall be of ABS plastic.
K.
Condenser Section:
1. The L shaped condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum fins to
reduce debris build up.
2. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard.
3. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of linear expansion
valve (LEV) metering orifice. The LEV shall be control by a microprocessor controlled
step motor.
L.
Compressor:
1. The compressor shall be a DC rotary compressor with Variable Compressor Speed
Inverter Technology.
2. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed.
3. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load for significantly
increasing the efficiency of the system which results in vast energy savings.
4. To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal
amount of current shall be intermittently applied to the compressor motor to maintain
enough heat.
5. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch.
6. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.
M. Outdoor Fan:
1. Outdoor unit shall be furnished with an AC fan motor.
2. The fan motor shall be of aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor
bearings shall be permanently lubricated.
3. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and
dispelling it through the front.
4. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.
N. Controls:
1. The control system shall consist of two (2) microprocessors, one on each indoor and
outdoor unit.
23 80 00 – 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
2. Field wiring shall run directly from the indoor unit interconnected by a single nonpolar two-wire AWG-16 stranded cable to the wall mounted controller with no splices.
3. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after power
interruption. The system shall have self-diagnostics ability, including total hours of
compressor run time. Diagnostics codes for indoor and outdoor units shall be
displayed on the wired controller panel.
4. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of monitoring
return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing
commands from the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling
the outdoor unit.
2.4
A.
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (CRU 1, 2, & 3)
Summary:
1. The contractor shall furnish and install computer room cooling units as shown and
scheduled on the contract documents. The units shall be installed in accordance with
this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.
B.
Approved Manufacturers:
1. Liebert, or approved equal.
C. Frame
1. The frame shall be MIG welded, formed sheet metal. It shall be protected against
corrosion using the autophoretic coating process. The frame shall be capable of
being separated into three parts in the field to accommodate rigging through small
spaces.
D. Downflow Air Supply
1. The supply air shall exit from the bottom of the unit.
E.
Exterior Panels
1. The exterior panels shall be insulated with a minimum 1 in. (25mm), 1.5 lb. (0.68 kg)
density fiber insulation. The main front panel shall have captive ¼-turn fasteners.
F.
Filters
1. The filter chamber shall be located within the cabinet, and filters shall be removable
from the top of the unit. Filters shall be arranged in a V-bank configuration to
minimize air pressure drop.
2. Filters shall be deep pleated 4" filters with an ASHRAE 52.2 MERV8 rating (45%
ASHRAE 52.1).
G. Centrifugal Blower Section
1. The fans shall be the centrifugal type, double-width and double-inlet, and shall be
dynamically balanced as a completed assembly. The shaft shall be heavy duty steel
with self-aligning, permanently sealed, pillow block bearings with a minimum L3 life
of 200,000 hours. The fans shall draw air through the V-frame coil to ensure even
23 80 00 – 12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
air distribution and maximum coil performance. A static regain duct shall be factoryinstalled on the bottom of the blower.
H. Motor
1. The fan motor shall be mounted to an automatic, spring-tensioning base. The motor
shall be removable from the front of the cabinet.
2. The fan motor shall be Open Drip-Proof, Premium efficiency and shall meet NEMA
Premium standard.
I.
Dual Refrigeration System
1. Each unit shall include two (2) independent refrigeration circuits and shall include
hot gas mufflers (semi-hermetic compressors units only), liquid line filter dryers,
refrigerant sight glass with moisture indicator, externally equalized expansion valves,
and liquid line solenoid valves. Compressors shall be located outside the airstream
and shall be removable and serviceable from the front of the unit.
J.
Digital Scroll Compressor
1. The compressor shall be scroll-type with a variable capacity operation capability.
The compressor solenoid valve shall unload the compressor and allow for variable
capacity operation. The compressor shall be suction gas cooled motor, vibration
isolators, thermal overloads, automatic reset high-pressure switch with lockout after
three failures, rotalock service valves, pump down low pressure transducer, suction
line strainer and a maximum operating speed of 3500 rpm. Consult factory for 575V
availability.
K.
Evaporator Coil
1. The evaporator coil shall be A-frame design with offset orientation. It shall be
constructed of rifled copper tubes and aluminum fins. A stainless steel condensate
drain pan shall be provided.
L.
R-407C Refrigerant
1. The system shall be designed for use with R-407C refrigerant, which meets the EPA
Clean Air Act for phase-out of HCFC refrigerants.
M. CONTROLS
1. The unit shall be supplied with amicroprocessor-based with a 9" color touchscreen
display and shall be mounted in an ergonomic, aesthetically pleasing housing. The
display and housing shall be viewable while the front panel is open or closed. The
controls shall be menu-driven. The system shall display user menus for active
alarms, event log, graphic data, unit view/status overview (including the monitoring
of room conditions, operational status in percentage of each function, date and time),
total run hours, various sensors, display setup and service contacts. A password
shall be required to make system changes. Service menus shall include setpoints,
standby settings (lead/lag), timers/sleep mode, alarm setup, sensor calibration,
maintenance/wellness settings, options setup, system/network setup, auxiliary
boards and diagnostics/service mode.
N. Locking Disconnect Switch
23 80 00 – 13
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 18, 2015
DECENTRALIZED HVAC EQUIPMENT
SECTION 23 80 00
1. The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high-voltage section of the
electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the outside of the unit with the
door closed and shall prevent access to the high-voltage electrical components until
switched to the “Off” position.
O. Smoke Sensor
1. The smoke sensor shall immediately shut down the environmental control system
and activate the alarm system when activated. The smoke sensor shall be mounted
in the electrical panel with the sensing element in the return air compartment. The
smoke sensor is not intended to function as or replace any room smoke detection
system that may be required by local or national codes. The smoke sensor shall
include a supervision contact closure.
P.
Condensate Pump, Dual Float
1. The condensate pump shall have a minimum capacity of 145 GPH (548 l/h) at 20 ft.
(58 kPa) head. It shall be complete with integral dual-float switches, pump-and-motor
assembly and reservoir. The secondary float shall send a signal to the local alarm
and shall shut down the unit upon high water condition.
Q. Air-Cooled Systems
1. The indoor evaporator unit shall include refrigerant piping, with a factory holding
charge of nitrogen. The hot-gas and liquid lines shall be spun shut and shall include
a factory-installed Schrader valve. Field-relief of the Schrader valve shall indicate a
leak-free system.
R. Air-Cooled Condenser
1. The Liebert-manufactured outdoor air-cooled condenser shall be the low profile,
multiple direct drive, propeller fan type. The condenser shall balance the heat
rejection of the compressor. The condenser shall be constructed of aluminum and
contain a copper tube, aluminum fin coil arranged for horizontal air discharge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT AND HEAT PUMPS
A.
Furnish roof curb and turn over to General Contractor for installation.
B.
Furnish and install all accessories shipped with unit including filter frame, economizer and
thermostat.
C. Cap or plug gas connection at unit.
D. Connect to cooling coil drip pan outlet. Provide 2" deep trap, discharge to roof.
END OF SECTION 23 80 00
23 80 00 – 14
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 01 26
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Testing company shall be an independent company, separate from the contractor, sub
contractors, suppliers and others involved with the project.
EQUIPMENT AND DEVICE TESTS
A.
Perform all equipment and device testing after installation and prior to substantial
completion or owner occupancy, allowing enough time for corrective action of all
deficiencies. Applies to new panels, breakers, relocated transformers, motors and
devices including alternate photovoltaic energy equipment.(if alternate is accepted.)
B.
Review manufacturer's installation instruction and confirm that equipment is installed in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Prior to performing tests confirm that the equipment is clean and free of construction
debris and dust.
D.
Phase Relationship Tests: Check connections to all new and existing three-phase
equipment for proper phase relationship. Disconnect all devices which could be
damaged by the application of voltage or reversed phase sequence.
E.
Test the open/close or energize/de-energize operation of each switch, circuit breaker,
contactor and other item of electrical control with the systems fully energized and
operating. Each shall be tested three times. Test report shall include a list of
equipment tested and the signed initials of the electricians performing the test on a
device by device basis.
F.
Inspect and test entire electrical systems provided by this contract to verify equipment
and controls are correctly operating. Power system tests shall be performed 4 to 8
weeks after substantial completion, and at such time that the maximum possible load is
connected (usually highest available occupancy at mid day.)
G.
Load Balance Tests: Checks all switchboards and panelboards for proper load
balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring
unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. Check shall consist of clamp on
ampere readings on each phase for a period of 15 minutes, of each panelboard.
Include phase realignment of 1% of the project's 3 pole circuit breakers in bid. Provide
revised panel board schedules per Section 262416.
26 01 26-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 01 26
H.
Motor Tests: Check all motors and measure actual load current. Submit tabulation of
motor currents for all motors 1 HP or more after the HVAC system has been balanced.
I.
Transformer Taps: Connect all transformers at "Normal" tap. Measure secondary
voltages at all new and existing transformers. Forward a list to engineer including
service switchboard voltmeter reading at the time of the test for evaluation. Reconnect
taps as subsequently directed.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
General
1.
B.
Test Report
1.
1.5
Provide submittal information in accordance with Division 1 - General
Requirements, Section 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical and
requirements described in this section.
The contractor shall maintain a written record of all tests and shall assemble and
certify a final test report indicating all equipment tested and the results found for
each. Any system, material, or workmanship which is found to have abnormal
operation, shall be specifically identified.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The contractor shall submit proof of company qualifications and personnel
qualifications. Include resumes of recent experience (within the last three years) for
the firm, engineers and technicians that will be assigned to the project. Include
references with current phone numbers in the resume. The testing company shall
have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials, devices, installations,
and systems for a minimum of five years.
B.
Test Equipment:
The contractor] shall have a calibration program, and test
instruments used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS. Provide a
complete list of test equipment utilized in all of the testing. Include manufacturer,
model number, current calibration date, next calibration date and age of equipment.
C.
Testing, inspection, calibration and adjustments shall be performed by an engineering
technician, certified by NETA or the National Institute in Engineering Technologies with
a minimum of five years experience testing, calibrating electrical distribution and
generation equipment, systems, and devices.
1.6
A.
CLOSEOUT
Operational and Maintenance Manuals
1.
2.
3.
All approved submittal information
Full test report in the O&M Manual
Completed form for each item of equipment tested
26 01 26-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 01 26
B.
One electronic version of the test report on CD and in the latest version of Microsoft
Word.
C.
Schedule of recommended testing frequency for all equipment tested under this
contract
D.
Testing company test stamps or stickers on all tested equipment. Indicate testing
company name, testing date and expiration date.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
TEST EQUIPMENT
The contractor shall provide all apparatus and material required for testing. The
contractor] shall use installation tools and test equipment which are designed for the
specific task and shall use this equipment per the manufacturer's instructions. All test
equipment shall have current calibration certification by a third party calibration
laboratory, and shall have a signed and dated calibration sticker affixed to the device.
Calibration shall be traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and be less than 6
months since last calibration. Defective test equipment and installation tools shall not
be used. Installation tools such as torque wrenches shall be calibration certified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
The contractor shall perform acceptance tests and inspections. Test methods,
procedures, and test values shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with
NETA ATS, the manufacturer's recommendations, and as required by each applicable
specification section. Equipment shall be placed in service only after completion of
required tests and evaluation of the test results has been completed. The following
testing shall be performed:
1.
2.
3.2
A.
Section 26 3100
Section 26 27 26
Photovoltaic Energy Equipment
Wiring Devices
PROJECT DOCUMENTS
Deliver applicable project documents to testing company two weeks prior to testing. As
a minimum include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Division 26 Specification
Electrical Floor Plans showing equipment to be tested.
Electrical One Line Diagrams
Submittals of Manufacturers Data and Shop Drawings including engineers review
letter of all systems to be tested.
26 01 26-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.3
A.
3.4
ACCEPTANCE TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 01 26
SCHEDULE
Perform all testing after installation and before energizing. All primary systems shall
pass tests prior to placing in service. Notify Architect 10 working days prior to
performance of any test.
TEST REPORTS
A.
The contractor shall prepare test reports including description of project, description of
equipment tested, description of test, test results, conclusions and recommendations,
retesting results and list of test equipment used and calibration date.
B.
One copy of each test report shall be delivered directly to the electrical engineer and
Owner within 7 calendar days of the test.
C.
Insert a copy of each test report in the operation and maintenance manuals.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
3.8
A.
RETESTING
Any fault in material or in any part of the installation revealed by these tests shall be
investigated, replaced or repaired by the Contractor and the same test repeated at
Contractor's expense until no fault appears.
LABELS
Upon completion of the tests, a label shall be attached to all serviced devices. These
labels shall indicate date serviced and the testing company.
OBSERVATIONS BY ENGINEER
Contractor shall remove and replace covers of electrical equipment, open manholes
and remove/replace ceiling tiles to permit engineer to observe equipment and wiring
provided. For manholes: Furnish OSHA safety compliant equipment and personnel,
including ventilation, safety harness, ladder and flashlight.
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a system or device provided under this contract does not operate per manufacturers
specifications contractor shall provide qualified men with tools and test equipment to
find and repair problem at contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 26 01 26
26 01 26-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes general electrical requirements for all Division 26 work and is
supplemental and in addition to the requirements of Division 1.
B.
It is the intention of this Division of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings to
describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory
and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary
appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system. Provide all materials,
appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings,
but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational installation of all
electrical systems shown on the contract drawings or described herein. Connect
equipment and devices furnished and installed under other Divisions of this
specification (or the Owner) under this Division.
C.
Workmanship shall be of the best quality and competent and experienced electricians
shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced
foreman.
D.
The drawings and specifications are complimentary and what is called for (or shown) in
either is required to be provided as if called for in both.
E.
See Division 1 for sequence of work.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS
See all other specifications for other work which includes but is not limited to:
Communications
Conveying Systems
Cutting and Patching
Door Hardware
Electronic Safety and Security
Equipment Wiring
Fire Protection
Mechanical Control Wiring
Mechanical Equipment
Painting, Refinishing and Finishes
Temporary Power
CODES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES
The following codes and standards are referenced in the Division 26 specifications.
Perform all work and provide materials and equipment in accordance with the latest
referenced codes and standards of the following organizations:
26 05 00-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
B.
Install the electrical systems based on the following:
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code as adopted and
amended by the Local Jurisdiction.
IBC
International Building Code as adopted
and amended by the Local Jurisdiction.
C.
The referenced codes establish a minimum level of requirements. Where provision of
the various codes conflict with each other, the more stringent provision shall govern. If
any conflict occurs between referenced codes and this specification, the codes are to
govern. Compliance with code requirements shall not be construed as relieving the
Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications
which may be in excess of requirements of the governing codes and rules and not
contrary to same.
D.
Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances
and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work by the
inspectors and give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work with that of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work on
the project. Examine all drawings and specifications of other trades for construction
details and coordination. Make every reasonable effort to provide timely notice of work
affecting other trades to prevent conflicts or interference as to space requirements,
dimensions, openings, block-outs, sleeving or other matters which will cause delays or
necessitate work-around methods.
B.
Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections
furnished under other divisions of the specification and by the Owner. Provide all
wiring in accordance with specific equipment requirements. Immediately advise the
Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price.
C.
Special attention is called to the following items.
installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordinate all conflicts prior to
Door swings such that switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door.
Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment
so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and
equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures
and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
Recessing and concealing electrical materials in CMU walls, concrete
construction and precast construction.
26 05 00-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
5.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
At each switchboard, panelboard and motor control center location the
Contractor shall monitor the work of all trades to assure that the space and
clearance requirements of code are met.
D.
Furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and
connections and all other materials required for the electrical systems shown or noted
in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational and fully tested upon
completion of the project. Raceways, boxes and ground connections are shown
diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and approximate location.
The layout does not necessarily show the total number of raceways or boxes for the
circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated runs intended to show the actual
routing of the raceways.
E.
The horsepower of motors and apparatus wattage's shown on the drawings are
estimated requirements of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this contract.
Provide overload elements to suit actual equipment nameplate current. Advise
Architect of any equipment changes or substitutions affecting electrical systems.
F.
Consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and location of all electrical
equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings. Make any minor changes
(less than 6'-6" horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices,
wiring, etc., from those shown on the drawings without extra charge, where
coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough-in.
G.
Provide inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and/or raceways as
required. Coordinate the installation thereof with other trades.
H.
The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing
required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
WARRANTY
Refer to General Conditions of the Contract.
CORRECTION OF WORK
Within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the work, the Contractor
shall correct any work found to be not in conformance with the Contract Documents
promptly after written notice from the owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously
given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall
survive acceptance of the work under this Contract and termination of the Contract.
The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.
ITEMIZED SCHEDULE OF COSTS
Complete the Schedule of Values included at the end of this section. This schedule
shall be adhered to for the electrical contractor to facilitate analysis and approval of the
monthly progress billings. Refer to the Supplementary Conditions of General Contract
26 05 00-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
and Division 1 - General Requirements for details, and conform thereto. Provide a
copy directly to Sparling.
1.8
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submittals and Shop Drawings: Schedule so as not to delay construction schedule
and no later than 60 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with
index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cuts.
Allow two weeks for review for each submittal and resubmittal. Incomplete submittals
and shop drawings which do not comply with these requirements will be returned for
correction, revision and resubmittal. See General Conditions for format, quantity, etc.
B.
Submit in a three ring binder with hardboard covers. Submittals shall show:
1.
Indicate listing by UL or other approved testing agency.
2.
Highlight with yellow or blue marker adequate information to demonstrate
materials being submitted fully comply with contract documents.
3.
Review and check all material prior to submittal and stamp "Reviewed and
Approved".
C.
Shop drawings shall show:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
The Contractor agrees:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
Ratings of items and systems.
How the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected,
function together and how they will be installed on the project.
System layout floor plans with complete device layout, point-to-point wiring
connection between all components of the system, wire sizes and color coding.
Coordinate with other division shop drawings and submittals. Identify interface
points and indicate method of connection.
Submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders.
The purpose of submittals and shop drawings by the Contractor is to
demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept.
Submittals demonstrate equipment and material Contractor intends to furnish
and install and indicate detailing fabrication and installation methods Contractor
intends to use.
To accept all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this
Division of the specifications meet, in full, all requirements of the contract
documents.
To pay for Engineers review cost of submittal review beyond one resubmittal.
The Engineer's review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the
project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents.
Corrections or comments made during this review do not relieve contractor from
compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Contractor is
responsible for: Dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site;
fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that
of all other trades; performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
26 05 00-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
F.
1.9
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
Submittals and shop drawings are required per the submittals schedule at the end of
this Section.
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
A.
Coordinate with close-out provisions in Division 01 - General Requirements.
B.
Request For Final Punchlist
1.
2.
To request a final electrical punch list, forward a letter to Sparling, Inc. stating;
"The electrical work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are
complete, items a. - n. in the Punchlist Procure paragraph in Section 260500 Common Work Results For Electrical are complete and the project is ready for
final punch list observation."
Project Punchlist Procedure: Perform the following procedures for project
closeout of electrical portions of work.
a.
Perform testing, tests and documentation per Section 260126 Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems.
b.
Provide engraved nameplates on electrical equipment.
c.
Refinish electrical equipment finishes which are damaged.
d.
Clean light fixtures per Section 260500 - Common Work Results For
Electrical.
e.
Color code junction boxes per Section 260533 - Raceways and Boxes For
Electrical Systems.
f.
Provide spare fuses and cabinet per Section 262813 - Fuses.
g.
Insert word processed (typed) Panel Schedules in all new and existing
panelboards with actual "as-built" circuit descriptions.
h.
Number all circuit breakers.
i.
Obtain final electrical permit inspection. Include copies in O & M manual.
j.
Provide written warranty in O & M per the General Conditions of the
Contract.
k.
Furnish Record Drawings per this section. Obtain signature on Job
Completion Form.
l.
Furnish O & M Manuals per this section. Obtain signature on Job
Completion Form.
m. Give instruction periods to owner's personnel per this section. Obtain
signature on Job Completion Form.
n.
To request final acceptance of project, fill out Job Completion Form in this
section and forward to Sparling. Note: If inspectors have not signed form,
a copy of signed-off permits will suffice.
o.
Include with Job Completion Form, a copy of the final punch list with the
word "DONE", and the date and Contractor's initials after each item on the
list.
1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A.
Provide O&M manuals required in Division 01 - General Requirements plus one
manual for Sparling for all equipment furnished under Division 26 - Electrical of the
specifications. Submit a preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover, 60
26 05 00-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. Deliver final bound
corrected copies as noted in Division 1 - General Requirements plus a copy to Sparling
20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and
forward a copy of the receipt to the Engineer with the Job Completion Form.
B.
The information included must be the exact equipment installed. Where sheets show
the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly
and clearly identified on such sheets.
C.
These O&M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain
all systems and equipment provided in the project. Present and arrange information in
a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel. The information
provided shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc.
Description of system configuration and operation including component
identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawings(s) may be
required for this purpose.
Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate.
Manufacturer's recommended operation instructions.
Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data including frequency.
Complete parts list including reordering information, recommended spares and
anticipated useful life (if appropriate). Parts lists shall give full ordering
information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or
renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not
acceptable.
Shop drawings.
Wiring diagrams.
Signal equipment submittals shall contain step-by-step circuit description
information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment
operation in each mode of operation.
A complete list of local (nearest) manufacturer representative and distributor
contacts for each type of equipment and manufacturer. Include name, company,
address, phone, fax, e-mail address, and web site.
D.
Furnish complete wiring diagrams for each system for the specific system installed
under the contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable unless revised to
indicate the exact field installation.
E.
Group the information contained in the manuals in an orderly arrangement by
specification index. Provide a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories
with identifying tabs. Bind the completed manuals with hard board covers not
exceeding 5" thick. (Provide two or more volumes if required.) Signal and
communication systems shall be in separate volumes. Imprint the covers with the
name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Contractor and year of
completion. Imprint the back edge with the name of the job, Owner and year of
completion. Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with
screw post binding.
26 05 00-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
1.11 INSTRUCTION PERIODS
A.
After substantial completion of the work and 20 days after the O&M manuals have
been delivered to the owner and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the
Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction; demonstrate the electrical systems and instruct the
Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled
instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be
superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers
representatives when so specified. When more than one training session is specified,
the second session shall be 30 to 90 days after the first as agreed to by the Owner.
B.
Include in each instruction session an overview of the system, presentation of
information in maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings. Conduct
tours of the building areas with explanations of maintenance requirements, access
methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, equipment cleaning procedures and
adjustment locations.
C.
Include the following scheduled instruction periods:
1.
Power Distribution System
2.
Lighting Control & Dimming System
3.
Power Generation Equipment & Transfer
Switches
4
Static Uninterruptible Power Supply
5
Transient Voltage Suppression System(s)
D.
1st Session
2nd Session
4 hours
4 hours
4 hours
4 hours
4 hours
4 hours
4 hours
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
Factory trained suppliers representatives shall provide instruction for lighting control,
static uninterruptible power supply and transient voltage suppression system(s).
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept
readily available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this
purpose alone.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Mark record prints with red erasable pencil. Mark the set to show the actual
installation where the installation varies substantially from the work as originally
shown.
Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underslab
raceways and stub-outs.
Note changes of directions and locations, by dimensions and elevations, as
utilities are actually installed.
Include addenda items and revisions made during construction.
Erase conditions not constructed or "X-out" and annotate "not constructed" to
clearly convey the actual "as constructed" condition.
Organize record drawings sheets in manageable sets, bind and print suitable
titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.
Transmit the record drawing set to the Architect at the completion of the work.
26 05 00-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
1.13 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST
A.
Submit to the Architect, with a copy to the Sparling Engineer, a Sparling Job
Completion Form (form attached in this section) properly filled out prior to the time final
acceptance of the electrical work is requested.
1.14 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A.
When the following abbreviations and definitions are used in relation to the work for
Division 16 they shall have the following meanings:
Item
Meaning
AHJ
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Boxes
Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes.
Code
All applicable codes currently enforced at project location.
Compression
Compressed using a leverage powered (hydraulic or
equivalent) crimping tool.
Connection
All materials and labor required for equipment to be fully
operational.
Exterior Location
Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the building
weather protective membrane.
Fully Operational
Tested, approved, and operating to the satisfaction of the
AHJ, manufacturer and contract documents.
Furnish
Deliver to the jobsite
Install
To enter permanently into the project and make fully
operational.
Kcml
Thousand circular mils (formerly MCM).
Mfr.
Manufacturer.
NEC
National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association,
Publication #70.
Noted
Shown or specified in the contract documents.
Provide
Furnish and install.
Required
As required by code, AHJ, contract documents, or
manufacturer for the particular installation to be fully
operational.
Shown
As indicated on the drawings or details.
Wiring
Raceway, conductors and connections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All materials and equipment installed shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless
otherwise permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Inspector).
B.
All materials to be new, free from defects and not less than quality herein specified.
Materials shall be designated to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the
environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed.
26 05 00-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
C.
Each type of materials furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the
manufacturer's latest standard design.
D.
All materials, equipment and systems furnished that include provisions for storing,
displaying, reporting, interfacing, inputting, or functioning using date specific
information shall perform properly in all respects regardless of the century. Any
interface to other new or existing materials, equipment or systems shall function
properly and shall be century compliant, both in regards to information sent and
received.
2.2
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A.
No Substitute:
Where a specified product is indicated "no substitute", it is the intent of this specification to
require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation or as specifically
requested by the owner. To this end certain materials and systems no substitution will be
allowed.
B.
Prior to Bid Opening:
Acceptance of products other than those specified will be issued by addendum to the bid
documents only after the following requirements are met and the proposed listed material is
determined to meet or exceed the requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Requests for listing to be original material, clearly indicating the product fully
complies with contract documents and be neatly marked with yellow felt tip
marker to clearly define and describe the product for which listing is requested.
Include certified laboratory test report for lighting fixtures.
Samples shall be submitted if requested.
Requests shall be received 10 days prior to bid opening.
Requests containing insufficient information to confirm compliance with contract
documents will not be considered.
C.
After Award of Contract:
Substitution of products will be considered after award of contract only under the following
conditions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
The Contractor shall have placed orders for specified materials promptly after
contract is awarded and the specified products can not be delivered to the
project to meet the Owner's construction schedule.
The reason for the unavailability is beyond the Contractor's control, i.e., due to
strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacturer, acts of God.
The specified product is no longer manufactured.
There is compelling economic advantage to the Owner.
In all cases, should a substituted material result in requiring electrical system or
building modifications; the Contractor alone shall pay all costs to provide these
modifications including all costs to the Engineer and Architect for redesign, and
updating of record drawings required to accommodate the required modifications.
26 05 00-9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.3
A.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
NAMEPLATES
Provide nameplates per Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations,
using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including
theft. Handle all equipment carefully to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and
scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged equipment.
B.
Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, undercover in a
weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain
temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instruction.
3.2
CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A.
Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting.
Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only
the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete
saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools.
B.
All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must
be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by
skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
FIRESTOPPING
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to
maintain fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 7 section "Firestopping".
PAINTING
Items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or
installation shall be refinished with touchup paint selected to match installed equipment
finish.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by
owner, provide complete all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment
and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully
operational upon completion of the project. Provide disconnect switch as required by
code whenever an equipment connection is shown on the drawings.
26 05 00-10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
B.
3.6
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
Investigate existing equipment to be relocated and provide new connections as
required.
HOUSEKEEPING PADS
A.
Provide steel reinforced concrete housekeeping pad under each floor mounted
switchboard, transformer, motor control center, generator and/or other free standing
electrical equipment. Size 4" greater (horizontal minimum) than base of equipment
mounted thereon. Minimum height 3-1/2". Use 3000-psi (20.7-Mpa), 28 day
compressive strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete". Chamfer edges and finish smooth with all blockouts square
and plumb.
B.
When housekeeping pad is poured on previously poured concrete or is for engine or
motor driven equipment, the pad shall be reinforced (4# rebar, 12" o.c., both ways) and
the rebar shall be tied to the existing floor via #4 rebar epoxy grouted into the existing
concrete on 18" centers or other acceptable means. The existing slab shall be
thoroughly cleaned and prepared for the pad just before the pour.
3.7
A.
CLEAN UP
Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by
his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate
hazard to the public, other workmen, the building or the Owner's employees. Before
acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting
fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster,
mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed
and new finish equal to the original applied.
1.
2.
3.8
A.
Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and
mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent, high pressure sodium, metal halide,
and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.
TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION
Demonstrate that all electrical equipment operates as specified and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Perform tests in the presence of the Architect, Owner or
Engineer. Provide all instruments, manufacturer's operating instructions and personnel
required to conduct the tests. Repair or replace any electrical equipment that fails to
operate as specified and or in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
26 05 00-11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
SPARLING ELECTRICAL JOB COMPLETION FORM
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT
LOCATION:
DATE:
A.
Electrical Inspectors Final Acceptance (Copy of certificate attached.)
B.
Name
Agency
Date
Fire Marshal's Final Acceptance of Fire Alarm System (Copy of certificate
attached.)
C.
1.
2.
4.
5.
6.
D.
E.
F.
Name
Agency
The following systems have been
representative.
Power
Distribution
System
Owner's Rep.
Lighting
Control
System
Owner's Rep
Owner's Rep
Static Uninterruptible
Power Supply
Owner's Rep
Transient
Voltage
Suppression
System(s)
Owner's Rep
Transient
Voltage
Suppression
System(s)
Transmitted
previously to
Record Drawings
Attache
d
Transmitted
previously to
O & M Manuals
Attache Transmitted previously to
d
Test
Reports
Attache Transmitted previously to
d
demonstrated
Date
to Owner's
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
Date
26 05 00-12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
G.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
The work is complete in accordance with contract documents and
authorized changes except for
at
on
and the architect/engineer's representative is requested to meet with
Time
Supervisor of Electrical Work
Date
26 05 00-13
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
Sparling Schedule of Values
Description of Work
Utility Services (power, telephone and cable TV) - Labor & Materials
Site Rough-in (ltg., pole bases, power & systems) - Labor and Materials
Distribution Feeders Rough-in - Labor & Materials
Distribution Feeders Conductors and Terminations - Labor & Materials
Branch Circuit (lighting, receptacles, misc.) Rough-in - Material and
Labor
Branch Circuit Conductors and Terminations - Material and Labor
Switchgear, Panelboards, Transformers, Starters, Disconnects - Material
Switchgear, Panelboards, Transformers, Starters, Disconnects - Labor
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression - Material
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression - Labor
Lighting - Material
Lighting Exterior (installation & checkout) - Labor
Lighting Interior (installation, trimout) - Labor
Devices (switches, receptacles, equip. connections) - Labor & Materials
Mechanical Power Connections (starter & disconnects) - Labor
Low Voltage Lighting Controls - Labor & Materials
Testing, Demonstration (AHJ approvals)
Training
Close Out (Record Drawings, O&M, etc.) - Materials & Labor
TOTAL DIVISION 16
26 05 00-14
Amount
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 00
SPARLING SUBMITTAL LIST
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
260519
260526
260529
260533
260533.10
260533.20
260543
260544
260553
260923
260943
262200
262413
262416
262726
262813
262816
262913
264313
COPPER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS
FLOOR OUTLET DEVICES POKE THRU
ELECTRICAL SITE WORK
UTILITY SUPPORT STRUCTURES
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SWITCHBOARDS
PANELBOARDS
WIRING DEVICES
FUSES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
INTERIOR LIGHTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
265100
265600
SUBMIT
RECEIVE
DATE
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
26 05 00-15
STATU
S
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
EXISTING SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 and Division 02 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
RELATED WORK
Same as in Section 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
Reference documents including record drawings and "as built’s of existing systems are
included with the construction documents. The contractor shall asses the accuracy of
these documents during pre-bid walk through and adjust his bid to accommodate
discrepancies between the documents and actual conditions.
INDICATED EXISTING SYSTEMS
A.
The electrical drawings show portions of the existing electrical systems which are to
remain, be removed or be modified as a part of the Contractor's work. The indicated
information is derived from record drawings and other data obtained from or with the
permission of the owner. Where indicated, concealed systems are also derived from
record drawings and the Engineer's best judgment of the configuration.
B.
The Contractor shall inspect the existing installation prior to bidding and shall judge the
work required. Inspection shall include areas within and adjacent to the work of any
discipline or trade performing work for the contract.
C.
The complete extent of the existing systems could not be verified during creation of the
construction documents. Unless the contractor's inspection of the existing system
determines a greater amount, the contractor shall assume there is 20% more existing
electrical systems than what is indicated on the contract drawings.
1.5
A.
POWER OUTAGES
This facility will be in operation 24 hours a day seven days a week during the
construction work; therefore it is required that the Contractor fully schedule electrical
system(s) outages with the owner. Contractor shall work closely with Owners'
Representative to assure the Owner fully understands the extent of each outage.
Owner maintains the right to limit the extent and length of any given outage. Assume
all outages to Electrical systems(s) in Owner occupied areas will require premium time
and that temporary electrical work may be required to limit the duration of outages.
260510 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
EXISTING SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 10
B.
Cutovers must make alternative arrangements to deliver power to the load at all times
C.
Submit a written request for a power outage at least one week in advance identifying
the areas and systems that will be affected, time and duration of the power outage.
The Contractor shall receive written authorization to proceed with the outage and shall
re-notify the Owner verbally at least one hour prior to the outage and also notify the
Owner when the outage is completed.
D.
Unscheduled Outages: In the event that the Contractor's work causes or contributes to
an electrical system(s) outage (or other system fault), the Contractor is responsible for
immediately correcting the problem. Included (as examples) shall be any premium
time required to stay on the job site until problem is corrected and air freight for parts
not locally available. Any damage resulting from performance of work under this
contract shall be repaired to assure continuing facility operation and integrity, at no
increase in contract cost.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
PREMIUM TIME
Premium time shall be included in the Base Bid for electrical system(s) outages and for
other work as required by the schedule, as shown on the drawings and as noted in
other Divisions of the Specifications.
EXISTING STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS
Existing floor slabs are post tensioned concrete slabs. Contractor shall penetrate
floors by core drilling only. Extreme caution is required to avoid cutting post tensioned
cables. X-ray of floor shall be performed prior to selecting location of cores and
anchors for electrical equipment. Cores and anchors shall be kept 2" minimum away
from the post tensioning cables.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
EXISTING MATERIALS
All materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner.
EXISTING MATERIALS TO BE REINSTALLED
Existing materials and equipment (except interior, undamaged raceways) that are
removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus shall not be reinstalled as a part of
the new systems unless specifically noted or authorized in writing by the owner.
Forward a copy of the authorization to the Engineer. The requirements of the
specifications (i.e., condition, installation, testing, etc.) shall apply as if the materials
were new, furnished by the Contractor.
260510 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.3
EXISTING SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 10
EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE REINSTALLED
A.
In coordination with the Architect, these materials shall be made available for his
inspection and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected
for retention shall be turned over to the Owner. These items shall be delivered to a
location on the premises selected by the Owner. Take reasonable care to avoid
damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement, he shall
purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement material of like kind and quantity.
B.
All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be legally disposed
of by the Contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which electrical work is to be
installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of electrical work.
Do not proceed with work until deficiencies or detrimental conditions have been
corrected. Report deficiencies or detrimental conditions of existing electrical work
which might be unsuitable to connect with or receive other work. Failure to so report
shall constitute acceptance of other work as being fit and proper for the reception of
electrical work.
B.
Field trace all existing circuitry affected by the project to determine:
1.
Source of supply or information collection point within the project area
2.
Load or termination within the project area
3.
Load or termination outside the project area, but supplied from or connected to
equipment within the project area
4.
Loads supplied from and located outside of the project area, but have circuitry
within the project area.
3.2
REMOVAL
A.
All removal work required under this contract is not shown on the electrical drawings.
Refer to work of other divisions for contract work that may affect existing electrical
systems. Coordinate work between trades prior to bid.
B.
Switchboards, panelboards, signaling and communication systems, other electrical
equipment free standing or surface mounted, raceway (exposed) and conductors;
which are not presently in service or will not be in service as a result of this contract
shall be removed.
C.
Contractor shall remove all floor, wall or ceiling mounted outlet devices in the
"Removal" or "Demolition Area" indicated on the drawing, even if the equipment/or
device is not individually shown on the project drawings. Unused flush mounted
devices, outlet and other boxes in finished areas shall be removed from wall and the
remaining hole patched to match adjacent wall surfaces.
260510 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
EXISTING SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 10
D.
Unused raceways and wire shall be removed back to source if accessible, otherwise
cut flush at ceiling, floor or wall and fill with grout.
E.
If Contractor questions whether a particular device is to be removed notify the Architect
noting type and location of device. If so directed the Contractor shall maintain the
existing device in service without any change in contract price.
F.
Contractor shall divert all electrical demolition materials including, but not limited to
copper and aluminum cabling, fixture ballasts and lamps, enclosures, raceways and
bus ducts, to either a local recycling station or to the on-site recycling station as
provided by the General Contractor or Owner.
3.3
EXISTING SYSTEMS MAINTAINED
A.
Maintain existing systems not identified for demolition. Maintaining existing systems
includes relocating the systems to coordinate with work of this contract, when work of
this contract cannot be done while the existing system is in its present location.
B.
Any existing wiring serving devices to remain in service and which may be affected by
work performed under this contract shall be rerouted to maintain circuit continuity.
Contractor shall assume the risk of maintaining existing systems, except relocation of
wiring of #2 AWG and above shall be considered an additional cost if not shown to be
relocated. If such wiring is found the Contractor shall notify Architect and owner of
wiring location, reason it must be removed and cost of relocation and receive the
Owner's approval before proceeding with the work.
C.
Examine drawings of all disciplines to determine where work of other trades will or is
likely to require relocation of existing systems. Remove and relocate electrical
equipment in the way of work of other trades. Exact relocation requirement of existing
systems to remain to be based on detailed coordination with other trades. Contractor
to provide proposed locations of relocated devices to owner for approval prior to
commencement of work.
D.
Relocation of any system shall be permanent.
E.
Re-route existing circuits that are affected as a result of this contract that serve devices
to remain in service.
1.
Power Circuits (Including removal or relocation of existing panelboards).
a.
Prior to demolition work trace out and identify each branch circuit and
feeder circuit that serves loads in occupied areas.
b.
Provide temporary wiring, schedule outage and reconnect loads to
temporary wiring.
c.
Provide new wiring in new location.
d.
Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and connect loads to new
wiring. Remove temporary wiring.
e.
Outage for each circuit shall not be more than 20 minutes.
2.
Signal and Communication Systems
a.
Prior to demolition trace out and identify device and systems being served.
260510 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.4
EXISTING SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 10
Provide temporary wiring to maintain operation of system throughout
facility.
Schedule outage and connect to temporary wiring and test system.
Provide new wiring on new location.
Schedule outage, disconnect temporary wiring, and reconnect to new
wiring. Remove temporary wiring.
Outage for each system shall not be more than 20 minutes.
EXISTING SYSTEMS UPGRADED
A.
Provide new raceway support system for all existing raceways that are to be
maintained in the project area in accordance with Section 260533 - Raceways and
Boxes for Electrical Systems.
B.
Provide new earthquake support system for all existing fixtures in project area in
accordance with Section 265100 - Interior Lighting
C.
Provide an allowance of 500 strap supports to be used to support any existing
unsupported Division 26, Division 27 or Division 28 system. Provide report at weekly
construction meetings indicating the number of strap supports installed the previous
week.
3.5
TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Provide temporary lighting, exit lighting, and fire notification in areas of construction
that will have ongoing or intermittent public access. Temporary lighting shall comply
with IES standards and other provisions of these specifications. Selected light fixtures
must have battery backup to allow for egress at all times. Indicate path to nearest exit
with exit signs. All temporary systems shall be removed after they are no longer in
operation.
B.
Removing, temporary installation, and reinstalling in ceilings of light fixtures, speakers,
detectors, exit signs and other electrical equipment is not shown on the drawings. The
Contractor shall investigate the ceiling demolition work and include appropriate
temporary work in the bid. The sequence of work shall be (1) Remove and store
fixtures, detectors and speakers along with removal of ceiling, (2) Provide temporary
support for wired fixtures and devices to be reinstalled in new ceiling at approximately
the same location. Use chains for lighting fixture support. (3) Clean and reinstall in the
new or replaced ceilings. Provide new lamps when so noted. Provide temporary
relocation of exit signs to original location when exit is reactivated.
3.6
WORK OUTSIDE OF REMODEL AREAS
A.
Provide new wiring systems in concealed ceiling spaces, unless the structure is open
to the floor below.
B.
For work outside of the project area assume that removal and replacement of ceiling
tiles is required in all finished areas. Spaces above existing ceilings are highly
congested.
260510 - 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
C.
3.7
A.
EXISTING SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 10
Route wiring around obstructions and provide pull boxes per code. Carefully remove,
store or temporarily hang and re-install in undamaged condition all electrical
equipment, lighting fixtures and ceiling tiles where access to perform work is required.
Clean prior to re-installation. Provide new lamps when so noted.
NEW DEVICES IN REMODEL AREAS
Provide flush mounting for devices in existing walls. Fish conduit in wall. Where
existing boxes are indicated to be reused, extend box as necessary and provide new
devices and plates.
END OF SECTION 26 05 10
260510 - 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COPPER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes
Building wire and cable
Remote control and signal circuits
Splices, connectors, and terminations
Armored cable type AC and metal clad cable type MC
B.
Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and
conditions of Section 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
C.
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WIRE AND CABLE
General
1.
2.
3.
Copper conductor, single insulated wire.
ASTM B1 solid conductors; ASTM B8 for stranded conductors
600 volt insulation class, 90C maximum operating temperature for dry and wet
locations
B.
Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables
Type THHN/ THWN , UL 83 listed, comply with NEMA WC5.
C.
Rubber Insulated Wires and Cables
Type XHHW-2, UL 44 listed, comply with NEMA WC3.
Type USE-2, UL 44 listed, comply with NEMA WC3.
2.2
A.
REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CIRCUITS
Class 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Copper conductor, single insulated wire
Insulation type THHN/ THWN (90C), 600 volt insulation class
Type XHHW for ambient temperature less than 0C
UL 83 listed, ASTM B1 solid conductors; ASTM B8 for stranded conductors
Class 2 and 3
26 05 19-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
2.3
A.
Splices
3.
4.
2.
A.
2.5
A.
No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Pre-insulated “twist-on” type with integral spring and
insulated housing per UL 486C. Manufacturers: Ideal, Thomas & Betts, or 3M.
No 8 AWG and Larger: Bolt or compression set type per UL 486C. Provide two
hole compression set connectors for ground bus applications. Manufacturers:
Thomas & Betts, O.Z. Gedney.
Terminals
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Electrical Tape: 7 mil thick, PVC backing with flexibility and adhesion at 0F.
Pre-Stretched Tubing: EPR pre-stretched tubular rubber sleeve suitable for
insulation of voltages up to 600 volts. 3M PST series or equivalent.
Heat Shrink Tubing: Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin with 3 to 1
expansion and internal adhesive sealant.
Thomas & Betts Shrink-Kon,
Raychem, or equivalent.
Resin Filled Insulators: Plastic mold body with pourable insulating and sealing
compound. 3M Scotchcast 82 or 90 series or equivalent.
Connectors
1.
C.
Copper conductor, multiple twisted conductors covered with an overall nonmetallic jacket unless otherwise noted
300 volt XLPE insulation rated 105C
UL listed for use in the space in which circuits will be installed
SPLICES, CONNECTORS & TERMINALS
1.
2.
B.
COPPER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19
Stranded Conductors #10 and Smaller: Comply with UL 486A
Heavy wall thickness copper, tin plated with nylon insulation
Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon Terminals
Cable ties - nylon locking type. Thomas & Betts Ty-Rap
TERMINATIONS
Compression set, bolted, or screw type lug or direct to bolted or screw type terminal.
PLASTIC CABLE TIES
Nylon or approved, locking type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
WIRE & CABLE
Sizing
26 05 19-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
B.
Use stranded conductors for #8 AWG and larger. Conductors of #10 and #12
AWG may be solid or stranded at the contractor’s option.
Minimum power and lighting branch circuit requirement of #12 AWG.
Oversize neutral conductors for receptacle circuits using common neutrals,
including those to power poles and powered furniture partitions for possible nonlinear loads. See drawings for sizing criteria.
Color Coding
1.
Color code wire in accordance with the coding shown below:
A Phase (Left bus in
panel):
B Phase (Center bus in
panel)
C Phase (Right bus in
panel)
Neutral
Equipment Ground
2.
3.
C.
COPPER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19
208Y/120V
480Y/277V
Black
Brown
Red
Orange
Blue
Yellow
White
Green
Gray
Green
If large conductors cannot be purchased with the correct insulation color, color
code the conductors with wire and cable markers of the appropriate color.
Completely encircle the conductor with color coding tape for a minimum length of
6 inches at all accessible locations.
In the event that separate neutrals are specified with each phase conductor,
provide a white neutral conductor with a tracer of the same color as the
corresponding phase conductor.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Utilize type THHN/THWN wire for all power, lighting circuits except where the
ambient temperature is below 0C, use Type XHHW installation.
Install all emergency (generator backup) wiring is separate raceway system
Install all wiring in a raceway system unless otherwise specified.
Install wire only after building interior has been protected from the weather.
Install wire only after mechanical work likely to damage wire has been
completed.
Completely and thoroughly swab exterior raceways before installing wire.
Pull all conductors into a common raceway simultaneously.
Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.
Provide conductor vertical supporting device as required by NEC 300-19.
Conductors from one system shall not be intermixed in the same raceway as
another system unless shown otherwise. Examples of circuits not be to be
intermixed are 480Y/277 with 208Y/120 volt circuits, emergency power, line
voltage circuits with low voltage wiring, etc.
MC type cable installation is acceptable with a room. All home runs are to be
EMT.
26 05 19-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.2
REMOTE CONTROL & SIGNAL CIRCUITS
A.
Sizing - #16 AWG minimum.
B.
Installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
A.
Splices
3.
2.
3.
4.
Except where equipment is furnished with bolted or screw type lug, use
compression set pressure connectors with insulating covers. Use compression
tools and die compatible with the connectors being installed.
Use bolt or compression-set type with application of insulating tape, prestretched or heat shrinkable insulating tubing for splices and taps of #8 AWG
copper conductors and larger.
Torque conductor connections to manufacturer’s recommended values.
Use pre-insulated “twist-on” connectors with integral spring for splices and taps
of #10 AWG copper conductors and smaller.
Terminals
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Do not make splices without the approval of the engineer.
Splice wires and cables only in accessible locations such as within junction
boxes.
Make splices to carry full capacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature
rise.
Connectors
1.
C.
Install cables in cable tray and cable rings.
Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
Support cables above accessible ceilings; do not rest on ceiling tiles.
Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
SPLICES, CONNECTORS & TERMINALS
1.
2.
B.
COPPER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19
Insulate ends of spare conductors with electrical tape and identify spare circuit
number where appropriate.
Eye type crimped terminal for removable screw type terminal. Forked torque
terminal when screw terminal cannot be removed.
Train wires to eliminate fanning of stands, crimp with proper tool and die.
Torque screw termination per manufacturer’s recommended values.
Cable ties: neatly bundle conductors and cables together for support. Size cable
ties sufficiently to accommodate the multiple cables being supported.
Sizing
1.
2.
Minimum #12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
Oversize neutral conductors for receptacle circuits using common neutrals,
including those to power poles and powered furniture partitions for possible nonlinear loads. See drawings for sizing criteria.
26 05 19-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COPPER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 19
E.
Color Coding
1.
Color code wire in accordance with Section 16120 - 3.1 B.
F.
Installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install cable in accordance with the manufacturers recommended procedures.
Cut cables only with the special tools provided by the cable manufacturer; the
use of wire cutters or hacksaws for armor cutting is not permitted.
Install cables only after building interior has been protected from the weather.
Install wire only after mechanical work likely to damage wire has been
completed.
Maintain 12" minimum clearance to high temperature (greater than 90 C)
surfaces.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
26 05 19-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 26
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
DESCRIPTION
Grounding systems shall be provided for service neutral power ground and for
equipment grounds and bonding as required by code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS
Copper only, sized per code. Bare or green insulated in sizes #10 AWG or larger.
Green insulated for size #12 AWG.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GROUNDING, GENERAL
A.
Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and
as specified herein.
B.
Branch Circuit Grounding: All branch circuits in patient areas shall include an insulated
green ground wire connected between the branch circuit panelboard ground bus and
the wiring device (or equipment) ground terminal that the branch circuit serves. One
ground wire in each branch circuit raceway, looped between ground terminals, is
required. For the purposes of this code requirement, the entire project area up to a
height of eight feet above the floor shall be considered to be a patient occupied area.
Green tape identification (in lieu of green insulation) on ground wires is not acceptable.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
SIZE OF GROUND WIRE
As required by National Electric Code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical
damage protect with rigid non-ferrous conduit as permitted by applicable code.
GROUND CONNECTION OF PIPING
Metal internal piping shall be grounded, as a part of this contract.
CONNECTION TO THE POWER GROUND BUS
Furnish and install connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited
to:
1.
Raceway system
26 05 26-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
3.8
A.
3.9
A.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 26
Service neutral
"Separately derived system" (transformer or emergency power supply)
Electrically operated equipment and devices.
No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a neutral
conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or
equipment.
METHOD OF CONNECTIONS
Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding or copper
compression set type connectors U.L. listed for grounding purposes. Grounding lugs,
where provided as standard manufacturer's items on equipment furnished, may be
used.
EXPANSION FITTINGS
In conduit runs requiring an expansion fitting, a bonding jumper shall be installed
around the fitting to maintain continuous ground continuity.
TESTING
Conform to Section 260126 - Maintenance Testing of Electrical Systems
GROUND CABLE CROSSING EXPANSION JOINTS
Ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures or paved
areas shall be protected from damage by means of suitable approved devices or
methods of installation which will provide the necessary slack in the cable across the
joint to permit movement. Stranded or other approved flexible copper run or jumper
shall be used across such separations.
GROUNDING FOR PANELBOARD FEEDERS
Provide a grounding bushing with ground conductor sized in accordance with NEC
table 250.122 to the grounding bus in the panelboard and switchboards.
3.10 PANELBOARD BONDING
A.
Provide a bonding conductor not smaller than #10 AWG between the ground bus in the
normal and emergency panels and/ or two or more emergency panelboards fed from
separate transfer switches, serving the same individual patient vicinity in accordance
with NEC 517.14.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
26 05 26-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2.
Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A325: American Society for Testing and Materials - Standard Specification for
Structural Bolts.
B.
ASTM A603: American Society for Testing and Materials - Standard Specification for
Zinc-Coated Steel Structural Wire Rope.
C.
IBC: International Building Code. 2003 and adopted and amended by City of Bothell.
D.
ICC: International Code Council.
E.
MFMA-3: Metal Framing Manufacturers Association's Metal Framing Standards
Publication.
F.
MSS SP-58: Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry
Standard for Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
G.
NECA 1: National Electrical Contractors Association Standard Practices for Good
Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.
H.
OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development.
I.
Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a
cable, an anchor bolt or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used
to transmit seismic forces from an item of equipment or system to building structure
and to limit movement of item during a seismic event.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
26 05 29-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittal information in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements,
Section 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical and requirements described in
this section.
B.
Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and
finish for each type and size of electrical support and seismic-restraint component
used.
1.
2.
C.
Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and
rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service
member of the ICC Evaluation Program.
Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with
requirements.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating routing of single raceways, trapeze
systems and cable trays requiring bracing. Indicate on the shop drawing the type and
location of bracing to be used. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify
hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices, signed and sealed by a
registered structural engineer in the state of Washington. Include the following:
1.
2.
Fabricated Supports: Representations of field-fabricated supports not detailed
on Drawings.
Seismic Restraints: Detail anchorage and bracing not defined by details or
charts on Drawings. Include the following:
a.
Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic
restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile, compressive, and
shear loads.
b.
Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of
restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment
locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths,
and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure
during seismic events. Submit details and calculations for the following
items:
1)
Raceway Supports
2)
Pad Mounted Transformers
3)
Dry Type Transformers
4)
Uninterruptible Power System
5)
Power Distribution Unit
c.
Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service
member of the ICC Evaluation Service Program, showing maximum ratings
of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
D.
Coordination Drawings:
Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical
components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports
and seismic restraints.
E.
Welding certificates.
26 05 29-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
F.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.
G.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this
Section are more stringent.
B.
Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.
B.
Ss, Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response at Short Periods:
1.257
C.
S1, Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Response at 1-Second Period:
0.426
D.
Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of two
times the applied force.
B.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components
for field assembly.
1.
2.
Manufacturers:
a.
Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
b.
ERICO International Corporation.
c.
Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit.
d.
GS Metals Corp.
e.
Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
f.
National Pipe Hanger Corp.
g.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
h.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
i.
Wesanco, Inc.
Finishes:
a.
Metallic Coatings:
Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied
according to MFMA-3.
26 05 29-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
Channel Dimensions:
forces].
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29
Selected for structural loading[ and applicable seismic
C.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1.
D.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,
designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:
plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical
items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Hilti, Inc.
2)
ITW Construction Products.
3)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
4)
Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, [zinc-coated] [stainless]
steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and
pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which
used.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
2)
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc
3)
Hilti, Inc.
4)
ITW Construction Products.
5)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
6)
Powers Fasteners.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron slotted-support-system units similar to
MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-3 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable
for attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength.
Comply with
ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
APPLICATION
Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment
and systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
26 05 29-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
B.
3.2
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel
slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25
percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps,
single-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction
action for retention in support channel.
2.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be
used for 1 inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication
systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze
supports.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article.
B.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so
strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified
loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be
weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
C.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor
and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the
following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts or use expansion anchor fasteners.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion
anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided
with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4
inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate
concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock
washers and nuts, Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying
with MSS SP-69 or Spring-tension clamps.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount
cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to
substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage
requirements.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars.
26 05 29-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.3
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29
INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS
A.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
B.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are
attached to wall.
C.
Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to
structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Testing: Test pullout resistance of seismic anchorage devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage
device to restrained component (unless post connection testing has been
approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide
temporary load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners
selected by Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until
satisfactory results are achieved.
Record test results in tabular form and submit to architect.
END OF SECTION 26 05 29
26 05 29-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures and cabinets for electrical
wiring.
B.
Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and
conditions of Section 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
C.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
D.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
SUBMITTALS
Make submittals in accordance with Section 260500 - Common Work Results For
Electrical. Submit product data only for surface raceways and fittings, wireways,
enclosures and cabinets.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction
elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1, UL 6.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit: ANSI C80.6, UL 1242.
C.
Fittings: NEMA FB1, UL 514B, galvanized malleable iron or non-corrosive alloy
threaded fittings. Erickson and watertight split couplings are permitted. Set screw and
running thread fittings are not permitted.
26 05 33-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
D.
2.2
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
Conduit Bodies and Fittings Manufacturers: American Electric; Construction Materials
Group, Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton
Electric Co., Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co., Lamson & Sessions;
Carlon Electrical Products, O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal, Scott Fetzer Co.;
Adalet-PLM, Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co., Link Seal, Thomas & Betts.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)
A.
UL 1, galvanized, or zinc coated flexible steel or aluminum for dry locations. Flexible
metallic tubing not permitted. Fittings: malleable iron or steel.
B.
Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. UL 360, PVC weatherproof cover over flexible steel
conduit. Fittings: galvanized or zinc coated.
2.3
RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (RNC)
A.
Schedule 40 and 80: UL 651.
B.
Type EB and B: UL 651, NEMA TC6.
C.
Fittings: NEMA TC3.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
ELECTRICAL NON-METALLIC TUBING (ENT)
NEMA TC-13.
LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (LFNC)
UL 1660
EXPANSION FITTINGS
Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized allowing 4”(100mm) (+/- 2” (50mm)) conduit
movement. OZ/Gedney AX Series or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.1.D.
RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS
Thruwall and Floor Seals: New construction - OZ/Gedney FSK Series. Existing
construction - OZ/Gedney CSM Series or equivalent by manufacturer lists in 2.1.D.
RACEWAY SEALING FITTINGS
For one through four conductors: OZ/Gedney CSB Series.
26 05 33-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
B.
For greater than four conductors: OZ/Gedney EYA Series with sealing compound.
C.
Low temperature or hazardous locations: OZ/Gedney EYA Series with sealing
compound.
2.9
A.
VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS
Factory-fabricated assembly consisting o threaded body and insulating wedging plug or
plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall
have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit
individual conductors or cables. Body shall be malleable iron.
1.
2.10
OZ/Gedney Type S or equivalent by manufacturer listed in 2.1.D.
METAL WIREWAYS
A.
Material: Sheet metal, size and shape as indicated. Manufacturer’s standard finish.
UL 870.
B.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with
wireways as required for complete system.
C.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include: Hoffman Engineering Co.,
Keystone/Rees, Inc., Square D Co., Circle AW, B-Line.
D.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
2.11
A.
ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush
latch.
1.
B.
2.12
A.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
enamel.
Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged
door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match
panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and
voltage, and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
OUTLET JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
Interior Wiring:
26 05 33-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
Outlet and Pull Boxes. Pressed steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where
applicable. NEMA OS1, UL 514A.
Large Junction and Pull Boxes. Fabricated sheet steel, zinc coated or baked
enamel finish, with return flange and screw retained cover.
Concrete and Masonry. Specifically designed boxes for casting in concrete or
mounting in masonry walls for that purpose.
Mounting. Provide boxes with fan side box support Caddy J1A series or Caddy
quick mount H series.
Exterior Wiring:
1.
Above Grade:
a.
Outlet and junction boxes: Cast or malleable iron or cast of corrosion
resistant alloy, complete with conduit hubs, compatible with raceway to
which it is connected. NEMA FB1.
b.
Pull boxes: Fabricated steel and hot dipped galvanized complete with
malleable iron hubs.
c.
All boxes labeled for damp (NEMA 3R) or wet (NEMA 4) locations as
applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
raceway installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
WIRING METHODS
Interior: Use the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Exposed: Electric Metallic Tubing.
Exposed Subject to Damage (i.e. from vehicles, carts and moving pallets
including stubups in concrete): Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit.
Concealed: Electric Metallic Tubing.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): Flexible Metal
Conduit, (except in wet or damp locations, use Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit)
with 90 loop, maximum 6 feet long.
Exterior: Use the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
Exposed: Rigid Steel Conduit or Intermediate Metal Conduit.
Concealed: Rigid Steel Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, or Rigid
Nonmetallic Conduit.
26 05 33-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
C.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,
Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): Liquidtight Flexible
Metal Conduit.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, NEMA type 3R or type 4.
Hazardous Locations: Use the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
3.3
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
Rigid Steel or Intermediate Metal Conduit.
Boxes and Enclosures: Cast Metal Boxes, NEMA FB1.
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide raceways concealed in construction unless noted otherwise or unless
specifically authorized by the Architect.
B.
Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide not less than 6'-6"
(200cm) headroom. Where raceways are installed in exit pathways provide not less
than 7'-0" headroom. Do not block access to junction boxes, valves, mechanical
equipment or prevent removal of ceiling panels, etc.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
E.
Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural
members and follow the surface contours.
1.
2.
Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical.
Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends
parallel. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel;
otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
F.
Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints
tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections subject to vibration. Use
bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight.
G.
Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align
raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box.
Where terminations are not secure with 1 locknut, use 2 locknuts: 1 inside and 1
outside the box. Provide bushings on all raceways 1-1/2" (40mm) and larger.
H.
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly
into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase
nipples are used, align raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the
chase nipple so no threads are exposed.
I.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or
monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at
least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of the pull wire.
26 05 33-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
J.
Size raceways not sized on the drawings per manufacturers shop drawings, applicable
standards or other section of this specification.
K.
Maintain 12” (300mm) minimum clearance to high temperature (greater than 90c)
surfaces.
L.
When construction involves masonry work, assemble and install raceways at the same
time as the wall is erected. Avoid surface cut masonry units whenever such units are
to remain unplastered or uncovered in completed construction.
M.
Surface Raceways:
1.
Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend
points.
2.
Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight
raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.
3.4
RIGID METAL AND INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
A.
All connections watertight.
B.
Provide plastic coated rigid steel or IMC conduit for all exposed exterior raceways.
Use only fittings approved for use with PVC coated raceways. Patch all nicks and
scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.
3.5
A.
3.6
RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
May be used where permitted by code and as specified in 3.2 above. Exception: Use
rigid steel for elbows, penetrations through floors and walls and stub ups. Raceway
size may need to be increased to include code required ground wire. Field bends
limited to less than 44 degrees, formed with manufacturer's recommended heater.
RACEWAY PENETRATION SEALS
A.
Exterior wall surfaces above grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. For
concrete construction above ground level, cast raceway in wall or core drill wall and
hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement. For other types of
construction use method acceptable to Architect.
B.
Exterior surfaces below grade: Provide watertight seal around all raceways. Cast
raceway into wall (or floor) or use manufactured seal assembly.
C.
Roofs: Provide flashed and hot mopped weatherproof seal, or a pitch pan filled and
sealed to be weatherproof where raceway penetrates roof membrane. Provide a
weatherhead on all raceway stubups penetrating roof.
26 05 33-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
D.
3.7
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
Fire rated construction: Seal penetrations to maintain fire rating of construction
penetrated as specified in Division 7 Firestopping.
RACEWAYS SEALING FITTINGS
A.
Provide watertight seal in the interior of all raceways which pass through building roof,
ground floor slab or through outside walls of the building above or below grade. Seal
on the end inside the building, using raceway sealing fittings manufactured for the
purpose. Locate fittings at suitable accessible locations. For concealed raceways
install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank coverplate to match finish of adjacent
plates or surfaces.
Exception: Sealing fittings are not required on raceways through the floor slab when
the raceway does not extend beyond the building footprint.
B.
Provide sealing fittings or duct seal in j-box for all raceways entering freezers and
refrigeration units.
3.8
HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS
A.
Raceways 1" and larger: Provide lay-in pipe hangers on 1/4" (6mm) or larger all
threaded rods attached to metal ceiling inserts or to structural members at not greater
than 10'-0" (3m) on center and within 12" (300mm) of each change in direction.
B.
When more than two raceways will use the same routing, group together on a channel
trapeze support system supported by 3/8" (9.5mm) (minimum) threaded rods attached
to metal ceiling inserts or structural members. Size supports for multiple raceways for
25% future capacity.
C.
Suspended ceiling systems: Do not attach raceways to ceiling suspension system
hangers. Raceways 3/4" (20mm) and smaller serving equipment located within ceiling
cavity or mounted on or supported by the ceiling grid system may be supported by
dedicated #12 ga. galvanized, soft annealed mild steel wire hangers. Two raceways
maximum per hanger. Attach raceways with clips manufactured for the purpose.
3.9
A.
3.10
A.
EXPANSION FITTINGS
Provide expansion fittings for raceways crossing expansion joints, building separation
walls, and seismic joints. Provide bonding jumper.
VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS
Provide cable support for vertical cable runs as required by NFPA 70.
26 05 33-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.11
A.
3.12
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
STUB-UP CONNECTIONS
Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment.
Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with the
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal
conduit may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. For future equipment
connections install threaded plugs flush with floor.
OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Firmly anchor boxes directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joists.
Boxes must be so attached that they will not "rock" or "shift" when devices are
operated.
B.
Flush Mounting: Install front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of
the wall or ceiling, except for those mounted above accessible ceilings or where
drawings indicate surface mounting is permitted.
C.
Do not mount flush boxes back-to-back. Provide 6" (150mm) minimum horizontal
separation between closest edges of the boxes. Option: Use sound isolation pads or
other sound proofing method acceptable to Architect.
D.
When boxes are installed in fire resistive walls and partitions provide 24” (600mm)
horizontal separation between boxes on opposite sides of a wall in accordance with
IBC 712.3.2. In addition, limit penetrations to 16 square inches (103 square
centimeters) per penetration and not to exceed a total of 100 square inches per 100
square feet (9.3 square meters) of wall area. Option: Apply fire stop putty pads
acceptable to the fire marshal.
3.13
ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
A.
General: Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and
trades. Study all drawings that form a part of this contract and confer with the various
trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this Section and the work of
other trades. Check and verify outlet locations indicated on Architectural drawings,
door swings, installation details and layouts of suspended ceilings and locations of all
plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment.
B.
Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recesses or similar features,
or where outlets are centered between two such features, such as between a door
jamb and a cabinet, make these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are
located off center.
C.
Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Align outlets exactly on center lines horizontally
or vertically where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the same
elevation or one above the other. Relocate as directed all such outlets (including
lighting, receptacle, power, signal and thermostat outlets) which are not so installed, at
no additional cost to Owner.
26 05 33-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
D.
Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor to the center line, unless
otherwise noted.
Switches
4 feet, set vertically
Receptacles
18 inches, set vertically or as indicated
Telephone
18 inches, set vertically or as indicated
Other
As noted or as directed by Architect
E.
Ceiling Location: Locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of a panel for
acoustical material, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the
same room in same panel position.
3.14
CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished
under this or other Divisions and provide final connections to all equipment.
B.
Outlet box required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not
have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires a wire with insulation rating
different from circuit wiring used.
C.
Study equipment details to assure proper coordination.
3.15
A.
3.16
A.
3.17
A.
3.18
BLANK COVERS
Provide blank covers or plates to match coverplates specified in section 262726 over
all boxes that do not contain devices or are not covered by equipment.
DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING EMERGENCY AND NORMAL DEVICES
Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the
box into two completely separate compartments.
DEVICE BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES AND WIRING RATED OVER
150 VOLTS TO GROUND AND OVER 300 VOLTS BETWEEN CONDUCTORS
Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the
box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts.
JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES
A.
Pull and junction boxes: Install as shown, or as necessary to facilitate pulling of wire
and to limit the number of bends within code requirements.
B.
Permanently accessible.
26 05 33-9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33
C.
Do not intermix conductors from one system in same junction box or pull box as
another system unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise.
D.
In suspended ceiling spaces: Support from structure independently from ceiling
suspension system.
E.
The drawings do not necessarily show every pull or junction box required. Add all
required boxes.
3.19
COLOR CODING
A.
Color Code all junction boxes installed in accessible ceiling spaces and exposed in
unfinished areas using spray paint on the box and entire cover in the following manner:
480 Power
Brown
277 Lighting
Yellow
120/208V
Unpainted
B.
Use black felt tip marker following painting to indicate the circuit numbers in 1" (25mm)
high letters contained within.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
26 05 33-10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS
SECTION 26 05 33.10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
This section includes flush floor outlets and covers for power, telephone,
communications, and special purpose outlets.
SUBMITTALS
Make submittals in accordance with Section 260500 - Common Work Results For
Electrical. Submit product data for each component utilized in the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
manufacturers: Wiremold or FSR. Provide same manufacturer for all products.
B.
Part numbers listed do not constitute a complete assembly. Contractor is responsible
to supply additional accessories as required for a complete working system.
2.2
A.
RECTANGULAR RECESSED BOX ASSEMBLY - SINGLE OR MULTIPLE SERVICE
Above Grade: Formed steel, concrete tight, shallow construction.
1.
B.
COVERS
1.
2.3
A.
2.4
A.
Refer to floor box schedule in E3 series drawings for floor box descriptions.
Refer to floor box flag notes in drawings for cover descriptions and outlet
requirements.
RAISED FLOOR SYSTEM FLUSH FLOOR BOX
Provide flush with raised floor system box for power and data. See flag note 7 on sheet
E3.0.
COMBINATION FLUSH FLOOR BOX
Multi-Service flush outlet box suitable for poured concrete construction with adjustment
after pour. Capacity for power, telephone and special systems, as shown on drawings.
Duplex receptacle per Section 262726 - Wiring Devices, provide communication device
activation for telephone, data and special systems wiring.
26 05 33.10-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
B.
Flush with finish floor with duplex receptacle or blank cover plate (as selected by
architect.) Wiremold RC7Series. Provide concrete core drill to match fitting.
Coordinate with structural and field verify prior to installation.
Multi-Service flush box suitable for up to (2) duplex devices.
1.
D.
Flush with finish floor, no carpet inserts with wire access door or opening. Color
as selected by Architect.
Core Drill Poke Thru fitting
1.
C.
FLUSH FLOOR OUTLETS
SECTION 26 05 33.10
Refer to floor box flag notes in ‘E3’ series and ‘T’ system drawings for floor box
information. Wiremold RFB4E Series
Multi-Service with AV flush box suitable for up to (4) duplex devices.
1.
Refer to floor box flag notes in electrical ‘E3’ series, ‘TA’ and ‘EA’ series AV
systems drawings for floorbox information. FSR-500P. Coordinate with new
concrete floor. Provide conduits, outlet plates and dividers as required for each
system
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate with Architect for exact location of all floor outlets prior to rough-in.
B.
Install cast iron floor boxes on grade above moisture barrier. (Do not penetrate
moisture barrier). Install stamped steel (concrete tight) floor boxes for above grade
installations.
C.
Adjust top surface to level and flush with finished floor.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
RECEPTACLES
Conform with Section 262726 - Wiring Devices.
CARPET FLANGES
Install carpet flanges after installation of final floor covering.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33.10
26 05 33.10-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS
Section 26 05 53
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Engraved Plastic Laminate Nameplates
Wire and Cable Markers
Primary Cable Tags
Posted Drawings and Operating Procedures
Safety Signs
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 262416 – Panelboards
C.
Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and
conditions of Section 160500 - Common Work Results for Electrical.
1.2
A.
REFERENCES
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1.
B.
1.3
ANSI A13.1 Operational and Warning signs.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 29 CFR - Labor Chapter XVII
Part 1910-145 "Occupational and Safety Health Standards" 1992.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make submittals in accordance with Section 160500 - Common Work Results for
Electrical.
B.
Submit a complete nameplate schedule to indicate nameplate size, lettering size and
color.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE NAMEPLATES
Materials: Three-layer laminated plastic with minimum nameplate dimensions of
1 3/4" high by 5" wide. Lettering height for panel or equipment identifier @ 1/4". Remaining
lines @ 1/8" high with 1/8" spacing between lines.
1.
2.
Normal System: White letters on black background.
Comply with ANSI 13.1.
26 05 53-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS
Section 26 05 53
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
B.
Panelboard Nameplates
1.
C.
Line 1:
Panelboard Name
Line 2:
Source from which panel is fed
Line 3:
Voltage, phase and wire
Disconnects, Starters, Combination Starters and Other Devices
1.
2.2
Provide engraved plastic nameplate for each new panelboard with the following
information:
Provide phenolic nameplate for each device with the following information:
Line 1:
Load served
Line 2:
Panelboard and circuit number from which device is fed
Line 3:
Fuse size or breaker size as applicable
WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3 for minimum lettering size.
B.
Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl with legend overlaminated
with a clear, weather-and chemical-resistant coating.
C.
Pretensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic
band sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by
pretensioned gripping action when placed in position.
D.
Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted
numbers and letters.
E.
Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch- (0.4-mm-) thick
aluminum sheet, with stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for
permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
2.3
POSTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Print electrical riser diagrams on 20 lb. bond paper. (Blue print paper is not
acceptable). Reduce drawings to approximately 1/2 size using Xerox reduction
process. Contact engineer to obtain updated original plans for printing.
B.
Mounting Frames: Extruded aluminum, 4 point screw mount with 1/8" clear plexiglass
cover.
C.
Operating Instructions: Printed in all capital letters of 12 pt. size minimum.
26 05 53-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS
Section 26 05 53
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.4
SAFETY SIGNS
A.
Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
B.
Engraved Plastic Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1/16
inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick
for larger sizes.
1.
2.
Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
C.
Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled
for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch (6.4mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
D.
Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted,
cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1mm) galvanized-steel backing; and
with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets
in corners for mounting.
E.
Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No.
10/32, stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE NAMEPLATES
Provide nameplates for the following:
1.
2.
Equipment identification labels including, but not limited to:
switchgear,
switchboards, panelboards, disconnect switches, motor starters, transformers,
capacitors, fixed equipment, motor control centers, and transfer switches.
Special equipment outlet labels. (1/4" letters).
B.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
C.
Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
D.
Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets.
unacceptable.
E.
Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panel board that is recessed in finished
locations.
3.2
A.
Adhesive is
WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
Provide wire markers for control wiring as indicated on schematic and interconnection
diagrams or equipment manufacturer's Shop Drawings for control wiring.
26 05 53-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS
Section 26 05 53
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
B.
Provide identification labels with the following information in accordance with NEC
210.4(d).
Conductors of power systems in this building are identified as follows:
280Y/120V
480Y/277V
A Phase (left bus in panel):
Black
Brown
B Phase (center bus in panel):
Red
Orange
C Phase (right bus in panel):
Blue
Yellow
Neutral:
White
Gray
Equipment Ground:
Green
Green
Isolated Ground:
Grn/Yel*
Grn/Yel*
*Green with yellow tracer
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.3
2.0 Mil, White Polyester, Permanent Adhesive Material. Peel-off self sticking
type.
Lettering: Black #10 font Arial on white opaque background.
In electrical rooms and closets, mechanical rooms, and other similar areas, post
decal on front of panel, MCC, and /or switchboard.
In finished areas, where panel may be painted at a later time, post decal behind
circuit breaker doors or behind dead front door where decal can be easily seen
when circuits are being added.
RACEWAY AND JUNCTION BOX COLOR CODING (IDENTIFICATION)
A.
Identify accessible conduits routed vertically or through ceiling spaces containing
medium-voltage cable (voltages greater than 600V) by painting conduits with Orange
Safety (FSC-1224) paint. Stencil the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" in Gloss
Black (FSC-17038) paint minimum 2" high letters at intervals not exceeding 50 feet at
visible locations.
B.
Conduit Identification:
1.
2.
In accessible ceiling spaces and exposed in unfinished areas, using an indelible
marking pen, label all conduits 1" larger with panel and circuit numbers of
conductors routed through the conduit. Label conduit at all wall penetrations and
connections to all panels, junction boxes, and equipment served.
Identify floor/wall area directly above or adjacent to medium voltage conduits
within 12" of the floor or wall.
26 05 53-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICALSYSTEMS
Section 26 05 53
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.4
WARNING SIGNS
A.
General: Provide warning signs where there is hazardous exposure or danger
associated with access to or operation of electrical facilities. Provide text of sufficient
clarity and lettering of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location;
mount permanently in an appropriate and effective location. Comply with ANSI A13.1
standard color and design.
B.
Operational Tags: Where needed for proper and adequate information on operation
and maintenance of electrical systems, provide tags of plasticized card stock, either
pre-printed or hand printed to convey the message; example: "DO NOT OPEN THIS
SWITCH WHEN BREAKER IS CLOSED."
3.5
A.
POSTED DRAWINGS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Mount drawings and operating procedures on the wall immediately adjacent to the
main piece of equipment for which the instructions apply. If sufficient wall space is
available, mount directly to one of the sheet metal panels of the equipment.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
26 05 53-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
COORDINATION STUDY
Section 26 05 73
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device
coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective
device coordination study.
1.
Coordination of series-rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B.
Product Certificates:
1.
For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs,
certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
2.
For arc flash calculations computer software programs certifying compliance with
IEEE 1584-2002.
C.
Qualification Data:
For coordination-study specialist and organization. Submit
qualifications of the organization proposed for performing the study. Include a
description of the equipment and computer based computation methods or programs
used, names and experience history of the personnel who will perform the study.
D.
Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval
process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals may be in
digital form.
1.
Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data
sheets.
2.
One-line diagram (PDF and Autocad drawing file)
3.
Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.
4.
Coordination-Study Report.
5.
Arc flash report (for all new panelboards)
1.3
A.
1.4
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.
1.
Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer
software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
2.
Informational submittals will not be approved until the coordination study is
completed and the submittals indicate the study recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide
use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides
specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
26 05 73-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
COORDINATION STUDY
Section 26 05 73
B.
Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application
of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar
magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1.
Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be
responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the
direct supervision and control of engineer.
2.
Preapproved by WSU: Electrotest, Power Systems Engineering and Siemens
Engineering Services Division
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of the InterNational Electrical
Testing Association.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association to supervise testing specified in Part 3.
D.
Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
E.
Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
F.
Comply with IEEE 1584-2002 for arc flash calculations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A.
Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a
comparable product by one of the following:
1.
CGI CYME.
2.
EDSA Micro Corporation.
3.
ESA Inc.
4.
Operation Technology, Inc.
5.
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
2.2
COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 1584-2002.
B.
Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include
"mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399, Table 74.
C.
Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report
device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate
selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
1.
Required Features:
a.
Arc flash and arcing faults.
26 05 73-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
b.
c.
D.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
COORDINATION STUDY
Section 26 05 73
Positive sequence faults.
Zero sequence faults.
Arc flash calculations: Software program shall be capable of calculating Arc Flash
Incident Energy (AEIE) levels and flash protection boundary distances for all new panel
boards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting
performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
B.
Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and
approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
C.
Provide the study based on the actual electrical equipment supplied for the project.
3.2
A.
POWER SYSTEM DATA
Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1.
Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26
Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use
equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system
diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and
recommended device settings.
2.
Impedance of utility service entrance.
3.
Impedance of emergency generator set(s).
4.
Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy
formats, showing the following:
a.
Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
b.
Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
c.
Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection
type, impedance, and X/R ratios.
d.
Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
e.
Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation, and length.
f.
Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
5.
Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, crossreferenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a.
Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent
starting and stopping.
b.
Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic
inrush current, and overload capability.
26 05 73-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
3.3
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
COORDINATION STUDY
Section 26 05 73
Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time,
type of start, and thermal-damage curve.
Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective
devices.
Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,
ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time
adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay
adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current
transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.
Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting
rating in amperes rms symmetrical.
FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A.
Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at
circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation
shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short
circuit at each of the following:
1.
Branch circuit panelboard.
B.
Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources
throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of systemswitching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault
conditions.
1.
Model the entire electrical distribution system from the utility company point of
connection to circuit breakers in 208 Volt distribution panels at the secondary
side of distribution transformers. Include mechanical HVAC equipment, motor
driven equipment feeder circuits, and elevator feeder circuits.
2.
The model shall include all components of the distribution system which would be
exposed to fault current levels of 10,000 Amperes symmetrical on a calculated
basis.
C.
Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault
current.
D.
Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply
with IEEE 14 IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.
1.
Transformers:
a.
ANSI C57.12.10.
b.
ANSI C57.12.22.
c.
ANSI C57.12.40.
d.
IEEE C57.12.00.
e.
IEEE C57.96.
2.
Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010.
3.
Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.
26 05 73-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
4.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
COORDINATION STUDY
Section 26 05 73
Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
E.
Study Report:
1.
Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault
currents on electrical distribution system diagram.
2.
Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on
medium- voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of
overcurrent relays.
F.
Equipment Evaluation Report:
1.
For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are
equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
2.
For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply
multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
3.
Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault
currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding
electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit
withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical
fault current.
3.4
COORDINATION STUDY
A.
Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a
written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.
1.
Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.
2.
Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds)
short-circuit currents.
3.
Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
B.
Comply with [IEEE 141] [IEEE 241] [IEEE 242] recommendations for fault currents and
time intervals.
C.
Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1.
Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a.
Inrush current when first energized.
b.
Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current,
whichever is specified for that transformer.
c.
Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2.
Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
D.
Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.
E.
Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to
ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242.
Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time
equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of
the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable
26 05 73-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
COORDINATION STUDY
Section 26 05 73
manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit
current.
F.
Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of
coordination study:
1.
Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a.
Device tag.
b.
Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneouspickup values.
c.
Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous
settings.
d.
Fuse-current rating and type.
e.
Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
2.
G.
3.5
Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective
devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate
time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility
company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching
schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation.
Show the following information:
a.
Device tag.
b.
Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c.
Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
d.
No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e.
Cable damage curves.
f.
Transformer inrush points.
g.
Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative, of
electrical distribution equipment being set and adjusted, to set overcurrent protective
devices within equipment.
B.
Testing: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform the following device setting and
to prepare test reports.
C.
Testing: Perform the following device setting and prepare reports:
1.
After installing overcurrent protective devices and during energizing process of
electrical distribution system, perform the following:
a.
Verify that overcurrent protective devices meet parameters used in studies.
b.
Adjust devices to values listed in study results.
2.
Adjust devices according to recommendations in Chapter 7, "Inspection and Test
Procedures," and Tables 10.7 and 10.8 in NETA ATS.
26 05 73-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.6
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE
COORDINATION STUDY
Section 26 05 73
ARC FLASH STUDY
A.
Study shall model worst-case arc flash conditions, and the final report shall describe,
when applicable, how these conditions differ from worst case bolted fault conditions.
B.
Provide study results in tabular form, and include:
1.
Device or bus name
2.
Bolted fault and arcing fault currents levels
3.
Arc Flash Incident Energy Level (AFIE) at 18 inches expressed in cal/cm2
4.
Flash protection boundary distances including
a.
Limited shock approach boundary
b.
Restricted shock approach boundary
c.
Prohibited shock approach boundary
5.
Personal-protective equipment class (PPE).
C.
Provide recommendations for reducing AFIE levels and enhancing worker safety.
END OF SECTION 26 05 73
26 05 73-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
ELECTRIC SERVICE
SECTION 26 05 75
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specifications, apply to this section.
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.3
Provide permanent utility service entrance complete and fully operational.
UTILITY CHARGES
A.
Owner will pay the electric utility service connection charges directly. Contractor will be
responsible for any utility cost associated with rework or re-inspection of the contractor's portion
of the installation due to failure to follow utility standards and directions and for poor quality work
identified by the utility upon inspection of the contractor's work scope.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONFORMANCE TO UTILITY STANDARDS
A.
2.2
Contractor shall obtain the latest utility standards for materials and installation requirements and
comply fully. Coordinate with Puget Sound Energy.
SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
A.
All service entrance equipment shall be provided in accordance with NEC requirements and
utility design standards.
B.
UL listed for intended service application and installation location
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
METERING
A.
3.2
Provide kW and kWh meter bases, meter raceway and metering conductors per utility
requirements, from current transformers (CTs) to meter location(s).
GROUNDING
A.
3.3
Provide service grounding and bonding per code.
WORK BY UTILITY
A.
Utility will provide:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Primary conductors and terminations
Service Transformer(s)
Termination of service entrance secondary conductors at utility connection point
Current transformers
26 05 75-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
5.
3.4
ELECTRIC SERVICE
SECTION 26 05 75
Meter(s)
WORK BY CONTRACTOR
A.
Contractor shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
All necessary work not being provided by utility
Primary raceway, pull cord(s) with distance markings in raceway, raceway route staking
and grading, civil engineering, excavation, backfill and compaction per utility standards or
Division 33 whichever has the more stringent requirements.
Transformer vault is part of scope of bid.
Service entrance raceway(s) and conductors(s), raceway route staking and grading,
excavation, backfill and compaction per Division 33.
Ground rods and grounding conductor at transformer vaults
Meter Base(s) per utility requirements. Coordinate location with Seattle City Light (SCL.)
All metering raceways and conductors per utility requirements. See SCL handbook for
requirements.
Key lock box for main electrical room when meter(s) are not located where utility has 24hour exterior access
Current transformer enclosure(s) per utility requirements.
Building service entrance raceways and conductors per utility requirements
Conductor phasing identification on all conductors, at all termination points and all
manholes, handholes and pull boxes
Service entrance equipment
Service entrance grounding per code
All required coordination with utility
Provide the service as required to completely conform to utility standards requirements
END OF SECTION
26 05 75-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1.
2.
B.
This Section includes the following daylighting control devices:
1.
2.
C.
Multi-level switching of electronic fluorescent ballasts with photo sensor,
occupancy sensor and wall box switches.
Dimmed control of electronic dimming ballasts with photo sensor, occupancy
sensor and wall box switches.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Indoor occupancy sensors
Time switches
Section 260519 Copper Conductors and Cables
Section 262726 Wiring Devices for light switches and wall-box dimmers
Section 265100 Interior Lighting and Lighting Fixture Schedule for light fixture
ballasts.
Section 260943 Network Lighting Controls
DEFINITIONS
A.
LED: Light-Emitting Diode.
B.
PIR: Passive Infrared.
C.
PDT: Passive Dual Technology.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make submittals in accordance with Section 260500 - Common Work Results For
Electrical.
B.
Product Data: Provide clearly marked and legible data sheets for each item of
equipment being installed on the project. This shall include each major replaceable
component that is part of a larger assembly. Data sheets should clearly indicate:
1.
2.
Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc.
Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate
26 09 23-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
Required environmental operating parameters
UL, FM and ETL listing and category
Manufacturer contact information including address, telephone number, facsimile
number, email address, web site address and contact person or persons.
Local manufacturer’s representative contact information including address,
telephone number, facsimile number, email address, web site address and
contact person or persons.
Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.
1.
2.
Lighting plan showing location, orientation, and coverage area of each sensor.
This plan shall take into consideration the size and use of each space as well as
the specific capabilities of submitted manufacturer's equipment to provide proper
coverage to the areas of control.
Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
D.
Label List: Submit list of proposed text for all labels prior to manufacturing for review
and approval by Owner’s representative.
E.
Warranty: Submit a copy of product warranty that complies with contract document
requirements. Where these requirements exceed manufacturer’s standard warranty
include cost of extended warranty in contract price.
F.
Maintenance Requirements: Submit maintenance requirements manual or guidelines.
This document should detail the requirements necessary to comply with the warranty.
This is required for the submittal process and is in addition to the O&M requirements.
G.
Samples: Provide sample devices and finishes plus other samples when requested, as
part of the submittal process
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction
that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate with system manufacturer to provide equipment which will most effectively
control lighting within designated spaces. Contractor and equipment manufacturer are
responsible for providing equipment which takes into consideration the size and
occupant use of the space, and any other limiting factors in the field to properly control
these areas.
1.6
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications
1.
Manufacturer shall have been in the business of manufacturing and providing
service for lighting control equipment for similar capabilities and size, under the
same name and ownership, for a minimum of three years preceding bid date of
the project
26 09 23-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.
3.
4.
B.
All components and assemblies shall be factory pre-tested prior to installation.
Factory trained technicians shall be on site for start-up, commissioning and
training
Factory trained technicians shall be available for telephone support twenty four
(24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week
Regulatory Requirements
1.
2.
1.7
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
Underwriters Laboratories: Provide U.L. listed lighting control equipment.
Code of Federal Regulations: 47 CFR - FCC All assemblies are to be in
compliance with FCC emissions standards specified in Part 15 for Class A
application.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide a written warranty agreeing
to provide parts to replace any portion of the lighting control system equipment that
fails due to material or workmanship for a period of twelve months from warranty
commencement.
B.
Warranty Commencement: Warranty shall begin at the point of substantial completion
of the system installation, which is defined as the date when commissioning and owner
training has been completed and the owner obtains beneficial use of the system.
C.
Warranty Replacement Parts: The manufacturer shall be able to ship replacement
parts within 24 hours for any component that that fails due to material or workmanship
during the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with the contract documents, provide products from one of the
following manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
A.
Douglas
Crestron
Leviton/PCI
Acuity Controls
Novitas, Inc.
Pass & Seymour/ Legrand
TriaTek
Watt Stopper (The)
INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
General Operation
26 09 23-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
The Occupancy Sensor system shall sense the presence of human activity within
the desired space and fully control the on/off function of the loads automatically.
Sensors shall turn on the load within 2 feet of entrance and shall not initiate "on"
outside of entrance.
Sensing technologies shall be completely passive in nature, in that the
occupancy sensor system shall not emit or interfere with any other electronic
device, or human characteristic. Acceptable known technologies are Passive
Infrared (PIR), or Ultrasonic.
Upon detection of human activity by the detector, a Time Delay shall be initiated
to maintain the light on for a field adjustable pre-set period.
Mounting
a.
Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b.
Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2 inch knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure.
c.
Time Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind
hinged door.
Automatic Photo Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 footcandles to turn lighting off
when selected light level is present.
Line Voltage Sensors
a.
Sensor shall be a self-contained dual voltage device capable of directly
switching loads upon detection of human activity.
b.
Sensor must be rated for 800 watts at 120 VAC, suitable for incandescent
light fixtures, fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts,
or 1/6 hp motors or rated for 1000 watts at 277 VAC, suitable for
fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts, or 1/3 hp
motors minimum. Sensor shall be capable of parallel wiring for 3-way
switching applications.
c.
Sensor Time Delay shall be factory set for typical applications, and field
adjustable from 30 seconds to 20 minutes. Sensor must provide a green
LED motion indicator.
System components shall be selected to provide full coverage of the intended
area in the manner intended. This design should use any variety of sensors to
accomplish this task, and shall be designed based on field conditions present at
the time of installation.
Switch-Box Occupancy Sensors
1.
General
a.
Photo sensor override shall be factory set in the off mode, but be field
adjustable. All adjustments shall be concealed once installed.
b.
Sensor must not protrude out from the cover plate more than 0.37 inches,
and recess into the switch box more than 1 inch. Sensor must surface
mount to single gang switch box, and accept accessory plates for multigang installations. Sensor must provide a vertical sliding Off/Auto override
switch, (2 switches if 2-pole device).
c.
Optional 2-Pole units must be available. Additional photo sensor override
of either pole shall also be available. Power switching shall be performed
with a mechanical relay in parallel with an AC Semiconductor to allow relay
contacts to switch under a no load condition.
26 09 23-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Where conditions exceed maximum allowable distances, areas, or other
field conditions require additional control in the space, such control will be
designed and installed as needed.
Passive Infrared (PIR) Technology
a.
PIR sensing, incorporating a combination of heat and movement sensing to
detect occupancy in the area of coverage.
Dual Technology (DT)
a.
Sensing must incorporate PIR with Ultrasonic, which utilizes the Doppler
principle and high frequency (40kHz) ultrasound to sense occupancy. The
PIR and/or Ultrasonic is used to initiate an ON condition; once ON the PIR
or Ultrasonic shall keep the load on. The DT can also be set so that only
one technology is needed to trigger lighting on. After the time delay expires
and the load goes off, the Ultrasonic shall remain active up to 10 seconds
as a back-up grace period.
Small Area Wall Switch Sensors
a.
Small Area Wall Switch Sensors must be provided for small spaces where
the occupant's work area is within 20 feet of sensor and the space is no
larger than 300 square feet.
b.
PIR sensing, incorporating a nominal one half inch focal length Fresnel
lens, designed to view at least 9 inches above and 9 inches below the
horizontal plane when measured 10 feet from the sensor. The PIR beam
pattern must be at least 170 degrees with 20 separate beams evenly
spaced.
Large Area Wall Switch Sensors
a.
Large Areas Wall Switch Sensors must be provided for large spaces where
the occupants work area is up to 40 feet from the sensor and the space is
no larger than 900 square feet.
b.
PIR sensing must incorporate a nominal one inch focal length Fresnel lens
design to minimize beam spacing, providing no more than a 20 inch gap
when measured at a 40 foot distance. The PIR beam pattern must be at
least 170 degrees with 30 separate beams evenly spaced.
Ceiling Occupancy Sensors
1.
2.
General
a.
Sensor shall be circular ceiling mounted device, mounted to either a single
gang enclosure, or surface mounted to a round surface raceway pancake
box. Sensor shall be capable of either surface or recessed mounting.
b.
Photo sensor override shall be factory set in the off mode, but be field
adjustable. All adjustments shall be concealed once installed.
c.
Optional 2-Pole units must be available. Additional photo sensor override
of either pole shall also be available. Power switching shall be performed
with a mechanical relay in parallel with an AC Semiconductor to allow relay
contacts to switch under a no load condition.
d.
Where conditions exceed maximum allowable distances, areas, or other
field conditions require additional control in the space, such control will be
designed and installed as needed.
Passive Infrared (PIR) Technology
a.
PIR sensing, incorporating a combination of heat and movement sensing to
detect occupancy in the area of coverage.
26 09 23-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
b.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
PIR sensing must utilize a high density Fresnel domed lens, providing a
circular view pattern of at least 360 degrees by 56 degrees.
Ultrasonic Technology
a.
Capable of detecting presence in the floor area to be controlled by
detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound.
Dual Technology (DT)
a.
Sensing must incorporate PIR with Ultrasonic, which utilizes the Doppler
principle and high frequency (40kHz) ultrasound to sense occupancy. The
PIR and/or Ultrasonic is used to initiate an ON condition; once ON the PIR
or Ultrasonic shall keep the load on. The DT can also be set so that only
one technology is needed to trigger lighting on. After the time delay expires
and the load goes off, the Ultrasonic shall remain active up to 10 seconds
as a back-up grace period.
Small Area Ceiling Sensor
a.
Small Area Ceiling Sensors must be provided for small spaces where the
space is no larger than 500 square feet.
Large Area Ceiling Sensor
a.
Large Area Ceiling Sensors must be provided for large spaces where the
space is no larger than 1200 square feet.
Approved manufacturers: PIR - Wattstopper CI-200 or approved equal;
Ultrasonic - Wattstopper UT-355 or approved equal.
Wall Mount Occupancy Sensors
1.
2.
General
a.
Sensor must be designed for large spaces where the occupants work area
is up to 40 feet from the sensor. Sensor must be mounted 8 to 10 feet
above the floor, out of occupants reach. Sensor shall be mounted either
flat against the wall or in a corner.
b.
Photo sensor override shall be factory set in the off mode, but be field
adjustable. All adjustments shall be concealed once installed.
c.
Optional 2-Pole units must be available. Additional photo sensor override
of either pole shall also be available. Power switching shall be performed
with a mechanical relay in parallel with an AC Semiconductor to allow relay
contacts to switch under a no load condition.
d.
PIR sensing must incorporate a nominal one inch focal length Fresnel lens
designed to minimize beam spacing, providing no more than a 20 inch gap
when measured at a 40 foot distance. The sensor must provide a 117
degree multi-level beam pattern.
e.
Sensors shall not require an electrical connection to neutral so that the
device may be directly wired in series with local override switches.
Sensors must be capable of parallel wiring for multi-sensor applications.
f.
Where conditions exceed maximum allowable distances, areas, or other
field conditions require additional control in the space, such control will be
designed and installed as needed.
Approved manufacturers: DT - Wattstopper DT-200 or approved equal; PIR Wattstopper CX-100 or approved equal.
26 09 23-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.3
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
POWER PACKS AND SLAVE PACKS
A.
Power Packs and Slave Packs must be designed to power and accept signals from
remote Low Voltage Sensors, or other control devices, and directly switch the line
voltage of the desired load controlled.
B.
Power Packs must accept 120, 240, or 277 VAC utilizing a dual tap transformer.
C.
Power Pack and Slave Pack relay switching shall not require more than 3 milliamps of
current at 15 to 30 VDC.
D.
Power Pack and Slave Pack relay switching shall be performed with a mechanical
relay in parallel with an AC Semiconductor to allow relay contacts to switch under a no
load condition.
Switching capacity shall be 20 amps of all types of loads:
Incandescent, Electronic Ballast, Magnetic, or Motor.
E.
Power Packs shall be available in combination 2-Pole units capable of switching two
independent loads, 20 amps each.
2.4
Photo Sensors and Dimming Sensors
A.
Photocell and dimming sensors shall control the light level in the space by monitoring
both the artificial light as well as available natural light.
B.
Photo sensors shall provide an On set point and a separate Off set point, thereby
creating a dead band to prevent unnecessary cycling of the artificial lights. Set point
setting shall be verified with a digital volt meter connected to test leads provided by the
sensor. Sensor shall send an electronic, low voltage signal to a remote power pack or
other control device which is directly connected to the load.
C.
Dimming sensors shall interface with a 0 to 10 VDC controllable electronic ballast.
Dimming sensor shall connect directly to the ballast with 2 low voltage wires. A third
test lead may be provided to allow setup adjustments. With the test lead disconnected,
the sensor shall react instantly to changes in the set point adjustment. Once set, the
test lead shall be connected to the control wire for normal operation. Photo sensing
element shall be a photodiode positioned to view out of the side of the sensor or in an
adjustable mounting for more accurate sensing of the space. Photo sensors designed
to view straight down on the work space will not be accepted due to varying light
absorbing characteristics.
1.
2.
2.5
A.
Photo sensor shall be a low voltage device, powered by the DC voltage supplied
by a remote power pack or other control device which is directly connected to the
load.
Provide quantity of power pack and slave packs with control relays as required to
control all designated circuits in the daylight area.
Daylight Zone Dimming Control with local switching
The lighting fixtures in this room configuration shall be controlled by manual wall
switches, occupancy sensors and photo sensors. The wall switches and occupancy
26 09 23-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
sensor together shall control all normal power lighting circuits in the room. The light
photo sensor shall automatically dim the lamps located in the daylight zone (as
indicated on the contract drawings) in response to available daylight.
B.
Dimming Ballast:
1.
C.
Occupancy sensor:
1.
2.
D.
Occupancy sensor shall be a ceiling-mounted device, powered by the DC voltage
supplied by a remote power pack or other control device which is directly
connected to the load.
Provide quantity of power pack and slave packs with control relays as required to
control all designated circuits in the daylighting area.
Photo Sensor:
1.
2.6
Standard 4-wire, 0-10 VDC dimming ballast as specified in Section 265100 Interior Lighting, quantity as required to control each fixture in the daylight zone
as specified in Lighting Fixture Schedule.
Photo sensor shall be a low voltage device, directly connected to the 0-10V
control loop of the dimming ballast.
Daylight Zone Dimming Control with wall box dimmers
A.
The lighting fixtures in this room configuration shall be controlled by manual wall box
dimmer switches, occupancy sensors and photo sensors. The wall box dimmer
switches and occupancy sensor together shall control all normal power lighting circuits
in the room. The photo sensor shall automatically dim the lamps located in the daylight
zone (as indicated on the contract drawings) in response to daylight contribution.
B.
Wall box electronic fluorescent dimmer:
1.
C.
Dimming Ballast:
1.
D.
Standard 4-wire, 0-10 VDC dimming ballast as specified in Section 265100 Interior Lighting, quantity as required to control each fixture in the daylight zone
as specified in Section 260650.16 Lighting Fixture Schedule.
Occupancy sensor:
1.
2.
E.
As specified in Section 262726 - Wiring Devices.
Occupancy sensor shall be a ceiling-mounted device, powered by the DC voltage
supplied by a remote power pack or other control device which is directly
connected to the load.
Provide quantity of power pack and slave packs with control relays as required to
control all designated circuits in the daylighting area.
Photo Sensor:
26 09 23-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.7
A.
2.8
A.
Photo sensor shall be a low voltage device, powered by the 0-10VDC supplied
by a remote power control device, providing a 0-10V control signal to the
dimming ballast or directly connected to the 0-10V control loop of the dimming
ballast.
CONTROL RELAYS
General Purpose Relays: Rated 120/ 240 volt, 10A. Square D Class 8501 Type K
plug in series with screw terminal socket.
low voltage control
Modular Relay Panel: Comply with UL 508 (CSA C22.2, No. 14) and UL 916 (CSA
C22.2, No. 205); factory assembled with modular single-pole relays, power supplies,
and accessory components required for specified performance.
1.
2.
2.9
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
Cabinet: Steel with hinged, locking door.
a.
Barriers to separate low-voltage and line-voltage components.
b.
Directory: Mounted on back of door. Identifies each relay as to load
groups controlled and each programmed pilot device if any.
c.
Control Power Supply: Transformer and full-wave rectifier with filtered dc
output.
Single-Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil,
momentary-pulsed type.
a.
Low-Voltage Leads: Plug connector to the connector strip in cabinet and
pilot light power where indicated.
b.
Rated Capacity (Mounted in Relay Panel): 20 A, 125-V ac for tungsten
filaments; 20 A, 277-V ac for ballasts.
c.
Endurance: 50,000 cycles at rated capacity.
d.
Mounting: Provision for easy removal and installation in relay cabinet.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than
No. 12 AWG, complying with Section 260519 - Conductors and Cables.
B.
Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors
not smaller than No. 22 AWG, complying with Section 260519 - Copper Conductors
and Cables.
C.
Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG, complying with Section 260519 - Copper Conductors and
Cables.
D.
Install unshielded, twisted-pair cable for control and signal transmission conductors,
complying with Section 260519 - Copper Conductors and Cables.
26 09 23-9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
SENSOR INSTALLATION
Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve at least 90 percent coverage of areas
indicated.
Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
3.2
Contractor is responsible for providing all necessary power packs and hardware
necessary for proper function of occupancy sensors and photocells.
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519 - Copper Conductors and Cables.
B.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions,
unless otherwise indicated.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 Identification For Electrical Systems.
B.
Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.4
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.
Operational Test: Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays.
B.
Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do
not comply with specified requirements.
C.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.5
A.
SYSTEM STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING
Commissioning shall take place prior to demonstration of system to Owner. After the
system has been installed the Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s recommended
commissioning with factory trained and authorized technicians on-site, to:
1.
2.
Verify that the contractor has properly installed and interconnected all necessary
components.
Verify correct operation of all system components.
26 09 23-10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
3.6
A.
Verify that all switch and contact inputs are in compliance with contract
requirements.
Aim and adjust all occupancy sensors and photocell devices for proper operation.
OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS and SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION
System Demonstration
1.
2.
B.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 26 09 23
Schedule demonstration a minimum of two-weeks prior to system turn over and
substantial completion. Schedule with owner’s representative and electrical
engineer.
Demonstrate complete system operation and contract compliance to designated
owner’s representative and engineer to prove system is functional and ready for
comprehensive training.
System Instruction
1.
2.
3.
The Contractor shall after one week (minimum) written notification to Architect
conduct an instruction session during which all maintenance and operational
aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected
by the Owner. The session shall be conducted by a Contractor's representative
thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the system.
O & M manual
information regarding the system shall be turned over to the Architect prior to
scheduling the instruction session.
Training shall utilize the following draft documents:
a.
Draft O&M Manual
b.
Contractor’s record drawings
The training effort shall validate the O&M Manual and record drawing
documentation.
END OF SECTION 26 09 23
26 09 23-11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
STANDALONE MULTIPRESET MODULAR
DIMMING CONTROLS
SECTION 26 09 36.19
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Wall-box multiscene dimming controls.
2.
Multipreset modular dimming controls.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Fade Rate: The time it takes each zone to arrive at the next scene, dependent on the
degree of change in lighting level.
B.
Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70, the term for circuits and equipment operating at
less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits.
C.
Scene: The lighting effect created by adjusting several zones of lighting to the desired
intensity.
D.
SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
E.
Zone: A fixture or group of fixtures controlled simultaneously as a single entity. Also
known as a "channel."
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
For modular dimming controls; include elevation, dimensions, features,
characteristics, ratings, and labels.
2.
Device plates and plate color and material.
3.
Ballasts and lamp combinations compatible with dimmers.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For master- and remote-control stations, and faceplates
with factory-applied color finishes and technical features.
1.4
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Field quality-control reports.
26 09 36.19-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.5
STANDALONE MULTIPRESET MODULAR
DIMMING CONTROLS
SECTION 26 09 36.19
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components
specified in other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible components.
Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified
functions. Include coordination with the following:
1.
Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
1.
Acuity
2.
Crestron
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
GENERAL DIMMING DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Compatibility:
1.
Dimming control components shall be compatible with lighting fixtures, ballasts,
and transformers.
2.
Dimming control devices shall be compatible with lighting control system
components specified in related sections for Addressable-Fixture Lighting
Controls, Relay-Based Lighting Controls, and Lighting Control Devices.
B.
Off Control Position: User-selected off position of any control point shall disconnect the
load from line supply.
2.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
26 09 36.19-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.4
STANDALONE MULTIPRESET MODULAR
DIMMING CONTROLS
SECTION 26 09 36.19
WALL-BOX MULTISCENE DIMMING CONTROLS
A.
Description: Factory-fabricated equipment providing manual dimming consisting of a
wall-box-mounted (touch screen) master controller, housekeeping station and pre-set
scene controller. Each zone shall be adjustable to indicated number of scenes, which
shall reside in the memory of zone controller.
B.
Each zone shall be configurable to control the following loads:
1.
Fluorescent lamps with electronic ballasts.
2.
Incandescent lamps.
3.
LED lamps or modules
C.
Memory:
1.
Retain preset scenes and fade rates through momentary (up to 3-second) power
interruptions.
2.
Retain preset scenes through power failures for at least seven days.
D.
Device Plates: Style, material, and color shall comply with Section 262726 "Wiring
Devices." Master-control cover plate shall be one piece.
E.
Master controller shall include the following:
1.
Cover-mounted switches, including master off, all bright, and selectors for each
scene.
2.
Touch screen control.
3.
A raise/lower switch for each zone for temporary adjustments of the zone,
without altering scene values stored in memory.
4.
Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.
2.5
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B.
Class 2 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Wiring Method: Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).
26 09 36.19-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
STANDALONE MULTIPRESET MODULAR
DIMMING CONTROLS
SECTION 26 09 36.19
C.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points.
Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor
manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips
in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for
identifying components and power and control wiring.
B.
Label each dimmer module with a unique designation.
C.
Label each scene control button with approved scene description.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative:
1.
Continuity tests of circuits.
2.
Operational Test: Set and operate controls to demonstrate their functions and
capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating
functions.
a.
Include testing of modular dimming control equipment under conditions that
simulate actual operational conditions. Record control settings, operations,
cues, and functional observations.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning modular dimming control components and retest
as specified above.
E.
Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to
tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and
representative.
F.
Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
26 09 36.19-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.4
STANDALONE MULTIPRESET MODULAR
DIMMING CONTROLS
SECTION 26 09 36.19
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain modular dimming controls. Laptop portable
computer shall be used in training.
B.
Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration
requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system
END OF SECTION 26 09 36.19
26 09 36.19-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1. Division 26 Section "Central Dimming Controls" or "Modular Dimming Controls" for
dimming control components.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: microprocessor based, networked, digital, addressable lighting control
system including control relay panels, addressable relays, addressable wall switches,
addressable photocells, network astronomical time clock, contact closure interface
devices, analog sensors, digital addressable sensors, integration interface module(s),
dimmers, digital addressable dimmers, digital addressable multi-input dimming ballasts,
software, handheld programmer(s) and required accessories to meet performance
indicated in the contract documents.
B.
1.3
All components of the system shall communicate via the digital intelligent lighting control
network.
REFERENCED STANDARDS
A.
American Society for Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
B.
1. ASHRAE 135-1995 and Addendum 135a and 135b:
BACnet:
Communications Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE)
C.
1. IEEE C62.41, Guide for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits (ANSI)
Underwriter's laboratories, Inc. (UL)
A Data
1. UL 50, Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
2. UL 486A, Standard for Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors
3. UL Standard 489, Molded-Case Circuits Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
4. UL 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment
5. UL 916, Standard for Energy Management Equipment
6. UL 924, Standard for Emergency Lighting & Power Equipment
D.
National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)
1. 250 Enclosures
E.
Electronics Industries Alliance/Telecommunications Industry Association (EIA/TIA)
F.
1. EIA/TIA 485A-98
Code of Federal Regulations
1. 47 CFR - FCC
All assemblies to be in compliance with FCC emissions standards
specified in Part 15 for Class A application.
26 09 43-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.4
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A.
BACnet™ - A networking communication protocol that complies with ASHRAE 135
B.
BAS – building automation system typically the digital mechanical control system
C.
DALI: Digital addressable lighting interface.
D.
Digital Addressable System – the switches, relays and accessory control devices shall be
individually addressable and shall communicate (two-way) over a single UL listed
Category 5, 4-pair UTP cable or dedicated non-polarized conductor pair.
E.
LCP – lighting control panel
F.
LonWorks™ - A control network technology platform for designing and implementing
interoperable control devices and networks
G. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than
50 V or for remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.
H.
Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status
data, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm
signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.
I.
PC - Personal computer
J.
Power Line Carrier: Use of radio-frequency energy to transmit information over
transmission lines whose primary purpose is the transmission of power.
K.
RS-485: A serial network protocol, similar to RS-232, complying with TIA-485-A.
L.
Schedule – one ON and OFF cycle
M. TOD Time of Day
N.
1.5
A.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Design Requirements
1. Environmental Operating Conditions
a.
Temperature: 14 F. (-10 C.) to 104 F. (40 C.)
b.
Humidity: 45% relative humidity at 32 F. (0 C.) to 85% relative humidity
at 95 F. (35 C.)
c.
Static Immunity: 15 kV
d.
Conducted lightning and line transient immunity: 6 kV
B.
Performance Requirements: System shall have the following performance capabilities:
1. Control Schemes
a.
Time-of Day (TOD) control
b.
Photocell control
c.
Incandescent dimming control
d.
Fluorescent dimming control via 0-10 VDC signal or multi-input digital
addressable ballast via digital signal
26 09 43-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.6
A.
B.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
Daylighting control via photodiode inputs with range of set points adjustable
at the Master Control panel or remotely via modem.
Astronomical sunrise and sunset control
Sweep Off with programmable duration Blink OFF Warning (10 second to
60 minute delay to OFF)
Manual after hours Override with programmable duration ON time and
Blink OFF Warning
External contact closure control input
i.
2. Software
a.
Control and Scheduling - a visual representation of each device on the bus,
with ability to show real time status and change the status of any individual
device, relay, switch, photocell, or zone.
3. Communications: System shall have the following communications operation and
control capabilities:
a.
Work station via RS-485 lighting control network and via separate local
area computer network connected to the RS-485 network.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submittal documentation shall conform to the contract document submittal
requirements including:
1. Make submittals in accordance Section 260500 - Common Work Results For
Electrical.
2. Additional requirements described in this specification section
Provide the following submittals for review and approval:
1. Bill of Material: Provide a complete itemized list of all materials being supplied to
meet the project requirements. Each item shall have a distinctive identification that
shall correlate to and be consistent with the identifications on the product data sheets
and shop drawings.
2. Product Data: Provide data sheets for each individual item of equipment being
installed on the project. This shall include each major replaceable component that is
part of a larger assembly. Data sheets shall indicate:
a.
Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, electrical requirements,
performance data, dimensions, weight, arrangement of components and
clearance and access requirements
b.
Required environmental operating parameters
c.
UL listing and category
d.
Manufacturer contact information including address, telephone number,
facsimile number, email address, web site address and contact person or
persons.
e.
Local manufacturer’s representative contact information including address,
telephone number, facsimile number, email address, web site address and
contact person or persons.
3. Shop Drawings
a.
Plan View Drawing: Indicate the exact locations of all components
b.
One-line Block Drawing: Indicate interconnectivity requirements between
all individual components and interfaces with other systems such as
network, telephone and building control systems.
c.
Typical Device Wiring Diagrams: provide component wiring diagram to
indicate how each component is wired to specific terminals at both ends.
26 09 43-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
4. Programming Information: provide individual programming information for each item
of equipment being installed
5. Label List: Submit list of proposed text for all labels prior to manufacturing for review
and approval by Owner’s representative.
6. Software
a.
Provide software programming and operating manual(s)
7. Warranty Specimen:
Provide specimen warranty that complies with contract
document requirements. Where these requirements exceed manufacturer’s standard
warranty include cost of extended warranty in contract price.
8. Maintenance Requirements:
Provide maintenance requirements manual or
guidelines. This document should detail the requirements necessary to comply with
the warranty. This is required for the submittal process and is in addition to the O&M
requirements.
9. Samples: Provide sample switches and finishes plus other samples as indicated and
when requested, as part of the submittal process.
10. Quality Assurance
a.
Specification Compliance Summary – provide a document that indicates
whether the vendor complies or does not comply with each specification
requirement. When the vendor does not comply describe the deviation in
detail and indicate how the vendor believes they are meeting the intent of
the specification and the reason this should be approved.
b.
Provide documentation of manufacturer’s burn-in factory test of assembled
lighting control panels.
C.
Closeout Submittals: Provide the indicated project closeout documents and drawings
when required by the Division 1 specifications
1. Record Drawings – hard copy and complete AutoCAD compatible drawing files on CD
2. O&M Manuals – hard copy and electronic format on CD
3. Software Program
a.
Provide software programming and operating manual.
b.
Provide hard copy printout of all project specific software programming (this
is not manufacturer's proprietary operating code).
c.
Provide two (2) back-up CD sets with all software programs and graphics
supplied and customized for the project.
d.
Provide complete as-built hard copy and electronic copy on CD (Excel™
format) of the relay map showing relay identification control schemes and
load controlled.
e.
Provide hard copy and electronic file on CD (Microsoft Word™ or Excel™
format) of the program schedules. Indicate all programs for control include
load identification, relay, input device identification, time –of-day schedule,
holiday schedule, etc. Provide in format similar to the attached specimen
at the end of this specification section.
f.
Provide complete point (device) address list after all project specific
software is installed and tested and accepted.
4. System Passwords: provide a list of all system default passwords and provide a list
of all other password holders allowed system access such a remote factory diagnostic
access.
5. Warranty with start and end dates clearly identified.
6. Provide manufacturer's extended warranty offer and terms for the system, software
and relays.
26 09 43-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
7. Field quality control and commissioning test reports.
8. Training signoff receipt.
9. Vendor’s maintenance proposal.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
B.
C.
D.
1. Manufacturer shall have been in the business of manufacturing, installing and
providing service for lighting control systems of similar capabilities and size, under the
same name and Ownership, for a minimum of three years preceding bid date of the
project.
2. Manufacturer shall be financially sound and shall provide acceptable third party
confirmation of same if requested.
3. Manufacturer shall have factory trained technicians.
a.
Factory trained technicians shall be on site for start-up, commissioning and
training.
b.
Factory trained technicians shall be available for on-site support within 24
hours of notification.
c.
Factory trained technicians shall be available for free of charge, telephone
technical support twenty four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week.
4. Telephone support: Manufacturer shall provide free telephone programming support
via modem during the warranty period.
5. Service: Manufacturer shall have maintenance agreements available for service
during and after the warranty period.
Regulatory Requirements
1. Code of Federal Regulations
a.
47 CFR - FCC: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions
standards specified in Part 15 for Class A application.
b.
Telephone Override System shall also be in compliance with standards
specified in Part 68.
Component Pre-testing: All relay panels, switches, photocells, and interface devices
shall be pre-wired at the factory. Each panel shall undergo complete performance, burnin and operational testing of both individual components and complete system prior to
shipping to site. All components shall undergo factory burn-in sufficient to mitigate
“infancy failure” of components on-site during start-up and commissioning.
Pre-Installation Meetings
1. Contractor, vendor (or vendor's representative), Owner and engineer shall meet after
submittals are approved and prior to start of low voltage control system installation, to
discuss and agree on:
a.
Schedule of system installation.
b.
Programming documentation for lighting control schedules and control
schemes.
c.
Programming documentation for lighting control graphics.
d.
Interface with building control system.
e.
Telephone, wireless and network access.
f.
System startup and commissioning schedule.
g.
Record documentation requirements and schedule.
h.
Training schedule.
26 09 43-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.8
A.
B.
1.9
A.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
COORDINATION
Coordinate low voltage lighting control network system with:
1. Architectural dimming controls for compatibility, graphics, status, control and interface
requirements.
2. Lighting control devices for compatibility, graphics, status, control and interface
requirements.
Coordinate the location of all exposed low voltage lighting control switches and sensor
devices with architectural finishes and mill work to ensure symmetrical appearance and to
avoid interferences.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
1. Contractor shall make all arrangements to have equipment properly packed for
shipping conditions and shipped to site for timely delivery. Contractor shall make all
arrangements for delivery and unloading on site.
B.
Acceptance at Site
C.
1. Contractor shall receive material on site and shall immediately open and inspect for
damage and ensure correct materials have been received. Provide notice to Owner’s
representative of any problems and schedule impacts related to shipping damage and
acceptance problems.
Storage and Protection
1. Once contractor has received material and inspected it, material shall be re-packed
as necessary and stored in an environmentally protected and secure space in
compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements.
1.10 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Requirements
1. Equipment shall not be stored on site until building is secured and has appropriate
environmental control to meet manufacturer’s requirements for proper storage and
operation.
1.11 WARRANTY
A.
Installation Warranty: The installing contractor shall provide a written warranty agreeing
to provide labor and materials to replace any portion of the lighting control system
equipment or wiring that fails due to materials or workmanship for a period of twelve
months from warranty commencement.
B.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide a written warranty agreeing to
provide parts to replace any portion of the lighting control system equipment that fails due
to material or workmanship for a period of three years from warranty commencement.
C.
Relay Warranty: In addition to the manufacturer’s warranty above, the manufacturer shall
provide a written warranty specifically for the relays. Warranty shall indicate warranty
period and replacement process for each type of relay on the project. This minimum
warranty period shall be three years and shall commence from the date of final
acceptance.
26 09 43-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
D.
Software Warranty: Provide all software upgrades and patches issued by the
manufacturer, free of charge during the warranty period.
E.
Warranty Commencement: Warranty shall begin at the point of substantial completion of
the system installation, which is defined as the date when commissioning and Owner
training has been completed and the Owner obtains beneficial use of the system.
F.
Warranty Replacement Parts: The manufacturer shall be able to ship replacement parts
within 24 hours for any component that that fails due to material or workmanship during
the warranty period.
1.12 SYSTEM STARTUP, COMMISSIONING and DEMONSTRATION
A.
Commissioning shall take place prior to demonstration of system to Owner. After the
system has been installed and the network wiring and telephone lines are operational, the
Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s recommended commissioning with factory trained
and authorized technicians to:
1. Verify that the contractor has properly installed and interconnected all necessary
components
2. Verify correct operation of all system components
3. Test and verify fully functional communication wiring
4. Verify each relay address and operation
5. Verify each switch address and operation
6. Verify each TOD schedule
7. Verify that all relays for each schedule are functioning with the correct schedule
8. Verify that all switch and contact inputs are in compliance with contract requirements
9. Verify all schedule documentation. Correct deficiencies to hardware, software and
documentation as necessary to comply with contract documents and reflect actual
installation and programming
10. Verify all software functions and capabilities
11. Verify all interfaces with other systems are functioning correctly
12. Test all overrides
13. Test all connectivity functions including telephone overrides, wireless, handheld
programmers, laptop links, etc. Test at each panel.
14. Aim and adjust all occupancy sensors and photocell devices for proper operation.
15. Verify proper operation of all workstation components and peripheral devices
16. Verify all telephone and network links including factory troubleshooting connections
for remote diagnostics.
B.
System Demonstration
1. Contractor shall schedule demonstration a minimum of two-weeks prior to system turn
over and substantial completion. Schedule with Owner’s representative, electrical
engineer, and factory service technician responsible for system commissioning.
2. Demonstrate complete system operation and contract compliance to designated
Owner’s representative and engineer. This demonstration will not be as detailed as
the separate Owner instruction. This demonstration will prove system is functional
and ready for comprehensive training.
3. Walk through the complete graphic screen package with the Owner’s representative.
4. Walk through the complete schedule with the Owner’s representative and obtain signoff.
26 09 43-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
1.13 TRAINING
A.
System Instruction
1. Contractor shall make arrangements for appropriate training space and furnishings
similar to a normal classroom. Space shall be on-site where possible. Contractor
shall provide temporary furnishings if required. Space shall be free of distracting
noise and shall have temperature controlled similar to any classroom.
2. Contractor shall provide two sessions of training
a.
Original Session: Schedule the first four (4) hour session with the Owner’s
designated staff at least two-weeks prior to the training day. Training
session shall be scheduled no sooner than 14 days and no later than 60
days after owner occupancy. Maximum of (5) five trainees per session.
Training shall be provided by factory trained technician familiar with the
specific installation. Provide reprogramming of the lighting control system
based on owner's requested written changes.
b.
Follow-up Session: Schedule a follow-up, four (4) hour session to take
place no sooner than ninety days after the original session and no later
than 30 days prior to the expiration date of the one (3)-year warranty
period.
3. Training shall utilize the following draft documents:
a.
Draft O&M Manual
b.
Contractor’s record drawings
c.
Manufacturer trained technician
d.
Owner’s program schedule
4. Video Recording
a.
Provide professional digital video recording with audio, of the original
training session. Training session shall be stored in digital format suitable
for replay on a computer. Recording shall be good quality with intelligible
sound.
b.
Provide three complete DVD sets of training sessions
5. The training effort will provide the Owner’s designated staff with the knowledge to
operate, maintain and make revisions to the program. It will also validate the O&M
Manual and record drawing documentation.
B.
Maintenance Service. As part of project closeout, contractor shall provide manufacturer’s
recommended service contract for support during the warranty period and one additional
year. Provide cost for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
24-hour telephone support
Software upgrades
On-site support
Software revisions to graphical user interface
Scheduled and recommended maintenance
1.14 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Services in this article may not be allowed for publicly funded projects.
B.
Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for
two years.
C.
Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and
program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of
26 09 43-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade
shall include new or revised licenses for use of the software.
1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to
allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with the contract documents, products of one of the following
vendors are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
A.
LIGHTING RELAY CONTROL PANEL
Enclosure: Each enclosure shall have the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Acuity Controls, Inc.
Crestron
Douglas
Hubbell Building Automation
Wattstopper
NEMA 1 surface mounted (unless otherwise indicated) steel enclosure with lockable,
hinged door.
Minimum of 16 gauge steel construction, 18 gauge for remote relay enclosures (8 or
less relays).
Completely painted with baked enamel paint or powder coated process finish.
Galvanized steel enclosure can is acceptable.
Code gauge steel barrier shall separate the load voltage(s) and the Class 2 control
voltage compartments of the panel.
16 AWG steel barrier shall separate the load voltages, 120 VAC and 277 VAC when
both are present.
Panels must be available in various relay increments up to 48 relays per enclosure.
Panels must be able to be fully populated to maximum relay capacity without requiring
the addition of any cards, additional electronics or additional power supply.
BASIC LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL COMPONENTS
1. Microprocessor based controller, pre-assembled, plug-in electronic circuit boards
including controller motherboard.
2. Relays
a.
20 Amp, zero crossing relay type rated for 200,000 operations and suitable
for:
1)
20 amperes 277/480 VAC Ballast
2)
2400 watts tungsten, lamps
3)
20 amperes HID lamp and ballast
4)
1/2 HP, 120 VAC motor
5)
1.5 HP, 240-277 VAC motor
3. Switch input module(s): Provide switch contact input module(s) with sufficient
numbers of inputs to meet project requirements. Input types shall be completely user
programmable to accept any combination of momentary, or maintained and two or
three-wire switches.
4. Network module(s): Provide network communications modules of the types and in
the quantities required to connect all LCP's in the network, work stations, laptops,
LAN systems and specified interface systems.
26 09 43-9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
5. Interconnect cables: Provide all necessary interconnect cables for the LCP, control
work station, laptop (when utilized for maintenance or program entry).
6. Power supply: Provide dual voltage (120 VAC and 277 VAC) transformer with
primary and secondary fusing and LED power ON indicator.
7. Required accessories: provide accessories required by this specification for the
operation capabilities required and described.
8. Nonvolatile memory or Lithium battery backup shall be provided so data is not lost
during power outages or brown outs lasting up to 1 year.
9. Filtering to reduce noise emissions on incoming power.
10. TVSS to mitigate impact from power line spikes.
C.
NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS BUS
D.
1. System shall communicate over one of the following bus mediums:
a.
UL listed Category 5e, 4-pair UTP sequential daisy chain with end-of-line
termination device
2. RS-485 communications protocol
3. Lighting Control LAN Link: Provide appropriate lighting control LAN module for each
lighting control panel
Operational Features
1. Programmable astronomical date and time clock with a minimum of 1 year power loss
protection, automatic leap year and daylight savings time adjustment.
2. Relay Control
a.
Individual control of each relay position in the network
b.
Status indication of the state of each relay
c.
Manual override of each relay
d.
Sequenced ON of all relays with programmable stagger times to reduce the
in-rush effects on the power system
e.
Programmable grouping of relays from one relay per group up to every
relay in the entire system.
f.
Ability to assign any relay to any group without rewiring
g.
Positive relay status feedback and failure to respond warning
3. Programmable OFF flash warning, programmable from 10 seconds to 60 minutes of
warning time.
4. Refresh commands to outputs to assure proper status; refresh command interval on a
user programmable rate of once every 3-30 minutes.
5. Any switch shall be able to control any relay or group of relays anywhere on the
network
6. Programmable switch input module with sufficient capacity to meet the project
requirements and capable of accepting inputs from dry contacts, 2 or 3-wire,
maintained or momentary switches.
7. Programmable switch input timers with intervals up to 18 hours
8. Software capability to run a diagnostic check of the memory at any time. If the panel
detects any problem with its memory after power up it shall provide warning indication
a problem exists.
9. Ability for each LCP to function independently of other panels if a network failure
occurs. All the features listed here shall continue to operate.
10. Automatic program re-boot and system restoration after a power outage of up to 14
days or more.
E.
Communications
26 09 43-10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
F.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
1. RS-485 and RS-232 serial communications ports connection for lighting control
network connection and laptop connection to any lighting control panel.
2. Internet Addressable Access
a.
Provide software and connectivity to the local area network to allow
individual users to have ON/OFF control of their lighting using Windows
based Software, a PC and an internet browser. Include multi-level
password protections
Programming Means and Methods: System shall accept control at each LCP via one or
all of the following:
1. Local Keypad and Display: built in keypad and alpha numeric display with all
commands in plain English.
2. Hand-held Programmer and Display: provide portable, handheld device with
operations and capabilities similar to the built-in keypad. Handheld device should
communicate with the LAN and any panelboard using a connection to any LCP via a
serial cable or with wireless infrared technology.
3. Laptop computer via software and a built-in modem with direct connection via onboard serial port and cable.
2.3
A.
EXTERNAL COMPONENTS and ACCESSORIES
Switches
1. General Switches
a.
All system switches shall be digitally addressable and connected to the
lighting control network bus with a single category 5, 4-pair unshielded
twisted pair cable
b.
Switch quantities of 1 to 6 switches on a single gang face plate
c.
Provide switches in the quantity and configurations indicated at each
station
d.
Engraved labeling capability for each switch button (stick on labels are not
acceptable.)
e.
LED Annunciation
1)
On Status for each button
2)
Location LED - always on, for each switch group location
2. Key Switches: Provide digitally addressable key switch where indicated on the
documents
3. Switch Wall Plates: Provide stainless steel or as selected by architect wall plates.
Submit sample of each type when requested.
B.
Occupancy Sensor: Provide compatible occupancy sensors as required by contract
drawings. Connect to switch input interface module and program the desired function.
C.
Photo sensors (interior daylighting applications): Provide digitally addressable photo
sensor daylight sensor(s) and necessary interface module(s). Photo sensor signal shall
be transmitted to the LCP or digital addressable ballast for processing and control.
System shall display real time readout in footcandles and trigger point(s) shall be
programmable.
2.4
A.
SOFTWARE
Time of Day Scheduling (TOD)
26 09 43-11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
1. Scheduling by building, area, zone, groups of zones, individually controlled lighting
zones and groups of individually controlled lighting zones
2. Each schedule shall provide beginning and ending dates and times (hours: minutes)
3. Weekly repeating schedule capability, i.e. between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Monday
through Friday
4. Capability of entering date schedules in advance
5. Schedules shall be self-deleting when effective dates have passed
6. Leap years shall be adjusted automatically
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Where shown on the drawings, the contractor shall furnish and install programmable
lighting controllers of the quantities, sizes and types indicated and required by contract
documents.
B.
All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer requirements and in
compliance with all applicable local and national codes and standards.
C.
Wiring
1. Install manufacturer's recommended wiring types in quantities and types required and
indicated on approved shop drawings.
2. Do not mix low voltage control (less than 120 VAC), 120 VAC or 277 VAC conductors
in the control panelboards. Provide metal dividers that comply with NEC.
3. Place manufacturer supplied end-of-line terminators at each end of line in the system
bus per manufacturer instructions.
4. Neatly lace and rack wiring in cabinets.
5. Terminate Category 5, 4 twisted pair cable on the RJ45 jack connectors provided with
each lighting control device, per manufacturer instructions.
6. Do not exceed 80% of manufacturer's maximum circuit bus length to any system
connection point.
7. All items on the bus shall be connected per manufacturer's directions. "Tee tap bus
connectivity is preferred, but series (daisy chain) is acceptable.
8. All screw post control and power conductor terminations shall have Thomas & Betts
StaKon™ ring or spade lug connectors.
9. Torque all screws and terminations to manufacturer's recommended torque-tightening
values when provided or to UL 468A and 468B which ever is applicable.
10. All terminations in panel enclosures shall be on UL listed terminal strips suitable for
the application and location intended.
D.
Labeling
1. Lighting Control Panels – provide label for each lighting control panel per Section
260553 - Identification For Electrical Systems shall include:
LCP Unique Identification
Control Power Fed from (panelboard and circuit number)
Communication Bus from (device identification and location)
Communication Bus to (device identification and location)
2. Relays – each relay to have unique identification label that is consistent with software
documentation, drawings and schedules.
26 09 43-12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
3. Switches –label all switches (behind the plates with permanent marking pen) to
indicate point identification that is consistent with software documentation, drawings
and schedules.
4. Dry contacts input devices, other input devices – provide engraved laminated label
black letters on white background) on each device to indicate point identification that
is consistent with software documentation, drawings and schedules.
5. Conductors – provide sleeve wire tags for each conductor terminated in the LCP. Tag
shall indicate where conductor goes and what signal is on the conductor. T&B series
or equal. Example: 277 V SW to Load or 1HL2A-12 or To PC-LCP12A-I12.
6. Engrave and label multi-gang switch plates to indicate load controlled. Submit
proposed labels prior to manufacturing for review and approval by Owner’s
representative.
7. Provide code required sign on lighting control panels to warn of the danger of high
voltage.
3.2
PROGRAMMING
A.
Factory: Provide all initial programming and a complete graphics package from the
factory. Programming to comply with Owner approved schedules, control zones and
identification nomenclature
B.
On-site: Time of Day Schedules: Contractor to provide all field updates based on asbuilt revisions and directives from the Owner. This will include programming and data
input to initialize the system with the control schedules and schemes agreed to by the
Owner's representative.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate with other trades to provide connections and
interface devices to ensure all interoperability described and required by this specification
and other related sections of the specification.
B.
3.4
Sequences of Operation: Coordinate with other trades to provide complete sequence of
operation descriptions for all interfaces. Provide electronic versions of final sequences in
the most current version of Microsoft Word format. Text font shall be Arial, 12 point with
1" margins on all sides. Provide one framed 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch copy of each sequence
for mounting adjacent to the equipment as directed by the Owner's representative
DAYLIGHTING SENSORS
A.
Provide sensors for each different interior daylight exposure including skylights.
B.
Comply with local energy code for number of daylight zones and sensors.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide a factory trained and authorized field service
technician to inspect and approve all lighting control field installation work (equipment
installation, terminations, programming), make all necessary adjustment and calibrations,
test operation of the completed system, demonstrate system to Owner's representative
and assist with the training.
B.
Testing
1. Complete all manufacturer's recommended commissioning and startup procedures.
26 09 43-13
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
2. Test continuity of all circuits
3. Complete all testing specified in Part 1
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Occupancy Sensors: Provide a factory trained and authorized field service technician to
aim and adjust sensitivity of each occupancy sensor to obtain desired operational
reliability and sensing with final furniture and equipment layouts.
B.
Photocells: Provide a factory trained and authorized field service technician to aim and
adjust sensitivity of each photocell to obtain desired ON/OFF operational thresholds of
the photocell control.
C.
Clock: Provide a factory trained and authorized field service technician to demonstrate
and make the final clock, calendar and latitude settings for accurate and reliable
operation of the system. Perform activities at the first training session.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
The contractor shall remove dirt and debris from the equipment.
B.
Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materials
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.8
A.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Contractor shall schedule demonstration and training for the designated Owner staff. The
training shall take place on site and shall include:
1. System overview
2. Walk through project to view all equipment locations and labels to verify the record
drawings
3. Review of O&M manual
4. Review of record drawings
5. Review of all program schedules
6. Review of all LCP relay panel schedules
7. Review of manufacturer's recommended maintenance
8. Demonstration of correct functioning of all hardware and software
9. Demonstration of system startup and restoration after power loss
10. Demonstrate preparation of graphics, changing of set points, setting schedules,
defining input points, assigning global schedule, overrides, holiday scheduling, etc.
11. Demonstrate online technical assistance with factory.
B.
Training Schedule
1. First Session
a.
Shall be scheduled after contractor has commissioned the system and
verified operation. The O&M manuals and record drawings must be
completed because the training will also be used to verify the accuracy of
these documents
b.
8-hour session
c.
Factory start-up technician or certified Manufacturer’s representative shall
lead training
2. Follow-up
26 09 43-14
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
a.
b.
C.
NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SECTION 26 09 43
Shall be scheduled for the eleventh month after substantial completion and
prior to expiration of the one year warranty period.
4-hour session
Training Facilities
1. Provide classroom type space with a laptop computer connected to the Lighting
Control LAN and to a projector.
2. Provide screen
3. Provide lunch and refreshment service as appropriate
D.
Printed Training Material
1. Include manufacturer's published operating manual for each attendee
END OF SECTION 26 09 43
26 09 43-15
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Distribution panelboards.
2.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7
1.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
a.
Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances
prior to submitting shop drawings.
2.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
3.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
4.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
5.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
6.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
7.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective
devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
26 24 16-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
C.
D.
1.6
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
Test procedures used.
2.
Test results that comply with requirements.
3.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.
2.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
2.
Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:
One spares for each panelboard.
3.
Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and
type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
4.
Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each
size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.
Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
26 24 16-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.9
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
1.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
2.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C to plus
104 deg F (plus 40 deg C).
B.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
C.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Bellevue College no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner’s written permission.
3.
Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURER
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
26 24 16-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
B.
2.2
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DISTRIBUTION, LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCHCIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
B.
Enclosures: Flush or surface-mounted cabinets, as indicated on drawings or panel schedules.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, NEMA 1
2.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged
trim cover. Key identically.
3.
Where two cabinets are located adjacent to each other in finished areas, provide matching trim, same height.
4.
Where remote controlled switch or contactor is mounted in panelboard, mount on same
frame as panelboard interior, with dedicated access door and key lock
5.
Finishes:
a.
Panels and Trim: Steel factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat.
b.
Back Boxes: Galvanized steel
6.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover, type written. Hand written is not acceptable.
C.
Incoming Mains Location: Top or bottom, as determined by contractor unless noted otherwise.
D.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
Material: [Tin-plated aluminum]
2.
Panelboards shall have full ampacity bussing throughout and shall be full size in regard
to number of possible pole spaces. Bussing shall be identified with phases reading left
to right.
3.
Neutral bus shall be mounted independently of equipment ground bus, and in no case
shall neutral bus be used as equipment ground bus, or vice versa.
4.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box and located on back of panelboard. Shall have lug or lugs
from equipment grounding conductor from switchboard or distribution board and screw
type terminals for connection of equipment green ground wire in same quantity as
number of poles in panel.
5.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as
suitable for nonlinear loads.
6.
Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.
E.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1.
Material: [Tin-plated aluminum] [Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity].
2.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.
3.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, UL listed for both steel
and aluminim.
26 24 16-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
4.
5.
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extracapacity neutral bus.
F.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
G.
Panelboards rated for 400 amps and above shall accept 225 amp frame circuit breakers.
H.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or
remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and
type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected shortcircuit rating by an NRTL.
2.3
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 400 A and larger.
2.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3.
Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
Instantaneous trip.
b.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
2
d.
Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I t response.
4.
Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault
protection (6-mA trip).
6.
Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).
7.
Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V,
single-pole configuration.
8.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
b.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
c.
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d.
Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with fieldadjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.
e.
Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit
breaker trips.
f.
Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key
shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.
g.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking
ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.
26 24 16-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
h.
i.
j.
B.
2.4
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a
single unit.
Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in
off position.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
Circuit breakers shall be the same manufacturer as panelboard.
Where spare is indicated, panelboard shall be provided with the specified branch circuit breaker, full ampacity bussing and mounting hardware. Where space is indicated, panelboard shall
be provided with full ampacity bussing and mounting hardware to accommodate future installation of branch circuit breaker.
NAMEPLATES
A.
Engraved nameplates per Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems permanently
attached to panelboard front. Include panel name with 1/4" letters, area served, voltage, phase
and wire (e.g., 2N1, 208Y/120, 3 phase, 4 wire, 480Y/277, 3 phase, 4 wire) in 1/8 inch characters. When project has more than one switchboard include switchboard fed from (e.g., Fed
from SWBD. 4BP).
B.
Nameplate color: Normal system - white letters on black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section Cast-inPlace Concrete.
1.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.
2.
For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base
and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.
5.
Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.
26 24 16-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
D.
Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
F.
Panelboards installed recessed in fire rated walls shall be adequately boxed or backed with fire
rated material and shall be approved by Fire Marshal. The final construction shall equal or exceed fire rating of the wall.
G.
Locate in dedicated spaces. Coordinate project construction so piping, ducts, etc. are routed
around dedicated spaces above and in front of panelboards per code.
H.
Verify space available with equipment sizes and code required working clearances prior to installation.
I.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
J.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
K.
Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or
space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits
into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
L.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
WIRING
A.
Conform to applicable sections of these specifications and NEMA PB 1.1. Conductors and
terminations per Section 260519 Copper Conductors and Cables. Coverplates in open knockouts.
B.
Panelboards shall be wired and connected after installation at locations shown. Pre-wiring off
site and splicing of branch circuit in wireway above or below panelboard is not permitted.
3.4
CIRCUIT INDEX AND LABELS
A.
Typed circuit index with odd circuits on left, even circuits on right, listing each circuit by number
with complete load designation, (i.e. Receptacle room ___, lights room ___, etc.). Room
names/numbers per actual room identification assigned by owner at project completion (assigned room numbers may differ from drawings). Mount inside door with transparent protective
cover. Provide number labels on circuit breakers to match index.
B.
Install nameplate as per Part 2.
3.5
GROUNDING
A.
Provide per Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
26 24 16-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.6
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
CABINET PAINTING
A.
3.7
Cabinets furnished prime painted: Field paint to match wall color. (See Division 9 Painting).
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with an engraved nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." attached to panelboard front Include panel name with 1/4" letters, area served, voltage,
phase and wire (e.g., 2NL1, 208Y/120, 3 phase, 4 wire, 480Y/277, 3 phase, 4 wire) in 1/8 inch
characters. When project has more than one switchboard include switchboard fed from (e.g.,
Fed from SWBD. MSB1).
C.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
D.
Nameplate color:
1.
Normal system - white letters on black.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
D.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
E.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days
after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove
front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
b.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of
each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
c.
Instruments and Equipment:
26 24 16-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1)
PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for
device.
F.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.9
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges [as indicated] [as specified in Division 26 Section
"Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."]
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
CLEANING
Prior to final inspection, clean panelboard interiors, adjust trims, covers, hinges and locks and
refinish marred or scratched covers to original conditions. Remove paint splatters and other
spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
PROTECTION
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
26 24 16-9
Name:
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL RM. 198
L5
Sparling
Location:
277/480V
3Ø
19†
17†
15†
13†
11†
9†
7†
5†
3†
1†
#
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Lighting LTG - XFMR ROOM
-------REMOTE RADIATOR FAN
-------REMOTE RADIATOR FAN
Mech REMOTE RADIATOR FAN
Lighting LTG - 175, 180 184, 191
Lighting EMERG LTG - 2ND FLOOR
Lighting EMERG LTG - IST FLOOR
Description
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
3.70
3.70
3.70
2.80
1.80
0.40
0/1
0/1
0/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
-------
-------
20/3
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
---
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
21†
Space
0.00
CB *
23†
Space
Load
25
Space
Serves:
27
19184
60A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
1.10
0.00
0.00
0.40
0.00
0.00
1.43
0.00
0.45
0.70
Spare
Equip VAV WAREHOUSE DOOR
Spare
Spare
Mech VAV - 113
Spare
Spare
Lighting EMERG LTG - 2ND FLOOR OPEN AREA
Spare
Lighting EMERG LTG - 2ND FLOOR
Lighting EMERG LTG- 1ST FLOOR
Description
22†
20†
18†
16†
14†
12
10
8†
6
4
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
14,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.00
Single Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
24†
Load
•
20/1
CB
Spare
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
0.00
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
•
0/1
0.00
0.00
Space
Space
Space
30
28
26
6.50
ØC
0.00
ØB
0/1
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
0/1
5.95
•
7.72
ØA
•
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
1
11
Connected KVA
29
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
LIFE SAFETY PANEL
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
x 125%
NEC Feed Amps
x 100%
NEC Feeder Factors
9
125% of Largest
Demand Amps
1
Demand KVA
7.58
17
NEC Demand Factor
x 100%
1.10
Conn KVA
7.58
14.37
Load Type
Lighting
x 100%
11/17/2015
30
17
x 100%
28
1.10
23.05
11.50
24 Amps
Equip
20.17
Seq. 5
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Sparling
Name:
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
29†
27†
25†
23†
21†
19†
17†
15†
13†
11†
9†
7†
5†
3†
1†
#
Spare
Equip NORTHSTAR KSU
Equip E911 CONTROLLER
Equip VOICE MAIL SYSTEM
Recept CALL ACCT & PBX OPX RECP
Recept EQUIP RACK RECP - RM 191
Recept EQUIP RACK RECP - RM 191
Recept EQUIP RACK RECP - RM 191
Recept EQUIP RACK RECP - RM 191
Recept CATV RECP - RM 191
Recept SECURITY RECP - RM 191
Recept ANTENNA RECP - RM 191
Recept PA SYSTEM RECP - RM 191
Recept RECP - RM 191
Recept COMP RCPT - RM 191
Recept RECEPTACLES, ROOM 181
Recept COMP. REC., ROOM 181
Description
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.20
0.50
0.40
1.00
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.20
0.30
0.20
0.30
0.20
0.20
0.90
0.90
20/1
-------
-------
0/3
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
---
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
31†
Panel UPS-SUB
0.00
UPS
33†
-------UPS-SUB
0.00
Serves:
35†
-------UPS-SUB
CB *
37†
Spare
Load
39†
19184
150A Main CB
Surface Mounted
Panel
2.20
Equip UNISYS MINI
Description
6†
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
CB *
CB
Equip FILE SERVER
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
30/1
0.70
Load
•
CB
14†
20/1
•
16†
8†
Recept EQUIP RACK RECP - RM 191
18†
Equip FILE SERVER
Recept EQUIP RACK RECP - RM 191
20†
0.70
0.70
Recept EQUIP RACK RECP - RM 191
22†
CB
0.70
Spare SPARE
24†
20/1
•
0.70
Equip PBX & VM WORKSTATION
26†
10†
CB
0.00
Equip PBX BATTERY
28†
Equip FILE SERVER
CB
1.20
-------PBX BATTERY
30†
0.70
20/1
CB
3.60
Equip LASER PRINTER
CB
20/1
CB
3.60
Equip PBX
34
32†
20/1
•
20/1
CB
0.90
-------PBX
36
12†
20/1
---
0.50
Equip TELECOM RACK SERVER (152)
38†
Recept RECPS - GTW BACKBOARD
40/2
CB
0.50
Equip TELECOM RACK SERVER (152)
40†
0.70
-------
CB
0.50
Spare
42†
CB
20/1
---
0.50
Spare
20/1
•
20/2
CB
0.00
Spare
Equip EQUIP RACK RECP - RM 191
-------
CB
0.00
20/1
20/1
CB
0.00
0.70
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
CB
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
20/1
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
11/17/2015
75
48
27
NEC Feed Amps
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
20/1
ØC
•
ØB
9.00
•
ØA
7.20
NEC Feeder Factors
11.00
x 100%
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Demand Amps
x 100%
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
27
NEC Demand Factor
File:
Notes:
48
Demand KVA
9.80
Conn KVA
17.40
Load Type
x 100%
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
75
9.80
27.20
17.40
75 Amps
Recept
27.20
Seq. 6
Equip
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
X
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31†
29†
27†
25†
23†
21†
19†
17†
15†
13†
11†
9†
7†
5†
3†
1†
#
Recept COMP RECPS - 180
-------TO ROOM 107
Spare TO ROOM 107
Spare
Equip CONTROL PNL FF 1
Mech CRU-3 CONTROLS
Mech CRU-1 CONTROLS
-------911 PNL 12B
Spare 911 PNL 12B
-------TO ROOM 107
Spare TO ROOM 107
Lighting EMERG LTG- FIRST FLOOR
Lighting EMERG LTG - 252
Lighting EMERG LTG - 2ND FLOOR
Lighting EMERG LTG - 201
Spare
Spare
Lighting N. LOBBY DISPLAY CASE
Description
0.00
0.18
0.18
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.10
0.30
0.20
0.20
0.00
0.00
0.20
0/1
0/1
20/1
20/1
-------
30/2
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
-------
20/2
-------
20/2
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
---
CB
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Recept RECPS - 180
0.00
Serves:
35
Space
CB *
37
Space
Load
39
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.00
0.50
0.54
0.00
0.00
0.40
0.20
0.40
0.40
0.50
0.00
0.20
0.75
0.00
0.40
0.90
0.10
0.10
-------
Spare
Equip FA DAMPERS
Mech FACP-181
Recept RECPS - CORRIDOR
Spare
Spare
Misc RECPTACLES, ROOM 213, EMERG LTG
Mech CRU-2 CONTROLS
Recept RECPS - 214
Recept RECPS - 214
Recept RECPS - 126, 138
Spare
Recept RECPS - 138
Misc 24-HR LTG/CC/RECPS - 2ND FLR CORRDIOR
Spare
Misc P REACTION COMP
Misc EVIDANCE REFER
Equip WTR HTR CONTRACTOR CAB
Equip AHU CONTRACTOR ENCLOSURE
Description
42†
40†
38†
36†
34†
32†
30†
28
26†
24†
22†
20†
18†
16†
14†
12†
10†
8†
6†
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.00
Mech VAV-113
Single Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.80
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
---
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/2
CB
•
-------
ØC
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
20/1
ØB
3.83
•
ØA
1.60
•
2.92
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
x 125%
2
7
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
x 100%
7
NEC Demand Factor
File:
Notes:
3
x 100%
6
3
7
x 100%
NEC Feed Amps
1.00
2
125% of Largest
NEC Feeder Factors
x 100%
2.40
7
Demand Amps
1.00
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
0.60
7
Demand KVA
Lighting
2.40
x 100%
2.45
Conn KVA
Recept
0.60
2.38
Load Type
Equip
x 100%
11/17/2015
24
x 100%
24
2.45
8.83
1.90
23 Amps
Misc
8.35
Seq. 9
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL RM. 198
L3
Sparling
Location:
277/480V
3Ø
31†
29†
27†
25†
23†
21†
19†
17†
15†
13
11
9
7
5†
3†
1†
#
Spare
Spare
Mech VAV-101
Spare
-------VAV-115
-------VAV-115
Mech VAV-115
Spare
Spare
Mech VAV 114
Mech VAV 110
Lighting 105-114 (NOTE#1)
Lighting 168-172 (NOTE#1)
Lighting LUNCH/OFFICES (NOTE#1)
Lighting 157-161 (NOTE#1)
Lighting LTG CORRIDOR
Lighting ltg room 124, 198, 123
Spare
Description
2.10
2.10
0.00
0.00
1.80
0.00
1.90
1.90
1.90
0.00
0.00
0.25
0.89
2.90
1.97
1.44
1.25
0.60
1.20
0.00
15/1
15/1
15/1
30/1
20/1
20/1
30/1
-------
-------
15/3
20/1
20/1
15/1
15/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
---
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Mech VAV-108
2.10
Serves:
35†
Mech VAV-107
CB *
37†
Mech VAV-106
Load
39†
19184
200A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
-------
-------
15/3
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
---
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
1.93
0.00
0.00
1.10
2.00
2.06
2.06
2.06
1.70
1.85
0.00
0.40
0.75
2.28
0.20
1.70
0.00
0.00
-------VAV-115
-------VAV-115
Mech VAV-115
Spare
Spare
Mech VAV-105
Mech VAV-112
-------VAV-109
-------VAV-109
Mech VAV-109
Lighting OUTDOOR LIGHTING
Lighting OUTDOOR LIGHTING
Spare
Lighting LTG LOADING AREA
Lighting SOUTH TOILET (NOTE#1)
Lighting 124 OPEN OFFICE CENTER (NOTE#1)
Lighting EXT BOLLARDS (CANOPY)
Lighting LTG 178, 180
Spare
Spare
Description
42†
40†
38†
36†
34†
32†
30†
28†
26†
24†
22†
20†
18†
16†
14†
12
10
8†
6†
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
14,000 AIC
15/1
CB
1.93
Mech VAV-116
Single Lugs
A B C
15/1
CB
1.93
Load
•
20/1
---
1.90
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
15/3
---
•
•
•
•
•
•
-------
CB
•
-------
11/17/2015
68
40
27
NEC Feed Amps
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
15/1
ØC
•
ØB
•
ØA
18.11
NEC Feeder Factors
15.80
x 125%
16.24
Demand Amps
125% of Largest
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
22
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER.
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
48
NEC Demand Factor
File:
Notes:
18.24
Demand KVA
39.88
Conn KVA
x 100%
Load Type
x 100%
70
18.24
58.12
31.90
60 Amps
Lighting
50.14
Seq. 11
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
L1
Sparling
Location:
277/480V
3Ø
21†
19†
17†
15†
13†
11†
9†
7
5
3
1
#
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Lighting LIGHTING FIRST FLOOR NORTH (NOTE#1)
Lighting SAOP (NOTE#1)
Lighting TOILET SHOWER (NOTE#1)
Lighting MECH CORR NORTH (NOTE#1)
Description
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.34
0.50
3.10
1.15
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
23†
Space
0.00
Serves:
25†
Space
CB *
27†
Space
Load
29†
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
0/1
0/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
3.05
3.36
0.00
2.10
2.10
2.10
0.20
1.33
0.68
0.48
0.30
0.00
0.60
Mech VAV - 104
Lighting OPEN OFFICE EAST
Lighting OPEN OFFICE WEST
Spare
Mech VAV - 102
Mech VAV - 102
Mech VAV - 102
Lighting CLERESTORY LTG
Lighting NORTH POLE PARKING
Lighting MAIN ENTRY M.V., SOFFIT M.V.
Lighting EXTERIOR LTG
Lighting EAST
Spare
Lighting LTG - 145, MECHANICAL
Description
32
30†
28†
26†
24†
22†
20†
18†
16†
14†
12†
10†
8†
6†
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
14,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.42
Mech VAV - 103
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
Space
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.89
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
0.00
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
8.48
ØC
0/1
ØB
•
6.30
•
8.92
NEC Feeder Factors
ØA
x 125%
11/17/2015
97
39
58
NEC Feed Amps
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
Demand Amps
125% of Largest
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
47
Connected KVA
31
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
EXIST. PANEL
45
NEC Demand Factor
File:
Notes:
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISITNG BREAKER.
38.78
Demand KVA
37.25
Conn KVA
x 100%
Load Type
x 100%
91
38.78
76.03
29.80
82 Amps
Lighting
68.58
Seq. 14
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
277/480V
3Ø
4W
7
5
3
1
#
Lighting LTG- 204-208 (NOTE#1), NW WR (R9)
Lighting COUNCIL CHAMBERS
Lighting LTG- 225-232 (NOTE#1), OPEN OFFICE (R8)
Lighting LTG- 225 (NOTE#1), OPEN OFFICE (R7)
Lighting LTG-211,212,216,217 (NOTE#1), NE WR (R6)
Lighting 213 (NOTE #1), CORRIDOR EAST (R5)
Description
1.10
0.90
1.40
2.63
3.10
2.40
1.50
0.40
-------
-------
30/3
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
---
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
3.00
3.00
2.60
1.65
2.20
2.30
2.50
-------EDH-1- 224 (NOTE #1)
-------EDH-1- 224 (NOTE #1)
Mech EDH-1- 224 (NOTE #1)
Lighting LTG-234 (NOTE#1)
Lighting NORTH ENTRY, ATRIUM (R10,R12)
Lighting LTG- 221, 222 (NOTE#1), OPEN OFFICE (R3)
Lighting LTG- 221 (NOTE#1), OPEN OFFICE NE (R2)
Lighting LTG - 218-221 (NOTE#1)OPENOFFICE NE (R1)
Description
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
14,000 AIC
A B C
20/3
---
3.00
Mech EDH-1 (NOTE #1)
22
Load
•
-------
---
9.00
Spare
•
•
•
•
•
-------
CB
0.00
•
•
•
•
•
0/1
0.00
Space
Space
Space
30
28
26
ØC
0.00
19.10
0.00
ØB
0/1
13.13
27
Demand Amps
125% of Largest
x 125%
NEC Feeder Factors
11/17/2015
64
29
34
NEC Feed Amps
0/1
ØA
•
12.65
•
•
40/1
CB
24
•
20/1
Spare
L2
Sparling
9
Mech DUCT HTR HIGHLANDS (NOTE#1)
1.10
20/1
CB
0.00
Name:
11
Mech CHILLER/CONDENSOR
1.10
20/1
CB
225A Main lugs only
Flush Mounted
13
-------(NOTE#1)
0.00
0/1
20/1
Single Lugs
15
-------#10 AWG WIRES
0.00
0/1
Spare
EAST CORRIDOR WALL
17
Spare
0.00
0/1
0.00
1ST FLOOR LTG MECHANICAL
19
Spare
0.00
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
CB
Location:
21
Space
0.00
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
20/1
Serves:
23
Space
CB *
25
Space
Load
27
19184
Connected KVA
29
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
(RX) = NEW RELAY NUMBER PANEL LCP-L2
REPLACEMENT PANEL. (NEW)
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
NOTE #1. EXISTING LOAD TO BE INTERCEPTED AND EXTENDED TO NEW PANEL. FIELD VERIFY WIRE SIZE.
33
NEC Demand Factor
NOTE#2. PROVIDE (6) 3/4" CONDUITS FROM PANEL STUBBED OUT TO ACCESS CEILING ABOVE. PROVIDE PULL STRINGS.
22.68
61
Demand KVA
x 100%
27.75
Conn KVA
22.68
50.43
Load Type
Lighting
x 100%
54 Amps
22.20
44.88
Seq. 15
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
M2
Sparling
Location:
277/480V
3Ø
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17†
15†
13†
11†
9†
7†
5†
3†
1†
#
-------WITH NEW
-------REPLACE EXISTING 30/3 BREAKER
Mech WH-2
-------WITH NEW
-------REPLACE EXISITNG 30/3 BREAKER
Mech WH-1
-------
-------
Spare
Space
Space
Space
-------DWH- 2
-------DWH- 2
Mech DWH- 2
-------DWH-1
-------DWH-1
Mech DWH-1
Description
1.27
1.27
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
8.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
-------
-------
20/3
-------
-------
50/3
-------
-------
50/3
-------
-------
15/3
0/1
0/1
0/1
-------
-------
30/3
-------
-------
30/3
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
4W
33
Mech DUMB WAITER
1.27
Serves:
35
-------DUMB WAITER
CB *
37†
-------DUMB WAITER
Load
39†
19184
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
NOTE#2. NEW BREAKER
400A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
CB *
CB
0.00
0.00
0.00
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Mech EDH-11
Description
14†
12†
10†
8†
6†
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
14,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
16†
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.00
Space
•
•
30/1
CB
0.00
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
0.00
•
20/1
CB
•
•
•
•
•
•
0.00
Space
20
18†
0/1
26
22
28
Spare
Spare
30
0.00
-------
32
CB
0.00
-------
34
20/3
0.00
Spare
36
24
0.00
-------
38
-------
---
0.00
-------
40
0.00
---
0.00
Mech RTU-5 (NOTE#2)
42
---
-------
CB
0.00
-------RTU-5 (NOTE#2)
-------
-------
---
13.87
-------RTU-5 (NOTE#2)
-------
20/3
---
13.87
0.00
-------
CB
13.87
---
-------
---
-------
100/3
---
20/3
-------
ØC
•
0/1
20/1
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
11/17/2015
309
303
6
NEC Feed Amps
------ØB
41.14
•
ØA
41.14
•
41.14
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
x 100%
NEC Feeder Factors
6
125% of Largest
Demand Amps
363
Demand KVA
5.10
369
NEC Demand Factor
x 100%
301.43
Conn KVA
5.10
306.53
Load Type
Equip
x 100%
296 Amps
241.15
246.25
Seq. 16
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
M1
Sparling
Location:
277/480V
3Ø
31
29
27
25
23
21†
19†
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Spare
Mech VAV-2,11 (NOTE#2)
Mech VAV-5 (NOTE#2)
Spare
Mech VAV-3 (NOTE#2)
Spare
Mech VAV-1 (NOTE#2)
Mech HEATER CELL CORR
Mech EXHAUST FAN CELL CORR
-------RTU-9 (NOTE #1)
-------RTU-9 (NOTE #1)
Mech RTU-9 (NOTE #1)
-------AHU-CU-3, AHU-3 (NOTE #1)
-------AHU-CU-3, AHU-3 (NOTE #1)
Mech AHU-CU-3, AHU-3 (NOTE #1)
-------
-------
Spare
Description
3.88
7.20
0.00
3.88
3.88
0.00
3.38
0.00
9.67
1.20
0.50
10.81
10.81
10.81
2.83
2.83
2.83
0.00
0.00
0.00
20/1
20/1
40/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
60/1
30/1
20/1
-------
-------
70/3
-------
-------
20/3
-------
-------
20/3
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
4W
33
Mech VAV-8
0.00
Serves:
35
Mech VAV-9 (NOTE#2)
CB *
37
Spare
Load
39
19184
Connected KVA
41
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
NOTE#1. EXISTING BREAKER TO BE REUSED.
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
NOTE#2. NEW BREAKER
400A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
Mech DC-2,3
Description
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
14,000 AIC
2.50
Single Lugs
CB *
CB
Load
A B C
20/1
8†
•
10†
6†
Space
12†
Mech DC-1
0.00
Space
14†
2.00
0/1
0.00
Space
16†
CB
0/1
0.00
Space
18†
20/1
•
0/1
0.00
Space
Mech DC-4
0/1
0.00
26
24†
0/1
-------GAS TANK GENERATOR
28
20†
---
1.70
Mech VAV-7 (NOTE#2)
30
Space
-------
---
11.66
Mech VAV-4 (NOTE#2)
32
0.00
-------
CB
10.19
Mech VAV-6 (NOTE#2)
34
0/1
80/1
CB
10.00
Spare
22†
70/1
CB
0.00
Mech VAV-10 (NOTE#2)
Equip GAS TANK GENERATOR
70/1
CB
3.88
-------GAS TANK GENERATOR
20/1
CB
1.70
3.00
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
1.70
CB
•
•
•
•
•
•
30/3
20/1
•
•
•
•
•
•
0/1
0/1
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Space
Space
Space
Space
42
40
38
36
ØC
0/1
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
11/17/2015
157
151
6
NEC Feed Amps
0/1
ØB
38.00
•
ØA
43.75
•
41.08
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
x 100%
NEC Feeder Factors
6
125% of Largest
Demand Amps
177
Demand KVA
5.10
183
NEC Demand Factor
x 100%
147.16
Conn KVA
5.10
152.26
Load Type
Equip
x 100%
148 Amps
117.73
122.83
Seq. 17
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
M3
Sparling
Location:
277/480V
3Ø
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
-------
Spare
-------
-------
Spare
-------
-------
Spare
-------WITH NEW
-------REPLACE EXISTING 20/3 BREAKER
Mech RTU-6
-------WITH NEW
-------REPLACE EXISTING 20/3 BREAKER
Mech RTU-4
-------
-------
Spare
Description
13.03
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
17.99
17.99
17.99
17.99
17.99
17.99
0.00
0.00
0.00
-------
-------
80/3
-------
-------
20/3
-------
-------
20/3
-------
-------
50/3
-------
-------
100/3
-------
-------
100/3
-------
-------
60/3
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
4W
31
-------
13.03
Serves:
33
Mech AHU-CU-1 (NOTE #1)
13.03
CB *
35
-------AHU-CU-1 (NOTE #1)
Load
37
-------AHU-CU-1 (NOTE #1)
Connected KVA
39
19184
NEC Demand Factor
x 100%
400A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
-------
-------
15/3
-------
-------
50/3
-------
-------
20/3
-------
-------
20/3
-------
-------
60/3
CB *
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2.84
2.84
2.84
3.81
3.81
3.81
9.15
9.15
9.15
-------
-------
Spare
-------
-------
Spare
-------
-------
Spare
-------
-------
Spare
-------AHU-2 (NOTE #1)
-------AHU-2 (NOTE #1)
Mech AHU-2 (NOTE #1)
-------AHU-1 (NOTE #1)
-------AHU-1 (NOTE #1)
Mech AHU-1 (NOTE #1)
-------AHU-CU-2 (NOTE #1)
-------AHU-CU-2 (NOTE #1)
Mech AHU-CU-2 (NOTE #1)
Description
42
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
14,000 AIC
15/3
---
0.00
Single Lugs
A B C
-------
CB
0.00
Load
•
-------
---
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ØC
•
•
50/3
--ØB
•
ØA
•
•
-------
•
-------
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
NEC Feed Amps
64.79
NEC Feeder Factors
250
64.79
Demand Amps
125% of Largest
64.79
292
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
292
11/17/2015
250
242.98
Seq. 18
242.98
Demand KVA
41
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
Conn KVA
194.38
194.38
234 Amps
NOTE#1. EXISTING BREAKER TO BE REUSED.
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
Load Type
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
M4
Sparling
Location:
277/480V
3Ø
29
27
25†
23†
21†
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Space
Space
Space
Space
Mech UH-1
Mech UH-2
Mech UH-3
Mech EF-1 (NOTE#1)
-------
-------
Spare
-------
-------
Spare
-------
-------
Spare
Description
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.70
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
25/1
25/1
25/1
25/1
-------
-------
80/3
-------
-------
20/3
-------
-------
20/3
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
---
---
CB
4W
31
Space
0.00
Serves:
33
Space
0.00
CB *
35
Space
Load
37
Space
Connected KVA
39
19184
x 100%
NEC Demand Factor
400A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
30/1
30/1
50/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
25.36
25.36
4.20
0.00
3.00
0.00
-------RTU-3 (NOTE#2)
-------RTU-3 (NOTE#2)
Mech RTU-3 (NOTE#2)
Mech DC-17
Spare
Mech EDH-11
Spare
Description
18
16
14
12
10
8†
6†
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
14,000 AIC
150/3
---
25.36
Mech RTU-7 (NOTE#2)
20
Single Lugs
A B C
-------
---
25.36
-------RTU-7 (NOTE#2)
22
Load
•
-------
CB
25.36
-------RTU-7 (NOTE#2)
•
•
•
•
150/3
---
25.36
•
•
•
•
-------
---
•
-------
24
28
Mech RTU-8 (NOTE#2)
30
19.91
Space
32
CB
Space
34
150/3
•
0.00
Space
36
26
0.00
Space
38
-------RTU-8 (NOTE#2)
0/1
0.00
Space
40
19.91
0/1
0.00
Space
42
---
0/1
0.00
Space
-------
•
0/1
0.00
Space
-------RTU-8 (NOTE#2)
•
0/1
0.00
19.91
•
•
•
0/1
0.00
---
•
•
•
0/1
-------
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
0/1
ØC
•
ØB
71.12
•
ØA
74.12
289
NEC Feed Amps
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
125% of Largest
NEC Feeder Factors
11/17/2015
289
333
333
Seq. 19
Demand Amps
76.02
276.58
276.58
Demand KVA
41
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
NOTE#2. NEW BREAKER
221.27
Conn KVA
221.27
266 Amps
NOTE#1. EXISTING BREAKER TO BE REUSED
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
Load Type
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
P1
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31†
29†
27
25
23†
21†
19†
17†
15†
13†
11†
9†
7
5
3
1†
#
Mech CP-1 (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - 130,141,142
Recept RECPS - 130, 141
Spare
Mech AHU-2,3 CONTROLS (NOTE#1)
Mech AHU-1 CONTROLS (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - TTB1
Spare
Recept RECPS - 130, 192, VAULT
Recept DEV. SERVICES (219)
Recept RECPS - 127, W STAIR
Recept RECPS - 128
Recept DEV. SERVICES (219)
Mech EF-5,6
Equip COPIER DEV. SERVICES (219) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - 194, 196, 197
Recept RECPECTACLES ROOF
Equip COPIER ROOM
Description
0.30
0.50
0.26
0.50
0.40
0.00
0.56
0.28
0.40
0.00
0.90
1.08
1.08
1.08
0.72
0.75
0.50
0.36
0.54
0.80
15/1
15/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Mech VAV-1,2,3,10,11 CONTROLS (NOTE#1)
0.30
Serves:
35
Mech VAV-4,5,6 CONTROLS (NOTE#1)
CB *
37
Mech VAV-7,8,9 CONTROLS (NOTE#1)
Load
39
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.72
0.72
0.72
0.72
0.72
1.08
Spare
Recept IT WORK (136) (NOTE#1)
Recept PLUGMOLD IT WORK (136) (NOTE#1)
Recept PLUGMOLD IT WORK (136) (NOTE#1)
Recept IT TRAIN (138) (NOTE#1)
Recept IT TRAIN (138) (NOTE#1)
Recept IT TRAIN (138) (NOTE#1)
Recept CERT CONF. (139) (NOTE#1)
Description
16†
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
1.08
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Load
•
20/1
CB
18†
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
Spare
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
0.00
•
15/1
CB
•
•
•
-------
20/2
-------
20/2
-------
30/2
-------
---
CB
---
CB
---
CB
---
0.00
1.04
1.04
1.56
1.56
1.20
1.20
0.00
0.00
Space
-------AC-2, CU-2 (NOTE#2)
Mech AC-2, CU-2 (NOTE#2)
-------AC-1, CU-1 (NOTE#2)
Mech AC-1, CU-1 (NOTE#2)
-------COPIER ROOM 248
Equip COPIER ROOM 248
-------
Space
36
34
32
30
28
26†
24†
22
20
30/1
---
CB
CB
1.56
1.56
0.00
-------AC-3, CU-3 (NOTE#2)
Mech AC-3, CU-3 (NOTE#2)
Spare
40
38†
42
20/2
0/1
20/2
20/1
•
•
•
•
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
------ØC
•
ØB
8.88
•
ØA
9.33
NEC Feeder Factors
25
9.58
x 100%
42
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Demand Amps
x 100%
Connected KVA
41
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
NOTE#2. NEW BREAKER
74
125% of Largest
11/17/2015
140
74
25
NEC Feed Amps
26.63
50
Demand KVA
8.90
NEC Demand Factor
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
17.84
Conn KVA
43.26
x 100%
Load Type
Recept
x 100%
148
8.90
53.37
14.27
184 Amps
Equip
66.43
Seq. 21
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
P5
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31†
29
27
25
23†
21†
19†
17
15†
13
11†
9†
7†
5
3
1
#
Recept RECPS - 192 (OFFICE)
Recept RECPS - 192 (OFFICE)
Recept FLR RECPS - 252
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Recept COFFEE BAR (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - 249
Recept RECPS - 249
Recept RECPS - 248
Recept RECPS - 248
Recept RECPS - 248
Recept COMP. RECPS - 246, 247
Recept COMP. RECPS - 248
Recept COMP. RECPS 248
Recept RECPS - 253
Equip TELECOM RACK IDF/AV (175) (NOTE#1)
Equip TELECOM RACK IDF/AV (175) (NOTE#1)
Equip TELECOM RACK IDF/AV (175) (NOTE#1)
Description
1.26
1.26
1.26
1.26
1.26
1.44
1.44
0.72
1.26
1.26
0.70
0.72
0.50
1.06
0.70
0.50
0.70
0.50
0.50
0.50
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Recept RECPS - 192 (OFFICE)
0.10
Serves:
35†
Recept RECPS - 192 (OFFICE)
CB *
37†
Equip CONTROL PWR PNL - CP
Load
39†
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
-------
30/2
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
1.26
1.26
0.90
1.26
1.50
1.50
0.18
1.08
1.08
0.50
1.44
1.08
1.44
1.44
Equip COPY MACHINE
Equip L4 LTG CONTACTOR
Recept RECP - 246
Recept RECP - 246
Recept CONF (220) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECP - 248
-------COPY MECH
Mech COPY MECH
Recept EOC 137
Recept IDF/AV (175)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Equip COPIER OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Description
32†
30†
28†
26†
24
22†
20†
18†
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.10
Single Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
1.50
Load
•
20/1
CB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
•
20/2
36
34†
38†
-------COPY MACHINE
40†
1.50
Panel CP
42†
---
-------CP
-------
•
0.00
-------CP
Recept CASHIER (221) (NOTE#1)
0.00
0.72
0.00
CB
•
---
0/3
---
20/1
•
-------
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
------ØC
•
ØB
11.36
•
ØA
12.86
56
14.42
NEC Feeder Factors
14
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Demand Amps
x 100%
10
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
56
x 100%
NEC Feed Amps
20.22
14
125% of Largest
Demand KVA
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
5.20
10
NEC Demand Factor
30.44
x 100%
81
Conn KVA
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
Recept
5.20
3.75
Load Type
Equip
29.17
11/17/2015
81
x 100%
107 Amps
3.00
38.64
Seq. 22
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Sparling
Name:
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Space
Space
Space
Lighting VIDEO STUDIO (135)
Lighting VIDEO STUDIO (135)
Recept EDITING (135-A)
Recept MCR/PCR (135-B)
Recept MCR/PCR (135-B)
Description
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.70
0.70
1.08
0.90
0.72
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
13
Space
0.00
P14
15
Space
0.00
Serves:
17
Space
CB *
19
Space
Load
21
19184
100A Main CB
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.08
1.08
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Recept VIDEO STUDIO (135)
Recept VIDEO STUDIO (135)
Equip AV RACK
Equip AV RACK
Equip AV RACK
Equip AV RACK
Description
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.00
•
•
•
•
•
ØC
•
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
20/1
ØB
2.66
•
ØA
3.18
•
2.42
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
5
Connected KVA
23
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
31
NEC Feed Amps
x 125%
10
NEC Feeder Factors
4
x 100%
Demand Amps
1.40
31
x 100%
Demand KVA
x 100%
11.30
10
NEC Demand Factor
1.40
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
45
Conn KVA
Lighting
12.60
3.50
Load Type
Recept
16.20
11/17/2015
46
x 100%
49 Amps
3.50
17.50
Seq. 24
Equip
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Sparling
Name:
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Recept MESSAGE CENTER (137-A)
Recept MESSAGE CENTER (137-A)
Recept ARES/VOST (137-B)
Recept ARES/VOST (137-B)
Equip DISPLAYS EOC (137)
Equip DISPLAYS EOC (137)
Equip DISPLAY EOC (137)
Equip COPIER EOC (137)
Description
0.00
0.00
0.90
0.72
0.90
0.72
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.50
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
13
Spare
0.00
P15
15
Spare
0.00
Serves:
17
Spare
CB *
19
Spare
Load
21
19184
100A Main CB
Surface Mounted
Panel
0.72
Recept EOC (137)
Recept EOC (137)
Description
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
CB *
CB
0.72
Recept EOC (137)
10
Single Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.72
Recept EOC (137)
12
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.72
Recept EOC (137)
•
20/1
CB
0.54
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
•
16
14
18
Recept EOC (137)
Space
20
0.72
Space
22
CB
0.00
Space
24
20/1
•
0/1
0.00
Space
Recept EOC (137)
0/1
0.00
Space
0.36
•
•
0/1
0.00
CB
•
•
0.00
ØC
0/1
20/1
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
0/1
ØB
2.74
•
ØA
3.08
•
3.42
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
NEC Feeder Factors
4
21
Connected KVA
23
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
x 100%
NEC Feed Amps
Demand Amps
x 100%
Demand KVA
4
21
NEC Demand Factor
7.74
Conn KVA
1.50
Load Type
x 100%
11/17/2015
26
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
26
7.74
9.24
1.50
26 Amps
Recept
9.24
Seq. 25
Equip
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
P2
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31†
29†
27†
25
23
21
19
17
15
13†
11†
9†
7†
5
3
1†
#
Recept RECPS - 197
Recept RECPS- SHOP
Equip DOOR MOTOR - SHOP
Equip DOOR MOTOR -SHOP
Mech EF-109, EF-7 & VAV-103
Recept RECEPTACLES - 184
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
Recept OFFICE (123) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECEPTACLES, ROOM 157 (NOTE#1)
Recept OFFICE (119) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - 145, 152
Recept RECPS - 152, UTIL CORR.
Recept RECPS - JAIL
Recept RECPS - MECH
Recept RECPS - 152, MECHAN, JAIL
Recept OPEN OFFICE (122) (NOTE#1)
Equip DISHWASHER - 152
Description
0.52
0.52
0.36
0.70
0.40
0.40
0.60
0.18
1.44
0.90
1.26
0.72
0.72
0.90
0.36
0.70
0.50
1.08
1.08
1.10
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Recept RECPS - 197
0.36
Serves:
35†
Recept RECPS - 197
CB *
37†
Recept RECPS - 197
Load
39†
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.40
0.20
0.60
0.00
0.90
0.90
0.90
Spare
Equip EVSE
Recept RECP - OUTSIDE P.O.
Mech EF-101
Spare
Equip FREEZER - 152
Equip MICROWAVE - 152
Equip FRIDGE - 152
Description
20†
18†
16†
14†
12†
10†
8†
6†
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.00
-------
22†
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
24†
Load
•
15/2
---
0.00
Recept RECPS - 142, UTIL CORR
•
•
•
•
•
•
-------
CB
0.36
26†
•
•
•
20/1
CB
Equip EVSE
•
20/1
1.00
32
30†
CB
Space
34
40/2
•
Equip DISPLAY CONF./IT TRAIN (138,139) (NOTE1)
36
28†
0.00
Recept REC., ROOMS 141,142, 146 & 147
38†
-------EVSE
0.20
Recept REC., ROOMS 140.141
40†
Recept OUTLET
0.18
Recept
42†
1.00
CB
0.72
Equip
0.36
CB
0.36
Recept RECPS - 197
---
20/1
CB
0.30
0/1
20/1
CB
1.08
CB
•
20/1
CB
------•
•
•
20/1
CB
20/1
•
•
•
20/1
ØC
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
20/1
ØB
8.62
•
ØA
7.92
•
7.72
NEC Feeder Factors
84
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Demand Amps
x 100%
4
22
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
84
x 100%
NEC Feed Amps
30.13
22
125% of Largest
Demand KVA
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
8.00
4
NEC Demand Factor
50.26
x 100%
110
Conn KVA
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
Recept
8.00
1.50
Load Type
Equip
39.63
11/17/2015
110
x 100%
165 Amps
1.20
59.46
Seq. 26
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
P6
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31
29†
27†
25†
23
21†
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Recept COMP. RECPS - 221, 212
Spare
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121)
Recept RECPS - 156
Recept RECPS - 157
Recept POWER POLE - 140
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - 221, 225
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #2 (223) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #2 (223) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (120) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (120) (NOTE#1)
Equip COPIER OPEN OFFICE (120) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP. REC., ROOM 157
Recept COMP. REC., JAIL & 157
Description
1.44
0.50
0.50
0.00
0.72
0.52
0.36
0.36
1.08
0.40
0.72
1.08
1.08
1.08
1.26
1.26
0.50
1.08
0.54
0.18
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Recept RECPS - 212
1.08
Serves:
35†
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
CB *
37†
Recept OFFICE (224,225,230) (NOTE#1)
Load
39
19184
Connected KVA
41
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Single Lugs
Panel
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
1.08
0.50
1.08
0.70
1.44
1.44
1.44
0.70
Recept OPEN OFFICE #1 (212) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #1 (212) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #2 (223) (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP. RECPS - 225
Recept OPEN OFFICE #2 (223) (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP. REC ., 140 & 141
Recept CORE DRILL DSC (212) (NOTE#1)
Recept CORE DRILL DSC (212) (NOTE#1)
Recept CORE DRILL DSC (212) (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP. REC., ROOM, 184 & 190
26†
24
22
20
18†
16
14†
12
10
8
6†
4
2
20/1
CB
1.08
Recept COMP. RECPS - 221
30
28†
#
20/1
CB
1.08
Recept RECPS - 221
32
Description
Load
20/1
CB
0.70
Recept OPEN OFFICE #1 (212) (NOTE#1)
34†
CB *
20/1
CB
0.70
Recept OPEN OFFICE #1 (212) (NOTE#1)
36†
A B C
20/1
CB
1.44
Recept RECPS - 194, 196
38†
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
20/1
CB
1.08
Recept RECPS - 196
40†
Recept OPEN OFFICE (121) (NOTE#1)
20/1
CB
0.36
Recept RECPS - 194, 196
42†
1.44
20/1
CB
0.52
Recept RECPS - 196
1.44
20/1
CB
0.36
Recept RECPS - 197
CB
20/1
CB
0.36
CB
20/1
CB
0.52
20/1
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
20/1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
ØC
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
20/1
ØB
12.80
•
ØA
11.54
•
10.86
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
NEC Feeder Factors
1
62
NEC Feed Amps
Demand Amps
x 100%
Demand KVA
x 100%
NEC Demand Factor
1
62
Conn KVA
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
0.50
22.35
Load Type
x 100%
11/17/2015
63
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
63
0.50
22.85
34.70
98 Amps
Recept
35.20
Seq. 27
Equip
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
CORRIDOR NORTHEAST EXIT
P3
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
43
41
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Spare
Spare
Spare
Recept 204 (NOTE#1)
Recept 252 (NOTE#1)
Recept 252 (NOTE#1)
Recept 218, 220, 221 (NOTE#1)
Recept 221 (NOTE#1)
Recept 221 (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP. RECPS - 218, 220 (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (212)
Recept COMP. RECPS - 221 (NOTE#1)
Recept 201 (NOTE#1)
Recept 212 (NOTE#1)
Recept 212 (NOTE#1)
Equip ROLLING DOORS
Recept DEV. SERVICES (219)
Equip SCANNER OPEN OFFICE #1 (212)
Equip COPIER OPEN OFFICE #1 (212)
Recept DISPLAY CONF RM (204)
Equip LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL LCP1 (NOTE #3)
-------(NOTE#1)
Mech WALL HEATER - 216 WOMEN'S EAST RR
Mech EF-12, 208, 212 (NOTE#1)
Description
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.40
0.90
0.70
0.72
0.70
0.70
0.54
1.62
0.90
0.40
0.50
0.90
0.70
1.08
0.70
0.50
0.56
0.10
0.75
0.75
0.92
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
-------
20/2
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
---
CB
CB
4W
45
Spare
0.00
Serves:
47
Spare
CB *
49
Spare
Load
51
19184
Connected KVA
53
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
225A Main lugs only
Flush Mounted
Panel
-------
20/3
20/1
20/1
20/1
-------
15/2
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
---
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.40
0.67
0.67
0.67
0.40
0.50
0.30
0.75
0.75
0.00
0.30
0.00
0.40
0.54
0.80
0.90
1.10
Mech WALL HEATER - 207, 208
Recept 216,217 (NOTE#1)
-------
-------(NOTE#1)
Mech DUCT HEATER -JANITOR
Equip DDC (NOTE#1)
Recept 209 (NOTE#1)
Mech SOUND MASKING CONT PNL - JAN (NOTE#1)
-------(NOTE#1)
Equip HAND DRYER - 208
Spare
Mech EDH-2 (NOTE#1)
Spare
Equip AUTOMATED LOBBY DOORS (NOTE#1)
Recept REFRIGERATOR BREAK RM (209)
Equip REFRIGERATOR BREAK RM (209)
Lighting TRACK COUNIL CHAMBERS
Mech EF-1-8,9,10,12,13,14,15, CF-1 (NOTE#1)
Description
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
-------
CB
0.75
-------(NOTE#1)
42
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.75
Mech WALL HEATER - 217 MENS EAST RR
Load
•
20/2
---
0.75
-------(NOTE#1)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-------
CB
0.75
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/2
---
•
------•
•
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
54
52
50
48
46
44
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
11/17/2015
0/1
ØC
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Seq. 28
0/1
ØB
8.23
•
ØA
9.53
•
9.43
NOTE#2. PROVIDE (6) 3/4" CONDUITS FROM PANEL STUBBED OUT TO ACCESS CEILING ABOVE. PROVIDE PULL STRINGS.
NEW PANEL P3.
NOTE#1. EXISTING PANEL IS TO BE DEMOLISHED. EXISTING LOADS TO REMAIN ARE TO BE INTERCEPTED AND EXTENDED TO
REPLACEMENT PANEL (NEW)
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
x 125%
20
56
4
x 100%
31
NEC Feed Amps
3
x 100%
NEC Feeder Factors
56
125% of Largest
Demand Amps
1.20
20
Demand KVA
x 100%
20.00
37
NEC Demand Factor
1.20
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
7.18
Conn KVA
Lighting
30.00
13.28
Load Type
Recept
x 100%
11/17/2015
110
x 100%
116
7.18
41.65
10.62
136 Amps
Equip
49.00
Seq. 28
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
COORIDOR NORTHEAST EXIT
P4
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
43
41
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Spare
Spare
Spare
-------
Spare
Equip DISPLAYS CONF RM (211)
Recept CONF RM (211)
Recept 209 (NOTE#1)
Recept 209 (NOTE#1)
Mech EWH- 102 (NOTE#1)
Mech EWH-101 (NOTE#1)
Recept KIOSKS
Recept 209 (NOTE#1)
Recept 209 (NOTE#1)
Recept FLOOR MTG - 209 (NOTE#1)
Equip FLOOR MTG - 209 (NOTE#1)
Recept 209 (NOTE#1)
Recept 209 (NOTE#1)
Equip DISPLAY LOBBY (202)
Recept COUNCIL CHMB (203)
Recept COUNCIL CHMB (203)
Recept COUNCIL CHMB (203)
Recept COUNCIL CHMB (203)
Recept COUNCIL CHMB (203)
Description
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.40
0.72
0.36
0.40
0.75
0.75
0.54
0.50
0.50
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.40
0.72
0.72
0.72
1.08
1.08
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
-------
30/2
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
45
Spare
0.00
Serves:
47
Spare
CB *
49
Spare
Load
51
19184
Connected KVA
53
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
225A Main lugs only
Flush Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.20
0.20
0.50
0.50
1.08
1.08
0.20
0.40
0.90
0.54
0.38
0.20
0.90
0.40
Recept RECPS - 225 (NOTE#1)
Recept 225 (NOTE#1)
Recept 223 (NOTE#1)
Recept 223 (NOTE#1)
Recept 248 (NOTE#1)
Recept 248 (NOTE#1)
Recept 221 & 221 (NOTE#1)
Recept 209 (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #1 (212)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #1 (212)
Recept 224 (NOTE#1)
Recept 224 & 225 (NOTE#1)
Recept 205, 205, EF-205 (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP REC, ROOM 252 (NOTE#1)
Equip PROJECTOR AND SCREEN (203)
Equip DISPLAY COUNCIL CHMB (203)
Recept FB COUNCIL CHMB. (203)
Recept UC FRIDGE, 209 (NOTE#1)
Description
40
38
36
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.40
Spare
42
Single Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.00
Lighting 209 (NOTE#1)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
0.30
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
•
•
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
Space
54
52
50
48
46
44
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
11/17/2015
0/1
ØC
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Seq. 29
0/1
ØB
7.57
•
ØA
6.85
•
7.40
NOTE#2. PROVIDE (6) 3/4" CONDUITS FROM PANEL STUBBED OUT TO ACCESS CEILING ABOVE. PROVIDE PULL STRINGS.
NEW PANEL P4.
NOTE#1. EXISTING PANEL IS TO BE DEMOLISHED. EXISTING LOADS TO REMAIN ARE TO BE INTERCEPTED AND EXTENDED TO
REPLACEMENT PANEL (NEW)
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Load Type
x 100%
6
39
1
NEC Feed Amps
x 100%
x 125%
NEC Feeder Factors
39
125% of Largest
1
Demand Amps
6
0.30
Demand KVA
13.97
5
x 100%
NEC Demand Factor
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
2.08
0.30
Conn KVA
17.94
1.88
Lighting
Recept
x 100%
11/17/2015
50
5
x 100%
51
2.08
18.22
1.50
61 Amps
Equip
21.82
Seq. 29
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Sparling
Name:
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
29†
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Recept COMP RECPS - 229, 230
Recept COMP RECPS - 231, 232
Recept COMP RECPS - 231, 232
Recept COMP RECPS - 229, 230
Recept OFFICE (117) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (106) (NOTE#1)
Recept OFFICE (118) (NOTE#1)
Recept OFFICE (113) (NOTE#1)
Recept WORK/COPY (115) (NOTE#1)
Equip COPIER WORK/COPY (115) (NOTE#1)
Recept DISPLAY OFFICE (114) (NOTE#1)
Recept OFFICE (114) (NOTE#1)
Recept OFFICE (112) (NOTE#1)
Spare
Spare
Equip AV RACK PETER KIRK (164) (NOTE#1)
Spare
Description
1.00
0.20
0.54
0.90
0.70
0.90
1.08
0.72
1.08
1.08
0.90
0.50
0.38
0.72
1.44
0.00
0.00
0.40
0.00
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
31†
Equip HANDICAP DOOR
0.80
P10
33
Equip INSTA - HOT
0.40
Serves:
35†
Equip FRIDGE/ICEMAKER
CB *
37†
Equip WINDOW
Load
39†
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.00
0.36
0.52
0.70
0.00
0.88
0.00
0.36
0.90
0.00
1.08
0.70
0.20
0.20
0.30
0.54
0.54
0.72
Spare
Spare
Spare
Recept RECP OFFICE 229
Recept RECPS 252, 231, 230
Recept RECPS - 225
Spare
Recept COMP RECPS - 225
Spare
Recept LOBBY (236)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (105) (NOTE#1)
Spare
Recept OPEN OFFICE (105) (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP. REC., ROOMS 164, 167 & 168
Recept RECEPTACLES, ROOM 169
Lighting LIGHTING, ELEVATOR CAR
Recept RECEP. AND LIGHT, ELEV. PIT
Recept OPEN OFFICE (105) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECEPTACLES
Recept OPEN OFFICE (105) (NOTE#1)
Description
42†
40†
38†
36†
34†
32†
30†
28
26†
24
22†
20
18
16
14†
12†
10†
8†
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.00
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
ØC
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
20/1
ØB
5.08
•
ØA
8.20
•
8.46
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
63
1
x 100%
x 125%
63
1
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
0.20
NEC Feed Amps
22.73
6
17
NEC Feeder Factors
x 100%
x 100%
Demand Amps
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
125% of Largest
Demand KVA
0.20
7
17
NEC Demand Factor
35.46
6.30
Conn KVA
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
Lighting
2.38
Load Type
Recept
x 100%
11/17/2015
87
x 100%
88
6.30
31.61
1.90
122 Amps
Equip
43.86
Seq. 30
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
JANITOR'S CLOSET 171
P11
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31†
29†
27†
25†
23†
21†
19†
17†
15
13†
11
9
7†
5†
3†
1†
#
Equip RECORDS
Recept RECPS - 225
Recept RECPS - 225
Recept RECPS - 225
Recept RECPS - 235, 251
Recept RECPS - 235, 251
Recept COMP RECPS - 236, 251, 254
Recept COMP RECPS - 235, 251
Recept RCPS - 114,172,173,164
Equip
Recept OPEN OFFICE #3 (231) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - 225
Recept OPEN OFFICE #3 (231) (NOTE#1)
Equip COPIER OPEN OFFICE #3 (231) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - 225,226
Recept RECPS - 227,228
Recept COMP RECPS - 225, 226
Recept COMP RECP- 227, 228
Description
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.52
0.36
0.52
0.52
0.36
0.52
0.52
0.36
0.20
0.72
0.90
0.90
0.50
0.90
0.70
0.50
0.70
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Equip RECORDS
1.44
Serves:
35†
Equip SOUTH LOBBY DOOR STRIKE
CB *
37†
Recept OPEN OFFICE #2 (223) (NOTE#1)
Load
39†
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.40
0.40
0.40
0.36
0.36
0.52
0.70
0.36
0.72
0.90
0.70
0.70
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.44
Equip COPIER OPEN OFFICE #2 (223) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #2 (223) (NOTE#1)
Equip PLANNING PRINTER PCD4
Equip PLANNING
Equip LASER PRINTER 6 & J
Recept RECPS - 235, 254
Recept RECPS - 235, 254
Recept RECPS - 235, 254
Mech EF-110-112
Recept RECPS & IDF - 102
Recept RECPS - 225
Recept RECPS - 225
Recept COMP RECPS - 225
Recept COMP RECPS - 225
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Recept OPEN OFFICE #2 (223) (NOTE#1)
Description
42†
40†
38
36
34†
32†
30†
28†
26†
24†
22†
20†
18†
16†
14†
12†
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
0.72
Mech ROOFTOP COOLING UNITS
Single Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.50
-------ROOFTOP COOLING UNITS
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.60
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
0.60
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
---
CB
•
20/2
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
------ØC
•
ØB
8.14
•
ØA
6.44
NEC Feeder Factors
8
38
7.54
x 100%
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Demand Amps
x 100%
Connected KVA
41
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
38
125% of Largest
NEC Feed Amps
8
Demand KVA
13.61
7
NEC Demand Factor
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
3.00
Conn KVA
17.22
2.38
Load Type
Recept
x 100%
11/17/2015
52
6
x 100%
53
3.00
18.99
1.90
61 Amps
Equip
22.12
Seq. 31
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
WORK ROOM 173
P12
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
13
11
9
7
5
3
1
#
Space
Space
Space
Equip PROJECTOR PETER KIRK (164)
Spare
Recept OPEN OFFICE #5 (248)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #5 (248)
Equip PRINTER
Recept PETER KIRK (164)
Recept PETER KIRK (164)
Recept DISPLAY PETER KIRK (164)
Equip MICROWAVE LUNCH (169)
Equip MICROWAVE LUNCH (169)
Equip MICROWAVE LUNCH (169)
Equip MICROWAVE LUNCH (169)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (172)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (172)
Recept OFFICE (103,104)
Description
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.30
0.00
0.90
0.90
1.00
0.54
0.54
0.24
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.80
0.72
1.08
1.08
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
0/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33
Space
0.00
Serves:
35
Space
CB *
37
Space
Load
39
19184
100A Main CB
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.40
0.40
1.08
1.08
0.90
0.36
0.36
0.72
0.90
0.40
0.90
0.72
0.50
0.72
Spare
Equip RACK IDF (269)
Equip RACK IDF (269)
Recept OFFICE (238-241)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #4 (245)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #4 (245)
Recept FB PETER KIRK (164)
Recept FB PETER KIRK (164)
Recept CONF. (165)
Recept CONF. (166)
Equip DISPLAY CONF. (165,166)
Recept OFFICE (171)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (172)
Equip COPIER OPEN OFFICE (172)
Recept LOBBY (102)
Description
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
36
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.00
Spare
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
0.00
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
•
0/1
0.00
0.00
0.00
Space
Space
Space
42
40
38
ØC
0/1
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
11/17/2015
50
17
33
NEC Feed Amps
0/1
ØB
6.32
•
ØA
5.86
NEC Feeder Factors
7.76
•
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
x 100%
Connected KVA
41
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
Demand Amps
x 100%
NEC Demand Factor
NEW PANEL REPLACES EXISTING 'P12'
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
33
Demand KVA
17
Conn KVA
6.20
11.87
Load Type
x 100%
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
50
6.20
18.07
13.74
55 Amps
Recept
19.94
Seq. 32
Equip
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAK RM. 198
P7
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31†
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15†
13
11
9†
7†
5
3†
1†
#
Recept FITNESS (147-B) (NOTE#1)
Equip ANTENNA PULLBOX- ROOF
Equip ANTENNA PULLBOX- ROOF
Recept LOBBY (102)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (172) (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP. REC., ROOM 105
Recept FITNESS (147) (NOTE#1)
Equip DISPLAYS FITNESS (147) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (172) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE (172) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECEPTACLES, LOADING DOCK
Recept COMP. REC. ROOM 107 & 109
Recept REC., ROOMS 107,108,109,110 AND OUTSIDE
Recept COMP.REC., ROOM 110
Recept RECEPTACLES, ROOMS 124,127
Recept RECEPTACLES, ROOM 124
Recept RECEPTACLES, ROOMS 129 & 198
Recept COMP. REC. ROOMS 116A,116B
Description
0.20
0.20
0.72
0.40
0.40
0.18
0.90
0.54
0.54
0.40
0.72
0.72
0.40
0.36
0.54
0.70
0.70
0.36
0.50
0.70
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Mech EHU-101
0.36
Serves:
35
Mech EHU-101
CB *
37†
Recept BY 911 HEAT PUMP
Load
39†
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.54
0.90
0.36
1.44
1.08
1.44
1.08
0.38
0.70
0.36
0.72
0.18
0.36
0.54
0.90
0.90
0.50
0.70
Recept REFER-183
Recept FITNESS (147) (NOTE#1)
Recept FITNESS (147) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECEPS, 249
Recept FITNESS (147) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #5 (248) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #5 (248) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254) (NOTE#1)
Recept DISPLAY FITNESS (147-B) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECEPTACLES, ROOM 105
Recept FITNESS (147) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECORDS (156) (NOTE#1)
Recept CONF. (165) (NOTE#1)
Recept CONF. (165,166) (NOTE#1)
Recept CONF. (165) (NOTE#1)
Recept REC., 117 &118
Recept REC., ROOM 115,116,116A, & 116B
Recept COMP. REC., ROOM 118
Recept COMP. REC., ROOM
Description
42†
40†
38
36
34†
32
30
28
26
24
22
20†
18
16
14
12
10
8†
6†
4†
2†
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
CB
0.54
Recept MICRO DISPATCH-183
Feed Thru Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.90
Load
•
20/1
CB
0.36
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
•
•
•
•
•
20/1
CB
•
20/1
ØC
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
20/1
ØB
8.46
•
ØA
8.52
•
8.44
NEC Feeder Factors
9
72
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Demand Amps
x 100%
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
72
x 100%
NEC Feed Amps
9
125% of Largest
Demand KVA
26.10
14
NEC Demand Factor
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
3.20
96
Conn KVA
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
42.20
x 100%
5.15
Load Type
Recept
3.20
34.45
11/17/2015
94
13
Equip
x 100%
137 Amps
4.12
49.52
Seq. 33
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
Name:
UTILITY TUNNEL
P9
Sparling
Location:
120/208V
3Ø
31†
29†
27†
25†
23†
21†
19†
17
15
13†
11†
9
7
5
3
1
#
Equip COPIER OPEN OFFICE #4 (245) (NOTE#1)
Recept COMP. RECPS - 250
Recept COMP. RECPS - 249
-------COMP. RM O.D. A/C
Mech COMP. RM O.D. A/C
Recept COMP. RECPS - 237 & 238
Recept COMP. RECPS - 239 & 152
Recept COMP. RECPS - 241 & 242
Mech COMP. RM AHU
Recept DISPLAY CONF. (153) (NOTE#1)
Recept CONF. (153) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECPS - 251
Recept RECPS - 251
Recept OPEN OFFICE #4 (245) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #4 (245) (NOTE#1)
Equip COPIER OPEN OFFICE #4 (245) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #4 (245) (NOTE#1)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #4 (245) (NOTE#1)
Description
0.50
0.50
1.00
0.90
0.70
0.80
0.80
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.52
0.56
1.08
0.36
0.52
0.72
0.72
0.50
0.72
0.90
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
-------
30/2
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
---
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
4W
33†
Equip COPIER COPY WORK RM (249) (NOTE#1)
0.36
Serves:
35
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254)
CB *
37
Recept BY 911 HEAT PUMP
Load
39†
19184
225A Main lugs only
Surface Mounted
Panel
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
20/1
CB *
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
CB
0.54
0.54
0.70
0.70
0.70
0.18
0.00
0.90
0.00
0.90
0.00
0.36
0.00
0.90
1.10
0.72
Spare
Spare
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254)
Recept OPEN OFFICE #6 (254)
Recept COMP. RECPS - 250
Recept COMP. RECPS - 251
Recept COMP. RECPS - 249
Recept ROOF GFI
Spare
Recept OPEN OFFICE #4 (245) (NOTE#1)
Spare
Recept OPEN OFFICE #4 (245) (NOTE#1)
Spare
Recept RECPS - 251
Spare
Recept CONF. (155) (NOTE#1)
Recept RECEPTACLES ROOMS 171-174, 186 & 185
Recept CONF. (155) (NOTE#1)
Description
40†
38
36
34
32†
30†
28†
26†
24†
22†
20
18
16
14
12
10†
6
4†
2
#
Deep
Type: Panelboard
10,000 AIC
20/1
0.00
Spare
42†
Single Lugs
A B C
20/1
CB
0.00
Mech HEAT PUMP 911 ROOM
Load
•
•
20/1
CB
0.00
-------HEAT PUMP 911 ROOM
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
56
11/17/2015
8
20/1
CB
0.80
•
20/1
CB
0.80
•
20/1
---
CB
•
40/2
ØC
* Circuit Breaker Code
H= HID Rated
C = HACR Rated
# = see note
------ØB
8.28
•
ØA
8.56
•
7.26
NEC Feeder Factors
6
39
G = GFCI
S = Shunt Trip
D = Switching Duty
A = AFCI
Demand Amps
x 100%
Connected KVA
41†
Rev:
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRK
Revised circuits marked ‡ Existing circuits marked †
Project #:
EXISTING
LAND CITY HALL PANEL SCHEDULE.PNL
File:
Notes:
39
x 100%
NEC Feed Amps
6
125% of Largest
Demand KVA
14.19
13
NEC Demand Factor
10 KVA @ 100%, rest @ 50%
2.00
58
Conn KVA
NOTE#1. REUSE EXISTING BREAKER
18.38
x 100%
4.65
Load Type
Recept
2.00
20.84
11
Equip
x 100%
67 Amps
3.72
24.10
Seq. 34
Mech
ShPnl3phNodeSeq.rpt
V:\2048\active\204819184\Design\Sched\KIRKLAN
D CITY HALL PAN
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2.
Twist-locking receptacles.
3.
Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units.
4.
Wall-box motion sensors.
5.
Tamper-resistant receptacles.
6.
Weather-resistant receptacles.
7.
Combination receptacles and USB chargers.
8.
Communications outlets.
9.
Pendant cord-connector devices.
10. Cord and plug sets.
11. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet
assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
F.
UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Coordination:
1.
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
2.
Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product.
26 27 26-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
B.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for
premarking wall plates.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'
packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3.
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from
single source from single manufacturer.
2.2
GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be
substituted under the following conditions:
1.
Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building
wire.
2.
Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
3.
All devices and face plates to be ‘White’.
2.3
A.
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following::
a.
Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).
b.
Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
c.
Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
d.
Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
26 27 26-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.4
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description:
1.
Straight blade, feed through type.
2.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A (including auto
monitoring and end of life power denial requirements), and FS W-C-596.
3.
Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no
longer provides proper GFCI protection.
B.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
a.
Cooper; VGF20.
b.
Hubbell; GFR5352L.
c.
Pass & Seymour; 2095.
d.
Leviton; 7899.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
2.7
TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
Single Convenience Twist-Lock Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Cooper; CWL520R.
b.
Hubbell; HBL2310.
c.
Leviton; 2310.
d.
Pass & Seymour; L520-R.
CORD AND PLUG SETS
Description:
1.
Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
2.
Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket;
with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of
the equipment rating.
3.
Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle
type for connection.
DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES
A.
Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Cooper; 6252.
b.
Hubbell; DR15.
c.
Leviton; 16252.
d.
Pass & Seymour; 26252.
B.
GFCI, Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square
face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R,
UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.
26 27 26-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
2.8
A.
2.9
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Cooper; TWRVGF15.
b.
Hubbell; GFTR15.
c.
Pass & Seymour; 1594TRWR.
Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors,
and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in
Dwelling Units" Section.
WALL PLATES
Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
1.
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2.
Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic - White
3.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic - White.
4.
Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and
listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A.
Type: Modular, flush-type dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
2.10 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
B.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
2.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
3.
Wiremold/Legrand.
C.
Description:
1.
Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with
multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching
floor service-outlet assembly.
2.
Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.
3.
Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two simplex receptacles and space for
two RJ-45 jacks] complying with requirements in Section 271500
"Communications Horizontal Cabling."
4.
Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
2.11 FINISHES
A.
Device Color:
1.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White.
2.
Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red
26 27 26-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over
device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding
against outside of boxes.
2.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,
concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway
system, conductors, and cables.
3.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross
a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C.
Conductors:
1.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or
terminated on devices.
2.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the
purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded
wire.
3.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of
NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
4.
Existing Conductors:
a.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign
matter.
c.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large
enough.
D.
Device Installation:
1.
Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that
were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to
connect conductors.
3.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until
the last possible moment.
4.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches
(152 mm) in length.
5.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap
solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around
terminal screw.
6.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by
manufacturer.
7.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits,
splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
26 27 26-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
9.
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to
hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up and on horizontally
mounted receptacles to the right.
F.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and
remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough
wall opening.
G.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of
partitions and furnishings.
3.2
RECEPTACLES
A.
Provide 15 amp receptacles in all locations except provide 20 amp receptacles on
dedicated 20 amp circuits (copiers, printers, kitchen equipment.)
B.
Provide exterior GFCI receptacle within 25’-0” of each roof mounted mechanical
equipment, for all outdoor receptacles, and other locations shown on the drawings.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
GFCI RECEPTACLES
Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream
receptacles is not required.
IDENTIFICATION
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess plaster from interior of outlet boxes.
B.
Clean devices and coverplates after painting is complete. Replace stained or improperly painted devices or coverplates.
3.6
A.
CORD AND PLUG SETS
Provide for all cord connected equipment furnished by the Owner or specified in other
sections when equipment is not supplied with an integral cord and plug set.
B.
match receptacle actually installed (within ampacity rating of equipment).
3.7
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Perform the following tests and inspections:
26 27 26-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in
NFPA 99.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.
B.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is
unacceptable.
3.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5.
Receptacle Polarity Test: Test every receptacle installed or reconnected under
this contract with a receptacle circuit tester. Tester shall test for open ground, reverse polarity, open hot, open neutral, hot and ground reversed, hot or neutral
and hot open. Rewire receptacles with faults and retest. Submit statement of
completed testing signed by the electrician that performed the test.
6.
Ground-Fault Receptacle Circuit Interrupter Tests: Test each receptacle or
branch circuit breaker having ground-fault circuit protection to assure that the
ground-fault circuit interrupter will not operate when subjected to a ground-fault
current of less than 4 milliamperes and will operate when subjected to a groundfault current exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform testing using an instrument specifically designed and manufactured for testing ground-fault circuit interrupters.
Apply the test to the receptacle. "TEST" button operation will not be acceptable
as a substitute for this test. Replace receptacles that do not shutoff power with
7/1000 of an ampere within 1/40th of a second and retest.
7.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely
mounted.
8.
Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the
circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective
devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning
units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
C.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
26 27 26-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
FUSES
SECTION 26 28 13
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less.
Spare-fuse cabinets.
REFERENCES
A.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
C.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1.4
A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,
dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets.
Include the following for each fuse type indicated:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation
and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
A.
Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
Fuse sizes for utilization equipment.
Ambient temperature adjustment information.
Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
26 28 13-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
1.7
FUSES
SECTION 26 28 13
Fuses: Equal to [10] percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no
fewer than three of each size and type.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single
source from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C.
Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
D.
Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.
1.8
A.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5
deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature
adjustment factors to fuse ratings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum
fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Eaton, Inc.
Edison Fuse, Inc.
Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
Littelfuse, Inc.
CARTRIDGE FUSES
A.
Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class as specified or
indicated; current rating as indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.
B.
Current limiting, 200,000 AIC minimum interrupting capacity, unless noted otherwise.
C.
Circuits 600 amps and less: Class RK1 or Class J
D.
Motor Circuits: Class RK5 dual element time delay or Class L (601-6000A)
26 28 13-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
FUSES
SECTION 26 28 13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions to verify proper
fuse locations, sizes, and characteristics.
B.
Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
damaged.
C.
Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.
D.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of
sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.
E.
Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be
applied to fuse ratings.
F.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fuses in fusible devices at job site just prior to energization.
equipment with fuses installed at factory.
B.
Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
Do not accept
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
Clean fuses, tighten connections and inspect fuse holders prior to energization of the
equipment.
IDENTIFICATION
Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26
Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement
information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket,
and holder.
END OF SECTION 26 28 13
26 28 13-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Fusible switches.
2.
Nonfusible switches.
3.
Receptacle switches.
4.
Shunt trip switches.
5.
Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
6.
Molded-case switches.
7.
Enclosures.
B.
Provide all disconnects required by code for equipment furnished under this and other
Divisions of these specifications unless disconnects are integral with equipment and
acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
B.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1.4
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the
effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and
component indicated.
Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and
26 2816-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,
ratings, accessories, and finishes.
1.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.
Current and voltage ratings.
3.
Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).
4.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.
5.
Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating
of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of
overcurrent protective device.
B.
1.7
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers,
accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
2.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
C.
Manufacturer's field service report.
1.8
A.
1.9
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to
include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items
specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches
and circuit breakers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
26 2816-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.10
A.
1.11
A.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the
following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not
exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).
2.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances
and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PRODUCTS
1.12
A.
1.13
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Eaton Electrical Inc
2.
General Electric Company.
3.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
4.
Schneider Electric.
RATINGS
A.
Voltage: Meet or exceed voltage of the circuit the switch or circuit breaker is applied
to.
B.
Current
1.
Continuous current rating shall be either of the following:
a.
As indicated on the drawings.
b.
If not indicated, match or exceed the continuous current rating of the
overcurrent protective device that protects the conductor providing
incoming power to the switch or circuit breaker.
2.
Short circuit withstand and interrupting ratings
a.
Shall comply with either of the following:
1)
If the available short circuit current at the switch or circuit breaker is
indicated on the drawings, exceed the indicated value while allowing
for appropriate X/R derating.
2)
Meet or exceed the AIC rating of the overcurrent protective device
that protects the conductor providing incoming power to the switch or
circuit breaker.
b.
Compliance: Short circuit withstand and interrupting ratings shall be
complied with using any of the following methods:
1)
Listed short circuit ratings complying with above criteria.
26 2816-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16
2)
3.
C.
1.14
Independent testing laboratory recognized series connected ratings
complying with the above criteria.
3)
Oversizing the indicated switch or circuit breaker rated current to
obtain a listed short circuit withstand and interrupting rating
complying with the above criteria, if the appropriate amount of space
is available at the indicated location.
4)
If a nonfusible disconnect is indicated it may be changed to a fusible
disconnect to obtain the required listed short circuit current withstand
rating.
Overcurrent Protection
a.
Provide overcurrent protection matching the ampacity indicated on the
drawings.
b.
When included as part of the disconnecting means for utilization equipment
the overcurrent protection shall comply with the listing requirements of the
utilization equipment. Obtain utilization equipment shop drawings as
specified in the appropriate specification division to determine
requirements.
Poles: Match the circuit the switch or circuit breaker is applied to.
FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 100 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors, lockable handle with capability to
accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, Larger than 100 amp: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses, lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C.
Accessories:
1.
Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are
specified.
1.15
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A.
Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 100 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, Larger than 100 amp. UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
C.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
26 2816-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16
RECEPTACLE SWITCHES
A.
Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Fusible Switch; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1;
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate fuses; lockable handle with
capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed position.
B.
Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Nonfusible Switch; UL 98 and NEMA KS 1;
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked
with cover in closed position.
C.
Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to
prevent inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug
other than specified, and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct
plug has not been fully inserted into the receptacle.
D.
Receptacle: Polarized, three-phase, four-wire receptacle (fourth wire connected to
enclosure ground lug).
1.17
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with
interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
B.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable
magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
C.
Molded Case Switch: When serving only as a disconnecting means.
D.
Frame sizes 400 amp and larger: Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: rms sensing, with
the following field-adjustable settings:
1.
Instantaneous trip.
2.
Long- and short-time pickup levels.
1.18
ACCESSORIES
A.
Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
B.
Equipment Ground Kit:
ground conductors.
C.
Neutral Kit: Required where neutral conductor is indicated on the drawings. Internally
mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and
aluminum neutral conductors.
D.
Additional accessories, where indicated
1.
Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered
type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and
Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum
26 2816-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.
3.
4.
1.19
A.
1.20
A.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16
time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit;
and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.
Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.
Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts
mimic switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.
Alarm Switch: One SPDT contact that operates only when switch has tripped.
ENCLOSURES
Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and
UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 .
2.
Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250,Type 4.
3.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
NAMEPLATES
Provide nameplates per Section 260553 - Identification For Electrical Systems.
EXECUTION
1.21
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.22
INSTALLATION
A.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers level and plumb according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Securely mount adjacent to equipment on wall or acceptable mounting frame.
Disconnect switches shall be mounted independent from the equipment they serve.
Disconnects supported only by raceway are not acceptable.
D.
Wiring space within Disconnects, Fused Switches or Enclosed Circuit Breakers shall
not be used for splices.
E.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
26 2816-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16
F.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets
and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
G.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
H.
Comply with NECA 1.
1.23
A.
1.24
A.
1.25
CLEANING
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish
including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
IDENTIFICATION
Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs.
2.
Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker,
component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.
2.
Test continuity of each circuit.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
3.
Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:
a.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than
60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed
switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections
are accessible to portable scanner.
b.
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan
of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of
Substantial Completion.
c.
Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to
measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal
values. Provide calibration record for device.
4.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged
and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
26 2816-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
D.
1.26
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SECTION 26 28 16
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed
switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of
deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as directed.
END OF SECTION 26 28 16
26 2816-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
These specifications cover the procurement of equipment, hardware, design,
documentation, labor and supervision required for the installation of grid-connected PV
system. There will be no energy storage devices (e.g. batteries) used in these systems.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
All systems should be designed for outdoor installation in Washington based on annual
ambient temperatures ranging from 10° F to 105° F. Supplied equipment must be rated
and warranted to withstand and operate under these conditions.
B.
The PV system will be connected to Puget Sound Energy (PSE) utility electric grid
through a grid-interactive power conditioner (inverter). The design and specification of
the PV modules, power conditioners, utility interconnections, PV system electrical
design, and PV array mechanical design shall meet local utility requirements and local
municipal codes.
C.
Contractors shall review all the documentation and procedural issues required by the
owner prior to submitting their bid.
D.
The Contractor shall coordinate with the local utility company (PSE) including providing
interconnection applications and obtaining any permits and inspections.
E.
The PV system shall not be started up without the permission of PSE. The contractor
shall assist the owner in obtaining an "Interconnection Application & Agreement - Level
1" with PSE. The agreement must be completed, signed, and submitted prior to
installation or modification.
F.
The Contractor shall aid owner process and coordinate incentive applications with the
Washington State Department of Revenue and PSE.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
Definitions: Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms
used in these specifications shall be as defined in IEEE 100.
B.
ACRONYMS
1.
NOCT: Normal operation Cell Temperature.
2.
PCS: Power Control System
3.
PTC: PV USA Test Conditions
4.
PV:
Photovoltaic
5.
PSE: Puget Sound Energy
6.
STC: Values of Factory Standard Test Conditions
7.
AFCI: Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter
26 31 00 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
C.
1.4
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
Reference Standards
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a.
ANSI/UL 1703 Standard for Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels.
2.
Institute Of Electrical And Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
a.
IEEE 100 - (2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE
Standards Terms
3.
International Electrical Commission (IEC):
a.
IEC 61215 International Standard (Extended Version) - Crystalline silicon
terrestrial photovoltaic (PV) modules - Design qualification and type
approval.
b.
IEC 61730-1 International Standard - Photovoltaic (PV) module safety
qualification - Part (1) - Requirements for construction
c.
IEC 61730-2 International Standard - Photovoltaic (PV) module safety
qualification - Part (1) - Requirements for testing.
4.
International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
a.
NETA ATS - (2009) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for
Electrical Power Equipment and Systems
5.
International Organization for Standardization (ISO):
a.
ISO 9001 Quality Management Systems.
b.
ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems.
6.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a.
NFPA 70 - (2011) National Electrical Code
b.
NFPA 70E - (2009) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
7.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
a.
ANSI C12.1 - (2008) Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering
b.
ANSI C12.7 - (2005) Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets
8.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
a.
UL 790 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
b.
UL 1703 Standard for Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions and Section
01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit specified products as follows:
1.
Manufacturer's product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA product
sheet.
2.
Manufacturer(s installation instructions.
3.
Catalog pages illustrating products to be incorporated into project.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows:
1.
Layout and orientation of modules.
2.
Roof surfaces and slopes.
3.
Location of inverter, combiner box and disconnects.
4.
Penetration plan.
5.
Mounting details.
6.
Electrical connection details.
7.
String, wiring, and grounding plan details.
26 31 00 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
8.
1.5
A.
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
All drawings shall be prepared in an electronic format that may be imported into
AutoCAD drafting software.
INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
Test and Evaluation Reports:
1.
Certified test reports showing compliance
characteristics and physical properties.
Submit
manufacturer's
specified
storage
and
performance
B.
Manufacturer's
instructions.
C.
Source Quality Control: Submit documentation verifying that components and materials
specified in this Section are from a single manufacturer.
D.
Qualification Statements:
1.
Submit letter of verification for Manufacturer's Qualifications.
2.
Submit letter of verification for Installer's Qualifications.
1.6
Instructions:
with
installation
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions and Section
01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.
Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with
Section 01 78 23 - Operation and Maintenance Data. Include:
a.
Manufacturer's instructions detailing maintenance requirements.
2.
The owner will incorporate required manufacturer's and vendor's drawings into its
as-built drawings for its own records.
C.
Warranty Documentation: Submit warranty documents specified.
1.7
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Qualifications:
1.
Manufacturer:
a.
PV Module Manufacturer's Qualifications: The PV module manufacturer of
any standard modules shall be a company specializing in the manufacture
of PV modules and have at least 3 years of documented experience with
their hardware in commercial applications in the field. The PV module
manufacturer of any custom modules shall supply documentation detailing
their products' field track record for review and approval.
b.
Equipment suppliers shall provide local representation when requested and
shall have been actively engaged in the assembly, installation and service
of this equipment for a period of not less than 3 years.
c.
Equipment suppliers shall have full parts backup and service availability for
this equipment.
26 31 00 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
d.
2.
1.8
Having sufficient capacity to produce and deliver required materials without
causing delay in work.
e.
Capable of providing field service representation during construction.
f.
Manufacturing facility certified to ISO 9001 and to ISO 14001.
Installer:
a.
Acceptable to the manufacturer, experienced in performing work of this
section and has specialized in installation of work similar to that required
for this project.
b.
Contractors shall have been trained in installing grid-connected
photovoltaic systems.
c.
Successful experience in at least five comparable installations which have
been in operation for a period of not less than three years. Furnish a list of
jobs and locations, with contact name and phone number.
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A.
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
1.
Deliver material in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product
Requirements and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels
intact and in sizes to suit project.
B.
Storage and Handling Requirements:
1.
Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at
temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Packaging Waste Management:
1.
Separate waste materials for recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management and Disposal.
2.
Remove packaging materials from site and dispose of at appropriate recycling
facilities.
3.
Fold metal and plastic banding. Flatten and place in designated area for
recycling.
4.
Remove:
a.
Pallets from site and return to supplier or manufacturer.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty: Refer to Contract Conditions and Section 01 78 36 - Warranties for project
warranty provisions.
B.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard
warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty
is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under other Contract
Documents.
1.
Warranty Term:
a.
Freedom from Defects in Materials and Workmanship: 5 years,
commencing on date of substantial completion.
26 31 00 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
b.
c.
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
93 Percent of Minimum Power Output: 12 years, commencing on date of
substantial completion.
85 Percent of Minimum Power Output: 25 years, commencing on date of
substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PV SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A.
The electrical design and installation instructions for the PV systems shall conform to
the 2014 National Electric Code (NFPA 70) (NEC) Article 690 Solar Photovoltaic
Systems, and comply with the IEEE Std. 1374-1998 (Guide for Terrestrial Photovoltaic
Power System Safety).
B.
All electrical components, including overcurrent protection, disconnect, surge
suppression devices, conduit, wiring and terminals must have UL or equivalent listing
and have appropriate voltage, current and temperature ratings for the application.
Special attention shall be given to appropriate ratings for components used in DC
circuits.
C.
All wiring shall be listed for a minimum operation of 1000 volts DC and temperature
rating of 90° C in wet locations. All current carrying conductors shall be enclosed in
conduit, including module interconnections.
D.
Ampacity calculations must take into account appropriate de-ratings as required. All
conductors in the system are subject to a 125% NEC de-rate, and all DC source circuit
conductors and overcurrent devices shall include an additional 125% de-rate for solar
radiation enhancement. Appropriate temperature de-ratings for conductors used in
module junction boxes must be considered for peak module operating temperatures,
as well as de-ratings for instances where more than three current-carrying conductors
are enclosed in a conduit.
E.
Voltage drop in array DC source circuits should be limited to no more than 5%,
including losses in conductors and through all fuses blocking diodes and termination
points.
F.
All overcurrent devices shall have trip ratings no greater than the de-rated ampacity of
the conductors that it protects.
G.
All series connected strings of modules (also known as panels, or source circuits) must
include a series fuse as required by UL and NEC to prevent wiring to other system
components. Parallel connections of modules in individual source circuits are not
permitted. Parallel-connected cells within individual modules are allowable as long as
the module listing allows for the series fuse required for this configuration.
H.
All series connected strings of modules (source circuits) shall also include a blocking
diode to prevent reverse currents. These diodes should have low voltage drop to meet
the requirements above, and have a voltage and current ratings (at temperature) at
least twice the open-circuit voltage and short-circuit ratings of the source circuits.
26 31 00 - 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
I.
The system array ground-fault protection and arc fault circuit interrupter devices shall
be included as part of the PCS packages as required by the NEC. These devices must
be capable of detecting array ground and arc faults, shunting the fault current to
ground, and disabling the array until the fault has been cleared.
J.
All terminations shall use listed box terminal or compression type connections. Twist on
wire splices, crimped, soldered or taped connections are not permitted for the required
field installed wiring. Proper torque specifications should be provided for all of the
required field connections.
K.
All module frames, panel/array support structures, metal enclosures, panel boards and
the PCS cabinet should be provided with connections for bonding to a common
grounding conductor and terminating at the utility service entrance ground. In addition,
provisions for grounding the neutral of the PCS output shall be provided. The DC
negative circuit may be common to the AC neutral in the PCS design and under no
circumstances should multiple connections to ground be specified for current carrying
conductors in the system.
L.
System arrangement shall comply with SCL requirements. A licensed electrician must
make all final connections.
M.
Loss of Line: The PCS shall not operate without the line voltage present. The PCS
shall sense a "loss of line" (utility) condition and shall automatically disconnect from the
line. In the event of multiple PCSs and/or balanced load on a common line, the PCS
shall contain circuits (such as Sandia Voltage Shift and Sandia Frequency Shift) that
will cause the PCS voltage or frequency to drift downwards under loss of line
conditions and cause it to cease energizing the grid within two seconds after loss of
line. The PCS restart shall occur automatically after restoration of line voltage and
frequency for at least five minutes.
N.
The PCS shall be capable of completely automatic operation, including "wake-up,"
"sleep" mode and shutdown after loss of utility power. In the automatic mode, the PCS
shall monitor the available PV array power and voltage, and when a predetermined
amount of power threshold of 200 watts maximum is available and the array voltage is
within the normal starting voltage, the wake-up sequence shall be initiated. The PCS
shall monitor the AC line voltage and frequency and, when the AC voltage is within the
normal operating range (460 to 500 V for nominal 480 volt system) and the frequency
is between 59.5 and 60.5 Hz, the synchronization process shall be initiated prior to
establishing line-tie. The shutdown sequence to place the PCS in "sleep" mode shall
not be initiated above 200 watts of array power. The DC power source and/or the AC
circuit may remain connected in the "sleep" mode to provide monitoring and
instrumentation power during nighttime operation.
2.2
A.
PV MODULES
The PV modules shall be framed flat-plate crystalline/poly-crystalline silicon modules.
Thin- film modules will not be considered for this project. PV modules shall meet
testing and certification requirements of UL 1703.
26 31 00 - 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
B.
The PTC rating of the system shall be 15.0kWp. The expected system output shall be
13.2kWac.
C.
The PV modules shall meet or exceed the requirements of Underwriter Laboratories
(UL) Standard 1703 Standard for Safety for Flat-Plate Photovoltaic Modules and either
IEEE Standard 1262-1995 IEEE Recommended Practice for Qualification of
Photovoltaic (PV) Modules and Panels or IEC 1215 Crystalline Silicon Terrestrial
Photovoltaic (PV) Modules- Design Qualification and Type Approval.
D.
Each PV module shall be warranted by the manufacturer for at least 90% of its rated
power for 10 years and 80% of its rated power for 20 years from the date of system
acceptance.
E.
The PV modules' electrical characteristics including current-voltage (I -V) curves and
temperature coefficients of module power, voltage, and current shall be characterized
by a research laboratory such as the Florida Solar Energy Center, the National
Renewable Energy Laboratory, Sandia National Laboratories, or Arizona State
University. Modules shall meet the following performance values at standard test
conditions of 1000 w/m2.
1.
Maximum power
315 Wp
2.
Open circuit voltage
45.6 V
3.
Maximum power point voltage
36.5 V
4.
Short circuit current
9.35 A
5.
Maximum power point current
8.71 A
6.
Module efficiency
16.03%
2.3
PCS SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The PCS for each system may use a single or multiple inverter(s), designed specifically
for utility grid interconnection of photovoltaic arrays and be capable of automatic,
continuous, unattended operation including start-up, synchronization, and disconnect.
The PCS shall be capable of stable operation over the range of voltages, currents, and
power levels for the size and type of array used.
B.
The PV Array Source Circuit Combiner Box shall meet the following requirements:
1.
1000 Vdc rating.
2.
Minimum four series fuses each rated at 15A and 1000 Vdc (two fuse holders
shall be designated as "SPARE").
3.
Integral lightning protection and surge protection.
4.
All fuse holders to be dead front, rated at 1000 Vdc (four total).
5.
Enclosure to be NEMA 3R or better.
C.
Each PCS shall be compliant with IEEE Std. 929-2000 (Recommended Practice for
Utility Interface of Photovoltaic Systems) and have UL1741 (Standard for Static
Inverters and Charge Controllers for Use in Photovoltaic Power Systems). The PCS
shall also comply with IEEE Std. 519 (Recommended Practices and Requirements for
Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems) and the latest applicable ANSI and
FCC standards and addenda dated prior to the award of the purchase order for this
procurement.
26 31 00 - 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
D.
The PCS shall have an automatic visual indicator showing whether the system is online or not, as well as an LCD display of current and total kW production data.
E.
The PCS, AC and DC disconnects, and any other required electronics shall be installed
near the array, where they will be exposed to weather. The contractor shall provide a
suitable lockable enclosure for housing these components.
F.
This enclosure shall provide any venting, cooling and weather sealing required by the
electronics enclosed. All electrical enclosures shall be rated as NEMA 3R or better and
have superior strength and corrosion resistance properties. Enclosure shall have
powder coat finish: color RAL7032 Pebble Grey. Enclosure construction shall be
compliant with UBC requirements for Seismic Zone 4.
G.
AC Surge Suppression: Surge withstand testing to ANSI 62.41 and IEEE 1547-2003.
H.
Isolation Transformer: Integrated high efficiency transformer.
I.
Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI): Provide a system for arc fault detection and
interruption, in accordance with UL 1699B. System shall detect and disconnect serial
electric arcs on the DC side.
J.
Each PCS shall have a communications port (RS 485) capable for remote monitoring
of inverter operation via modem access from a personal computer. Provide a data
acquisition controller. Provide communication cable between inverters and terminate
within the building in an IDF room. Provide software for receiving and tabulating this
information in an IBM-compatible PC with Windows 7 or newer. At a minimum, this
information shall include DC voltage and current AC voltage and, current and
cumulative Kwh power, and operational status of the PCU.
K.
A graphic PV system display shall be provided. This display shall constitute a
enclosure equipped with an analog meter mounted onto a white rigid board with
various pictures display. This meter will receive an analog signal generated through a
current transducer which will be receiving current from a current transformer (CT). One
output feeder conductor from the DC/AC inverter will be going through the CT. The
current traveling in the feeder will create a magnetic field that will generate a new
current in the CT. Display shall be 30" wide x 24" high. Graphics suitable for children
shall be approved by the Owner.
2.4
A.
2.5
A.
MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name,
address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place;
the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE
ASTM D 709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure,
relay, switch, and device; as specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each
nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position.
26 31 00 - 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.
Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and
engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches.
Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
PRODUCTION METER
ANSI C12.1. Provide a self-contained, socket-mounted, electronic programmable
outdoor watthour meter. Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be
programmed in the field. Meter shall be coordinated to system and local utility (Puget
Sound Energy) requirements.
1.
Design: Provide watthour meter designed for use on a three-phase, four-wire,
480Y/277 volt system. Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware for
Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS).
2.
Class: 200; Form: 2S, accuracy: plus or minus 1.0 percent; Finish: Class II.
3.
Cover: Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and unauthorized
removal.
4.
Kilowatt-hour Register: five digit electronic programmable type.
5.
Demand Register:
a.
Provide solid state.
b.
Meter reading multiplier: Indicate multiplier on the meter face.
c.
Demand interval length: Shall be programmed for 15 minutes with rolling
demand up to six subintervals per interval.
6.
Socket: ANSI C12.7. Provide NEMA Type 3R, box-mounted socket, ringless,
having jaws compatible with requirements of the meter. Provide manufacturers
standard enclosure color unless otherwise indicated.
STRUCTRAL SUPPORT SYSTEM
Coordinate with structural drawings, specifications and engineer. Provided for a 25
degree triangulated support. Attach to structural steel platform. Provide Unirac support
system or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Electrical installations, including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts,
plenums and other air-handling spaces, shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and
IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein.
B.
Labels:
Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD
FABRICATED NAMEPLATES. Use lettering of at least 0.25 inch in height, and
engrave on black-on-white matte finish.
C.
Grounding and Bonding: Provide in accordance with NFPA 70. Ground exposed, noncurrent-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems,
26 31 00 - 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways, and neutral conductor of
wiring systems.
1.
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible
by exothermic weld or compression connector
a.
Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer's
written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show
convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.
b.
Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to
provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other
standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been
adequately compressed on the ground wire.
D.
Examination and verification of conditions: Verify that conditions of substrates
previously installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for product
installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to solar electric module
installation.
1.
Inform Architect of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
2.
Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval from architect.
E.
Preparation:
1.
Ensure structure or substrate is adequate to support solar electric module(s).
2.
Surface Preparation: Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer's written
recommendations.
F.
Workmanship and Installation: Lay out work in advance. Exercise care where cutting,
channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces is
necessary for proper installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other
electrical work. Repair damage to buildings, piping, and equipment using skilled
craftsmen of trades involved.
1.
Coordinate installation of components in accordance with installation and
manufacturer's installation instructions
2.
Coordinate solar electric module work with work of other trades for proper time
and sequence to avoid construction delays
3.
Accurately fit, align, securely fasten and install free from distortion or defects
G.
Watthour Meters: ANSI C12.1
3.2
A.
FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
A.
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated.
Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet-metal screws or two
rivets.
26 31 00 - 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.3
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
PV ARRAY
A.
The Contractor shall provide the mechanical hardware for mounting the photovoltaic
arrays. The Contractor shall provide all hardware required for assembling the
photovoltaic modules and panels and structurally attaching them to the base support
structure.
B.
The PV array, including modules, hardware and attachments shall be designed to
withstand wind loads of 125 mph or more and comply with all existing local and state
codes for Seismic Zone 4 installations.
C.
Building Integrated Photovoltaic (BIPV) Array:
1.
The base array design shown on the drawing is a building integrated photovoltaic
array, to be structurally integrated as shown on architectural and electrical
drawings.
D.
Array mounting hardware supplied by the bidder should be compatible with the site
considerations and environment. Special attention should be paid to minimizing the risk
from exposed fasteners, sharp edges, and potential damage to the modules or support
structure. Corrosion resistance and durability of the mechanical hardware should be
emphasized - the use of stainless steel fasteners and an aluminum support structure is
preferred. Galvanic corrosion shall be prevented.
E.
Spacing between individual modules and panels shall be kept to a minimum to
maximize space utilization. As much as possible, all mechanical hardware, conduit,
junction boxes and other equipment shall be concealed beneath the array.
F.
The array layout shall be consistent with the ordering (and labeling) of source circuits in
the array combiner boxes. Ease of access for array troubleshooting and maintenance
is desired by allowing access to the back of the array for module junction box servicing,
and removal/replacement of individual source circuits (panels) and modules if
necessary.
3.4
A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Manufacturer Services
1.
Coordinate manufacturer's services with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Have
manufacturer review work involved in handling, installation/application, protection
and cleaning of products, and submit written reports in acceptable format to
verify compliance of work with Contract.
2.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services, consisting
of product use recommendations and periodic site visits, for product installation
inspection in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.
Schedule site visits to review work at stages listed:
a.
After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory work on
which work of this Section depends is complete, but before installation
begins.
b.
Twice during progress of work at 25% and 60% complete.
c.
Upon completion of work, after cleaning is carried out.
4.
Obtain reports within three days of review and submit immediately to Architect.
26 31 00 - 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
B.
Devices Subject to Manual Operation: Each device subject to manual operation shall
be operated at least five times, demonstrating satisfactory operation each time.
C.
1000-Volt Wiring Test: Test wiring rated 1000 volt and less to verify that no short
circuits or accidental grounds exist. Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6
AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 800
volts to provide direct reading of resistance. Minimum resistance shall be 250,000
ohms.
D.
Transformer Test: Perform the standard, not optional, tests in accordance with the
Inspection and Test Procedures for transformers, dry type, air-cooled, 1000 volt and
below; as specified in NETA ATS. Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper
tap settings. Tests need not be performed by a recognized independent testing firm or
independent electrical consulting firm.
E.
Watthour Meter
1.
Visual and mechanical inspection
a.
Examine for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.
b.
Verify that meter type, scales, and connections are in accordance with
approved shop drawings and utility company requirements.
2.
Electrical Tests
a.
Determine accuracy of meter.
b.
Calibrate watthour meters to one-half percent.
c.
Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter, where
applicable.
3.5
A.
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Before start up the PV system shall be tested by the contractor and witnessed by the
owner according to the following test criteria. Results of all inspections, tests, and
subsequent corrective action taken or to be taken shall be documented and provided to
the owner.
1.
Visual inspection to make sure system is installed to code and in a workmanlike
manner. A photo-record shall be made by contractor including the PV array,
inverter, isolation transformer, disconnect switches, combiner boxes and
connections.
2.
Visual inspection of PV array to insure that all PV modules are free from defects,
installed properly and are in like new condition.
3.
Verify proper wire connections/polarities/phase sequencing to and from all
equipment as appropriate.
4.
The following parameters shall be measured and recorded on a clear sunny day
between the hours of 11:00 am and 1:00 pm.
a.
Ambient temperature in ?C
b.
Plane of Array Irradiance in kW/m2
c.
AC line voltage at utility side of isolation transformer
d.
AC line voltage at inverter side of isolation transformer
e.
Open-circuit voltage of all source circuits (measured at DC combiner box)
f.
Short-circuit current of all source circuits (measured at DC combiner box)
g.
Max-power current of all source circuits (measured at DC combiner box)
h.
PV array max-power voltage (measured at DC disconnect)
26 31 00 - 12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
i.
j.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.6
PV array max-power current (measured at DC disconnect)
3-Phase power output measured at utility side of isolation transformer (in
kW)
Training and start-up: Within one week of approval for interconnection by SCL
contractor shall start system up and conduct training of select Owner's personnel
covering the following items:
a.
Overall system operation
b.
Each major component and discuss its function (PV Array, Combiner box,
DC disconnect, inverter, isolation transformer, kWh meter, AC disconnect)
c.
Start-up procedure
d.
System operation
e.
System shutdown procedure
f.
Inverter error message/codes
g.
Possible system faults'
h.
System troubleshooting procedure
Performance requirements including:
a.
Minimum Inverter efficiency = 94%
b.
Minimum Isolation transformer efficiency = 98%
c.
Maximum allowable wire loss (dc plus ac) = 3%
d.
Maximum allowable module mismatch = 3%
System overall peak power:
a.
PV array nameplate rating at Standard Test Conditions = 46.8 kWdc
b.
PV USA Test Conditions (PTC) rating = 36 kWac
c.
Expected system output (PTC x inverter efficiency) = 34.2 kWac
Inverter input/output voltage
a.
Input voltage range = 330 - 600 Vdc
b.
Output voltage = 3-Phase, Delta 480 Vac, 60 Hz.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Furnish electrical schematics and diagrams showing all major components and
devices, including conductor types and sizes, connections of individual modules and
array source circuits, terminations at junction boxes, connection to surge suppression
devices and the PCS, and the PCS interface with the utility grid.
B.
Furnish complete parts lists, including all electrical components, mechanical hardware
and other equipment required for installing the systems (must include description and
make for all the equipment provided, model/part number and source are also required
for the PV modules and the inverter).
C.
Furnish mechanical drawings showing details of module/array mechanical support.
D.
Furnish complete assembly and installation instructions for mounting array, junction
boxes and enclosures, routing conduit, wiring arrays, and terminating conductors at
array, combiner boxes and PCS.
E.
Submit procedure for commissioning, operating, disconnecting, servicing and
maintaining complete system and individual components.
26 31 00 - 13
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
F.
PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM
SECTION 26 31 00
A site survey of the intended array location shall be performed before the installation
begins. This will help the Contractor determine appropriate equipment locations and
give all parties a better idea of the expected performance of the PV system.
END OF SECTION 26 3100
26 31 00 - 14
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
2.
Emergency lighting units.
3.
Exit signs.
4.
Lighting fixture supports.
B.
Related Sections:
C.
Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including
time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays
and contactors.
D.
Section 260943 "Network Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control
systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
E.
Substitutions:
1.
Bidders requesting approval to provide products other than those specifically
listed in the Light Fixture Schedule shall submit requests in writing to the
Architect and Lighting Designer ten days prior to the close of the bid period.
Approval will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications issued to all
registered plan holders. No requests for substitution will be considered after this
date.
2.
Substitution request shall include all information required under paragraph 1.5
SUBMITTALS. Requests for approval shall be accompanied by a working fixture
sample (including lamps and a cord and plug). Provide the name of at least one
installation where each proposed substitute has been installed for at least six
months along with the name and phone number of the Architect, Owners
representative and the Lighting Designer of Record. If required by the Architect,
the proposed substitutes must be installed at the bidder's expense in a location
selected by the Architect.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) LE5-1993:
1.
Procedure for determining Luminaire efficiency ratings.
B.
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
26 51 00-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.4
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
UL 496:
Edison Base Lampholders
UL 542:
Lampholders, Starter Holders for Fluorescent Lamps
UL 924:
Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
UL 935:
Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts
UL 1012
Power Units Other Than Class 2
UL 1310
Class 2 Power Units
UL 1570:
Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures
UL 1598
Luminaires
DEFINITIONS
A.
BF: Ballast factor.
B.
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
C.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
D.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
E.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
F.
Lumen: Unit of luminous flux. Photometrically, it is the luminous flux emitted within a
unit solid angle by a point source having a uniform luminous intensity of 1 candela.
G.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast, lamp, housing, parts designed
to distribute the light, to position and protect the lamps, and to connect the lamps to the
power supply.
1.5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Light fixture schedule series numbers are a design series reference and do not
necessarily represent the exact catalog number, size, voltage, wattage, type of lamp,
ballast, finish trim, ceiling type, mounting hardware, ceiling trim or special requirements
as specified hereinafter or as required by the particular installations. Provide complete
fixtures to correspond with the number of lamps, wattage and/or size specified.
B.
If there are discrepancies between fixture illustrations and the written description in the
fixture schedule, the written description in the fixture schedule shall take precedence.
C.
Light fixture voltage shall match voltage of circuit serving the light fixture.
26 51 00-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.6
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation
include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
2.
Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
3.
Ballast, including circuit type (Programmed start, instant start, etc) BF.
4.
Lamps including brand name, product name, rated life, output CCT, and CRI.
5.
Product Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests,
complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of
each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts,
and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in
this Project.
B.
Pendant support system if part of fixture.
1.7
A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on
which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1.
Lighting fixtures.
2.
Suspended ceiling components.
3.
Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches
(305 mm) of the plane of the luminaires.
4.
Ceiling-mounted projectors.
5.
Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be
attached.
6.
Other items in finished ceiling including the following:
a.
Air outlets and inlets.
b.
Speakers.
c.
Sprinklers.
d.
Smoke and fire detectors.
e.
Occupancy sensors.
26 51 00-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
B.
Qualification Data:
fixtures.
C.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled
fixtures, from manufacturer.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
E.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.
Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers'
codes.
2.
Provide cut sheets of all fixtures and control devices.
3.
Provide instruction manuals for all control systems.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Lamps: 10% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
2.
Ballasts: 1% of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications:
Provided by
manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer
Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an
independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the
IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
26 51 00-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
1.11 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.12 WARRANTY
A.
Ballasts: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for a period of not less than five years.
Warranty shall include parts and labor to replace defective ballasts.
B.
Exit Signs Utilizing LED Lamp Technology: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for a
period of not less than five years including parts and labor for full replacement of
defective product.
C.
LED Luminaires: Provide manufacturer's warranty for a period of not less than three
years for repair or replacement of defective electrical parts, including light source and
power supplies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Finish ferrous mounting hardware and accessories to prevent corrosion and
discoloration to adjacent materials.
B.
For vapor tight installations, painted finishes of fixtures and accessories shall be
weather resistant enamel using proper primers or galvanized and bonderized epoxy, so
that the entire assembly is completely corrosion resistant for the service intended.
Where aluminum parts come into contact with bronze or steel parts, apply a coating
material to both surfaces to prevent corrosion.
C.
Fixtures shall be free of light leaks and designed to provide sufficient ventilation of
lamps to provide the photometric performance required. Ballasts and transformers
shall be adequately vented.
D.
All sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents and shall have accurate
angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal.
Intersections and joints shall be formed true and of adequate strength and structural
rigidity to prevent any distortion after assembly. Finish exposed edges so no sharp or
ragged edges are exposed. All miters shall be in accurate alignment with abutting
intersecting members.
E.
Lampholders shall hold lamps securely against normal vibrations and maintenance
handling.
F.
Reflector Cones:
26 51 00-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
Provide minimum 45lamp and lamp image cut-off for all vertically mounted
lamps. For horizontal lamps provide minimum 33 cut-off. There shall be no
visible lamp flashing in the cone.
Plastic materials shall not be used for reflector cones, unless noted otherwise in
the Light Fixture Schedule.
Reflector cones shall not be riveted or welded to housing and shall be removable
without tools. Retention devices shall not deform the cone in any manner. Trim
shall be flush with finished ceiling without gaps or light leaks. Where the flange
trim is separate from the cone, it shall have the same finish as the cone.
Reflector cones shall be of uniform gauge, not less than 0.032-inch thick, high
purity aluminum Alcoa 3002 alloy, free of spin marks or other defects.
Manufacture reflector under the Alzak process. Refer to fixture schedule for
cone color and specular or diffuse finish requirements. For fixtures using
compact fluorescent lamps, provide additional finish equivalent to Color-Chek
that eliminates iridescence. Submit one sample of each cone type for review
when required in the fixture schedule.
G.
Light fixtures containing lamps which require protective shielding shall have tempered
glass lenses.
H.
For adjustable fixtures, provide positive locking devices to fix aiming angle. Fixture
shall be capable of being relamped without adjusting aiming angle.
I.
Fixtures recessed in suspended ceilings where the space above the ceiling is either an
air supply or return plenum shall conform to NEC Article 300-22.
J.
Safety: Provide safety devices for removable fixture elements (cones, reflectors,
lenses, etc.) to support removable elements when not in normal operating position.
Safety devices shall be detachable if necessary and shall not interfere with fixture
performance, maintenance or the seating of any fixture element, and not be visible
during normal fixture operation.
2.2
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A.
Housing: Minimum code gauge steel or rigid aluminum construction painted after
fabrication with high reflectance white paint (min. 89%).
B.
Light Shields:
1.
Parabolic Louvers: Provide Alzak aluminum, specular or semi-specular as
specified, with a low-iridescent finish.
2.
Flat Translucent Diffusers: Shall be 100% virgin DR acrylic and have matte finish
on exterior side (facing away from lamps). Diffuser shall be of thickness
specified and shall be of sufficient density to completely obscure lamp image.
3.
Flat Clear Lenses: Injection molded 100% virgin DR acrylic or clear tempered
glass, thickness as specified.
26 51 00-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
C.
Frames:
1.
Supply with concealed hinges and latching. Provide mitered corners with no
gaps or light leaks.
D.
Lamp Mounting:
1.
Mount lamps used in rapid start circuits 430 ma and below within 1/2" of
grounded metal as long as the lamp.
2.
For rapid start circuits using single lamp ballasts, provide one grounding lamp
holder per lamp.
2.3
Light Emitting Diode (LED) FIXTURES:
A.
Housing: Rigid aluminum construction.
B.
Finish: Visible surfaces. Powder coated paint or natural aluminum as specified in
Light Fixture Schedule. Color and finish as selected by architect. Concealed parts,
(lamp holders, yokes, brackets, etc.) matte black.
C.
Lamp Holder Housing: Cast aluminum with integral heat radiating fins to assure cool
lamp base operation, with sufficient heat dissipation to meet device manufacturer's
guidelines, certification programs, and test procedures for thermal management.
D.
Off-state Power: Luminaires shall not draw power in the off state. Exception:
Luminaires with integral occupancy, motion, photo-controls or individually addressable
fixtures with external control and intelligence are exempt from this requirement. The
power draw for such luminaires shall not exceed 0.5 watts when in the off state.
2.4
WIRING
A.
Wiring shall be as required by code for fixture wiring.
B.
Flexible cord wiring between fixture components or to electrical receptacle and not in
wireways shall have a minimum temperature rating of 105°C.
C.
Cords shall be fitted with proper strain reliefs and watertight entries where required by
application.
D.
No internal wiring shall be visible at normal viewing angles, i.e. above 45° from vertical.
E.
Provide #18 AWG, 3-wire flexible conduit connections (whips) for dual level switching
as shown on Drawings for light fixtures recessed in accessible suspended ceilings.
Provide 3-wire whips for all dual level switching. Wire count on wire whips is not
shown on Drawings and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide proper
wire count for the lighting control as shown on Drawings.
2.5
A.
BALLASTS AND POWER SUPPLIES:
Fluorescent General Requirements:
26 51 00-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
Lamps shall be operated on the type of circuit the lamp was designed for
(preheat, rapid start, instant start, programmed start, etc.). T8 lamps shall be
operated on rapid start or programmed rapid start ballasts only. Ballasts shall
provide normal rated lamp life as stated by lamp manufacturers.
Ballasts shall be HPF (greater than 90%), UL listed, or ETL certified. Magnetic
ballasts shall be CBM certified. For projects applying for utility funding, ballasts
shall meet utility requirements. Provide ballasts with thermal protection unless
otherwise specified. Ballasts shall be Class P.
Confirm voltage requirements with Electrical Drawings. Ballasts shall operate
lamps correctly within +/-10% voltage variation without damaging ballasts.
Ratings:
a.
"A" sound rating for 430 ma and 265 ma
Provide a ballast disconnecting means for all fixtures that utilize double ended
fluorescent lamps in accordance with NEC 410.130(G).
26 51 00-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
6.
7.
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
Low temperature application:
Provide ballasts suitable for low starting
temperature where light fixture is located in a freezer or refrigerator or other
location where ambient air temperature will be below 50 degrees F.
Dimming Ballasts: Type required by dimmer manufacturer for proper operation
and to maintain UL listing of dimming system components utilized. Total
harmonic distortion shall not exceed 20% at any point within the dimming range.
For T5HO lamps, ballasts must meet proposed IEC dimming parameters and all
other industry requirements to maintain lamp manufacturer's warranties. Ballasts
known to meet these parameters are Advance VZT2S54 and REZ2S54 and
Lutron FDB-T554 and ECOT554 for one or two lamps for 120 or 277v operation.
B.
Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts: In addition to the general requirements, provide
electronic ballasts where required in the Light Fixture Schedule as follows:
1.
Ballasts in conformance with the following regulatory requirements:
a.
EMI and RFI limits set by the FCC (CFR47, Part 18 and FCC Part 18,15j),
IEEE Publication 587, Category A (transients).
b.
Minimum efficiency standards of Public Law 100-357.
c.
Starting sequence consistent with ANSI Standard C82.1-1993.
2.
Reduced light output ballasts (ballast factors below 87%) are not acceptable
except as noted otherwise in the Light Fixture Schedule.
3.
Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10% of the input current. Current
crest factor shall be less than 1.7. Operating frequency shall be between 25 and
60 kHz with no visible flicker.
4.
Ballasts shall operate in ambient temperatures up to 105F (40C).
5.
Rapid start ballasts shall be wired in series (or in parallel if manufactured
accordingly).
6.
Ballasts for single ended lamps shall be program start, with end of life protection.
7.
Manufacturers: Philips Advance, GE, Osram/Sylvania, Universal.
C.
LED Power Supplies:
1.
Minimum power factor 90%.
2.
Minimum operating temperature of 3.
Output operating frequency shall be minimum 120 Hz.
4.
Power supply shall meet FCC requirements for non-consumer use.
5.
Sound rating: Class A.
6.
Power supply shall comply with IEEE C.62.41-1991, Class A operation.
2.6
LAMPS
A.
Each lamp type in the Project shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer.
B.
Fluorescent:
1.
Medium Bi-pin, T5 program start, T8 rapid start, T12, compact TT , DTT and
TRT; 3500K color temperature and 80+ Color Rendering Index (CRI) unless
otherwise noted. Use TCLP compliant lamps unless they are unavailable for
type of lamp specified (brand names are GE - Ecolux, Osram Sylvania - Ecologic
and Philips - ALTO).
2.
Manufacturers: General Electric, Philips, Osram Sylvania or as specifically noted
in the Light Fixture Schedule.
26 51 00-9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
C.
2.7
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
Light Emitting Diode Type:
1.
LED modules/arrays shall have a minimum CRI of 80 unless otherwise specified
in the Light Fixture Schedule.
2.
Color temperature variation shall not exceed +/- 100 degrees Kelvin at
installation, and +/- 200 degrees Kelvin over the life of the module.
3.
LED modules/arrays shall deliver at least 70% of initial lumens, when installed insitu, for a minimum of 35,000 hours.
4.
Acceptable manufacturers: Cree, Philips, Nichia.
SOCKETS
A.
Incandescent: Porcelain for medium or mogul screw base. For other lamp types, as
required by base type.
B.
Fluorescent: Suitable for lamp and ballast type employed. Where Instant Start ballasts
are specified, supply Circle I sockets designed for Instant Start ballasts.
2.8
EMERGENCY BATTERY PACKS
A.
Where fluorescent fixtures are indicated or specified to have self-contained battery
backup, provide battery pack(s) with 1100 lumen output for single lamp operation or as
indicated. Unit shall have high temperature nickel cadmium battery, automatic transfer
switch, battery charger high frequency inverter, installed test/charging indicator and
switch, dual voltage, and be UL listed to standard 924. Provide normal switching
connection where indicated.
B.
Testing: Apply power for 24 hours, disconnect power observe, measure and record
light output for specified 90 minute period. Continue to run on battery until automatic
low battery cut-off circuit disconnects battery. Restore normal power and verify battery
returns to charging mode.
C.
Warranty: Entire unit shall be warranted for 5 years, battery shall have 15 year life
expectancy with 5 year full warranty and 7 additional years prorated warranty. Full
warranty to cover labor and materials without charge. Prorated warranty to cover
material only.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide mounting accessories and trims as required for wall and ceiling construction
types shown in Finish Schedule and on Drawings.
B.
Lighting fixtures:
1.
Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
26 51 00-10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
C.
Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent
luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of
luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the
temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
D.
Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not
exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify requirements for maximum
distance between ballast and luminaire with ballast manufacturers.
E.
Verify weight and mounting method of fixtures and provide suitable supports. Fixture
mounting assemblies shall comply with local seismic codes and regulations.
26 51 00-11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
F.
Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans for coordination of lighting fixture locations
with mechanical and fire safety equipment. Where conflicts occur, coordinate with
Architect prior to installing any of the systems.
G.
For fire rated ceilings and walls, provide rated enclosure for recessed light fixture, or
coordinate with Architect and Lighting Designer to specify fixture suitable for use in
rated ceiling or wall.
H.
Install fixtures with vent holes free of air blocking obstacles.
I.
Lighting fixtures located in recessed ceilings with a fire resistive rating of 1-hour or
more shall be enclosed in an approved fire-resistive rated box equal to that of the
ceiling.
J.
Adjust aperture rings on all recessed fixtures to be flush with the finished ceiling.
K.
Adjust variable position lampholders for proper lamp position prior to fixture installation.
L.
Blemished, damaged or unsatisfactory fixtures or accessories shall be replaced.
M.
For pendant mounted fixtures, mounting height is from finished ceiling to bottom of
pendant light fixture. For wall mounted fixtures, center on outlet box unless otherwise
noted. Verify mounting provisions and other requirements prior to order of light fixtures
and provide as required.
N.
In accessible suspended ceilings, provide 72" flexible conduit wiring connection
(flexible tubing not permitted) from a rigidly supported junction box.
O.
All finishes shall be unmarred upon project completion. Repair or replace damaged
finishes.
P.
Replace all burned out or inoperative lamps at the end of the construction prior to
Owner occupancy.
3.2
DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES
A.
Remove protective plastic covers from lighting fixture diffusers only after construction
work, painting and clean-up are completed. Remove all dirty lamps, reflectors and
diffusers; clean and reinstall. When cleaning "Alzak" reflectors, use a manufacturer
recommended cleaning solution. Reflectors damaged or impregnated with fingerprints
shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
B.
For LED fixtures, whether surface mounted or recessed, remove all construction dirt
and dust from heat sink fins to ensure proper dissipation of heat.
26 51 00-12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
STARTUP SERVICE
Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to
occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to
be dimmed, for at least 12 hours at full voltage per NEMA recommendations or as
required by fixture manufacturer.
ADJUSTMENT OF LIGHT FIXTURES
Focus all adjustable light fixtures under the direction of the Lighting Designer during a
scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project, after normal business
hours if required. Include all equipment and personnel expenses (including overtime)
required for adjustment.
SUPPORT OF LED LIGHT FIXTURES
A.
Surface or Pendant Type: Attach heavy formed steel straps to the outlet box by means
of threaded stems with locknuts, or directly to the outlet box where the light fixture is
specifically so designed.
B.
Recessed Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with recessed portion of the
fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. Bottom of light fixture to be flush
with adjacent ceiling. Fixture trim shall totally conceal ceiling opening. Provide two
#14 earthquake chains or #12 wires when fixture is supported by ceiling suspension
system.
26 51 00-13
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.6
BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
SECTION 26 51 00
SUPPORT OF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES
A.
Recessed type: For light fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide
four Caddy #515 support clips (one each corner) which lock light fixture to ceiling tees
after light fixture is installed. In addition, provide for each light fixture two #14
earthquake chains or #12 wires secured at diagonally opposite fixture corners (for
fixtures weighing less than 56 pounds) to structural members above suspended ceiling.
For plaster or gypsum board ceilings provide plaster frame compatible with light fixture.
Contractor shall coordinate fixture trim with ceiling type.
B.
Surface Mounted Type:
1.
Where mounted on accessible ceilings, support from structural members above
ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved.
2.
Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Laser sight to assure fixtures are straight when
sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where light
fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections.
C.
Pendant Mounted Type:
1.
For fixtures with rigid pendants, supply swivel ball aligners at canopy to comply
with local seismic requirements.
2.
Where suspended from accessible ceiling, support fixture from structural
members above ceiling by means of hanger rods through ceiling or as accepted.
3.
Continuous Runs of Light Fixtures: Laser sight to assure fixtures are straight
when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in the ceiling. Where
light fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between sections.
4.
Where pendant is longer than 48 inches (1200mm), brace to limit swinging.
3.7
A.
CEILING LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT
Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixtures installed,
provide additional framing to support as required.
END OF SECTION 26 51 00
26 51 00-14
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Description: Work includes materials, equipment, labor, supervision, tools and items
necessary for the construction, installation, connection, testing and operation of
telecommunications work. This section applies to Telecommunications Division 27
sections with the exception of Fire Alarm Systems.
B.
General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01
sections apply to Work in this section.
1.2
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Perform work in accordance with requirements of the state in which the work is
performed.
B.
Conform to applicable industry standards, UL standards, NEMA standards, and other
standards as noted.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Operating Conditions:
1.
2.
1.3
Notify the A/E of deviations in Contract Documents to applicable codes and
ordinances prior to installation of the Work. Perform changes in the Work after
initial installation due to requirements of code enforcing agencies at no additional
cost to the Owner.
If conflict occurs between legally adopted codes and the Contract Documents, the
codes prevail, except that this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor
from complying with requirements of the Contract Documents which may exceed
code requirements and not contrary to same.
Arrange for and pay for required telecommunications permits, fees, and
inspections.
Temperature: Minus 20 deg C to plus 40 deg C.
Altitude: Up to 3,300 feet (100 meters).
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 and with additional requirements indicated in
this article.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with requirements in Section 01 33 00 for electronic submittals.
Submit prior to fabrication of assemblies and delivery of purchased items.
Submit complete at one time. Partial product submittals not acceptable and will be
returned unreviewed.
Clearly mark catalog pages, equipment, and model number to be used. Note
required accessories.
27 05 00 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
5.
C.
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
Format: Electronic
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Submit as specified in the individual specification sections. Submit minimum 30
days prior to starting fabrication on installation work. Do not fabricate on install
until reviewed by the A/E. Include complete location dimensions, and hanger and
support sizes and dimensions.
“Typical” drawings and wiring diagrams not accepted unless they specifically apply
to this project.
Drawings shall be drawn at sufficient scale to show details clearly on same size
sheets as Drawings.
Show required coordination with work of other trades.
Identify details and show their locations in Project.
Include description of configuration and operation of proposed systems.
Include outline drawings of proposed equipment in plan and elevation views
including overall dimensions, weights, and clearance required.
Include one-line telecommunications diagrams.
CAD Drawings: AutoCAD floor plan backgrounds are available in electric format
and shall be requested from the A/E.
Direct use of the Drawings as the basis of Contractor’s prepared Shop Drawings
not acceptable.
D.
Approval: Approval of a manufacturer’s name or product by the A/E does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in
detail with requirements of the Contract Documents.
E.
Re-Submittals: Clearly identify re-submittals. Provide revised tabs, indexes, page
renumbering, and other formats to interface with original submittal. Identify changes and
include date for project tracking.
F.
Test reports and Certificates: Submit as a package prior to Substantial Completion.
G.
Certifications: Submit written certifications from the governing building authorities stating
that work has been inspected and accepted, and complies with applicable codes and
ordinances.
H.
Record Drawings: Comply with Article “Record Drawings” in this section.
I.
Schedule of Values:
1.
2.
Comply with the requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements as
indicated in this paragraph.
Include costs in Schedule of Values as follows:
a.
Mobilization.
b.
Submittals.
c.
Low Voltage Permit.
d.
Low Voltage Site – Material.
e.
Low Voltage Site –Labor.
f.
Low Voltage – Telecommunications Systems Pathway Rough-in, Material.
g.
Low Voltage – Telecommunications Systems Pathway Rough-in, Labor.
h.
Low Voltage – Telecommunications Cabling, Material.
27 05 00 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
i.
j.
k.
1.4
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
Low Voltage – Telecommunications Cabling, Labor.
Punch List and Close Out.
Testing and Training.
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
A.
Refer to Division 01 for definitions and abbreviations.
abbreviations are as follows.
B.
“Approved” or “Approval” means written approval by the owner or “Owner’s agent” (A/E).
C.
“Codes” means AHJ adopted codes, rules, and ordinances and additional codes as
specified herein.
D.
“Concealed” means spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings, below floors,
between double walls, furred-in areas, pipe and duct shafts, and similar spaces.
E.
The word “Contractor”, as used in Divisions 27 sections, means the telecommunications
subcontractor.
F.
“Coordination”, “Coordinating”, and “Coordinate” means to bring, or the bringing, into a
common action, movement, or combination so as to act together in a smooth concerted
way.
G.
“Directed”, “Requested”, “Accepted”, and Similar Terms means these terms imply “by the
A/E” unless otherwise indicated.
H.
“Exposed” means open to view. For example, raceways installed in a tunnel or raceways
installed in a room and not covered by other construction.
I.
“Furnish” means supply and deliver to the project site ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar activities.
J.
“Indicated” and “Indicated on the Drawings” means shown on Drawings by notes,
graphics or schedules, or written into other portions of Contract Documents. Terms such
as “shown”, “noted”, “scheduled” and “specified” have same meanings as “indicated”,
and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information.
K.
“Install” means to place in position for service or use. Includes operations at project site,
such as unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, preserving, anchoring,
applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar
activities.
L.
“Provide” means furnish and install for a complete, finished, and operable system and
ready for intended use.
M.
“Shop Drawings” means Document which fully details equipment and intended
installation relative to this specific Project.
N.
“Substantial Completion” shall mean that the entire project (or readily definable portion
thereof if so designated in the Contracted Documents) is acceptable to code
27 05 00 - 3
Additional definitions and
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
enforcement authorities and to extent required by such authorities, has been inspected
and approved by such authorities, and is suitable for occupancy by the Owner or
occupant for the purpose intended. Refer to Division 00 and 01 for additional
requirements.
O.
“Work” or “Project” means entire scope of work required by the Contract Documents.
P.
Abbreviations:
A/E
AHJ
ANSI
ASTM
C
ETL
F
FM
IBC
NEC
NEMA
NFPA
OSHA
UL
RMS
THD
V
1.5
Architect
Authorities Having Jurisdiction
American National Standards Institute
American Society for Testing and Materials
Degrees Celsius
Environmental Technology Laboratory
Degrees Fahrenheit
Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation
International Building Code
National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 (latest adopted edition with
Amendments)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
National Fire Protection Association
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Root Mean Square
Total Harmonic Distortion
Volts
MATERIALS
A.
Where 2 or more manufacturers are listed, select for use any of those listed. The first
mentioned, in general, was used as the basis of design. Bids on any manufacturer
named acceptable as long as that manufacturer meets every aspect of the Contract
Documents. Note that equipment layout is based on equipment listed in equipment
schedules.
B.
Where other than the first named manufacturer is selected, include cost of resulting work
and redesign of associated services and structure. Include redesign drawings with Shop
Drawings.
C.
Ensure that equipment will fit within available space, including manufacturer’s
recommended clearances.
1.6
STANDARDS OF QUALITY
A.
Materials and Equipment: UL listed and labeled or other AHJ approved testing
laboratory and in compliance with other industry standards as specified.
B.
Equipment shall be manufacture’s regularly catalogued items and shall be supplied as a
complete unit in accordance with manufacturer’s standard specifications and any
optional items required for proper installation for equipment unless otherwise noted.
27 05 00 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
Equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and best trade practices.
C.
Products shall be new unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents.
D.
Fabricator and Manufacturer Qualifications: Specialists with at least 5 years experience
and regularly engaged in manufacture of equipment and materials specified.
E.
Furnish products of a single manufacturer for items which are used in quantity. A
Product, for the purpose of this paragraph, is an assembly of components such as
switchboards, transformers, panelboards, and similar items. Materials such as wire and
cable, raceways, outlet boxes, and similar items not requiring maintenance are not
included in the single manufacturer requirement of this paragraph.
F.
Installer Qualifications: Specialists with at least 5 years’ experience and regularly
engaged in the installation of the system, equipment, and materials specified. Where
required by the AHJ, employ licensed trades persons.
1.7
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this
article.
B.
Substitutions will be considered following bid award only when a product becomes
unavailable through no fault of the Contractor.
C.
Where “Manufacturer” paragraphs include the words "or approved", prior approval of the
proposed substitution is required. The A/E is sole judge of quality of proposed
substitution.
D.
When the A/E approves a substitution request, the approval is given with the
understanding that the Bidder:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified Product.
Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.
Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently
become apparent.
E.
Whenever a Product is described by detail, specification, trade name, manufacturer's
name or catalog reference, use only such Product, unless written approval is given for
substitution prior to bid. Submit written requests on substitution request form included in
Division 01. Approved substituted manufacturers will be listed by Addendum.
F.
Provide as specified certain products, materials, and systems where “manufacturer”
paragraphs are followed by the words “no substitutions”.
27 05 00 - 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
G.
1.8
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop
Drawings or product data submittals, without separate written prior approval, or when
approval will require revision to the Contract Documents.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
General: The telecommunications drawings are diagrammatic. Complete details of
building features which affect telecommunications installation may not be shown. For
additional details, refer to other Contract Documents. Report any discrepancies to the
A/E along with suggested revisions. Obtain written response from the A/E before
proceeding with changes.
B.
Depiction of Work: Drawings do not show the exact characteristics of the work including,
physical arrangement of equipment, lengths of wiring or conduit runs. Base work on
actual field measurements and conditions. Provide work required to complete the
installation.
C.
Dimensions: Do not scale drawings. Dimensional accuracy is not guaranteed, and field
verification of dimensions, locations, and levels to suit field conditions is required.
D.
Since the Drawings of floor, wall, and ceiling installation, are made at small scale,
outlets, devices, equipment, and similar items are indicated only in their approximate
location. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls, and ceilings where
not dimensioned and coordinate such locations with work of other trades to prevent
interferences.
E.
Discrepancies: Field verify dimensions and existing conditions prior to performing work.
Bring to the A/E’s attention any discrepancies within the Contract Documents and
between the Contract Documents and field conditions. Also for any design and layout
changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to the Contractor’s work
(equipment and material purchasing and installation). Any corrective work required by
the Contractor after his discovery of such discrepancies, inconsistencies, or ambiguities
shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
F.
Specifications: These specifications are written in imperative mood and streamlined
form. The imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted
otherwise. The words “shall be” are included by inference where a colon (:) is used
within sentences or phrases.
1.9
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 01, with additional requirements as indicated in this
article.
B.
Prepare Record Drawings. Record Drawings shall be new blue line prints (pencil and
black pen not acceptable) and shall show the measured locations of portions of the Work
and changes the Contractor has made.
C.
Record corrections and changes made during the progress of the work, showing work as
actually installed. In general, tolerance plus or minus 1’-0” from actual location. Indicate
27 05 00 - 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
installed locations for underground raceways. Neatly hand-draft on daily basis. Keep
readily available at project site. Use latest revisions and keep neat and clean. Do not
use Contractor’s working drawings.
D.
Record Drawings are subject to review by the A/E on a regular basis throughout
construction. At end of construction, check drawings for completeness and accuracy.
E.
Drawings shall show addendum items, change orders, clarifications, supplemental
instructions, and deviations from the Drawings.
F.
Per project closeout procedures, submit in AutoCAD format along with corrected blue
line drawings. Each sheet shall be noted as “RECORD DRAWING”.
1.10
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Divisions 27 work with other trades.
B.
Be aware of restricted space for installation of telecommunications systems. Include
offsets and perform rerouting and coordination to fit elements in available space. Include
provisions for such requirements in bid.
C.
Telecommunications equipment and systems shown are based on existing drawings as
available and on limited project site observations to the extent possible under current
conditions. Field verify existing conditions prior to commencement of work. Obtain
specific locations of structural and architectural features or equipment items from
referenced drawings, field measurements, or trade providing material or equipment.
D.
Be responsible for beam and floor penetrations as they relate to the telecommunications
work. Submit sizes and locations to the structural engineer for review and determination
of structural details.
E.
Coordinate attachments to structure to verify that attachment points on equipment and
structure can accept seismic, weight, and other loads imposed.
F.
Refer to architectural and structural drawings for location of expansion and seismic
joints. Provide flexible loops for raceways and cable trays crossing expansion and
seismic joints.
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
WORKMANSHIP
Work shall be in accordance with best trade practices.
Remove substandard
workmanship and provide new material at no extra cost to the Owner.
CERTIFICATION
By submitting a bid for the telecommunications systems, the Contractor and his
subcontractors acknowledge and certify the following:
1.
That they have carefully examined and fully understand the Drawings and
Specifications (including but not limited to architectural, site, utility, mechanical,
27 05 00 - 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.13
A.
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
structural and telecommunications drawings and specifications. In addition, they
have determined that the Drawings and Specifications are adequate to complete
the telecommunications systems and that they can provide a complete finished and
operable system in accordance with the Contract Documents.
That they have had a reasonable opportunity to discover any ambiguities in the
Contract Documents and such ambiguities have been brought to the attention of
the A/E in writing prior to submitting the bid.
That they have reviewed the project progress schedule with the general contractor,
fully understand the schedule, and they have verified, prior to submitting a bid,
availability of necessary labor and materials, including supervision and office
backup, and can comply with the schedule requirements.
That there may be changes to the scope of work and that they understand that any
proposal submitted for performance of additional work shall include costs
associated with such change including but not limited to labor, materials,
subcontracts, equipment, taxes, fees, schedule impact, loss of efficiency,
supervision, overhead and profit.
That the Contract requires them to coordinate their work with that of other trades
and that responsibility for coordination includes rerouting, offsets, and similar
provisions, to fit Work and address manufacturer’s recommended clearances for
service access, maintenance, and replacement of equipment in a manner that is
compatible with work of other trades in the same area.
That routing of elements of low voltage systems shown on the Drawings is
schematic only and that offsets and rerouting probably will be required in
installation and that labor and materials have been included for such in their bids.
That they have consulted with affected utilities and included in their bids labor and
materials to meet requirements which may be imposed by each utility and have
included in their bids costs and fees to be paid to such utilities, including temporary
services and temporary and permanent connections unless specifically excluded in
the Contract Documents.
That they understand submittals of material and equipment to the A/E is for the
purpose of establishing what they are providing for the project. Any review
undertaken by the A/E does not relieve them of their responsibilities to furnish and
install materials and equipment required for work in the project nor does such
review relieve them of their responsibilities for coordination with other trades and
designers to ensure that such materials and equipment will fit and be suitable for
purpose intended.
That they agree to receive payment for bid amounts as full compensation for
furnishing materials and labor which may be required in prosecution and
completion of work required under the Contract Documents, and in respects to
complete the contract work to the satisfaction of the A/E.
That they include in their bids costs to furnish bonds as specified in the Contract
Documents.
WARRANTY
Conform to requirements in General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division
01. Where not so prescribed or defined, the period shall be 1 year. Warranty periods
within Division 27 shall not commence until final acceptance/ completion. Contractor
shall extend longer warranties specified in other sections.
27 05 00 - 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.14
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
EQUIPMENT OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED (OFCI)
A.
Material Handling and Delivery: Coordinate delivery of OFCI equipment. Receive, off
load, transport, store, hoist, unpack, dispose of packing, same as for other project
equipment arriving at job site. Requirements of the Contract Documents apply to OFCI
equipment.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Obtain from the Owner operation and maintenance
data for the OFCI equipment and incorporate them into the Operations and Maintenance
Manuals.
1.15
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this
article.
B.
Following installation of low voltage work and prior to final acceptance, demonstrate that
equipment and systems operate as indicated in the Contract Documents and in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
C.
Perform in presence of the A/E and Owner’s representative, unless otherwise directed by
the A/E. Give minimum 1 week notice prior to demonstrations.
D.
Provide instruments and personnel required to conduct demonstrations.
1.16
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 01.
B.
Prepare list of items that are not complete prior to asking for a substantial completion
review by the A/E.
1.17
A.
1.18
ALTERNATES
General: See Bid Form and Alternates described in Division 00 and 01 for possible
effect on work of Divisions 27.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Prepare Operation and Maintenance Manuals for equipment and materials furnished
under Division 27.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 with additional requirements indicated in this
article.
C.
Submit 3 copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for review at least 4 weeks prior
to Substantial Completion date. Assemble Operation and Maintenance Manual in 3-ring
binder(s). Use multiple binders if pages in a single binder would exceed 4 inch
thickness. Separate binders for each category, such as Telecommunications, and
Electronic Safety and Security. Where one subject matter encompasses more than one
27 05 00 - 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
binder, differentiate by volume numbers. Include indexed tabs for each binder. Engrave
cover with the project title in 1/2 inch high letters and name and address of the
Contractor in 1/4 inch high letters. Provide same information in 1/8 inch high letters on
spine.
D.
Include complete cleaning and servicing data compiled in clearly and easily
understandable form. Include serial numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists
of replacement parts, motor ratings, and similar information. Each item of equipment
shall have its own individual sheet. (Example: If 2 items of equipment A and D appear
on the same sheet, individual sheet shall be included for each unit specified).
E.
Include the Following Information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.19
Identifying name and mark number.
Certified outline drawings and Shop Drawings.
Parts list.
Performance curves and data.
Wiring diagrams.
Manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions.
Vendor's name, address and telephone number for all parts and equipment.
Name, address and telephone number of Contractor performing the work.
Test reports.
Product data and Record Drawings.
PROJECT TRAINING
A.
Upon completion and testing of equipment and system installation, assemble equipment
factory representatives and subcontractors for system training with Owner's
representatives as required in specific specification sections.
B.
Each representative and subcontractor shall assist in start-up, check out, and training for
their respective system and remain on-site until the total system operation is thoroughly
reviewed by the Owner's representatives and are thoroughly trained. Return for
additional training sessions as required to completely train Owner's Representatives.
C.
Factory representative and system subcontractor shall give personal instruction on
operating and maintenance of their equipment to the Owner's maintenance and
operation personnel. To certify acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's
representative, prepare a written statement as follows:
1.
2.
This is to certify that the factory representative and system subcontractor for each
system listed below have performed start-up and final check out of their respective
systems.
The Owner's maintenance and operation personnel have received complete and
thorough instruction in the operation and maintenance of each system.
SYSTEM
FACTORY REPRESENTATIVE
(List systems included)
(List name and address of factory representative).
27 05 00 - 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
Owner's Representative
D.
1.20
A.
1.21
Contractor
Submit copy of acceptance to A/E.
PUNCHLIST AND FINAL REVIEWS
At the time of punchlist and final reviews, the project telecommunications foreman shall
accompany the reviewing party, and remove coverplates, panel covers and other access
panels as requested to allow review of entire telecommunications system.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Engineering services required beyond the final completion date shall be paid by the
Contractor at a rate of $135 per hour.
B.
Punchlists will be done at Substantial Completion and final completion dates. Submit
Record Drawings and final Operation and Maintenance Manuals prior to Substantial
Completion date. Subsequent reviews shall be paid by the Contractor at a rate of $135
per hour.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
27 05 00 - 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
GENERAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS PROVISIONS
SECTION 27 05 00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION 27 05 00
27 05 00 - 12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 27 05 10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Description: Work includes basic electrical requirements specifically applicable to
Division 27 sections including general material and installation requirements and site
work.
B.
General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections and section 270500
apply to the Work in this section.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
ordinances.
B.
UL Compliance: Where UL fire-resistance rating is indicated for construction penetrated
by access units, furnish UL listed and labeled units, except for those units which are
smaller than minimum size requiring ratings as recognized by governing authority.
C.
Codes and Standards:
1.
1.3
Comply with applicable city, county and state codes and
ASTM D 1557, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3).
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations, using means and methods to prevent damage, deterioration, and
loss, including theft.
B.
Deliver products to site in manufacturer’s original containers, complete with labels.
C.
Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and
to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
D.
Store products subject to damage by weather conditions above ground, under cover in
weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain
temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
GENERAL
Furnish specified items acceptable to AHJ as suitable for intended use.
27 05 10 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 27 05 10
B.
New, unless otherwise indicated, free from defects and the standard products of
reputable manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such equipment.
C.
Furnish similar items of equipment by same manufacturer.
D.
Materials and Equipment: UL listed and labeled or other AHJ approved testing
laboratory and in compliance with other industry standards as specified.
E.
Remove rejected or damaged material from site.
F.
Samples may be required for non-standard or substituted items before installation.
Submit samples as required in specific specification sections.
G.
Furnish required items necessary for installation and testing procedures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
3.3
EXAMINATION
Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of the various sections. Do
not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
INSPECTIONS
Confirm that installations have been inspected before enclosure within building features,
buried, or otherwise hidden from view. Pay costs associated with uncovering or
exposing installations and features not previously inspected and for repair to exposed
surfaces.
PREPARATION
A.
Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to prevent damage as work is installed.
B.
Obtain equipment roughing-in dimensions from approved Shop Drawings or actual
measurements.
C.
Be familiar with the location of other trade's equipment. Eliminate conflicts. Check door
swings before installing switches. Locate switches on strike side of doors unless noted
otherwise.
D.
Layout telecommunications work in advance of construction to eliminate unnecessary
cutting, drilling, channeling, and similar activities. Where such cutting, drilling, channeling
and similar activities become necessary for proper installation, perform with care using
skilled mechanics of trades involved. Repair damage to building and equipment at no
additional cost to the Owner.
E.
Perform cutting work of other trades only with consent of that trade. Cutting structural
members not permitted without consent of the A/E.
27 05 10 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.4
BASIC TELECOMMUNICATIONS MATERIALS AND METHODS
SECTION 27 05 10
INSTALLATION
A.
Install Work as specified and in accordance with the Drawings and manufacturer's
instructions. Where these conflict, manufacturer's instructions govern. Phased project,
coordinate with phasing on Architectural drawings.
B.
Review Architectural, Mechanical, Electrical and other applicable drawings and
applicable Shop Drawings to prevent outlets, and other equipment from being hidden
behind doors, cabinets, counters, heating equipment, and similar items, or from being
located in whiteboards, tackboards, glass panels, and similar items. Relocate devices
and connections as directed by the A/E at no additional cost to the Owner if the work is
not properly coordinated.
C.
Where conduit, outlets, floor boxes and apparatus are encased in concrete, locate and
secure at point of installation. Check locations of items before and after concrete and
masonry installation and relocate displaced items.
D.
Provide block-outs, sleeves, demolition work, and similar items required for installation of
Work specified in this division.
3.5
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Work and materials will be subject to observation at any time by the Owner and the A/E.
B.
Install material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Cutting and Patching: Do not weld to, cut, or notch structural members or building
surfaces without approval of the A/E. Restore surfaces neatly to original condition after
cutting, channeling, chasing, and drilling of walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, and
anchorage of conduit, raceways, and other equipment.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean equipment, conduit, and fittings and remove packing cartons and other debris
created by Division 27 work.
B.
Before Substantial Completion, carefully clean equipment, fixtures, exposed raceways
and similar items. Remove construction labels, dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar,
concrete, and similar items. Clean fixtures, interiors and exteriors of equipment and
raceways.
3.7
A.
PROTECTION
Protect cabling and equipment during and after hookup, painting, and final testing.
END OF SECTION 27 05 10
27 05 10 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEMOLITION
SECTION 27 05 12
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Description: Work includes phased demolition of existing telecommunications work as
indicated in the Contract Documents.
B.
General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections and section 270500
apply to Work in this section.
1.2
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulatory Requirements:
ordinances.
Comply with applicable city, county and state codes and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
Dust Control: Provide protective measures to minimize transfer of noise, dust, dirt, and
refuse to adjacent areas of building. Such measure may include dust tight barriers,
temporary walls, portable exhaust fans, vacuum systems, and temporary partitioning.
B.
Extent: Keep areas of demolition as clean and orderly as physically possible. Do not
allow demolition debris to accumulate. Gather debris and dispose daily. Broom or
vacuum-clean work areas on daily basis.
C.
Protection:
Protect existing equipment, furnishing, and systems with protective
coverings. Protect finished surfaces including floors, ceilings, and walls.
3.2
A.
3.3
A.
DAMAGES
Repairs: Promptly repair damage to existing surfaces, equipment, finishes, or adjacent
facilities at no cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the A/E and the Owner.
DEMOLITION
General: Provide phased demolition work required in existing building for removal of
existing telecommunications equipment, raceways, and cabling for installation of new
telecommunications equipment, raceways, and cabling. Relocate and modify existing
27 05 12 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEMOLITION
SECTION 27 05 12
telecommunications equipment, raceways and conductors as required by general
construction alterations and by installation of new telecommunications equipment,
raceways, and cabling in existing building to achieve a complete and functioning
installation as defined in the Contract Documents.
B.
Extent: Remove and dispose of existing materials indicated in the Contract Documents
to be removed.
C.
Reuse: Do not reuse existing products unless indicated on the Drawings.
D.
Materials to Owner: Deliver items to the Owner’s Representative as indicated in the
Contract Documents. All existing patch panels in existing server room shall remain upon
demolition of terminated cabling that shall be replaced with new cabling in three new IDF
rooms.
E.
Materials to Contractor: Materials other than those reserved by the Owner.
F.
Existing Conditions: Comply with requirements in Division 01. Verify specific phased
demolition work and operating conditions to be encountered from on-site review and
coordination with the Owner. Maintain service to existing equipment and devices during
phased new construction work as required by construction sequencing/scheduling
provisions. In areas adjacent to new construction work, provide temporary services as
necessary to meet these conditions. Protect active conductors encountered. Notify the
A/E of utilities encountered whose services are not known.
G.
Repair of Damages to Underground Utilities: Exact location of existing underground
utilities is not definitely known. Should any underground utilities be damaged in
excavations, restore such utilities without additional cost to the Owner.
H.
Drilling of Concrete: Drill openings through existing concrete with diamond tipped rotary
core-drilling equipment or carbide tipped drills. In existing post tensioned slabs, locate
and mark post tensioned strand locations with subsurface interface radar type locating
equipment prior to drilling, cutting, and sawing operations. Verify and avoid existing infloor raceway. Coordinate core drills with GC, structural and electrical.
I.
Saw-Cutting of Concrete: Saw cut through existing concrete with diamond tipped or
carbide tipped saw blade. In existing post tensioned slabs, locate and mark post
tensioned strand locations with subsurface interface radar type locating equipment prior
to drilling, cutting, and sawing operations.
3.4
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition
operations from building site unless reinstalled or delivered to the Owner as indicated in
the Contract Documents. Transport and legally dispose of material off site.
B.
Burning: Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
27 05 12 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.5
TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEMOLITION
SECTION 27 05 12
CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR
A.
Clean-Up:
Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and
demolished materials from site. Remove protection and leave interior areas clean.
B.
Repair: Repair demolition performed in excess of that required at no additional cost to
Owner. Return structures and surfaces to conditions existing prior to commencement of
demolition work or as directed by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 27 05 12
27 05 12 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 05 33
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Description: Work includes conduit, telecommunications metallic tubing, wireway,
surface metal raceway, poke-thru’s and associated appurtenances.
B.
General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections and 270500 apply to
Work in this section.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
ordinances.
B.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Comply with applicable city, county and state codes and
UL 1, Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit.
UL 5, Standard for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.
UL 360, Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
UL 514B, Standard for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings.
UL 797, Standard for Metallic Tubing – Steel.
C.
NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used
and installation of telecommunications power connections.
D.
Comply with applicable NEMA standards and refer to NEMA standards for definitions of
terminology herein. Comply with NEC for workmanship and installation requirements of
raceway systems.
E.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types
and sizes specified and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 3 years.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 27 05 00.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of raceway
system and appurtenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 797, hot-dip galvanized.
27 05 33 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
B.
2.2
TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 05 33
Fittings: UL 514B, galvanized steel, insulated throat, raintight compression ring type
through 1-1/4 inch, set screw type for 1-1/2 inch and larger. Drive-on type and cast
fittings not acceptable.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Ferrous Metal Conduit: Steel, UL 1, galvanized. UL listed for grounding as available.
Aluminum and flexible metallic tubing not acceptable.
B.
Fittings: Insulated throat, UL 514B, galvanized steel, UL listed for grounding as
available.
C.
Provide where indicated in the drawings.
2.3
A.
TELE-POWER POLES
Provide Tele-Power Poles to extend branch circuit wiring and telecommunication cabling
to locations shown on the drawings. The Tele-Power Poles shall consist of the TelePower Pole Assembly, appropriate fittings and accessories to complete the installation
per the electrical and communication drawings.
1.
Wiremold 30TP-2V.
B.
The Tele-Power Pole shall be steel channel, 10’- 5” to 12’-5” long with a cross section of
2.75” x 1. 5” with two separate compartments and an ivory-baked enamel finish. Paint
pole to match building column finish.
C.
One compartment for electrical shall be blank unless noted otherwise on electrical
drawings. Where required by electrical drawings compartment shall be factory wired with
the number of devices indicated on the drawings. The harness is to be single circuit (2
conductor plus ground), factory assembled to the receptacles. 6” conductor leads are to
be furnished for termination to the overhead wiring system. The second compartment
shall be for field installation of telecommunications horizontal cabling.
D.
A full complement of fittings for the Tele-Power Pole shall be available including, but not
limited to, entrance end fitting for top of the electrical channel, ceiling trim plate, polemounting bracket, Velcro carpet gripper pad, and adhesive pad. (If for air handling
spaces, an entrance end fitting must be furnished for the communications channel.)
2.4
LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Ferrous Metal Conduit: Galvanized with PVC weatherproof cover, UL 360 listed for
grounding as available.
B.
Fittings: Insulated throat, UL 514B, galvanized steel, UL listed for grounding as
available.
2.5
A.
CONDUIT BODIES
Conduit bodies are not permitted for use for telecommunications systems.
27 05 33 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.6
TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 05 33
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A.
UL 5, sheet metal channel with fitted cover. Type and size as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Finish: Enamel. Ivory finish as indicated on the drawings. Field paint to match wall finish
as coordinated by architect or as indicated on drawings.
C.
Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Designed for use with raceway systems.
D.
All raceway and fittings to be supplied by one manufacturer.
E.
Manufacturers: Wiremold 2400 series.
2.7
SEALING FITTINGS
A.
Wall Sealing Fittings: At each wall sealing fitting, include conduit seal fitting, OZ/Gedney
FSK Series, Crouse Hinds EYS Series, or approved.
B.
Raceway Stubups and Stubouts: Conduit seals together with wall sealing fittings.
OZ/Gedney CSB Series or approved.
2.8
A.
FIRE RATED SEALING COMPOUND
Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam or approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSPECTION
General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do
not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
PREPARATION
A.
Field Measurements:
Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to
commencing work of this section.
B.
Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of
this section.
3.3
A.
INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality
Assurance” provisions, specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and
directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.
27 05 33 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.4
TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 05 33
RACEWAY SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT
A.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, size conduit for conductor type installed.
Minimum size 1 inch for telecommunications.
B.
Install conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance in unfinished spaces.
Install a minimum of 9’-6” above finished floor in spaces or above ceilings unless
otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings.
C.
Install conduit concealed in walls, below floors, and above ceiling in spaces, except
conduit may be exposed in mechanical rooms, telecommunications rooms, and similar
unfinished spaces. Horizontal conduit installation is not allowed in floor slab unless
specifically noted on telecommunications and structural drawings.
D.
Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to building planes.
E.
Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12 inch
clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, heating and hot
water pipes, and heating appliances.
F.
Brace conduit or conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire-pulling
operations.
G.
Do not fasten or support with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove temporary conduit
supports used during construction before conductors are pulled.
H.
Do not cut structural members for passage of raceway.
3.5
RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter. Deburr cut ends.
B.
Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and tighten securely.
C.
Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheet
metal boxes in damp or wet locations.
D.
Do not use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction unless shown on the
Drawings.
E.
Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in 2 inch conduit and
larger.
F.
Provide plastic bushings on conduit stubs used for transition from conduit to open cable
runs.
G.
During construction, use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against
entrance of dirt and moisture.
H.
Distance Between Supports:
27 05 33 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 05 33
Threaded Rigid Metal Raceways: Maximum 8 foot centers and within 18 inches of
each outlet, junction box, and bend.
Electrical Metallic Tubing: Maximum 8 foot centers at each bend and within 12
inches of each outlet, junction box, and coupling.
Surface Metal Raceway, Auxiliary Gutter, and Wireway: Maximum 5 foot centers
or in accordance with manufacturer’s instruction, whichever is less, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings.
I.
Install nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty
conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end origin and destination
of each empty conduit.
J.
Route conduit through roof inside openings for ductwork where possible. Otherwise,
install through roof jack and seal weather tight.
K.
Install no more than equivalent or three 90 degree bends between boxes.
L.
Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, install junction box with drain
fitting at conduit low point.
M.
Raceway Installation below Slab on Grade and underground:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
N.
Install marker tape over underground raceway.
Arrange and slope raceway entering building to drain away from building.
Install insulated grounding bushings at conduits stubbed up or out from
underground unless capped for future (spare).
Wipe PVC conduit clean and dry before jointing. Apply full even coat of cement to
entire area to be inserted into fitting. Let joint cure for minimum 20 minutes.
Install conduit that stub up through floor at such depth that exposed conduit is
vertical and no curved section of elbow is visible.
Sealing of Conduit Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Exterior Wall Surfaces Above Grade: Seal around penetrations with caulking
approved by the A/E. For concrete construction above ground level, cast conduit
in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with mixture of equal parts of sand and
cement.
Exterior Wall Surfaces Below Grade: Cast conduit into wall (and floor) or use
manufactured seal assembly cast in place.
Roofs: Install mopped and flashing roof jack and where conduit penetrates roof
membrane.
Fire Rated Construction: Seal penetrations with fire rated sealing compound to
maintain fire rating of construction penetrated.
O.
Sealing of Raceways: Seal interior of raceways that pass through building roof and
through outside walls of building, above or below grade. Seal on end inside building.
Use raceway sealing fittings manufactured for purpose sealed with non-hardening,
compound-type mastic, specially designed for such service. Pack around wires in
raceways.
P.
Do not install conduit on exterior surface of building, except as shown on the Drawings
and as approved by the A/E.
27 05 33 - 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 05 33
Q.
Where flexible metal or liquid tight flexible metal conduit is installed, install bonding
conductor to insure electrical continuity of raceway. Route bonding jumper inside conduit
and terminate at grounding bushing or grounding locknut installed on inside of junction
boxes at each side of flexible section. In instances where this method is not feasible
(such as when cast boxes with hubs are used or where required by the NEC, route
bonding jumper on outside of flexible conduit and terminate in accordance with methods
acceptable to the AHJ.
R.
Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts.
S.
Support raceways below roof decking to provide minimum 1-1/2” separation from
raceway surface to nearest surface of metal roof decking.
T.
In finished areas with exposed structure, subject to the approval of the A/E, raceways
may be installed exposed. Install raceways as high as possible, tight to the ceiling deck,
and neatly arranged. Submit shop drawing indicating routing of proposed surface
raceways and boxes in finished areas.
3.6
SURFACE METAL RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Use flat-head screws to fasten channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.
B.
Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
C.
Maintain grounding continuity between raceway components for continuous grounding
path.
D.
Fastener Option: Use manufacturer’s standard clips and straps for installed purpose.
Include cover clips where raceways join. Provide entrance end fittings where
transitioning from an accessible ceiling space or attic to raceway, unless noted
otherwise.
3.7
A.
RACEWAY SCHEDULE
Rigid Metal Conduit:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Acceptable in all locations except as modified in this section.
Where in contact with earth or concrete, install protective coating consisting of
spirally wrapped 20 mil PVC tape with 1/2 inch minimum overlap – 3M Scotchrap
Tape 51 or approved - or utilize PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit. Completely
wrap and tape field joints.
Required for exposed raceways in areas subject to physical damage including but
not limited to the following areas:
a.
Loading Docks
PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit:
1.
Required in corrosive environments or where indicated on the Contract Drawings,
including but not limited to the following areas:
a.
Chemical storage rooms
27 05 33 - 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
C.
Intermediate Metal Conduit:
1.
2.
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Acceptable underground with minimum 24 inches of cover.
Acceptable below concrete slab on grade installed a minimum of 2 inches below
bottom of slab.
Acceptable within masonry walls.
Not acceptable for raceways extending through concrete; utilize Rigid Metal
Conduit.
Not acceptable for bends 45 degrees and greater unless concrete encased; utilize
Rigid Metal Conduit as specified herein or PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit. Field
bends not acceptable.
Concrete encased were indicated on Contract Drawings or where required by
Code or Utility.
Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit:
1.
G.
Acceptable for dry interior locations where not exposed to moisture or physical
damage.
Not acceptable for circuits over 600 Volts.
Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit:
1.
2.
F.
May be used in lieu of rigid metal conduit unless otherwise prohibited by code or
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
Not acceptable for circuits over 600 Volts.
Electrical Metallic Tubing:
1.
E.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAY SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 05 33
For feeding owner provided modular furniture base. Coordinate with electrical
contractor.
Surface Metal and Multi-Outlet Raceway:
Drawings.
END OF SECTION 27 05 33
27 05 33 - 7
Install where indicated on the Contract
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES
SECTION 27 05 34
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Description:
Work includes outlet, junction, and pull boxes and associated
appurtenances required to enclose devices, permit pulling conductors, and for wire
splices and branches.
B.
General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 sections and section 270500
apply to Work in this section.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
ordinances.
B.
Codes and Standards:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Comply with applicable city, county and state codes and
NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).
UL 514A, Metallic Outlet Boxes.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 and Section 27 05 00.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each type of outlet box
and appurtenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OUTLET BOXES FOR INTERIOR WIRING
A.
General: Outlet and pull boxes pressed steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where
applicable, minimum 4-11/16 inch size. See Telecommunications detail drawings for
additional information. See Division 27 specification sections for additional information.
B.
Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same manufacturer and to match raceway. Boxes
shall accommodate standard devices and device plates.
C.
Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete and mounting in masonry walls of
type specifically designed for that purpose.
D.
Sheet Metal Boxes Larger than 12 Inches in any Dimension: Include hinged enclosure.
27 05 34 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.2
A.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES
SECTION 27 05 34
OUTLET BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES
Outlet Boxes Containing Multiple Devices and Wiring Rated over 150 Volts to Ground
and Over 300 Volts between Conductors: Permitted only with steel barrier manufactured
especially for purpose of dividing outlet box into separate compartments for each device
having exposed live parts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
INSPECTION
General: Verify installation conditions as satisfactory to receive work of this section. Do
not install until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
PREPARATION
A.
Field Measurements:
Field verify locations of new and existing work prior to
commencing work of this section.
B.
Protection: Protect surrounding areas and surfaces to preclude damage from work of
this section.
3.3
A.
3.4
INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, ERECTION, AND PERFORMANCE
General: Install, apply, erect, and perform the work in accordance with Article “Quality
Assurance” provisions, specifications, and manufacturer’s installation instructions and
directions. Where these may be in conflict, the more stringent requirements govern.
COORDINATION OF OUTLET BOX LOCATIONS
A.
Locate as shown on the Drawings and as required to facilitate pulling. Limit number of
bends per NEC.
B.
Telecommunications box locations shown on the Drawings are approximate unless
dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets before roughing in.
C.
Locate outlet boxes to allow access.
installation of access doors.
D.
Coordinate Work of this section with the Work of other sections and trades to avoid
conflicts. Check and verify door swings and locations of built-in cabinets, plumbing,
heating, and ventilating equipment.
E.
Install outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve equipment furnished
under this or other divisions of the specifications. Make final connections thereto.
Review equipment Shop Drawings for required outlet locations.
If inaccessible, furnish, arrange, and pay for
27 05 34 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES
SECTION 27 05 34
F.
Where more than one outlet box is shown on the Drawings, and indicated to be at same
elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on center lines horizontally or
vertically.
Relocate outlet boxes which are not so installed (including
telecommunications, lighting, receptacle, power, signal, and temperature control outlets)
at no additional cost to the Owner.
G.
Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features,
or where outlet boxes are centered between such features, such as between door jamb
and cabinet, make these outlet box locations exact. Relocate outlet boxes which are not
centered.
H.
Flush mount boxes with front edge of box or plaster ring even with finished surface of
wall and ceiling, except those mounted above accessible ceilings and where surface
mounting is permitted.
I.
Locate to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.
J.
Route conduit from outlet boxes in walls vertically to space above ceiling. Install junction
box before horizontal run.
K.
Offset outlet boxes minimum of one stud horizontal separation between flush boxes
mounted on opposite sides of acoustic rated common wall.
L.
Install outlet boxes with minimum 6 inch horizontal separation between closest edges of
flush boxes mounted on opposite sides of common wall.
3.5
OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A.
Anchor boxes so they will not shift or rock when devices are operated (including insertion
and removal of cord caps).
B.
Firmly anchor flush outlet boxes directly or with concealed bracing to studs and joists.
C.
Close unused openings.
D.
Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast outlet boxes that are connected
to 2 rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches of outlet box.
E.
Use multiple-gang outlet boxes where 2 or more devices are mounted together. Do not
use sectional boxes.
F.
Install blank covers or plates over outlet boxes that do not contain devices.
G.
Install recessed outlet boxes in finished areas. Secure outlet boxes to interior wall and
partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped
steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall and adjustable steel channel
fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.
H.
Install outlet boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
27 05 34 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES
SECTION 27 05 34
I.
Seal conduit boxes, telephone boxes, and similar items air tight with acoustical caulk
where located in acoustical rated walls that are not fire rated.
J.
Install outlet boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for outlet boxes. Use outlet boxes
with sufficient depth to permit conduit hubs to be located in masonry void space.
K.
Install pull boxes to be accessible after completion of building construction.
3.6
A.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK, AND
CASEWORK
Install as shown on the Drawings. Furnish templates to other trades for drilling and
cutting to ensure accurate location of telecommunications devices as verified with the
A/E.
END OF SECTION 27 05 34
27 05 34 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
Description: Work includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.2
A.
General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions, Division 01 and 27 05 00 sections apply to Work
in this section.
RELATED SECTIONS
Related Sections
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Structured Cabling System supporting various low-voltage systems
Telecommunications Rooms and Spaces
Grounding and Bonding Infrastructure
Manufacturer Certification
270500 – General Telecommunications Provisions
270510 – Basic Telecommunications Materials and Methods
270512 – Telecommunications Demolition
270533 – Telecommunications Raceway System
270534 – Telecommunications Outlet Boxes
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
ordinances.
B.
Codes and Standards:
1.
Comply with applicable city, county and state codes and
Installation Standards: Comply with following standards for cable and equipment
installations. Publications shall be latest issue and addenda:
a.
NEC, National Electric Code.
b.
NESC, National Electric Safety Code.
c.
TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises.
d.
TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
Part 1: General Requirements.
e.
TIA-568-C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and
Components Standards.
f.
TIA-568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standards.
g.
ANSI/TIA-569-D, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces.
h.
TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Building.
i.
TIA-607-B Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)
For Customer Premises.
j.
TIA-862-A, Building Automation Systems Cabling.
27 11 00 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
C.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
TIA-526-7, Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode
Fiber Cable Plant – OFSTP-7.
TIA-526-14-B, Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode
Fiber Cable Plant-OFSTP-14.
IEEE 802.3-2000. Ethernet Standard.
BICSI Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual.
BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual.
2.
Contractor shall have read the above documents and shall be familiar with the
requirements that pertain to this installation. The documents may be obtained from:
a.
Global Engineering Documents, 15 Inverness Way East, Englewood, CO,
80112-5776, 800-854-7179, http://global.ihs.com/
b.
BICSI, 8610 Hidden River Parkway, Tampa, FL, 33637, 800-242-7405,
www.bicsi.org
3.
Materials:
a.
UL listed and labeled. Install label to be visible.
b.
Equipment: Regularly catalogued items of manufacturer and supplied as
complete unit in accordance with manufacturer's standard specifications with
optional items required for proper installation unless otherwise noted in this
section.
c.
Telecommunications connectivity and cabling independently tested to meet
current TIA standards.
Qualifications:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The contractor performing work specified in this section is required to have special
skills obtained by education, experience, or both.
Contractors bidding work specified herein shall have a minimum of seven years of
experience in the construction, testing, and servicing of systems of the type and
magnitude specified in this section. The subcontractor shall have completed at
least five projects of equal or larger size to this project within the past five years.
Contractor shall be a certified installer of the telecommunications system and prequalified by the manufacturer for the purpose of offering the Applications
Assurance warranty at the time of bid.
Contractor shall have direct access to the tools and test equipment required to
complete the telecommunications work when the work is bid.
Project manager (in office) and superintendent (field) shall have 5 years of
experience at project manager and superintendent levels, respectively, on
completed telecommunications projects of like magnitude and complexity as to this
project. Project manager shall be certified as a Registered Communications
Distribution Designer (RCDD) through Building Industry Consulting Service
International (BICSI).
a.
RCDD shall be a direct employee of the company bidding on said work.
Field technicians who will work independently at any given time during the project
on the structured cabling system shall have a minimum of 3 years’ experience on
completed telecommunications projects of like magnitude and complexity as to this
project. Field technicians working at job site shall have completed a copper
technician installation training class conducted by the warranting manufacturer or
BICSI.
27 11 00 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
7.
1.4
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 01, Section 013300 and Section 270500.
Product Data:
a.
Submit with data arranged under basic categories, such as, certifications,
personnel training, manufacturer warranty, products, test equipment and
calibration, and similar items. Include index with the submittals.
b.
Organize by specification infrastructure component sections described in
Part 1 and Part 2 of this section.
c.
Submit Product Data information sheets for coordination with item and model
number.
d.
Where more than one product is shown on a page, mark product with arrow
or by other means to identify exact product or products being submitted by
specific part number.
e.
Submit network test equipment proof of calibration by manufacturer.
f.
Submit resumes and certifications of technicians and project manager who
will support this project. Certifications shall include:
1)
RCDD certification
2)
Copper and optical fiber installation certification
3)
Approved manufacturer classes satisfactorily completed to provide
manufacturer warrantied solution
Test Reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Submit complete at one time. Partial product submittals not acceptable and will be
returned unreviewed.
Pre-Construction Submittal:
1.
C.
Field technicians who will work independently at any given time during the project
on the optical fiber systems shall have a minimum of 3 years’ experience on
completed telecommunications projects of like magnitude and complexity as to this
project. Field technicians working at the job site shall have completed an optical
fiber technician installation training class conducted by the warranting
manufacturer or BICSI.
SUBMITTALS
1.
B.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Prepare test reports and submit to the Owner’s Representative an electronic copy
of the detailed test results, including overall test summary report.
Include a copy of the detailed test reports on CD-ROM in each Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
Include a hard copy of the summary test sheets in each Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
Submit electronic copies in PDF and LinkWare software formats, including
LinkWare reader software.
Record Drawings:
1.
2.
Keep complete set of telecommunications drawings in job-site office updated within
3 days to show actual installation of cabling and equipment during construction.
Use of this set of drawings for recording as-built conditions.
27 11 00 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
E.
Indicate where material, equipment, and system component are installed differently
from that shown on the Drawings, clearly and neatly using ink or indelible pencil in
color red during construction.
Prepare electronic set of Record Drawings, incorporating changes during
construction. Submit Record Drawings to the Owner’s Representative for review
and acceptance.
Submit Record Drawings using latest version of AutoCAD software or as approved
by the Owner, and in PDF format. Request final architectural background drawing
files that incorporate floor plan and program spaces numbering modifications.
AutoCAD drawings shall be e-transmitted to include backgrounds, title blocks and
other associated files.
Submit electronic copy of Record Drawings in full-size PDF and AutoCAD format,
on CD-ROM.
Prepare laminated hard copy of telecommunications floor plan drawings,
telecommunications room layouts, and equipment rack elevations. Install in each
telecommunications room for associated floor area served.
a.
Floor plan drawings shall be full-size, scaled down drawings shall not be
acceptable.
Project Closeout:
1.
2.
1.5
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Submit closeout documentation to the Owner’s Representative and Architect under
provisions of Division 01, section 017700 and this section.
Provide all project closeout documentation including but not limited to; test result
documentation, Record Drawings, manufacturer warranty certificates and
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
DEFINITIONS
Administration: Methodology defining the documentation requirements of a cabling
system and its containment, the labeling of functional elements, and the process by
which moves, additions, and changes are recorded
Bonding: Permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that
will ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be
imposed
Cable: An assembly of one or more insulated conductors or optical fibers within an
enveloping sheath
Cable run: Length of installed media, which may include other components along its
path
Cabling: System of cables, cords, and connecting hardware
Channel: End-to-end transmission path between 2 points at which application-specific
equipment is connected including test cords and patch cords for a maximum total
distance of 328 feet (100 meters)
Connecting hardware: Device, or combination of devices, used to connect cables or
cable elements
Consolidation point: Location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending
from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways
27 11 00 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Cross-connection: Connection scheme between cabling runs, subsystems, and
equipment using patch cords or jumpers that attach to connecting hardware on each end
Demarcation point: Point where operational control or ownership changes
Equipment room: Environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications
equipment that usually houses a main or intermediate cross-connect
Ground: Conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an
electrical circuit or equipment and the earth, or to some conducting body that serves in
place of earth
Horizontal cabling: Distribution media that connects the telecommunications
outlet/connector at the work area and the first piece of connecting hardware in the
horizontal cross-connect
Horizontal cross-connect: Group of connectors that allows equipment and backbone
cabling to be cross-connected with patch cords or jumpers
Infrastructure (telecommunications): Collection of those telecommunications
components, excluding equipment, that together provides basic support for the
distribution of information within a building or campus
Local area network (LAN): Standard industry term for a network installation that
serves a relatively small area (for example, structured cabling installation serving a
building)
Main cross-connect: Cross-connect normally located in the (main) equipment room for
cross-connection and interconnection of entrance cables, first-level backbone cables,
and equipment cables
Metropolitan area network (MAN): Data communications network that covers an area
larger than a campus area and smaller than a wide area network
Modular jack: Female telecommunications connector that may be keyed or unkeyed
and may have 6 or 8 contact positions
Outlet/connector (telecommunications): Connecting device in the work area on
which a horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates
Patch cord: Length of cable with connectors on both ends used to join
telecommunications circuits/links at the cross-connect
Patch panel: Connecting hardware system that facilitates cable terminations and
cabling administration using patch cords
Pathway: Sequence of connections that provides connectivity between devices on a
network or between networks on an internetwork; the vertical and horizontal route of the
telecommunications cable; a facility for the placement of telecommunications cabling
Permanent link: Test configuration for link excluding test cords and patch cords for
maximum total distance of 295 feet (90 meters)
Plenum: Compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts are connected and
that forms part of the air distribution system
Telecommunications Room: Enclosed architectural space for housing
telecommunications equipment, cable terminations, and cross-connect cabling
27 11 00 - 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Storage Area Network (SAN): Specialized high-speed network dedicated to the
transport of data between storage devices and servers
Star topology: Network topology in which services are distributed from or through a
central point
Telecommunications: Transmission, emission, and reception of signs, signals,
writings, images, and sounds, that is information of any nature by cable, radio, optical, or
other electromagnetic systems
Unshielded twisted pair (UTP): Cable made up of one or more pairs of twisted copper
conductors with no metallic shielding; the entire assembly is covered with an insulating
sheath (cable jacket)
Wireless access point: Stand-alone hardware device or computer wireless adapter
with software that acts as a wireless communication hub for users of wireless devices to
connect with each other and to bridge those devices to the cabled portion of the network
Wide area network (WAN): Data communications system that uses
telecommunications circuits to link LANs that are distributed over large geographic
distances
Wireless local area network (WLAN): Data communications system that uses using
radio frequency technology, such networks transmit and receive data over the air,
minimizing the need for wired connections; they combine data connectivity with user
mobility
Work area (workstation): Building space where occupants interact with
telecommunications terminal equipment
Work area cable (cord): Cable connecting the telecommunications outlet/connector to
the terminal equipment
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS
The telecommunications subcontractor shall attend the pre-construction meeting as
required by the Contractor or the Owner’s Representative.
MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION
The structured cabling system shall be covered by an Extended Product and Application
Assurance Warranty.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Approved manufacturer partner is Ortronics/ Berk-Tek solution.
Warranty shall cover passive telecommunications infrastructure copper and optical
fiber connectivity and cabling products and performance for a minimum of 25 years
from date of installation registration, and will support existing or future applications.
Installation practices shall follow the installation guidelines and procedures
specified in the manufacturer certified installer training course and current TIA
standards.
Submit closeout documentation in accordance with the manufacturer warranty
requirements to comply for acceptance of warranty.
The contractor shall provide the original hard copy certificate for the Application
Assurance Warranty to the Owner.
27 11 00 - 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.8
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
MATERIAL PROVISIONS
A.
Deliver materials to the Owner under provisions of this section.
B.
Contractor shall be responsible to provide a material transmittal for all materials being
provided to the Owner as described herein and that are not permanently installed.
Transmittal shall be signed by the Owner receiving the materials. Transmittal shall be
included as part of the O&M manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Substitutions: The substitution of products shall not be considered under the terms and
conditions of this Section.
B.
The basis of design for manufacturer partner and connectivity is Berk-Tek cabling and
Ortronics connectivity as specified herein.
C.
All copper connectivity shall be Category 6:
D.
All optical fiber connectivity shall be OM3 Multimode Fiber and OS2 Singlemode Fiber:
2.2
A.
OPEN CABLING SUPPORTS
Provide all accessories and mounting hardware required for a complete and working
installation of open cabling supports. All tie wraps installed in the plenum spaces shall be
plenum rated.
1.
B.
Circular Cable Retainer:
1.
C.
Manufacturer Panduit or equal:
a.
Plenum 7.4”, Part No. PRT2S-M2
b.
Non-Plenum 8.0”, Part No. PLT2M
Cable retainers shall comply with TIA requirements for structured cabling systems
and pathway supports. The cabling retainers shall be of plastic material with
rounded edges, plenum rated, utilizing an easy-lock closure and an attachment
base. Cable retainers shall be screwed into structure and shall not be attached with
self-adhesive. Cable retainers shall only be utilized in spaces that are extremely
tight and J-hooks do not have sufficient space to be mounted.
a.
Manufacturer Erico Caddy, Part No. CAT CR50
J-Hooks:
1.
2.
J-hooks shall comply with TIA requirements for structured cabling systems and
pathway supports. Galvanized finish. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for
quantity of cables supported.
Provide all hardware necessary for secure mounting to the structure.
a.
Manufacturer Erico Caddy:
27 11 00 - 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1)
2)
3)
4)
D.
2.
A.
Split duct shall provide protection for cabling from the modular furniture feedthrough point devices to the modular furniture base channel. Split duct shall have a
1.88-inch inside diameter and a 2.17-inch outside diameter and be in the color
black.
a.
Manufacturer Panduit, Part No. CLT188F-C20 (per 100’-0” roll)
FIRE-RATED PATHWAY DEVICE
The fire-rated pathway device shall consist of a heavy gauge galvanized steel raceway
lined with intumescent firestopping material. The intumescent firestopping material shall
automatically adjust to the size of the cabling bundle and shall permit cabling to be
added or removed without the need to remove the firestopping material. Provide the
necessary quantity of wall plates to support the pathway device. The pathway device
shall be UL tested and classified in accordance with ASTM E814 (UL1479).
1.
B.
Waterfalls shall be provided at the ends of 4-inch conduits and conduit sleeves
installed horizontally where the pathways transition from conduit to ladder rack and
cable tray pathways. Waterfalls shall be utilized to provide bend radius of all
horizontal and backbone cabling. Waterfalls shall be UL Listed and rated for UL
94V-0. Material shall be glass reinforced flame retardant nylon 6.6.
a.
Manufacturer Panduit, Part No. CWF400
Cable Protective Devices:
1.
2.3
Cable supports shall comply with TIA requirements for structured cabling system
and pathway supports. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for quantity of
cables supported.
Provide all hardware necessary for secure mounting to the structure.
a.
Manufacturer Erico Caddy, Part No. CAT425
Conduit Waterfalls:
1.
F.
1” Dia., Part No. CAT16HP
1-5/16” Dia., Part No. CAT21HP
2” Dia., Part No. CAT32HP
3” Dia., Part No. CAT48HP
Adjustable Cable Support:
1.
E.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
On the 3-inch and 4-inch sleeves, provide radius control modules at the end of
each sleeve through wall transitions and penetrations.
a.
Manufacturer Specified Technologies, Inc. EZ Path:
1)
1-Inch mini fire-rated pathway device, Part No. EZD22
2)
3-Inch fire-rated pathway device, Part. No. EZD33FW
3)
3-Inch radius control module, Part No. RCM33
4)
4-Inch fire-rated pathway device, Part No. EZP144W
5)
4-Inch radius control module, Part No. RCM44
Firestopping putty shall be a one-part, two-stage intumescent, non-hardening compound.
The putty, when exposed to high heat or flame shall be capable of expanding a minimum
of five times. Range of continuing expansion shall be from 230°F to >1,000°F (110°C to
>538°C). The putty shall be soft and pliable with aggressive adhesion and shall not
27 11 00 - 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
contain any water-soluble intumescent ingredients. The putty shall be UL Classified
and/or FM Systems Approved and tested to the requirements of ASTM E814 (UL1479).
1.
2.4
A.
COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
Category 6 UTP cabling for interior spaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Manufacturer Specified Technologies, Inc. SpecSeal:
a.
24” putty bar, Part No. SSP28
b.
36” putty bar, Part No. SSP100
Each horizontal cable shall be constructed from 23 AWG insulated solid bare
copper conductors formed into four individually twisted pairs with a crossfiller
center spline.
Cable shall be NFPA 262, CMP (plenum) rated as specified herein, unless
otherwise noted. Cable diameter shall not exceed 0.23 inches.
Each conductor shall have an impedance of 100Ω ±10% / 100m.
Each cable shall meet the most current technical characteristics of ANSI/TIA-568-C
standard.
a.
Wire map
b.
Length
c.
Insertion loss (Attenuation) 32.6dB/100m @ 250MHz
d.
Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss 43.3dB/100m @ 250MHz
e.
Attenuation to crosstalk ration far-end (ACRF) 24.8dB/100m @ 250 MHz
f.
Power sum Attenuation to crosstalk ration far-end (PSACRF) 21.8dB/100m
@ 250MHz
g.
Power sum-near-end crosstalk (PS-NEXT) 41.3dB/100m @ 250MHz
h.
Return loss (RL) 20.5dB/100m @ 250MHz
i.
Propagation delay (PD) (CMP) 72% nom, (CMR) 68% nom
j.
Delay skew (DS) 45ns/100m max
k.
Balance (LCL/TCL) 27.0dB/100m @ 200MHz
l.
Balance (EL-TCTL) 9.0dB/100m @ 20 MHz
Manufacturer Berk-Tek LANmark-1000 series:
a.
Yellow plenum rated, Part No. 10032090
Category 6 UTP outside plant cabling for underground and exterior spaces:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Each horizontal cable shall be constructed from 23 AWG insulated solid bare
copper conductors formed into four individually twisted pairs with a crossfiller
center spline and enclosed by a UV resistant polyethylene in the color black.
Cable shall contain a gel-filled water resistant flooding compound.
Cabling shall be utilized per the NEC for use where pathways are routed within or
below building slabs and foundations, in outside plant underground pathways and
for aerial applications.
Provide cross-connect to rated Category 6 cabling in plenum rated enclosure in
accessible ceiling space where required.
Cable diameter shall not exceed 0.25 inches.
Each conductor shall have an impedance of 100Ω ±10% / 100m.
Each cable shall meet the most current technical characteristics of ANSI/TIA-568-C
standard.
27 11 00 - 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
7.
2.5
A.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Wire map
Length
Insertion loss (Attenuation) 32.8dB/100m @ 250MHz
Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss 38.3dB/100m @ 250MHz
Attenuation to crosstalk far-end crosstalk (ACRF) 19.8dB/100m @ 250 MHz
Power sum attenuation to crosstalk far-end crosstalk (PSACRF)
16.8dB/100m @ 250MHz
Power sum-near-end crosstalk (PS-NEXT) 36.3dB/100m @ 250MHz
Return loss (RL) 17.3dB/100m @ 250MHz
Propagation delay (PD) 62% nom
Delay skew (DS) 45ns/100m max
Manufacturer Berk-Tek LANmark-6 OSP, Part No. 10139885
INTRABUILDING BACKBONE INFRASTRUCTURE
Optical Fiber Cabling:
1.
Intrabuilding singlemode optical fiber backbone cabling shall be premise
distribution, color coded tight buffered fibers, 900 µm buffered fibers with
FGE/aramid yarns, overall yellow color jacket. Optical fiber cabling shall meet the
following standards: ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-46, 53 or 61; Telcordia GR-409; ICEA S83-596; ETL or UL OFNP (plenum) rated as specified herein, unless otherwise
noted.
a.
Singlemode optical fiber shall be Class IVa dispersion-unshifted per
ANSI/EIA/TIA-492CAAB secondary coating diameter of 242 µm. Zero
dispersion wavelength shall be between 1300 nm and 1324 nm.
b.
Nominal mode field diameter shall be 9.2 µm with a tolerance of +/- 0.5 µm at
1310 nm.
c.
Singlemode optical fiber shall meet the following performance specifications.
1)
Maximum Attenuation: 0.7 dB/km @ 1310/1550 nm
2)
Transmission distance: 1 GbE ≥ 5 km @ 1310 nm
3)
Cutoff Wavelength: <1279 nm when measured in accordance with
ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-170 or ANSI/EIA/TIA-455-80. Distance versus
bandwidth shall be using a laser transmitter operating at a 1310 nm
wavelength.
4)
Operating Temperature: -20C to +75C
5)
Storage Temperature: -40C to +85C
d.
Manufacturer Berk-Tek:
1)
24-strand plenum rated, Part No. PDP12B024AB0707
2.
Intrabuilding 50/125 µm multimode optical fiber backbone cabling (OM3) shall be a
tight buffered premise distribution cable with 900 µm buffered fibers surrounded by
FGE/aramid yarns. Cable shall have an overall aqua color jacket and shall meet
the following standards: ANSI/TIA-455-46, 53 or 61; ANSI/TIA-455-51 or 30;
Telcordia GR-409; ICEA S-83-596; ETL or UL and OFNP (plenum) rated as
specified herein, unless otherwise noted.
a.
Multimode optical fiber shall meet the following performance specifications.
1)
Maximum Attenuation: 3.0 dB/km @ 850 nm, 1.0 dB/km @ 1300 nm
27 11 00 - 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
2)
b.
2.6
A.
B.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS WORKSTATION DEVICES
Category 6 Modules:
1.
8-Position 8-Conductor modules shall be Category 6, dual reactance technology,
non-keyed, universal T568A/B, wired in accordance with the T568B pin
configuration standard and used to terminate Category 6 UTP cables as specified
herein. Module shall be high impact plastic housing, flame retardant UL 94V-O,
modular contacts shall be beryllium copper, nickel plating under 50 micro-inches
gold plating in contact area. IDC contacts shall be phosphor bronze, nickel under
plating with tin lead over plate serving 22 through 24 AWG.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics:
1)
Category 6 module:
a)
Cloud white, Part No. OR-TJ600-88
2)
Blank module in package of 10:
a)
Cloud white, Part No. OR-42100002-88
2.
Provide Wiremold Ivory color, Category 6, 8P8C modules and blank modules for
installation of modules in Wiremold raceway.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics:
1)
Category 6 module, Part No. OR-TJ600-99
2)
Blank module (pkg. of 10), Part No. OR-42100002-99
3.
Provide black color, Category 6, 8P8C modules and blank modules for installation
of modules in Wiremold Furniture Outlet at Modular Furniture locations.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics:
1)
Category 6 module, Part No. OR-TJ600-00
2)
Blank module (pkg. of 10), Part No. OR-42100002-00
Wall Phone Faceplate with Studs:
1.
C.
Minimum Bandwidth: Effective Model Bandwidth using Differential
Mode Delay is 2000 MHz-km @ 850 nm; Overfilled launch is 500
MHz-km @ 1300 nm
3)
Gigabit Ethernet distances of 1000 m @ 850 nm, 600 m @ 1300 nm
4)
10 Gigabit Ethernet distances of 300 m @ 850 nm, 300 m @
1300 nm
5)
Numeric Aperture: 0.200 +/- 0.015
6)
Core Diameter: 50 +/- 2.5 µm
7)
Cladding Diameter: 125.0 +/- 1.0 µm
8)
Operating Temperature: -20C to +75C
9)
Storage Temperature: -40C to +85C
Manufacturer Berk-Tek:
1)
24-strand plenum rated, Part No. PDP024EB3010/25
Wall phone faceplates shall be stainless steel single gang plates with top and
bottom phone studs for mounting of telephony handsets. Provide 8P8C module in
the category of infrastructure specified for the structured cabling system.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics, Part No. OR-403STJ1WP
Faceplates:
27 11 00 - 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
D.
A.
Frame shall hold 8P8C modules and shall utilize a Decora style configuration.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics:
1)
3-port Decora bezel:
a)
Cloud white, Part No. OR-41900017-88
2)
4-port Decora bezel:
a)
Cloud white, Part No. OR-41900018-88
Modular Furniture Outlets
1.
2.7
Bezel shall hold 8P8C modules and shall utilize a 106-type configuration.
Bezels shall utilize a color that matches the power pole; default color shall be
Wiremold Ivory.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics, Part No. OR-40800019-99
Floor Box and Poke-Thru Pedestal Frame:
1.
G.
Surface mount interface boxes shall be thermoplastic to hold 8P8C modules with
recessed designation strips with clear plastic covers in accordance with the
ANSI/TIA-606-B labeling standard.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics:
1)
2-Port cloud white, Part No. OR-404TJ2-88
Power Pole Bezel:
1.
2.
F.
Faceplate shall be thermoplastic or stainless steel manufactured to hold 8P8C
modules with recessed designation strips with clear plastic covers in accordance
with the ANSI/TIA-606-B labeling standard. Stainless where indicated on drawings
or in plenum spaces.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics:
1)
4-port thermoplastic:
a)
Cloud white, Part No. OR-40300546-88
2)
4-port stainless steel, Part No. OR-403STJ14
Surface Mount Interface Boxes:
1.
E.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Modular Furniture Plate shall provide mounting of TracJack Modules. Owner
provided furniture manufacturer with base opening template for Modular Furniture
Plate. Color shall be black.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics:
1)
OR-40300633-00
DIRECT CONNECT AND ALARM CONNECTIVITY
Direct Connect Connectivity and Terminations:
1.
8P8C Modular Plugs
a.
Provide pre-approved Category 6 8-position, 8-conductor 8P8C plugs by the
warranting manufacturer for the direct attach termination to solid conductor
Category 6 cabling.
b.
8P8C plugs shall be field terminated with manufacturer approved termination
tool. No other termination tools shall be authorized for the termination of
these direct attach terminations.
27 11 00 - 12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
c.
d.
2.8
A.
Plugs with a plastic boot shall be plenum rated when used in an air-plenum
environment.
Adhere to manufacturer’s plug installation guidelines and testing procedures
to ensure proper performance and signal transmission.
1)
Category 6 8P8C plug approved manufacturers:
a)
Bel Stewart, Part No. SS-39100-021
b)
Sentinel, Part No. 111-08080054L34
c)
Allen Tel, Part No. AT8X8RCSC-24
2)
8P8C termination tool approved manufacturers:
a)
Bel Stewart, Part No. 2990003-01
b)
Sentinel, Part No. 90015
c)
Allen Tel, Part No. AT568 or AT680
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS AND SPACES
Fire Retardant Plywood Backboards:
1.
B.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Plywood backboards shall be 3/4” fire retardant ACX plywood backboard to cover
walls as shown on drawings. Backboard shall bear a seal identifying the plywood is
fire-rated.
Ladder Rack:
1.
2.
3.
Ladder rack shall be prefabricated metal structure consisting of longitudinal stringer
side rails with cross members welded at 12 inch intervals on center.
Both stringer side rails and cross members shall be constructed of 3/8-inch x 1-1/2inch x 0.065-inch wall rectangular steel tubing. No portion of the cross member
rungs shall protrude below the bottom or above the top plane of the side rails.
All additional hardware required to construct the designed runway shall be those
recommended by the manufacturer. Mounting supports shall be based upon the
building conditions of the space. Utilize wall or ceiling/structural support mounting
methods only, ladder rack shall not be attached to or supported by the equipment
rack. Provide seismic bracing of the ladder rack as required by the AHJ. Cable
loading shall meet the loading requirements of NEMA 12C.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
Universal cable runway, Part No. 10250-712 and 10250-718
2)
Protective end caps, 1-pair, Part No. 10642-001
4.
Wall angle support kits shall be provided where cable runway terminates
perpendicular to the wall. Wall angle support kits consist of one wall angle bracket,
two j-bolts and attachment hardware.
a.
Manufacturer CPI, Part No. 11421-7xx (xx = width of ladder rack)
5.
Triangular bracket support kits shall provide wall support for ladder tray. Supports
shall be constructed of 1/4” x 2” aluminum bar and have a load rating of 100 lbs.
Supports kits shall consist of one triangular bracket, j-bolts and attachment
hardware.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
Ladder rack width 4”-6”, Part No. 11312-706
2)
Ladder rack width 6”-12”, Part No. 11312-712
3)
Ladder rack width 12”-18”, Part No. 11312-718
27 11 00 - 13
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
C.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
6.
Threaded ceiling kits shall be provided where cable runway runs parallel to the wall
and above equipment racks at intervals not to exceed 5-feet. Ceiling kits consists
of one ceiling support bracket, one 5/8-inch x 6-foot long threaded rod, one runway
support bracket and four 5/8-inch hex nuts. Provide (2) kits at each support
location.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
Threaded ceiling kit, 1 kit, Part No. 11310-003
2)
For locations where the ceiling height exceeds the 6-foot threaded
rod length, provide 5/8-inch threaded rod coupling kit and 5/8-inch
threaded rod.
a)
Threaded rod coupling kit, Part No. 10697-002
b)
Threaded rod, 5/8-inch x 12-feet, Part No. 11440-004
c)
Threaded rod, 5/8-inch x 8-feet, Part No. 11440-005
d)
Threaded rod, 5/8-inch x 4-feet, Part No. 11440-006
7.
Radius drop out brackets shall be provided at all sections along the ladder rack
where cabling enters and exits the horizontal pathway. Movable cross members
shall be provide for radius drops where fixed rungs are not positioned directly over
the side channels of the equipment rack.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
Cross member radius drops, Part No. 12100-7xx (xx = width of
ladder rack)
2)
Stringer radius drops, Part No. 12101-711
3)
Movable cross member cable runway, Part No. 12115-7xx (xx = width
of ladder rack)
8.
Splice kits shall be utilized to connect sections in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
Butt-splice kit, Part No. 11301-701
2)
Junction-splice kit, Part No. 11302-701
3)
45 degree runway splice kit, Part No. 11313-701
9.
Ground straps shall be provided to bond cable runway sections at butt and junction
splice points. Ground strap kit consists of 8-inches of #6AWG green insulated wire
attached at both ends to two-hole compression lugs and attachment hardware. The
cable runway shall be bonded to the telecommunications grounding and bonding
system.
a.
Manufacturer CPI, Part No. 40164-001
10.
Elevation kits shall be installed above racks or cabinets to provide additional space
between the tops of the racks or cabinets and the cable runway for radius drop
fittings and maintaining cable bend radius at transitions from horizontal to vertical.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
Elevation kit, (rack) Part No. 10506-702
Grounding and Bonding:
1.
Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)
a.
Telecommunications Bonding Backbone conductors shall be #3/0 AWG
stranded insulated copper conductor, unless otherwise noted.
2.
Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB)
27 11 00 - 14
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
a.
b.
c.
D.
F.
TGB shall be a copper plate, 1/4” thick x 4” wide x 10” long conforming to
BICSI and ANSI/TIA standards.
TGB shall be pre-drilled for bolts to secure bar to insulating standoffs.
Mounting holes shall be 3/8” diameter spaced 5.75” apart. TGB shall include
insulators to isolate busbars from the wall or other mounting surfaces.
Busbar shall be pre-drilled with hole pattern to accommodate two-hole lugs
as follows, (4) lugs with 5/8” hole centers and (3) lugs, 1” hole centers.
1)
Manufacturer CPI, Part No. 13622-010
3.
Pipe Clamps:
a.
Copper UL listed grounding connector with pre-drilled lug pad allowing 2-hold
compression terminal; the size of connector will be dictated by pipe size.
1)
Manufacturer Burndy, T&B, Thermoweld or approved equal.
4.
Exothermic Welding:
a.
Manufacturer Erico Cadweld or Thermoweld, appropriate fittings as required.
5.
C-type Compression Taps:
a.
Bonding together two or more bonding backbones.
1)
Manufacturer Burndy, T&B, Thermoweld or approved equal.
6.
Cable Terminals:
a.
Cable terminal shall be two-hole, non-insulated copper compression long
barrel terminal, requiring 3/8” bolts on 1” and 5/8” centers.
1)
Manufacturer Burndy, T&B, Thermoweld or approved equal.
Free-Standing Equipment Racks:
1.
E.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Standard Channel 2-Post Equipment Racks:
a.
Equipment racks shall have 2.5” channel with standard EIA mounting hole
pattern.
b.
Equipment racks shall be 7’-0” high with 45 rack units of mounting space.
c.
Equipment rack side rails shall have manufactured rack unit labeling on each
side of the rails.
1)
Manufacturer CPI, Part No. 46353-703
Peripheral Devices for Equipment Racks:
1.
Each equipment rack shall be equipped with the following equipment. Quantities
shall be determined from applicable drawings.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
Equipment mounting screws, Part No. 40605-005 (qty. 50)
2.
Equipment rack shall be anchored with a 1/2" anchor design for concrete and shall
include (4) 1/2" anchors, (4) 3-3/4” long bolts, (4) washers and (4) nuts.
a.
Manufacturer CPI, Part No. 40604-003 or approved equal
Vertical Power Strips:
1.
Each equipment rack shall be equipped with the following. Quantities shall be
determined from applicable drawings.
a.
Vertical power strip shall be 66” vertically mounted power strip with (14)
NEMA 5-20R receptacles and standard plug.
27 11 00 - 15
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1)
G.
H.
I.
Manufacturer CPI:
a)
Power strip, Part No. 12850-708
b)
9.1” mounting bracket, Part No. 35700-701 (per power strip)
Rack Mounted Cable Management:
1.
Horizontal cable management panels shall distribution rings to secure copper
and/or optical fiber patch cords.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
1RU panel with cover, Part No. 13930-701
2)
2RU panel with cover, Part No. 13930-702
2.
Vertical cable management panels shall be 7’-0” high and have latches spaced 12
inches apart for securing cabling and patch cords to be provided in between and at
the end of each equipment rack as indicated on applicable drawings. Panels shall
have oval port feed through openings within the center separator for pass-thru of
patch cords. Spacing at the separator shall be 11.62 inches.
a.
Manufacturer CPI:
1)
3.65” wide double sided, Part No. 12096-703
2)
6” wide double sided, Part No. 11729-703
Wall Mounted Cable Management:
1.
110 Jumper Troughs shall have with legs and be mounted above and below each
100-pair or 300-pair 110 wiring block kit.
a.
Manufacturer Ortronics, Part No. OR-30200140
2.
Flexible D-rings shall be provided for routing and managing cabling on backboards.
a.
Manufacturer Panduit:
1)
Horizontal cabling D-ring, Part No. CMVDR1S
2)
Backbone cabling D-ring, Part No. CMVDR2
Patch Panels:
1.
J.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Category 6 Modular Patch Panels:
a.
Category 6, 8-Position 8-Conductor module, non-keyed, dual reactance
technology, 110 type printed circuit board style patch panels, universal
T568A/B, wired in accordance with the T568B pin configuration standard and
used to terminate UTP cables as specified herein. Patch panels shall be
high density, 6-port modules, panel thickness at .125" aluminum with black
powder coat finish; module shall be high impact plastic housing, flame
retardant UL 94V-O, and fully encased protected printed circuitry. Modular
contacts shall be beryllium copper, nickel under plating, 50 micro-inches of
gold in contact area with IDC contacts phosphor bronze, nickel under plating
with tin lead over plate, serving 22 through 24 AWG.
1)
Manufacturer Ortronics:
a)
24 port patch panel, Part No. OR-PHD66U24
b)
48 port patch panel, Part No. OR-PHD66U48
Optical Fiber Cabinets and Adapter Panels:
1.
The optical fiber cabinet is a termination and administration point for the optical
fiber cables in the network. The cabinet shall protect the connectorized optical
27 11 00 - 16
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.
3.
K.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
fiber from mechanical stress, macro-bending loss at the connection point and
tampering with the circuits. The cabinet shall provide a place for circuit
identification.
Rack Mount Fiber Cabinets (RMFC):
a.
The RMFC shall provide terminating capability of 18 to 288 optical fiber
strands.
b.
The RMFC shall be stackable, wall or rack mountable depending on the
location requirement. The cabinets shall fit into either 19” or 23” frame
arrangements and shall be one, two or four rack units in height.
c.
The RMFC shall consist of an enclosure with front and rear access and can
be fully administered from the front or rear.
d.
The RMFC shall have a clear, translucent, hinged Plexiglas door in the front
with a dedicated locking mechanism and the rear door shall be a solid
metallic cover.
1)
Manufacturer Ortronics:
a)
1RU patching, Part No. OR-FC01U-P
b)
2RU patching, Part No. OR-FC02U-P
Optical Fiber Adapter Panels:
a.
Optical fiber adapter panels shall be located within surface mount and rack
mount fiber cabinets. Panels shall securing lock into open positions with the
patching frames. Panels shall have plunger / grommet fasteners.
b.
Optical fiber adapter panels shall consist of LC connector types and shall be
configured in either simplex or duplex connector arrangements.
c.
Singlemode optical fiber connectors shall be in the color blue.
d.
50µm multimode optical fiber connectors shall be color aqua.
e.
Within the adapter panels, multimode optical fiber connectors shall have
phosphor-bronze alignment sleeves and singlemode optical fiber connectors
shall have ceramic alignment sleeves.
f.
All unfilled positions within the fiber cabinets shall contain blank panels.
1)
Manufacturer Ortronics:
a)
Blank adapter panel, Part No. OR-61500020
b)
6-Duplex LC 50µm MM, Part No. OR-OFP-LCD12LC
c)
6-Duplex LC SM, Part No. OR-OFP-LCD12AC
Optical Fiber Connectivity:
1.
Optical Fiber Fan Out Kits:
a.
Buffer tube fan-out kits shall provide the means of field-install connectors on
250 μm coated fibers. Indoor kits shall have a 900 μm fan-out assembly that
is color coded to match the fiber color scheme. The fan-out assembly shall
be 47-inches in length.
1)
Manufacturer Corning:
a)
6-fiber kit, Part No. FAN-BT47-06
b)
12-fiber kit, Part No. FAN-BT47-12
2.
Singlemode Connectors:
a.
Provide field installable singlemode connectors to terminate optical fiber
cables from cable-to-cable, cable-to-equipment or equipment-to-equipment.
Singlemode connector shall contain a factory bonded fiber strand insert,
ceramic ferrule and factory polished.
27 11 00 - 17
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
b.
c.
3.
2.9
A.
The connector shall be capable of mounting on 125 micron fiber. The
connector shall meet IEC standards for repeatability and have a locking
feature to the coupler and assure non-optical disconnect.
Singlemode connectors that are straight tip shall be identified with the color
blue.
1)
Manufacturer Ortronics:
a)
LC, Part No. OR-205KAS9GA-09
2)
Manufacturer Corning:
a)
LC, Part No. 95-200-96
Multimode Connectors:
a.
Provide field installable multimode connectors to terminate optical fiber
cables from cable-to-cable, cable-to-equipment or equipment-to-equipment.
Multimode connector shall contain a factory bonded fiber strand insert,
ceramic ferrule and factory polished.
b.
The connector shall be capable of mounting on either 0.9 mm-buffered fiber
or 3.0 mm cordage. The connector shall meet IEC standards for repeatability
and have a locking feature to the coupler and assure non-optical disconnect.
1)
Manufacturer Ortronics:
a)
LC 50 µm, Part No. OR-205KNT9GA-50T
2)
Manufacturer Corning:
a)
LC 50 µm, Part No. 92-050-99-X
INNERDUCT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS
Optical Fiber Flexible Plastic Innerduct:
1.
B.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Flexible duct/innerduct shall be UL 2024 with pull tape. Provide flexible duct/
innerduct for all optical fiber cabling routed in open cabling pathways and
backbone riser applications.
a.
Manufacturer Carlon:
1)
1-inch plenum, Part No. CF4X1C-xxx (where xxx = feet)
Copper and Optical Fiber Identification Tags:
1.
Identification tags shall be self-laminating, write-on, rigid, non-adhesive, measuring
3.50” x 2.00”, and with a vinyl material strength of 0.20”. Attach the tags to the
associated innerduct or directly to the cabling utilizing specified cable ties. The
legend and nomenclature for optical fiber cabling shall read “CAUTION: FIBER
OPTIC CABLE” and for copper cabling shall read “CAUTION: TELEPHONE
CABLE”. Each tag shall have sub attribute lines for “TYPE” and “COUNT”. The
tag color for optical fiber cabling shall be yellow and the tag color copper cabling
shall be orange.
a.
Manufacturer ACP International:
1)
Optical fiber cabling tags, Part No. VCT-200 (yellow).
2)
Copper cabling tags, Part No. VCT-201 (orange)
2.
Cable tie shall be dome-top; barb type with stainless steel locking barb, material
shall be Nylon 6.6 with a maximum width of .141”.
a.
Manufacturer Panduit:
1)
6.1-inch length, Part No. BT1.5I-C0
27 11 00 - 18
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2)
2.10
A.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
8.0-inch length, Part No. BT2I-C0
MATERIAL PROVISIONS
Materials shall be provided to the Owner as specified herein. Deliver to the Owner
Representative 21 days prior to Substantial Completion. Include a signed transmittal to
the Owner or Owner’s Representative for each type of patch cord, quantity, length, and
color provided as part of the Final Acceptance.
1.
2.
Copper Patch Cords:
a.
Category 6 Patch Cords:
1)
Patch cords shall be constructed from Category 6 4-pair 24 AWG,
stranded patch cable material.
2)
Patch cord cable assembly shall be UL listed and meet FCC Part 65
plug and termination.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Manufacturer
Ortronics
Ortronics
Ortronics
Ortronics
Ortronics
Part Number
OR-MC601-04
OR-MC609-04
OR-MC601-05
OR-MC603-05
OR-MC607-00
Qty.
875
875
92
92
72
Length
1’-0”
9’-0”
1’-0”
3’-0”
7’-0”
Color
Yellow
Yellow
Green
Green
Black
Description
Data/ Voice
Data/ Voice (Field)
Wireless
Wireless (Field)
OOBM
Optical Fiber Patch Cords:
a.
Multimode Patch Cords (OM3):
1)
Optical fiber patch cords shall be 50/125 µm with metal ferrules,
constructed from OFNR rated dual fiber cordage, in the color aqua.
Item Manufacturer Part Number
OR1 Ortronics
P0DF2LPAZAZ001M
OR2 Ortronics
P0DF2LPAZAZ002M
OR3 Ortronics
P0DF2LPAZAZ003M
b.
Qty. Length Color Description
48
1M
Aqua LC – LC
24
2M
Aqua LC – LC
24
3M
Aqua LC – LC
Singlemode Patch Cords (OS2):
1)
Optical fiber patch cords shall be 9/125 µm with ceramic ferrules,
constructed from OFNR rated dual fiber cordage, in the color yellow.
Item Manufacturer Part Number
OR1
Ortronics
P0DC2IPUZUZ001M
OR2
Ortronics
P0DC2IPUZUZ002M
OR3
Ortronics
P0DC2IPUZUZ003M
27 11 00 - 19
Qty. Length Color
Description
6
1M
Yellow
LC – LC
6
2M
Yellow
LC – LC
6
3M
Yellow
LC – LC
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.11
A.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
SPARE PARTS
Provide (25) 2-port telecommunications outlets with associated cabling, faceplates and
jacks in bids to be used for additional devices in construction. Conduit, back boxes and
cabling supports shall be provided for the aforementioned spare 2-port
telecommunications outlets.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Include labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for installation as indicated on the
Contract Documents.
B.
Coordinate Work with other trades for complete and operational system.
C.
Include supplementary and miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental
to and necessary for sound, secure, and complete installation, whether or not specifically
indicated in the Contract Documents.
D.
Provide suitable barriers and take any other safety precautions required by applicable
codes.
E.
The working area shall be kept free from debris of all types and remove all rubbish
resulting from their work on the premises. Upon completion, vacuum and clean room
floors, equipment racks, enclosures and cable management where work has been
performed.
F.
Contractor shall be responsible for any building repairs made necessary by their work or
caused by negligence of their employees. No cutting, notching, drilling or altering of any
kind shall be done to the building without first obtaining permission from the Owner.
G.
The Owner may have other contracts in connection with this work for the installation of
software and equipment. Contractor shall provide other Trade Contractors reasonable
opportunity for the introduction and execution of their work and shall properly coordinate
other trade’s work with theirs as required.
H.
Provide all patch panels and blocks shown on the telecommunications drawings whether
or not they are fully populated with cables.
I.
Provide all cables, devices and equipment racking systems as shown on the contract
drawings.
3.2
A.
ABANDONED CABLING
Contractor shall be responsible for the phased demolition, removal and disposal of all
existing abandoned telecommunications cabling and infrastructure in its entirety per NEC
Article 800 and as identified on the contract drawings. Abandoned cabling shall be
defined as any telecommunications cabling that is not terminated at both ends at a
module or other equipment and is not identified for future use with a tag.
27 11 00 - 20
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
B.
Telecommunications cabling and infrastructure shall include but not limited to,
faceplates, surface mount boxes, RJ11 and 8P8C modules, horizontal UTP cabling,
copper and optical fiber backbone infrastructure, innerduct, cabling support systems,
equipment racks, horizontal and vertical cable management, equipment shelving, ladder
tray, dedicated telecommunications surface raceway, 110 and 66 blocks, rack mount and
surface mount fiber cabinets and other related passive infrastructure.
C.
Contractor shall salvage all telecommunications equipment racks, patch panels,
horizontal and vertical cable management and optical fiber connectivity being
demolished. These items shall be returned to the Owner unless directed by the Owner to
be disposed of by the contractor. All other telecommunications passive infrastructure
shall be disposed of by the contractor.
D.
Provide blank cover plates for demolished flush mount outlets, surface mount boxes,
modular furniture feed locations, and junction boxes.
E.
Provide blank cover plate for demolished modular furniture telecommunications devices.
Field verify and match modular furniture manufacturer system, make and base channel
color.
F.
Provide new cover plates for surface mount raceway systems after demolition of existing
devices. Cover plate sections shall be seamless between new devices. Cover plates
shall match existing base color.
G.
Provide fire stopping of existing horizontal and vertical conduit sleeve, after existing
horizontal and backbone cabling has been demolished. Provide fire stopping of existing
wall penetrations. Seal all penetrations with approved fire stopping materials.
H.
Provide (2) pull strings in each vertical conduit riser sleeves at the completion of
demolition of existing cabling.
3.3
TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
The primary function of a telecommunications room is the termination of horizontal,
backbone and service entrance cabling to compatible connecting hardware.
B.
A telecommunications room also provides a controlled environment to house
telecommunications equipment, connecting hardware, and splice enclosures serving a
portion of the building.
C.
Install fire retardant plywood backboard vertically at 6” AFF painted with white latex paint
as shown on drawings. Backboard shall be painted to leave fire seal exposed. See
contract drawings for location of backboards in the telecommunications rooms and
spaces.
D.
Provide equipment including the following, but not limited to the following, and shall be
installed according to the contract drawings:
1.
2.
Equipment racks and enclosures with cable management systems
Cross-connect patch panels and termination blocks, whether they are populated or
not
27 11 00 - 21
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Telecommunications workstation devices
Cable tray and ladder rack
E.
Where applicable, each freestanding equipment rack and/or server enclosure shall be
seismically braced from the top to a structural component beam, column, bearing wall,
etc. of the building. AHJ shall determine if seismic bracing is required and if structural
engineering services are required.
F.
Equipment rack shall be secured to the concrete floor with a concrete floor mounting kit.
G.
All 110 blocks shall be securely fastened to the backboards in the telecommunications
room. Provide all required D-rings or other approved cable guides as identified on the
contract drawings.
3.4
LADDER RACK INSTALLATION
A.
Install ladder rack at locations indicated on the drawings. Installation shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and with recognized industry practices to
ensure that ladder rack equipment comply with requirements of NEC and applicable
portions of NFPA 70B. Reference NEMA-VE2 for general cable tray installation
guidelines.
B.
Support the ladder rack on 5’ centers for a total of 2 supports for every 10' span when the
ladder rack is supported from the ceiling. Support ladder rack at every transition. Support
ladder rack utilizing wall mount brackets or Unistrut hangers.
C.
Provide additional brackets on ends, and two additional brackets at tees and corners.
Securely fasten ladder rack to brackets and supports using clamps manufactured for the
purpose. Provide all required hardware and supports.
D.
Fitting supports shall be located such that they meet the strength requirements of straight
sections. Install fitting supports per NEMA VE-2 guidelines, or in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.5
OPEN CABLING SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
All cabling shall be run exposed as "open cabling" in ceiling spaces and ceiling plenums,
unless otherwise noted
B.
Provide all hanger supports and cable supports for cabling specified in this section. All
support structures shall adhere to the requirements in the National Electrical Code.
C.
Cabling supports shall be spaced no further than 4’-0" apart.
D.
Cabling bundles shall not sag a maximum of two inches from the bottom of the cable
support.
E.
Provide all additional cable management products as required to protect exposed cabling
and complete the installation of cabling in a neat professional manner.
F.
All floor penetrations shall be at columns, exterior walls unless otherwise specified.
27 11 00 - 22
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
G.
Cabling supports shall be installed on their own support system. The use of ceiling grid
supports shall be prohibited.
H.
Do not support cables from ductwork, sprinkler piping, water piping, waste piping, conduit
or other system supports. Cabling shall never come in physical contact with these
mechanical, fire protection and electrical systems and raceways.
I.
Cabling bundles and supports changing pathway direction shall maintain proper bend
radius as to not impact the physical jacket construction of the cabling. Cabling that
becomes damaged during this transition shall be replaced in its entirety.
J.
Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for quantity of cables supported in J-hooks and
adjustable cable supports.
K.
Installers shall observe the applicable requirements and recommended good practices
contained within ANSI/TIA-568-C standard for cabling installation requirements.
3.6
CABLING INSTALLATION
A.
Each telecommunications device shall be connected to the horizontal cross-connect in a
telecommunications room with horizontal cabling installed in star topology.
B.
Horizontal cabling shall be installed in continuous runs from the telecommunications
rooms to telecommunications device locations. Splices are not permitted.
C.
Maximum length of horizontal cables shall be 295 feet (90 m) including all service loops.
D.
All cabling shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations,
including but not limited to maximum tensile loading and maximum bend radius.
E.
Cabling shall be organized and identified so as to facilitate locating and handling
individual sheaths for maintenance functions.
F.
Each bundle shall be neatly tied without cinching or stressing the cabling, using plenum
rated tie wraps in open cabling installations and Velcro straps in the telecommunications
room. Tie wraps shall be loose enough so that the tie wrap can be easily rotated around
the cabling bundle and does not impact the physical construction of the cabling.
G.
Bundles shall be clearly marked identifying the frame and terminal block to which routed,
the station numbers served by the bundle, and any other information that may assist in
administration.
H.
Provide machine typed label on both ends of the horizontal cabling jacket no more than
4-inches from each termination point.
I.
Great care shall be taken to protect all cabling from physical damage beneath floors,
above ceilings or elsewhere. Cabling shall not be exposed to any forces or handling
factors that will degrade performance, such as crushing, pull stressing, twisting, or
damaging sheathing materials. When left unattended, all cabling shall be secured and
protected to avoid damage.
27 11 00 - 23
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
J.
Velcro straps shall be utilized in the telecommunications room for all cabling bundles.
Plenum tie wraps are prohibited in the telecommunications rooms and spaces.
K.
A spare pull string shall be installed at every outlet installed.
L.
Horizontal and backbone cabling shall be bundled and routed separately in dedicated
cabling supports in a neat and organized fashion for routing from the telecommunications
rooms utilizing cable trays and open cabling pathways to the telecommunications
devices.
M.
Route cabling runs from workstations parallel to building grid lines and directly to open
cabling pathways without passing over adjacent office spaces or cubicles.
N.
Provide 5 feet of slack in neatly suspended loops above each workstation and 10 feet of
slack neatly coiled in the ladder rack or cable tray in the telecommunications room unless
indicated otherwise on contract drawings. Service loops in the telecommunications room
shall not be located above the equipment racks and server enclosures.
O.
Trim all excess length from Velcro straps.
P.
Cables shall contact only dedicated and properly protected cable accesses and support
mechanisms.
Q.
Telecommunications unshielded twisted pair cabling supported utilizing open cabling
methods shall maintain a minimum separation of three inches from fire alarm,
intercom/paging, clocks and security cabling. Cabling supports shall maintain increased
separation requirements when attaching to the same hanger rod to ensure cabling sag
maintains the minimum three inch separation.
R.
Maintain the following distances between cabling and other building systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
One foot from fluorescent lights.
Six feet from motors and transformers.
Three feet from water piping or other mechanical equipment.
One foot from electrical conduits or other electrical equipment.
CONNECTIVITY AND CABLING INSTALLATION
A.
All cabling shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the cabling installation
requirements identified in ANSI/TIA-568-C, BICSI Telecommunication Cabling
Installation Manual, and the manufacturer’s documentation.
B.
Cabling entering the telecommunications room and routing on the ladder rack or cable
tray pathway shall be separated into cabling bundles specific to the patch panel in which
it will be terminated to. Cable bundles shall be in increments of 24 cables.
C.
Cabling shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each
panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the
point of cable entrance into the equipment rack, enclosure or backboard.
27 11 00 - 24
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
D.
Cabling transitioning from ladder rack or cable tray pathway shall maintain proper bend
radius utilizing waterfall device brackets for transitioning vertically down the side rail of an
equipment rack or server enclosure as to not impact the physical jacket construction of
the cable. Waterfall device brackets shall also be utilized for transitioning cabling to
blocks mounted on plywood. Cabling that become damaged during this transition shall
be replaced in their entirety.
E.
Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a
location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support straps. Cables labeled
within the bundle, where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.
F.
The installation of 8P8C modules into faceplates and attaching of the faceplates to the
wall shall ensure that the faceplate and modules are flush. The faceplate shall be
secured to the wall but shall not be secured to the wall with such force as to bow the
faceplate.
3.8
WORK AREA
A.
4-pair UTP horizontal cabling shall be terminated on 8-conductor 8-position modular
jacks located at each telecommunications device shown on the applicable contract
drawings.
B.
Each telecommunications device shall be provided with 1, 2, 3 or 4, 8-Position
8-Conductor modules as shown on the applicable contract drawings.
3.9
CABLING TERMINATIONS
A.
Provide all necessary installation materials, tools and equipment to perform insulation
displacement type terminations at all the telecommunications outlets, patch panels and
110 cross-connect blocks.
B.
All pairs in each cable shall be terminated on a 110 block, modular patch panel or
telecommunications modules in accordance with this specification.
C.
All cabling shall be terminated in accordance with the T568B pin configuration standard.
D.
Remove only as much of the cable sheath as is necessary to terminate the cabling on
the connecting hardware.
E.
A maximum of 0.25” of cable pair twists shall be removed from a 4-pair UTP cable.
Cabling and terminations exceed these dimensions shall be re-terminated.
F.
At the horizontal station patch panel, the cabling shall terminate from the center of the
110 IDC termination.
G.
Terminate cabling in accordance with connecting hardware
recommendations. All cabling shall terminate in numerical sequence.
27 11 00 - 25
manufacturer’s
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.10
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
FIRESTOPPING
A.
All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the NEC and the manufacturer’s
recommendations and shall be accomplished in a manner acceptable to the local fire and
building authorities having jurisdiction over this work.
B.
All cabling running through rated floors and walls shall be firestopped in accordance with
the requirements within this Section.
C.
All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed
with an appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations
(complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire
rated structure).
D.
Any penetrations created by or for the contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as
part of the contractor’s scope of work.
E.
Firestop putty or pillows shall be used inside conduits and cable trays to provide a
re-enterable system allowing telecommunications cables to be easily removed or added
in the future. Firestop putty shall not be water soluble.
F.
Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479).
G.
All firestopping sleeved devices shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations including, but not limited to;
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.11
Wiring devices shall be installed in locations where indicated on the contract
drawings, arranged in a single or multiple sleeve formation at the height specified.
Sleeves shall be installed a minimum of 6 inches above the accessible ceiling grid.
Install the devices in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings and the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
Apply the factory supplied gasket material prior to the installation of the wall plates.
Secure wall plates to devices per the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING
A.
Grounding and bonding connections to the building’s structural steel, electrical service
main building ground and telecommunications bonding backbone shall be terminated on
the left side of the busbar to facilitate access for other grounding sources within the
space to be terminated within the center and right side of the busbar.
B.
The bonding backbone shall route along the shortest and straightest pathway as possible
with minimal bends. Any bend shall be sweeping. The conductors shall be continuous
and shall not contain splices.
C.
A telecommunications bonding backbone shall connect the existing main
telecommunications grounding busbar to each other telecommunications grounding
busbar within the facility.
D.
Grounding and bonding conductor distances shall meet the distance requirements
described within ANSI/TIA-J-STD-607-B.
27 11 00 - 26
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
E.
Grounding and bonding connections shall be a stranded, insulated copper conductor with
a minimum size of #6 AWG.
F.
Grounding and bonding connectors shall be 2-hole and made with a crimp or other
non-reversible termination method.
G.
Provide a coupled bonding conductor for outside plant copper shielded cabling routing
between buildings and ground to the busbar.
H.
Provide a dedicated grounding connection for the below floor and overhead ladder rack
and/or cable tray pathways.
I.
Each equipment rack and server enclosure shall have a dedicated grounding connection.
J.
Provide grounding and bonding of all telecommunications pathways including conduit
raceway systems and cable tray pathways.
K.
Coordinate with the flooring contractor to ensure that the grounding strip located below
the anti-static dissipative vinyl composition tile flooring is located and terminated directly
below the busbar to minimize the distance of the required grounding conductor.
L.
Ensure that all grounding and bonding connections break through and/or remove the
paint to the bare metallic surface of all painted metallic hardware.
3.12
A.
INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBER CABLING SYSTEM
Installation for Optical Fiber Cabling:
1.
B.
Securing Fiber Cabling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Follow cable manufacturer’s specifications regarding handling methods, bend
radius and maximum pulling tension limitations.
Immediately after cabling installation, a permanent identification tag as indicated
shall be attached to visible cabling sections. Cabling shall be checked to ensure
that the markings are intact.
Cabling and equipment shall be supported and secured as indicated. Where the
specific method of support is not shown, supports and fasteners shall be used to
secure cabling and equipment in position. Metallic supports and fasteners shall
have a corrosion resistant finish. All cabling shall be routed along the interior sides
of manholes.
Corrosion resistant clamps and straps shall be used as necessary to properly
secure the cabling.
All optical fiber cabling shall be secured to the optical fiber cabinet using the
aramid strength yarn of the cabling to provide strain relief.
Optical Fiber Cabling Bending:
1.
Caution shall be used when bending cabling to avoid kinks or other damage to the
sheath. Bend radius shall be as large as possible with a minimum of 20 times the
cabling diameter. Minimum radius shall be increased when necessary to meet
27 11 00 - 27
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
cable manufacturer's recommendation. Cabling shall not rest against any sharp
edges.
D.
Optical Fiber Cabling Pulling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
E.
Pulling lines shall be attached to both cable ends when cabling is destined for
bi-directional pull, and fitted with factory-installed pulling eyes where possible.
Cabling not equipped with a pulling eye shall have the pulling line attached to the
cable end by means of a cable grip. Core hitches shall not be used.
Cable reels shall be located and aligned so that the cable is payed out from the top
of the reel by rotating the reel in the feed direction at the rate of pull into the duct or
conduit in a long, smooth bend without twisting. Cabling shall not be payed out
from the bottom of the reel or by pulling. A cable feeder guide of proper
dimensions shall be used at the mouth to guide the cable into the duct or conduit.
Rigging shall be set up at the pulling end so that the pulling line and cable exit on a
line parallel with the duct or conduit to prevent either from rubbing against the edge
or mouth. Cable ends shall not be pulled around sheave wheels. When the
sheave or pulley cannot be positioned to obtain sufficient cable end slack for
proper racking and splicing with the pulling line attached to the end of the cable, a
split cable grip may be used to obtain the necessary slack.
All equipment and the pulling set shall be checked to minimize interruptions once
pulling begins. Cabling shall be payed out without stopping until the required
amount of the cabling has been placed. If the pulling operation is halted before the
pull is completed, the tension of the pulling line shall not be released. When pulling
is resumed, the inertia of the cabling shall be overcome by increasing the tension
in small steps a few seconds apart until the cabling is in motion.
Pulling tension shall not exceed 500 lbs or cable manufacturer's recommendation,
whichever is less.
Provide a 20’ foot service loop for all optical fiber cabling located at both ends of
the cabling run in all telecommunications rooms. Service loop shall be attached to
the fire retardant plywood backboard and shall not be located on the ladder rack or
cable tray.
Do not pull optical fiber cables with copper cables.
Do not pull optical fiber cables over existing cables.
When pulling optical fiber cabling in an innerduct or conduit, do not exceed the
40% fill ratio.
When installing optical fiber cabling in cable trays, use cable ties to secure the
cable to the cable tray every 48”-60”.
Optical Fiber Cabling Terminations:
1.
2.
All cabling terminations shall be made in optical fiber distribution units. All installed
optical fiber strands shall be terminated.
Optical fiber cabling terminations shall utilize enclosures and components in
quantities consistent with the required fiber counts at each end of each segment.
During optical fiber connector termination and polishing, visually inspect all
terminations with a 400-power microscope.
Follow all of the connector
manufacturer’s recommendations. Unacceptable flaws in the terminations will
include, but not limited to, scratches, full or partial cracks, bubbles, pits, epoxy
residual, dirt, dust, oil, moisture, grinding and sanding debris. The acceptable final
polish will show a connector tip that is free of all imperfections in 100% of the core
27 11 00 - 28
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.13
A.
General:
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Labeling shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for
Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.
All labels shall be permanent typewritten labels produced by a labeling machine.
Labels shall be installed on all cabling at each end. Ensure labels are securely
fastened.
All labels shall be located within 6 inches of cable termination and placed so they
can be easily read.
The font type for each type of label shall be Arial.
Labeling information will be reviewed at the Pre-Construction Meeting.
All labeling shall be completed prior to the substantial completion date of the
project.
Telecommunications Device Labeling:
1.
2.
3.
C.
and 80% of the cladding. All unacceptable connectors shall be inspected after
rework.
Optical fiber cabling slack shall be neatly coiled within the optical fiber cabinet. No
slack loops shall be allowed external to the optical fiber cabinet.
Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the fiber adapter panel.
To maintain the correct polarity throughout the optical fiber cabling system, each
cabling segment shall be installed in a pair-wise crossover orientation as defined in
ANSI/TIA 568-C.
Dust caps shall be installed on the connectors and couplings.
LABELING
1.
B.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Each telecommunications device shall be labeled in accordance with
ANSI/TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
Infrastructure and the Owner’s standards.
The label shall be produced to fit into the recess provided and covered with a clear
plastic cover.
The labeling shall be as follows for a tenant space with a single or multiple
telecommunications rooms:
a.
TR-2-03-04 where:
1)
TR = Telecommunications Room (I1N, I1C, and I2W as indicated on
the construction drawings))
2)
–2 = Equipment rack number
3)
–03 = Patch panel number
4)
–04 = Port number
Equipment Rack Labeling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide plastic lamacoid nameplate for each equipment rack and/or server
enclosure in the telecommunications room.
Plastic lamacoid nameplate shall be black with white letters. The nameplate shall
be machine engraved with a size 36 font.
Mount the name plate at the top of each equipment rack, server enclosure or wall
mount enclosure.
Labeling scheme is provided on the contract drawings.
27 11 00 - 29
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
D.
Patch Panel Labeling:
1.
E.
RMFC shall be labeled with sequential numbering starting with “RMFC1” for the
topmost fiber cabinet and moving downward to the bottom of the rack. Labels shall
be affixed to the left hand side of the RMFC.
Optical Fiber Termination Labeling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Station Patch Panel:
a.
48-port modular patch panels shall be labeled with sequential numbering
starting with “01” for the topmost patch panel and moving downward to the
bottom of the rack. Patch panel labels shall be affixed to the left hand side of
the patch panel.
b.
Horizontal cabling distributed from station patch panels to specialty devices
(i.e. wireless access points) shall have a label in the designation strip space
directly below the 8P8C module identifying the device interconnect point, the
designation label shall be as follows:
1)
“WAP - #”, where the “#” represents the Owner’s wireless access
point identification number.
Rack Mount Fiber Cabinet Labeling:
1.
F.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Labeling shall be placed within the designation strip holder of the fiber connector
panel where designation strips are provided with the connector panel.
Labeling shall be placed on the inside of the front door for surface mount fiber
cabinets and rack mount fiber cabinets where no designation label strips are
provided. The label shall be in the same orientation of the connector panel.
Labeling shall contain the originating telecommunications room designation, rack
row if applicable, equipment rack number designation, rack mount fiber cabinet
number, fiber adapter panel position(s) and the associated fiber strand numbers by
individual strands and/or optical fiber subunit classification.
The Main Cross-connect will have labeling associated for the distribution of optical
fiber cabling to each telecommunications room and the telecommunications room
(IC or HC) will have labeling associated from the Main Cross-connect.
Backbone Optical Fiber Labeling:
a.
The labeling shall be as follows in the originating telecommunications room:
1)
I1N-1-2:1-6 where:
a)
I1C, I1N, I2W = telecommunications room
b)
-1 = Equipment rack number
c)
-2 = Connector panel position
d)
:1-6 = Strand numbers per connector panel
Cable Identification Tag Labeling:
1.
2.
Optical fiber cabling shall be clearly and visibly identified by the contractor in all
manholes, pull boxes, riser room pull points, entrance points, service entrance and
3' before entering a free standing rack, wall mounted enclosure or surface mount
fiber cabinet utilizing an optical fiber cable identification tag.
Optical fiber cable identification tags shall contain the following information at a
minimum.
a.
Cable manufacturer and part number
b.
Extent of cable run (i.e. “From: MDF – To: IDF-I1C”)
27 11 00 - 30
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
c.
3.14
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Cable type and description (i.e. “Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube, OM3 24strand”)
TESTING
A.
Test procedures shall be as prescribed by the ANSI/TIA, Insulated Cable Engineers
Association and the National Electrical Testing Association.
B.
Test Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
The network testing equipment shall be a Fluke Networks DSX-5000 Cable
Analyzer or equal and shall have a certified calibration from the manufacturer
within the past six months. Proof of calibration shall be provided with the product
submittal. Test equipment shall be utilized to test horizontal and backbone cabling.
The field tester and adapters shall be certified by an independent laboratory as
meeting or exceeding current level as defined in ANSI/TIA-1152.
The 8P8C test plug for the network testing equipment adapters shall be in range of
values defined in Annex C with ANSI/TIA-568-C for Near-end Crosstalk, Far-end
Crosstalk and Return Loss.
The test equipment shall support the complete suite of Resistance Unbalanced
standards for PoE per IEEE 802.3af, IEEE 802.3at and ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.
The test equipment shall be able to test up to a 1000 MHz frequency range.
The test equipment shall be ISO 9001 certified.
The contractor shall maintain an electronic copy of the manufacturer’s testing
procedures in the job site office.
The test equipment batteries shall be charged daily and a level of greater than
twenty-five percent of capacity shall be maintained during the testing.
The test equipment shall be calibrated daily before the start of testing.
Horizontal Cabling:
1.
2.
All horizontal cabling shall be certified to meet or exceed the permanent link
performance specifications for Category 6 horizontal cabling tested with a
frequency range from 1MHz to 250 MHZ as defined in ANSI/TIA-568-C.
Certifications shall include the following parameters for each pair of each cable
installed:
a.
Building identification
b.
Cable identification
c.
Date of test
d.
Test equipment manufacturer and model number
e.
Wire map:
1)
Continuity to the remote end.
2)
Shorts between any two or more conductors
3)
Reversed pairs
4)
Split pairs
5)
Transposed pairs
6)
Any other miswiring
f.
Length
g.
Near-end crosstalk (NEXT)
h.
Attenuation to crosstalk ration far-end (ACRF)
i.
Power sum Attenuation to crosstalk ration far-end (PSACRF)
27 11 00 - 31
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
j.
k.
l.
m.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
Power sum-near-end crosstalk (PS-NEXT)
Return loss (RL)
Propagation delay (PD)
Delay skew (DS)
All horizontal cabling shall be tested using a Permanent Link configuration as
defined in ANSI/TIA-568-C.
Test reports with an asterisk (*) or fails, shall be documented identifying the reason
for the test failure and a corrective action plan developed.
After corrective action has been completed, the permanent link shall be retested.
It is the Telecommunications Contractor’s responsibility to ensure 100 percent of
the network horizontal cabling system links pass all tests.
The test results shall be organized by building identification and cable identification
number. The test results shall contain the date and time of when each test was
saved in the memory of the tester. The test results shall be recorded on a CD-ROM
in both PDF and LinkWare software formats.
Optical Fiber:
1.
Acceptance Testing:
a.
After terminating optical fiber cabling, one of the individual fibers of each
cable segment shall be tested using an OTDR to determine the actual length.
One strand of each optical fiber buffer tube shall be tested with an OTDR.
b.
Multimode optical fiber attenuation shall be tested and recorded at a
minimum of three times on all individual fiber strands of each cable using the
power meter tester configuration to determine the actual loss and the
connector repeatability. Each of the three tests shall be recorded in the test
form and a final value with the average of the three tests shall also be
recorded. The connector repeatability shall not exceed 0.2 dB as defined by
Telcordia GR-326-CORE. These tests shall be performed at the 850nm and
1300nm windows in bi-directional testing. Test set up and performance shall
be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A, Method B, and ANSI/TIA568C.0.
c.
Singlemode optical fiber attenuation shall be tested and recorded at a
minimum of three times on all individual fiber strands of each cable using the
power meter tester configuration to determine the actual loss and the
connector repeatability. Each of the three tests shall be recorded in the test
form and a final value with the average of the three tests shall also be
recorded. The connector repeatability shall not exceed 0.2 dB as defined by
Telcordia GR-326-CORE. These tests shall be performed at the 1310 nm
and 1550 nm windows in bi-directional testing. Test set up and performance
shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1.
d.
A reference power measurement shall be obtained by connecting one end of
test jumper 1 to the light source and the other end to the power meter tester.
After recording the reference power measurement, test jumper 1 shall be
disconnected from the power meter tester without disturbing the light source
and attached to the cable plant. The power meter tester shall be moved to
the far end of the cable plant and attached to the cable plant with test jumper
2.
e.
The optical fiber test jumper shall be properly cleaned at both ends prior to
the start of testing for each backbone segment.
27 11 00 - 32
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
SECTION 27 11 00
END OF SECTION 27 11 00
27 11 00 - 33
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
It is the intention of this specification and the accompanying drawings to describe
and provide for the completion of design details, furnishing, installing, testing and
placing in satisfactory and fully operational condition all equipment, materials,
devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete and fully operational
Audiovisual (AV) Systems, together with such other miscellaneous installations and
equipment hereinafter specified and/or shown on the drawings.
B.
These specifications are intended as a standard of quality, function, performance
and appearance that will be considered as acceptable. Brand names are used to
establish a minimum level of quality and performance.
C.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.1
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
The work of this specification is shown on the TA-XX series of drawings and
equipment schedules.
Section 260500: Common Work Results for Electrical
Section 260533: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
Section 270500: Common Work Results for Communication Systems
SUMMARY OF WORK
Work Includes:
1.
Provision of complete audiovisual systems.
2.
Provision of complete audiovisual control system.
3.
Coordination and connection to fire alarm. Audio systems to mute during
alarm.
4.
Connection of audio system to paging system. Emergency pages only
should override program material.
5.
If required, connection to and integration with other equipment provided by
the Owner.
6.
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall generate all shop drawings and
information for the complete installation and wiring of the system. The
Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall provide (or sub-Audiovisual Systems
Contractor for) the on-site installation and wiring, and shall provide on-going
supervision and coordination during the implementation phase.
7.
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall be responsible for the initial and
final adjustment of the systems as herein prescribed and shall provide all test
equipment for the system checkout and acceptance tests. Audiovisual
27 41 16 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
8.
2.2
A.
2.3
A.
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
Systems Contractor shall provide on-the-job training in the operation and
maintenance of the systems for personnel designated by the Owner.
Preparation of a project management schedule, including a time line for
equipment procurement and installation of all AV systems.
WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS
See all other divisions of specifications for other work which includes but is not
limited to:
1.
Cutting and Patching.
2.
Painting, Refinishing and Finishes.
3.
All conduits, wire ways, connection boxes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and
outlet boxes permanently installed in walls, floors, and ceilings.
4.
All power receptacle outlets and interconnecting wiring for these circuits.
5.
All structural work, wall openings, platforms, railings, stairs, fire prevention
and safety devices, rough and finished trim, painting and patching, drapes,
carpets, floor coverings, computer floors, glazing, acoustical treatments, and
heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
Council Chambers
1.
One motorized projection screen (behind council seating) for display of
testimony materials and/or far end video for video conference.
2.
Two ceiling mounted high definition monitors visible from council seating. One
monitor for display of testimony materials or far end video for video
conference and one display for confidence monitor. Confidence monitor will
display broadcast video (from cameras) feed.
3.
Eight high definition displays will be located on the dais at each council
member position. These will display testimony video or far end video
conference content.
4.
Four high definition displays will be located at the staff tables (one per table).
These will display testimony video or far end video conference content.
5.
Each council member position will have a microphone with a local on/off
switch. Staff positions will have one microphone with a local on/off switch for
each pair of seats. Two microphones will be located at the clerk desk. One
microphone for each staff table.
6.
Six microphone connections and a video input (HDMI or VGA+Audio) to the
testimony display will be available at floor box. One or two can be used for
testimony with a lectern, or six microphones when used in a work table
configuration.
7.
Video content can be displayed via Wi-Fi as a dedicated video input to the
system (BYOD). Wi-Fi interface is not part of city hall network.
8.
Video input (HDMI or VGA+Audio) to the testimony display will also be
located at the clerk’s position. A high definition display will be located at the
clerk’s position for viewing any available video input source. System controls
will be via a dedicated touch screen controller.
27 41 16 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
Two wireless microphones will be available for presentations.
Speakers will be zoned to optimize audibility and minimize feedback.
An induction loop Assistive Listening System will be provided.
Audio and video will be provided in lobby area for overflow. Video will be
displayed on two wall mounted high definition LCD monitors and audio will be
through ceiling speakers. When the council is not in session, the lobby
monitor can be used for dynamic signage (not in scope).
High definition remote controlled pan/tilt/zoom cameras will be located to
provide full view of the council (dais), seating area, and testimony area.
Cameras will be controlled from broadcast control room (by others). Camera
feed will be provided by broadcast system (by others) and interface to video
conferencing system. Cameras provided by others
The touch screen controller at the clerks desk will have control of video
content displayed on all screens in the room, projector screen control, audio
level control, initiation and termination of video conferencing, and lighting
presets.
A dedicated feed for broadcast will have limited access level control interface
via IP for mixing audio for video broadcast.
B.
Peter Kirk Conference Room
1.
One wall mounted 85” – 90” high definition, LCD monitor.
2.
Eight wireless microphones will be provided at the conference table with
charging base. Boundary or gooseneck microphone type to be determined.
3.
Two computer input connections for HDMI or VGA+Audio will be provided at
pockets in table top.
4.
Video content can be displayed via Wi-Fi as a dedicated video input to the
system (BYOD). Wi-Fi interface is not part of city hall network.
5.
Live video and audio feeds from Council Chambers will be viewable as a
discrete input to the system.
6.
Connections to conference table to be via over floor, ADA compatible wire
way. Wire way to be installed under carpet.
7.
An on-wall touch screen will be the control interface for audio and video.
System controls will be duplicated and operational via a dedicated iPad.
8.
Ceiling speakers will be zoned to optimize audibility and minimize feedback.
9.
An induction loop Assistive Listening System will be provided.
10. Equipment to be located in local credenza millwork.
11. System will have audio processing to support optional video conferencing.
C.
Small Conference Rooms
a.
One wall mounted 70” – 80” high definition LCD monitor.
b.
Video content can be displayed via Wi-Fi as a dedicated video input to
the system (BYOD). Wi-Fi interface is not part of city hall network.
c.
Wall mounted control panel and wall mounted computer input
connections for HDMI or VGA+Audio.
d.
Two wall speakers will be mounted adjacent to the high definition LCD
monitor.
27 41 16 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.4
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Audio Systems
1.
Systems shall provide clear, natural sound uniformly distributed throughout
the listening areas. The entire electro-acoustic system shall be carefully
balanced and equalized to provide a high order of intelligibility and gain
without feedback or reverberant coloration. Adequate power capability shall
be provided to ensure the necessary dynamic range and prevent distortion at
peak levels.
2.
Acoustic Frequency Response: 50 Hz to 15 kHz, 3dB/octave roll-off above
2000 Hz ±2dB. Measured at continuous one-third octave bands at seated ear
height.
3.
Noise: System noise shall not exceed an equivalent input noise of -120dBu
based on a 20 kHz noise bandwidth. Predominant noise component in the
system output under any operating condition will be that of the input stages.
Adjustment of any system controls shall produce no audible clicks, pops,
thumps, or other spurious noises.
4.
Signal to Noise Ratio (including crosstalk and hum at all input/output levels):
90 dB.
5.
Dynamic Range: The system shall deliver a minimum sound pressure level of
95 dB with a 10 dB peaking factor to any location at seated ear height at less
than 5% total acoustic harmonic distortion. When system is driven to
maximum output, clipping shall first occur in the power amplifiers.
6.
Total Harmonic Distortion: 0.05% maximum from 20Hz to 20kHz
7.
Polarity: A positive pressure at any system microphone shall produce a
positive pressure from the speakers.
B.
Video Systems
1.
Projected images shall properly fill their respective screens to full size without
“cropping” or overshoot.
2.
Projection lenses shall provide distortion-free images without color fringing or
aberration.
3.
Screen brightness and screen brightness ratio shall reasonably approach the
theoretical value based on the projector’s specified light output value with the
necessary light loss corrections.
C.
Test procedures for video systems shall conform to the following basic guidelines:
1.
All equipment and video signal chains shall operate according to
manufacturer’s specifications and/or to the EIA RS-170A standard.
2.
All video monitors/projectors shall be set up and adjusted following the
manufacturer’s guidelines including the following:
a.
black level (using the brightness control);
b.
white level (using the contrast control);
c.
correct hue.
27 41 16 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.5
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer’s Qualifications: At least 5 years’ experience in production of
specified products.
B.
Installer’s Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation of systems similar in
complexity and scope to those required for this project; and meet the following:
1.
At least five years’ experience with equipment and systems specified.
2.
Experience with similar systems. Provide a list of recent completed projects
along with contact person name and phone number.
3.
Be a franchised dealer and authorized service center for the major products
specified. If the installer is not an authorized dealer for a major component,
submit documents describing how equipment will be acquired, how warranty
repair work will be provided and what arrangements have been made to
provide replacement parts.
4.
Maintain fully staffed and equipped service facility.
5.
Provide evidence of experience in similar rigging projects or qualifications of
proposed rigging sub-contractor with appropriate experience.
6.
Installer to have completed factory training in installation and maintenance of
DSP system’s hardware and software prior to Bid opening.
7.
Installer’s firm shall be engaged in the full-time installation of permanent
sound systems and shall derive at least 60 per cent of their revenue from
these types of projects.
2.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with Division 01, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Equipment list, based on the specified equipment and other additional equipment
or materials needed for complete systems.
C.
Product Data: By specification section, with brochures and/or catalog cuts for all
items of equipment and hardware.
D.
For each item, indicate listing by UL or other approved testing agency. For audio
power amplifiers, indicate the NEC Class of output wiring.
E.
List each item of equipment with:
1.
item number;
2.
name of manufacturer;
3.
model number;
4.
description or nomenclature;
5.
quantity to be furnished.
A.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing the ratings of items and systems
and how the components of an item or system are to be assembled,
interconnected, function together and how they will be installed on the project.
27 41 16 - 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
System layout drawings shall show floor plans with complete device layout and
point-to-point wiring and connection diagrams between all components.
B.
Shop Drawings required for:
1.
Floor plans, showing the layout of devices and cabling and wiring within
raceway systems. Include the number of cables, type of cables, and size of
raceway for each run.
2.
Single line diagrams showing model numbers of each component. Include
wire numbers for each connection, with numbers corresponding to those of
the wire-run list.
3.
Wiring diagrams showing point to point connections between components.
Include wire numbers and color-coding for each connection point, with
numbers corresponding to those of the wire-run list.
4.
Rack panel layout for each equipment cabinet.
5.
Scaled and dimensioned drawings of all custom assemblies and fabricated
items, including but not limited to the following. Include details of all
components, materials, finishes, and colors.
6.
Control panel mounting.
7.
Speaker mounting details: Retain services of registered professional
structural engineer licensed to practice in state of Washington to develop
mounting details. Include hardware types and load capacity, and details
describing attachment to structure. Structural engineer’s information should
include design calculations and copy of engineer’s certification.
8.
Projector mounting and hardware.
9.
Input/output Panels, including mounting of panels in casework.
C.
Submit with the Shop Drawings:
1.
Preliminary cable numbering lists.
2.
Include detailed description of the proposed cable number systems,
complying with specified requirements.
D.
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor agrees that submittals and shop drawings
processed by the Consultant are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals
and shop drawings by the Audiovisual Systems Contractor is to demonstrate to the
Consultant that the Audiovisual Systems Contractor understands the design
concept, that they demonstrate their understanding by indicating which equipment
and material they intend to furnish and install, and by detailing the fabrication and
installation methods they intend to use. The Audiovisual Systems Contractor alone
accepts all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this Division
of the specifications meet in full all requirements of the contract documents. The
Consultant’s review is for general conformance with the design concept and
contract documents. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving the
Audiovisual Systems Contractor from compliance with the project plans and
specifications, nor departures therefrom. The Audiovisual Systems Contractor
remains responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and correlating all
quantities and dimensions, for selecting fabrication processes and for techniques of
assembly.
27 41 16 - 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
E.
If a conflict is found between the specifications and drawings, the Audiovisual
Systems Contractor will provide the greater quantity and assumed to be correct.
F.
Submittals and shop drawings which are incomplete or which contain insufficient
information will be returned without review, for resubmittal.
PRODUCTS
3.1
GENERAL
A.
All systems mentioned shall be complete in every detail and fully operational upon
completion of the project unless specifically noted otherwise. Mention of certain
materials in these specifications shall not be construed as releasing the Audiovisual
Systems Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all
labor required to provide a complete and fully operational system.
B.
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor will be responsible for determining the proper
equipment complement to provide complete and working systems, based on the
operational requirements set forth in the specification.
C.
All materials shall be new, free from defects and not less than the quality herein
specified. Materials shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation and
operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are
being installed.
D.
Where these specifications include model or series numbers, the provided
equipment (including substitutions) shall meet or exceed the manufacturer’s
published specifications for the specified model or series the same as if the
manufacturer’s published specifications were enumerated within these project
specifications. This requirement is in addition to the other requirements given in
the project specifications.
This requirement is not intended to apply to
characteristics (such as color or appearance) which do not affect the performance,
function, or reliability.
E.
Prior to ordering equipment, the Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall coordinate
the frequencies of all wireless devices to prevent unwanted interaction between
devices and rooms. This includes, but is not limited to, wireless microphones,
assisted listening system devices, etc.
F.
All accessories, including rack mounting hardware, power supplies, etc., shall be
obtained from the original equipment manufacturer. Unless otherwise noted or
specified, third party accessories shall not be used.
G.
Equality:
1.
Other products of equal quality and function may be furnished, subject to
approval by the Owner, Architect, and Consultant.
2.
Proof of equality rests with the submitter. The Owner shall be the final judge
of equality.
27 41 16 - 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
H.
Substitutions:
1.
In accordance with Division 1, Substitutions.
I.
Manufacturer:
1.
Do not provide an assortment. For each category, provide products of the
same manufacturer; for each item, provide the same model for all pieces.
J.
The specification and drawings are representative of the design and do not
necessarily provide all hardware, miscellaneous equipment, software and details
for a fully functioning system. It is the responsibility of the Audiovisual Systems
Contractor to ensure the system is complete and functions according to the system
descriptions and design intent.
3.2
A.
AUDIO/VISUAL EQUIPMENT
Council Chambers & Lobby
7
8
3
16
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
2
JBL
JBL
JBL
Shure
Shure
Biamp
Biamp
MOTU
Crown
JBL
Wms Sound
FTR
Extron
Extron
Extron
Extron
Extron
Extron
Cisco
Extron
Extron
Extron
SVSI
Extron
Extron
Extron
Control 47 HC
Control 47 C/T
Control 67 P/T
MX412D C
QLXD124/85
TesiraFORTE` AVB CI
Tesira EX-IN
DCi 8|300
CSA 2120Z
PLA DL210 SYS 2
Reporter
XTP CP II 1600
XTP II CP 4i HD 4K Plus
XTP CP 4i
XTP CP 4o
XTP II CP 4o HD 4K Plus
XTP T UWP 202
Group 700
HDMI DA2
HDMI DA4
HDMI DA8
N3121
ShareLink 200 N
XTP SR HDMI
XTP R HWP 201
27 41 16 - 8
High Ceiling Speaker
Ceiling Speaker
Pendant Speaker
Desk Microphone
Wireless Microphone
Audio DSP
Input Expander
AVB Switch
8 Ch. Amplifier
2 Ch. Amplifier
Assistive Listening System
Logging Software
Matrix Frame
4x HDMI Input Card
4x F/UTP Input Card
4x F/UTP Output Card
4x HDMI Output Card
HDMI to F/UTP, Decora
Codec
2x HDMI Dist. Amplifier
4x HDMI Dist. Amplifier
8x HDMI Dist. Amplifier
IP Video Encoder
Collaboration Gateway
F/UTP Scaling Receiver
F/UTP Receiver, Decora
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
B.
Ensemble
Ensemble
Hitachi
Chief
Chief
Chief
Draper
Samsung
Peerless
Peerless
Premier
Samsung
Peerless
Chief
LG
Crestron
Crestron
Crestron
Crestron
Luxul
EnGenius
DSAN
Middle Atlantic
Furman
Middle Atlantic
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
BrightEye 83
BrightEye 81
CP-WU9410/SL902
RPAU
ACC850
CMA110
Access/Series E
DM55E
ECM-D70T
PP-6
MSCC-2
DM75E
SFL670
PAC526F
LG 22MB35PU-B
CP3
TSW-752
TSW-1052
TSW-1050-TTK-B-S
AMS-1208P
EAP1750H
PRO-2000BT
WRK-SA Series
CN-1800S
TOR-2-20RP
HDMI TO HD-SDI
HD-SDI to HDMI
WUXGA Projector
Projector Mount
Cable Entry/Coupler
Ceiling Mount
189” Projection Screen
55” LCD Monitor
Dual Monitor Mount
Ceiling Mount
Swivel Coupler
75” LCD Monitor
Flat Panel Mount
Flat Panel Back Box
22” Monitor
Controller
Control Panel (rack)
Control Panel (clerk)
Desktop Stand
PoE+ Switch
Wi-Fi Access Point
Speaker Timer
Equipment Rack
Power Controller
Tilt Out Rack (clerk pos.)
Peter Kirk Conference Room
9
2
2
2
2
1
12
12
4
2
1
1
1
JBL
JBL
Biamp
JBL
Shure
Shure
Shure
Shure
Shure
Shure
Wms Sound
SVSI
SVSI
Control 47 C/T
Control 25 AV
TesiraFORTE` AI
CSA 2120Z
MXWANI8
MXWAPT8
MXW8
MX410C
MXW2/SM86
MXWNCS8
PLA DL210 SYS 2
N3221
N3121
27 41 16 - 9
Ceiling Speaker
Program Speaker
Audio DSP
2 Ch. Amplifier
Wireless Mic Interface
Wireless Mic Transceiver
Gooseneck Base
Gooseneck Microphone
Handheld Microphone
Microphone Charger
Assistive Listening System
IP Video Decoder
IP Video Encoder
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C.
Extron
Extron
Extron
Extron
Ensemble
Canon
Chief
Chief
Draper
Crestron
Crestron
EnGenius
Luxul
Middle Atlantic
Furman
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
ShareLink 200
DTP 84
DTP T UWP 232 D
DTP HDMI 4K 230 D Rx
Brite Eye 83
WUX400ST
RPMAU
CMS440
Access FIT/Series E
CP3
TSW-752
EAP1750H
AMS-1208P
CFR Series
CN-1800S
Collaboration Gateway
Matrix Video Switch
HDMI to F/UTP Xmit
F/UTP to HDMI Rcvr
HDMI to HD-SDI
WUXGA Projector
Projector Mount
Suspended Ceiling Mount
113” Projection Screen
Controller
Control Panel
Wi-Fi Access Point
PoE+ Switch
Credenza EQ Rack
Power Controller
Conference Room 211
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
JBL
RDL
Extron
SVSI
Sharp
Peerless
Chief
Control 25AV
RU-PA40D
MLC Plus 100
N3221
LC70LE661U
SFL670
PAC526F
Speaker
2 Ch. Amplifier
Control Panel
IP Video Decoder
70” LCD Monitor
Flat Panel Mount
Flat Panel Back Box
EXECUTION
3.3
GENERAL
A.
Coordinate work with other trades to avoid causing delays in construction schedule.
B.
Mount equipment and enclosures plumb and square. Permanently installed
equipment to be firmly and safely held in place. Design equipment supports to
support loads imposed with a safety factor of at least three (five to one for
loudspeaker mountings). Equipment shall be braced for seismic conditions
according to applicable codes and regulations.
C.
The process of acceptance testing the System may necessitate moving and
adjusting certain component parts - e.g., loudspeakers. Provide for +5 degrees
(horizontally and vertically) of adjustability from initial aiming angles and perform
such adjustments without claim for additional payment.
27 41 16 - 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
D.
Cover edges of cable pass-through holes in chassis, racks, boxes, etc., with rubber
or nylon grommet.
E.
Install and test all equipment, in operating order under the terms of this
specification.
F.
Install all equipment in accordance with all appropriate local electrical codes for
public buildings.
G.
Component grounds, interconnections, and cable shield ground to be rendered
such that system shall be free from ground loops, hum, noise, instability, and
crosstalk.
H.
All boxes, equipment, etc., shall be secured plumb and square.
I.
In the installation of equipment and cable, consideration shall be given not only to
operational efficiency, but also to overall aesthetic factors.
J.
Verify performance of each and every item of equipment to be equal to or better
than factory specifications. Repair or replace items or components that do not
meet factory specifications.
K.
Audiovisual Systems Contractor is responsible to verify all rough-in requirements.
3.4
WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION
A.
Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent and experienced
Audiovisual Systems Contractors shall be employed and shall be under the
supervision of a competent and experienced foreman.
B.
Completed work shall represent a neat and orderly appearance.
C.
All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by
representatives of the Architect and Consultant.
D.
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall keep the job adequately staffed at all
times, including a designated field supervisor present at the job site, and in
responsible charge during all phases of installation and checkout. This supervisor
shall be the same individual throughout the execution of the work, unless illness,
loss of personnel, or other circumstances beyond the control of the Audiovisual
Systems Contractor intervene.
3.5
A.
PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS
Must be provided such as to retain that rating.
27 41 16 - 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.6
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
CLEAN UP
A.
Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates,
cartons, etc., created by his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at
sufficient frequency to eliminate hazard to the public, other workmen, the building
or the Owner's employees. Before acceptance of the installation, Audiovisual
Systems Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting fixtures, wiring
devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster, mortar, concrete,
etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed and new finish
equal to the original applied.
B.
Clean equipment to remove plaster, taping or patching compound, overspray, paint
spills, oil, grease, dust, fingerprints, or other dirt or contaminants to restore
equipment to original finish and condition.
C.
Remove dirt and debris from the interior of enclosures, outlet boxes, pull and
junction boxes, and equipment cabinets.
3.7
EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
A.
Loudspeakers:
1.
Provide adequate support (using attachments to structural elements and/or
metal mounting bars as required).
B.
Rack-mounted equipment:
1.
Mount equipment in racks and consoles and fully wire and test before delivery
to job site.
2.
Provide ventilation adequate to keep temperature within the rack below
95 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide whisper type ventilation fan in each rack if
temperature in rack rises above 95 degrees with power on for five continuous
hours.
3.
Looking at the rack from the rear, install cables and wiring neatly, forming
straight lines and smooth corners. Locate AC power, digital control, DC
control, and speaker wiring on the left; microphone, line level audio, and
video wiring on the right. Panels or equipment mounted on the rear rack rails
shall not block access to any front mounted components.
4.
Install blank panels to fill any unused rack spaces.
5.
Controls, patch panels, and user equipment at working height.
3.8
A.
WIRING
To the greatest extent possible, install wire and cable only within the raceway
systems being provided by the electrical Audiovisual Systems Contractor. Do not
install wire or cable in wall cavities or ceiling plenums/attic spaces without the use
of raceway (conduit or cable tray), without the explicit written permission of the
Owner's representative, or as otherwise noted on the drawings.
27 41 16 - 12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
B.
Maintain conduit fills equal to or less than those given by Table 1 of Chapter 9 of
the NEC, regardless of the class of wiring.
C.
All cables shall be grouped according to the signals being carried. In order to
reduce signal contamination, separate groups shall be formed for the following
cable families:
1.
Power cables
2.
Control cables
3.
Audio cables carrying signals less than -20dBm
4.
Audio cables carrying signals between -20dBm and +20dBm
5.
Audio cables carrying signals above +20dBm
D.
Protect installed conductors from painting, overspray, and taping or patching
compounds.
E.
Number each cable. Number code individual conductors of cables to identify
circuits and connections. Record number on the "AS-BUILT" drawings.
F.
Cable ties shall be placed at appropriate intervals of no greater than six inches.
G.
Do not use cable ties in the cable tray or overhead junction boxes.
H.
Cable assemblies shall utilize a service loop so that equipment in racks or
equipment consoles can be fully pulled out for service without cutting wire ties or
putting undue stress on cable assemblies.
I.
Cable assemblies run in conduit and/or cable trays should provide for a minimum of
3 feet of excess cable on each end to allow for relocation of equipment or retermination of cable in the future.
J.
All vertical cable bundles shall be attached to the rack frame.
K.
All cables shall be continuous lengths without splices. All system wire, after being
cut and stripped, shall have the wire strands twisted back to their original lay and
be terminated by approved soldered or mechanical means. Except where noted
otherwise in the specifications, heat-shrink tubing shall be used to insulate the
ground or drain wire. Unused wires at the end of a cable shall remain un-stripped
and shall be laid back and held in place with wire ties.
L.
Prior to connection, verify freedom from shorts or grounds of all conductors
(including shields and drain wires) of all cables.
M.
All solder connections shall be made with rosin-core solder using temperaturecontrolled solder stations. Care shall be taken to avoid cold or cracked solder
joints. Any connections which do not appear to be clean and shiny, or which show
signs of cracking, shall be re-soldered by the Audiovisual Systems Contractor
before final acceptance of the system.
N.
Connections made with screw actuated pressure type terminal strips shall be made
by stripping approximately 1/4 inch of insulation from the stranded conductor. Then
27 41 16 - 13
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
the un-tinned wire shall be inserted into the terminal and the screw tightened using
a secure fitting precision screwdriver.
O.
For all crimp-type connectors and pins, utilize only crimp tools rated for the crimp
pin type, size and wire gage being assembled. Consult the manufacturer's
specifications and recommendations for crimping.
P.
Utilize only gold-plated crimp pins.
Q.
Cables shall not protrude from the back of racks.
R.
All cable entry shall be through the tops of racks or through entrance holes in the
base of the rack. No cable shall enter racks through front, rear or side panel
openings.
3.9
CONNECTIONS
A.
If a signal path requires that the signal pass through more than one device, each
device must have looping input capability, or a distribution amplifier must be used
to feed the signal to the devices.
B.
All audio circuits shall be balanced (high, low, shield) except where otherwise
indicated. Balance boxes shall be used to convert unbalanced equipment to
balanced, where necessary to conform to a balanced standard.
C.
Wire all three and five pin audio connectors and quarter-inch phone jacks (mono
and stereo) in accordance with IEC-268.
1.
For three pin connectors, Pin 1 is ground, Pin 2 is positive, and Pin 3 is
negative.
2.
For five pin connectors, Pin 1 is ground, Pin 2 is left positive, Pin 3 is left
negative, Pin 4 is right positive, and Pin 5 is right negative.
3.
For quarter-inch stereo phone jacks, Tip is positive, Ring is negative, and
Sleeve is ground.
4.
For quarter-inch mono phone jacks, Tip is positive and Sleeve is ground.
D.
Connections
1.
Splice only in accessible junction boxes, using insulated crimp-on connectors,
wire-nuts, or other methods approved by the Consultant. Do not splice in
conduits or cable tray.
2.
Make connections to plugs, receptacles, connectors, or solder terminals using
rosin-core solder. Make connections to screw connections using insulated
spade lugs.
a.
Ensure that no uninsulated wire is exposed beyond its pin.
b.
Utilize only multi-core flux resin with 60/40 tin-lead non-corrosive
construction, designed for electronic equipment use.
c.
Soldering shall utilize good engineering practices, and completed solder
connections shall appear shiny and smooth with no visible imperfections
or cold-solder joints.
27 41 16 - 14
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
E.
3.10
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
Cover shielded cables with heat shrink tubing to insulate shield and drain
wire.
Cable jacket shall be fully engaged by the strain relief of the connector.
Patch Panel Assignments
1.
All patch panels shall be wired so that signal "sources" (outputs from) appear
on the upper row of a row pair; and all "loads" (inputs to) appear on the lower
row of a row pair.
2.
Patch Panel Designation Strips: All audio patch panel designation strips shall
utilize alphanumeric identifications and descriptive information. The jack
position in each horizontal row shall be numbered sequentially from left to
right. The horizontal jack rows shall be lettered sequentially from top to
bottom. The alphanumeric identification of each jack shall be included on the
functional block drawings, as well as on reproductions of these drawings,
which shall be mounted in an appropriate location near the patch bays.
GROUNDING AND SHIELDING
A.
Rack Grounding
1.
Prior to installing or connecting equipment, temporarily disconnect ground
wires from equipment cabinet(s), and measure impedance between each
ground wire and its cabinet. Verify electrical isolation (minimum resistance of
1M ohm) between rack cabinets and raceway and conductive structure.
Record results for test report. Reconnect ground wires.
2.
Install a single-point grounding system for each system. Where multiple
systems are installed in a single grouping of racks, they shall be considered
one system for grounding purposes.
B.
Verify integrity of grounding systems and isolated receptacles prior to connection of
equipment.
C.
Connect shield and grounding conductors as follows:
1.
Connect shields of microphone wiring to receptacle and patch panel common.
2.
Insulate shields from connector shell, plates, boxes, and raceway.
3.
Connect shields of wiring from patch panel to control console inputs only to
control console (insulate at patch panel).
4.
Connect shields of balanced line level circuits at patch panel only; insulate at
other end. For balanced circuits that do not terminate on patch panel,
connect shields at input ends only; insulate at output ends. Use this standard
as needed to correct ground hum issues
D.
Maintain shield and drain wire continuity through junction boxes and intermediate
termination points. Insulate shields from raceway or other conductive building
elements. Maintain shields to within 3 inches of connected devices, and maintain
twisting of pairs of wires to within 1/2 inch of connector or device termination.
E.
Make any modifications to grounding and shielding which are necessary to
eliminate extraneous noise and RFI, prevent oscillations, parasitics, and other
27 41 16 - 15
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
signal instabilities, and to meet overall systems noise specifications. Record any
deviations from the above guidelines, and the reasons that each deviation was
deemed necessary.
F.
Do not remove or defeat grounding terminal of 3 conductor power cords, and
maintain safety grounding and bonding as required by the NEC.
G.
The overall governing requirements are that the wiring systems shall not induce or
pick up perceptible noise, and that the predominant components of the noise floor
of all signal paths shall be normal "thermal" noise of the upstream devices.
H.
Because of the great number of possible variations in grounding systems, it shall
be the responsibility of the Audiovisual Systems Contractor to follow good
engineering practice, as outlined above, and to deviate from these practices only
when necessary to minimize crosstalk and to maximize signal-to-noise ratios in the
audio and control systems.
3.11
LABELING
A.
Develop a wire numbering system to uniquely identify each cable.
B.
Identify each equipment location with an alpha-numeric identifier. Include room
and rack or bay location.
C.
Label cables on each end, with number. Labels shall be self-laminating type, such
as Panduit PDL-54 or PDL-56. Labels shall be placed the following distances from
the connector and/or heat shrink at each end of the cable:
1.
Coax cable: 1 1/2 inch from cable end.
2.
Audio cable: 4 inches from cable end.
3.
Control cable: 4 inches from cable end.
4.
Audio cables punched down to audio patch bays: 10 inches from cable end.
5.
Coax cables connected to patch bays: 10 inches from cable end.
D.
For each system, include the following on the wire run list, for each cable:
1.
Cable number
2.
Signal type
3.
Cable type
4.
"To" destination
5.
"From" destination
6.
Room and equipment location for both ends of the cable
7.
Approximate length of cable run
E.
Provide the cable numbering list as a computerized spreadsheet, in a format
compatible with Microsoft Excel (version 6.0 or higher). As part of the O&M
Manuals, provide:
1.
Printed copies in each Manual.
2.
Clearly label input and output jacks and receptacles with engraved lettering.
Labeling will include type of receptacle (MIC, LINE, SPEAKER, etc.) and
27 41 16 - 16
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
3.12
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
input or output number. Locate legends on AV Panel or plates as shown on
drawings. Characters shall be engraved, and filled with colored, contrasting
enamel.
Lettering should be of adequate size to be legible from a distance of at least
3 feet.
SYSTEM TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
A.
Provide all required testing equipment and apparatus specified herein to complete
successfully the tests and the equalization.
B.
All manufacturers' maintenance or alignment manuals shall be present during
testing and adjustment procedures.
C.
Testing and adjustment of equipment shall be performed by qualified technicians
with prior knowledge of the particular items of equipment, and general knowledge
of audio systems alignment and trouble shooting, and knowledge of the specific
systems and installations of this project.
D.
Inspect and make adjustments after installation.
E.
Provide functional performance checklists (PFT) as a submittal.
F.
Repair or replace defective equipment.
3.13
A.
INSTRUMENTATION
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall have the following test equipment
available on-site during the installation and testing:
1.
Audio
a.
Dual-trace, triggered oscilloscope with calibrated settings.
b.
Sine wave oscillator with balanced output and distortion below 0.1%.
c.
AC voltmeter with 100 millivolt full-scale sensitivity and 50 to
10,000 Hertz frequency response.
d.
Distortion Analyzer.
e.
Sound Level Meter, type 2 minimum.
f.
One-third octave real-time spectrum analyzer, or FFT analyzer, and
calibrated microphone.
g.
Pink Noise generator.
h.
Software to adjust remotely controlled signal processors, with
necessary computer and related hardware. Provide sufficient cabling to
permit controlling computer to be located in loudspeaker service areas
while signal processors remain in equipment cabinets.
2.
Video
a.
Calibrated video signal generator, Extron VTG 400DVI, or equivalent.
b.
Digital Video Essentials HD test Blu-ray DVD
c.
Color Analyzer – Datacolor Spyder4Elite with PC test disc, or
equivalent.
27 41 16 - 17
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
Non-professional test equipment or "home-built kit" equipment is not
acceptable.
3.14
PRELIMINARY AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS CONTRACTOR INSPECTIONS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Audio:
1.
Measure and record impedance of each loudspeaker line at 100, 1000, and
10,000 Hz before connecting it to the output of its respective amplifier.
2.
Make corrections as required so that the load impedance of each amp is
equal to or greater than rated load impedance.
3.
Measure and record the output impedance of each active device operating as
a source to any passive device or series of passive devices. Record the DC
resistance of any build-out resistors used.
4.
Measure and record the input impedance of any active device used to
terminate passive devices, and record the total impedance of all such
devices. Record the DC resistance of any terminating resistors used.
5.
Perform tests with the measuring microphone at the seated ear height of the
audience, within designated seating areas.
All interior finishes and
furnishings shall be in place during measurements. For each system,
measure and record the following:
a.
Acoustic distribution of the loudspeakers in the sound system
throughout the entire seating area. Record the location of all positions
in the seating area where any 1/3-octave band, from 250 to 5000 Hz,
deviates more than +/- 3dB from the desired house curve.
b.
The un-equalized acoustic frequency response at three locations in
each listening area.
c.
Acoustic noise floor with all microphone inputs at full gain, or at gain
settings which correspond to the onset of ringing for a single
microphone, whichever is lower, and other controls at normal settings.
During test, terminate microphone receptacles with 200 ohm resistors.
d.
Maximum sound pressure level of pink noise at onset of amplifier
clipping. Make measurement using both A-weighted and un-weighted
(flat) settings of the Sound Level Meter (SLM).
6.
Measure and record the polarity of all loudspeakers.
7.
Measure and record the polarity of all microphones to be used in the system.
8.
Verify that all microphones have the same polarity of output for positive
pressure at diaphragm.
9.
Verify that positive pressure at a microphone produces positive pressure from
each loudspeaker. Reverse polarity if required, and record which circuit was
reversed.
10. Verify that signal polarity is correct for each circuit and path, and consistent
for all circuits and paths. Reverse polarity if required, and record which circuit
was reversed.
11. Adjust gain controls so all components except power amplifiers reach rated
nominal output simultaneously. For components which have rated maximum
outputs between 18 and 25dBm and line level inputs, adjust each component
27 41 16 - 18
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
B.
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
for unity gain (i.e., assume all such components have rated outputs equal to
20dBm, and nominal outputs of 0dBm).
Set audio distribution amplifiers for unity gain unless otherwise specified by
the Consultant.
Adjust power amplifier gains so power amplifiers reach clipping at 10 decibels
above 0 volume units on the control console output meter.
Re-adjust gains if required for proper operation of each system and
component. Measure and record any such re-adjustments; also record the
reason adjustment was deemed necessary.
Adjust automatic mixers, automatic level controllers, and other signal
processors to optimize use of microphones for speech using the expected
(normal) microphone positions.
Measure and record the overall frequency response and signal-to-noise ratio
of each complete signal path.
Record all filter settings.
Measure and record, with an oscilloscope, the output of each power amplifier.
The input source to each amplifier being measured shall be a sine wave
oscillator with less than 0.5% THD adjusted to 10dB less than full power
output of the amplifier. Inspect the output sine wave appearing on the
oscilloscope for complete freedom from hum, noise, parasitic oscillation, and
RF interference.
Slowly sweep all low frequency and full range speaker systems with sine
waves at 25% of rated maximum amplifier power output, or at 50% of rated
continuous power capacity of loudspeakers, whichever is less, from 20 to
2000 Hertz. Observe for audible or perceptible vibration or rattling of speaker
components, mounting apparatus, or building elements. Under this Section,
correct vibration or rattling of speakers or mounting apparatus to the
satisfaction of the Consultant. Report vibration or rattling of other building
elements to the Consultant; include frequency, characterization of observed
rattling or vibration, and recommendations for correcting the rattling or
vibration in the report.
Video
1.
Video Display:
a.
Use manufacturer’s recommendations for setting up and adjusting video
displays.
b.
Perform tests and adjustments using measuring equipment and record
measurements.
2.
Perform tests and adjustments separately for each presentation switcher
input to be used in the system, including at a minimum:
a.
Computer video at 1024 x 768 pixels, for vertical refresh rates of 60
Hertz.
3.
Digital video at 480P, 720P, 1080i, 1080p.
4.
Set scaling so that images fill the screen with optimal resolution.
5.
Physical adjustments:
a.
Adjust video projector lens offset to center image on screen, ±1%.
b.
Adjust optical focus for maximum sharpness.
6.
Raster adjustments:
a.
Adjust for uniform illumination of each primary color.
27 41 16 - 19
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
7.
8.
9.
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
Light output:
a.
Luminance level, per ANSI standard. Record all measured values in
each of the 9 test areas in addition to the average.
Aspect ratio:
a.
Image width to be within ±1% of image height times 1.78
Image to be square, level, and plumb to the room and screen, image, ±1%.
C.
Test patterns of squares and circles to be square and round within 2.5%.
D.
Gray Scale:
1.
Luminance level and luminance level within 10 percent of calculated ideal
level, for each step of the gray scale pattern.
2.
Color temperature: 6500k for video signals and 9500k for computer signals,
plus or minus 200K for each step of the gray scale pattern.
E.
Picture quality adjustments:
1.
Adjust with lighting set to the levels intended for viewing of video.
2.
White level ("contrast"): using 100 percent white signal, set to the highest
value
a.
No blooming.
b.
No degradation of resolution, using needle pulse signal.
c.
Luminance level of less than 50 foot-Lamberts or other maximum level
as directed by Consultant. Record measurements of the full white
luminance level.
3.
Black level: using PLUGE pattern (Picture Line-Up Generation Equipment
pattern) signal:
a.
Standard black level (7.5 IRE for video) barely visible
b.
High black level (10 IRE for video) visible
4.
Chroma, using SMPTE color bars and/or equivalent for computer video.
3.15
TESTING RESULTS AND COMPLETION REPORT
A.
Submit copies of the test results prior to final acceptance and training. Include
copies of the test results in the O&M manuals. Include a block diagram of the test
setup for each test.
B.
When the work is complete and ready for acceptance testing, submit Completion
Report to the Consultant for review and approval. Submit copies to the Architect,
the Consultant, and the Owner. Include copies of final inspection certificates to the
Owner.
C.
Include:
1.
Letters from the Audiovisual Systems Contractor and all audiovisual systems
sub-contractors, on their respective letterheads, certifying that the audiovisual
systems are substantially complete, fully tested and adjusted, fully
operational, and ready for inspection, final testing, and tuning.
2.
The results of all tests, measurements, and adjustments which are specified
within this section and related sections.
27 41 16 - 20
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
List of personnel and test equipment used.
List of discrepancies and corrective action taken.
D.
Submit the complete package of Completion Report to the Consultant for review
prior to scheduling of the site visit by the Consultant for final observation and
testing.
E.
The Consultant will not schedule its site visit until the Audiovisual Systems
Contractor’s Completion Report has been submitted and approved. Allow at least
10 calendar days between receipt of Completion Report by Consultant and the
earliest desired date for site visit by Consultant. The Audiovisual Systems
Contractor is encouraged to communicate informally with the Consultant prior to
submission of Completion Report to coordinate the scheduling of the Consultant's
site visit.
3.16
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TEST
A.
System Acceptance Tests will not be performed until the Audiovisual Systems
Contractor’s Completion Report has been submitted and the test results have been
reviewed. The System Acceptance Tests will be supervised by the Consultant and
will consist of the following:
1.
A physical inventory will be taken of all equipment on site and will be
compared to equipment lists in the contract documents.
2.
The operation of all system equipment shall be demonstrated by the
Audiovisual Systems Contractor.
3.
Both subjective and objective tests will be required by the Consultant to
determine compliance with the specifications. The Audiovisual Systems
Contractor shall be responsible for providing test equipment for these tests.
4.
All final, "as-built" drawings, run sheets, manuals, and other required
documents, as detailed, shall be on hand. Two complete sets of these
documents shall be delivered to the Owner at this time. (One complete set
shall have been delivered to the Consultant prior to the scheduling of
Acceptance Tests).
5.
In the event further adjustment is required, or defective equipment must be
repaired or replaced, tests may be suspended or continued at the option of
the Consultant.
6.
Any charge for additional time incurred by the Consultant required to oversee
the system tests, due to improper system installation or previous failed
systems, shall be the responsibility of, and charged directly to the Audiovisual
Systems Contractor.
B.
Provide installation, servicing, and alignment manuals for all items of equipment,
and a copy of the Completion Report.
C.
Provide on-site personnel who have participated in the installation and testing.
27 41 16 - 21
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
D.
Assist the Consultant in making final tests, equalization, and other adjustments.
This shall include listening and viewing tests, including subjective tests by
observers at various positions, under various operating conditions.
E.
Make any adjustments, including but not limited to re-wiring of speaker taps,
resetting of gain controls, changes in shielding or grounding, and minor changes in
wiring and termination, which are deemed necessary by the Consultant. Such work
shall be included in the base bid contract amount.
3.17
A.
3.18
FINAL ACCEPTACE REQUEST
When the work is complete, including work shown on the "punch lists", and ready
for final acceptance, submit a completely filled-out Job Completion Form (form is
attached below). Submit copies to the Architect, the Consultant, and the Owner.
Include copies of final inspection certificates to the Owner.
ADDITIONAL SITE VISITS BY CONSULTANT
A.
Additional site visits may be deemed necessary by the Consultant if any of the
following conditions are found during the (initial) site visit:
1.
Items of equipment which are missing or non-operational.
2.
Items of equipment which do not meet the specifications or the manufacturers
published performance criteria.
3.
Hum, buzz, or noise which degrades the signal to noise ratio of any circuit by
more than 5 decibels from the manufacturers' rated signal-to-noise ratios for
the upstream components.
4.
Audio distortion which is audible.
5.
Any other conditions which are not in accordance with the specifications,
drawings, Audiovisual Systems Contractor’s submittals, or Completion
Report.
B.
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall make every possible effort, and the
Consultant will render reasonable assistance which does not hamper the other
work of the site visit or extend the site visit, to correct the deficiencies during the
site visit to avoid additional site visits.
C.
If additional site visits are deemed necessary:
1.
The Consultant will submit a written notification of the reasons with
descriptions of the deficiencies to be corrected.
2.
Under this Section, with no increase in the Contract amount, the Audiovisual
Systems Contractor shall pay for the addition site visits by the Consultant, in
the form of reimbursement to the Owner or Architect for their actual cost of
services by BRC Acoustics. BRC Acoustics will bill the additional services for
the additional site visit(s) at its prevailing standard hourly rates for time
(including travel time), plus actual costs for travel, per diem, and related
expenses.
27 41 16 - 22
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.19
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
WARRANTY
A.
Refer to General Conditions of the Contract.
B.
Guarantee all work installed under this specification. The Audiovisual Systems
Contractor shall make good, repair or replace, at his own expense, any defective
work, materials or parts which may show themselves within one year after final
acceptance, if in the opinion of the Architect or Consultant said defect is due to
imperfection in material, design or workmanship. Any request for service or repair
under this warranty shall be honored, except when damage has resulted from
obvious vandalism or Acts of God.
C.
The warranty shall include all provisions of the standard manufacturer's backed
warranty for each particular piece of equipment, and remain in effect for a period as
stated by the manufacturer. The Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall be an
authorized service representative for all equipment supplied as part of this project
unless appropriate approval from Owner has been granted prior to equipment
procurement or installation. The warranty shall also cover the accuracy of technical
documentation, and signal quality as specified and documented during the testing
process of this project.
3.20
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Continually record the actual "as-built" installation on a set of prints kept readily
available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this
purpose alone. At the completion of the work, Audiovisual Systems Contractor
shall furnish the Architect a set of reproducible record drawings and the set of
mark-ups. Final payment to the Audiovisual Systems Contractor will not be
authorized until these prints have been submitted to and accepted by the Architect.
B.
Record drawings shall include, at a minimum, updates of all sheets of the Shop
Drawings.
C.
Provide drawings in the following formats and quantities:
1.
Two sets of full-size or half size bond (size of drawings determined by
Owner).
2.
One set on USB storage device, as AutoCAD "dwg" files (release 2010 or
higher).
3.21
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A.
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall prepare four (4) Operations Manuals for
each system/facility provided under these specifications.
B.
The Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall prepare four (4) Maintenance Manuals
for all equipment furnished under this specification.
27 41 16 - 23
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
C.
The information included must be the exact equipment installed, not the complete
"line" of the manufacturer. Where sheets show the equipment installed and other
equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such
sheets.
D.
These O & M Manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and
maintain all systems and equipment provided in the project. They shall be
presented and arranged in a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's
operating personnel. The information provided shall include but not be limited to
the following:
1.
Equipment manufacturers, makes, model numbers, serial numbers, sizes,
etc. Include addresses and telephone numbers for each manufacturer. List
loose items separately.
2.
A copy of the delivery receipt for Loose Items.
3.
Description of system configuration and operation including component
identification and equipment interconnect diagram.
4.
Manufacturers' recommended operation instructions for each item of
equipment.
5.
Overall system operating instructions, custom written for this specific project.
6.
Warranty Information, including but not limited to:
a.
An overall Statement of Warranty from the Audiovisual Systems
Contractor for the complete systems.
b.
A copy of the Manufacturers' warranties for each item of equipment so
covered.
c.
Instructions for obtaining warranty service from the Audiovisual Systems
Contractor, and from each Manufacturer.
7.
"As-built" Shop Drawings, including point to point wiring diagrams.
8.
"As-built" Cable Numbering Lists.
9.
Copies of all test results. Include the names of the individuals performing and
witnessing the tests, and the manufacturer and model of each item of test
equipment which was used. Include block diagrams of the test setup for tests
which involve more than one item of test equipment.
E.
Wiring diagrams for each system shall be complete drawings for the specific
system installed under the contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable
unless marked to indicate the exact field installation.
F.
The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly
arrangement by specification index. The manuals shall have a typewritten index
and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. The completed
manuals shall be bound in heavy-duty slant-ring binders (3 "D" rings), or with
hardboard covers and screw-post bindings. O & M manuals shall not exceed 5"
thickness. Provide two or more volumes if required. The covers shall be labeled
with the name of the job, Owner, Architect, Consultant, Audiovisual Systems
Contractor and year of completion. The spine shall be labeled with the name of the
job, Owner and year of completion. Labeling may be laser-printed inserts in clear
plastic overlays, or imprinting by silk-screening or hot stamping. Include the
following information:
1.
Project Title
27 41 16 - 24
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
3.22
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
Project Number
Owner/Operator
Architect
Consultant (BRC Acoustics)
Audiovisual Systems Contractor
Completion Date
A preliminary copy, complete except for the bound cover shall be submitted 15
days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. After checking and
review, four (4) bound, final, corrected copies shall be provided. Deliver one (1)
copy to BRC Acoustics and remaining copies to the Owner five days before
instruction is to begin. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward copies of the
receipt to both BRC Acoustics and the Architect with the completed form.
INSTRUCTION/TRAINING PERIODS
A.
After substantial completion of the work, and at least five days after the O & M
manuals have been delivered to the Owner, and after all tests and final inspection
of the work by the Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction, the Audiovisual Systems
Contractor shall demonstrate the systems and instruct the Owner's designated
operating and maintenance personnel in their operation and maintenance. The
Audiovisual Systems Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with
the Owner. The Audiovisual Systems Contractor's representatives shall be
superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system, and suppliers'
representatives when so specified.
B.
At a minimum, provide the following sessions of training for systems users,
covering operations. Each session shall be for at least the specified number of
hours and number of attendees per session.
1.
General and Technical Operations: at least one session of two hours.
C.
All maintenance and operational aspects of the systems shall be described and
demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner. The sessions shall be
conducted by a representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the
system. O&M manual information regarding the system shall be submitted to the
Owner prior to scheduling the instruction session. The training session shall cover
the following areas:
1.
General operation of all systems and functions.
2.
Explanation and orientation of all technical documentation.
3.
Explanation of signal flow including all signal paths through routing switchers
and patching.
4.
Basic system troubleshooting and preventive maintenance.
5.
Explanation of system warranty and process for Owner to follow during
system malfunctions to obtain customer support from the Audiovisual
Systems Audiovisual Systems Contractor.
END OF SECTION 27 41 16
27 41 16 - 25
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
INTEGRATED AV SYSTEMS
SECTION 27 41 16
27 41 16 - 26
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This section includes general electrical requirements for all Division 28 work and is
supplemental and in addition to the requirements of Division 1.
B.
It is the intention of this Division of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings to
describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory
and fully operational condition all equipment, materials, devices and necessary
appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system. Provide all materials,
appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or shown on the drawings,
but which are necessary to make a complete, fully operational installation of all
electrical systems shown on the contract drawings or described herein. Connect
equipment and devices furnished and installed under other Divisions of this
specification (or the Owner) under this Division.
C.
Workmanship shall be of the best quality and competent and experienced electricians
shall be employed and shall be under the supervision of a competent and experienced
foreman.
D.
The drawings and specifications are complimentary and what is called for (or shown) in
either is required to be provided as if called for in both.
E.
See Division 1 for sequence of work.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
WORK IN OTHER DIVISIONS
See all other specifications for other work which includes but is not limited to:
1.
Communications
2.
Conveying Systems
3.
Cutting and Patching
4.
Door Hardware
5.
Equipment Wiring
6.
Fire Protection
7.
Mechanical Control Wiring
8.
Painting, Refinishing and Finishes
CODES, PERMITS, INSPECTION FEES
The following codes and standards are referenced in the Division 28 specifications.
Perform all work and provide materials and equipment in accordance with the latest
referenced codes and standards of the following organizations:
1.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2.
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
3.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
4.
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
28 05 00-1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
B.
Install the electrical systems based on the following:
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code as adopted and
amended by the Local Jurisdiction.
IBC
International Building Code as adopted
and amended by the Local Jurisdiction.
C.
The referenced codes establish a minimum level of requirements. Where provision of
the various codes conflict with each other, the more stringent provision shall govern. If
any conflict occurs between referenced codes and this specification, the codes are to
govern. Compliance with code requirements shall not be construed as relieving the
Contractor from complying with any requirements of the drawings or specifications
which may be in excess of requirements of the governing codes and rules and not
contrary to same.
D.
Obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances
and rules governing work specified herein. Arrange for inspection of work by the
inspectors and give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work with that of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work on
the project. Examine all drawings and specifications of other trades for construction
details and coordination. Make every reasonable effort to provide timely notice of work
affecting other trades to prevent conflicts or interference as to space requirements,
dimensions, openings, block-outs, sleeving or other matters which will cause delays or
necessitate work-around methods.
B.
Obtain submittals and shop drawings of all equipment with electrical connections
furnished under other divisions of the specification and by the Owner. Provide all
wiring in accordance with specific equipment requirements. Immediately advise the
Architect of any changes which may affect the contract price.
C.
Special attention is called to the following items. Coordinate all conflicts prior to
installation:
1.
Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment
so that all electrical outlets and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear
from and in proper relation to these items.
2.
Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets and equipment
are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
3.
Recessing and concealing electrical materials in CMU walls, concrete
construction and precast construction.
D.
Furnish, install and place in satisfactory condition all raceways, boxes, conductors and
connections and all other materials required for the electronic safety and security
systems shown or noted in the contract documents to be complete, fully operational
and fully tested upon completion of the project. Raceways, boxes and ground
connections are shown diagrammatically only and indicate the general character and
approximate location. The layout does not necessarily show the total number of
raceways or boxes for the circuits required, nor are the locations of indicated runs
intended to show the actual routing of the raceways.
28 05 00-2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
E.
Consult the architectural drawings for the exact height and location of all electrical
equipment not specified herein or shown on the drawings. Make any minor changes
(less than 6'-6" horizontal) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices,
wiring, etc., from those shown on the drawings without extra charge, where
coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect before rough-in.
F.
Provide inserts or sleeves for outlet boxes, conductors, cables and/or raceways as
required. Coordinate the installation thereof with other trades.
G.
The Contractor will not be paid for relocation of work, cuttings, patching and finishing
required for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation.
H.
See section 013100 for requirements related to preparation of Ceiling Coordination
Drawings, which shall apply to the work of division 28.
1.5
A.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
1.8
WARRANTY
Refer to General Conditions of the Contract.
CORRECTION OF WORK
Within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the work, the Contractor
shall correct any work found to be not in conformance with the Contract Documents
promptly after written notice from the owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously
given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall
survive acceptance of the work under this Contract and termination of the Contract.
The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.
ITEMIZED SCHEDULE OF COSTS
Complete the Schedule of Values included at the end of this section. This schedule
shall be adhered to for the electrical contractor to facilitate analysis and approval of the
monthly progress billings. Refer to the Supplementary Conditions of General Contract
and Division 1 - General Requirements for details, and conform thereto. Provide a
copy directly to Sparling.
SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submittals and Shop Drawings: Schedule so as not to delay construction schedule
and no later than 60 days after award of contract, submit common brochure(s) with
index and divider tabs by specification section, containing all required catalog cuts.
Allow two weeks for review for each submittal and resubmittal. Incomplete submittals
and shop drawings which do not comply with these requirements will be returned for
correction, revision and resubmittal. See General Conditions for format, quantity, etc.
B.
Shop drawings shall show:
1.
Ratings of items and systems.
2.
How the components of an item or system are assembled, interconnected,
function together and how they will be installed on the project.
28 05 00-3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
4.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
System layout floor plans with complete device layout, point-to-point wiring
connection between all components of the system, wire sizes and color coding.
Coordinate with other division shop drawings and submittals. Identify interface
points and indicate method of connection.
C.
The Contractor agrees:
1.
Submittals and shop drawings processed by the Architect are not change orders.
2.
The purpose of submittals and shop drawings by the Contractor is to
demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept.
3.
Submittals demonstrate equipment and material Contractor intends to furnish
and install and indicate detailing fabrication and installation methods Contractor
intends to use.
4.
To accept all responsibility for assuring that all materials furnished under this
Division of the specifications meet, in full, all requirements of the contract
documents.
5.
To pay for Engineers review cost of submittal review beyond one resubmittal.
D.
The Engineer's review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the
project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents.
Corrections or comments made during this review do not relieve contractor from
compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Contractor is
responsible for: Dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site;
fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordination of his work with that
of all other trades; performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
E.
Submittals and shop drawings are required per the submittals schedule at the end of
this Section.
1.9
PROJECT CLOSE-OUT
A.
Coordinate with close-out provisions in Division 01 - General Requirements.
B.
Request For Final Punchlist
1.
To request a final electrical punch list, forward a letter to Sparling, Inc. stating;
"The electrical work on this project is complete, all punch list items to date are
complete, items a. - n. in the Punchlist Procure paragraph in Section 280500 Common Work Results For Electronic Safety and Security are complete and the
project is ready for final punch list observation."
2.
Project Punchlist Procedure: Perform the following procedures for project
closeout of electrical portions of work.
a.
Provide engraved nameplates on electrical equipment.
b.
Refinish electrical equipment finishes which are damaged.
c.
Obtain final electrical permit inspection. Include copies in O & M manual.
d.
Provide written warranty in O & M per the General Conditions of the
Contract.
e.
Furnish Record Drawings per this section. Obtain signature on Job
Completion Form.
f.
Furnish O & M Manuals per this section. Obtain signature on Job
Completion Form.
28 05 00-4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
g.
h.
i.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
Give instruction periods to owner's personnel per this section. Obtain
signature on Job Completion Form.
To request final acceptance of project, fill out Job Completion Form in this
section and forward to Sparling. Note: If inspectors have not signed form,
a copy of signed-off permits will suffice.
Include with Job Completion Form, a copy of the final punch list with the
word "DONE", and the date and Contractor's initials after each item on the
list.
1.10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A.
Provide O&M manuals required in Division 01 - General Requirements plus one
manual for Sparling for all equipment furnished under Division 28 - Electronic Safety
and Security specifications. Submit a preliminary copy, complete except for the bound
cover, 60 days prior to completion of the project for checking and review. Deliver final
bound corrected copies as noted in Division 1 - General Requirements plus a copy to
Sparling 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods. Obtain a receipt for the
manuals and forward a copy of the receipt to the Engineer with the Job Completion
Form.
B.
The information included must be the exact equipment installed. Where sheets show
the equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly
and clearly identified on such sheets.
C.
These O&M manuals shall contain all the information needed to operate and maintain
all systems and equipment provided in the project. Present and arrange information in
a logical manner for efficient use by the Owner's operating personnel. The information
provided shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
Equipment manufacturer, make, model number, size, nameplate data, etc.
2.
Description of system configuration and operation including component
identification and interrelations. A master control schematic drawings(s) may be
required for this purpose.
3.
Dimensional and performance data for specific unit provided as appropriate.
4.
Manufacturer's recommended operation instructions.
5.
Manufacturer's recommended lubrication and servicing data including frequency.
6.
Complete parts list including reordering information, recommended spares and
anticipated useful life (if appropriate). Parts lists shall give full ordering
information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or
renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier not
acceptable.
7.
Shop drawings.
8.
Wiring diagrams.
9.
Signal equipment submittals shall contain step-by-step circuit description
information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment
operation in each mode of operation.
10. A complete list of local (nearest) manufacturer representative and distributor
contacts for each type of equipment and manufacturer. Include name, company,
address, phone, fax, e-mail address, and web site.
28 05 00-5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
D.
Furnish complete wiring diagrams for each system for the specific system installed
under the contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable unless revised to
indicate the exact field installation.
E.
Group the information contained in the manuals in an orderly arrangement by
specification index. Provide a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories
with identifying tabs. Bind the completed manuals with hard board covers not
exceeding 5" thick. (Provide two or more volumes if required.) Signal and
communication systems shall be in separate volumes. Imprint the covers with the
name of the job, Owner, Architect, Electrical Engineer, Contractor and year of
completion. Imprint the back edge with the name of the job, Owner and year of
completion. Hard board covers and literature contained may be held together with
screw post binding.
1.11 INSTRUCTION PERIODS
A.
After substantial completion of the work and 20 days after the O&M manuals have
been delivered to the owner and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the
Authority(s) Having Jurisdiction; demonstrate the electrical systems and instruct the
Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the various electrical systems. The Contractor shall arrange scheduled
instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's representatives shall be
superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers
representatives when so specified. When more than one training session is specified,
the second session shall be 30 to 90 days after the first as agreed to by the Owner.
B.
Include in each instruction session an overview of the system, presentation of
information in maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings. Conduct
tours of the building areas with explanations of maintenance requirements, access
methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, equipment cleaning procedures and
adjustment locations.
C.
Include the following scheduled instruction periods:
1st Session
2nd Session
1
Fire Detection and Alarm
2 hours
2 hours
D.
Factory trained suppliers representatives shall provide instruction for each of the
sessions listed above.
1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Continually record the actual electrical system(s) installation on a set of prints kept
readily available at the project during construction. These prints shall be used for this
purpose alone.
1.
Mark record prints with red erasable pencil. Mark the set to show the actual
installation where the installation varies substantially from the work as originally
shown.
2.
Accurately locate with exact dimensions all underground and underslab
raceways and stub-outs.
3.
Note changes of directions and locations, by dimensions and elevations, as
utilities are actually installed.
28 05 00-6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
4.
5.
6.
B.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
Include addenda items and revisions made during construction.
Erase conditions not constructed or "X-out" and annotate "not constructed" to
clearly convey the actual "as constructed" condition.
Organize record drawings sheets in manageable sets, bind and print suitable
titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.
Transfer the changes marked up on the record prints into AutoCAD 2002 (or higher) at
the completion of the work. Provide two (2) sets of prints, one set of fixed line
reproducible drawings and one set of AutoCAD drawing files on CD Rom or Zip disk.
Transmit drawings, CAD files and the record drawing mark-ups to the Architect. Final
payment to the contractor will not be authorized until these document have been
submitted to and accepted by the Architect.
1.13 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUEST
A.
Submit to the Architect, with a copy to the Sparling Engineer, a Sparling Job
Completion Form (form attached in this section) properly filled out prior to the time final
acceptance of the electrical work is requested.
1.14 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
A.
When the following abbreviations and definitions are used in relation to the work for
Division 28 they shall have the following meanings:
Item
Meaning
AHJ
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Boxes
Outlet, Junction or Pull Boxes.
Code
All applicable codes currently enforced at project location.
Compression
Compressed using a leverage powered (hydraulic or
equivalent) crimping tool.
Connection
All materials and labor required for equipment to be fully
operational.
Exterior Location
Outside of or penetrating the outer surfaces of the building
weather protective membrane.
Fully Operational
Tested, approved, and operating to the satisfaction of the
AHJ, manufacturer and contract documents.
Furnish
Deliver to the jobsite
Install
To enter permanently into the project and make fully
operational.
Kcml
Thousand circular mils (formerly MCM).
Mfr.
Manufacturer.
NEC
National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Association,
Publication #70.
Noted
Shown or specified in the contract documents.
Provide
Furnish and install.
Required
As required by code, AHJ, contract documents, or
manufacturer for the particular installation to be fully
operational.
Shown
As indicated on the drawings or details.
Wiring
Raceway, conductors and connections.
28 05 00-7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
All materials and equipment installed shall have been tested and listed by Underwriters
Laboratories or other approved testing organization and shall be so labeled unless
otherwise permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (Inspector).
B.
All materials to be new, free from defects and not less than quality herein specified.
Materials shall be designated to insure satisfactory operation and operational life in the
environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed.
C.
Each type of materials furnished shall be of the same make, be standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in production of such materials and be the
manufacturer's latest standard design.
D.
All materials, equipment and systems furnished that include provisions for storing,
displaying, reporting, interfacing, inputting, or functioning using date specific
information shall perform properly in all respects regardless of the century. Any
interface to other new or existing materials, equipment or systems shall function
properly and shall be century compliant, both in regards to information sent and
received.
2.2
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS
A.
No Substitute:
Where a specified product is indicated "no substitute", it is the intent of this specification to
require new materials to be compatible with the existing installation or as specifically
requested by the owner. To this end certain materials and systems no substitution will be
allowed.
2.3
A.
NAMEPLATES
Provide nameplates per Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products according to the manufacturer's recommendations,
using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including
theft. Handle all equipment carefully to prevent damage, breakage, denting, and
scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged equipment.
B.
Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, undercover in a
weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain
temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instruction.
28 05 00-8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.2
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
CUTTING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
A.
Obtain permission from the Architect and coordinate with other trades prior to cutting.
Locate cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only
the minimum amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills or concrete
saws except where space limitations prevent the use of such tools.
B.
All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must
be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by
skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade.
3.3
A.
3.4
A.
3.5
FIRESTOPPING
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire rated floor and wall assemblies to
maintain fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation
requirements are specified in Division 7 section "Firestopping".
PAINTING
Items furnished under this Division that are scratched or marred in shipment or
installation shall be refinished with touchup paint selected to match installed equipment
finish.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
A.
For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the specifications, or by
owner, provide complete all electrical connections necessary to serve such equipment
and provide required control connections to all equipment so that the equipment is fully
operational upon completion of the project. Provide disconnect switch as required by
code whenever an equipment connection is shown on the drawings.
B.
Investigate existing equipment to be relocated and provide new connections as
required.
3.6
A.
CLEAN UP
Contractor shall continually remove debris, cuttings, crates, cartons, etc., created by
his work. Such clean up shall be done daily and at sufficient frequency to eliminate
hazard to the public, other workmen, the building or the Owner's employees. Before
acceptance of the installation, Contractor shall carefully clean cabinets, panels, lighting
fixtures, wiring devices, cover plates, etc., to remove dirt, cuttings, paint, plaster,
mortar, concrete, etc. Blemishes to finished surfaces of apparatus shall be removed
and new finish equal to the original applied.
1.
Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and
mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
28 05 00-9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.7
A.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
TESTING AND DEMONSTRATION
Demonstrate that all electrical equipment operates as specified and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Perform tests in the presence of the Architect, Owner or
Engineer. Provide all instruments, manufacturer's operating instructions and personnel
required to conduct the tests. Repair or replace any electrical equipment that fails to
operate as specified and or in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
28 05 00-10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
STANTEC ELECTRICAL JOB COMPLETION FORM
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT
LOCATION:
DATE:
Kirkland City Hall Remodel
A.
Electrical Inspectors Final Acceptance (Copy of certificate attached.)
B.
Name
Agency
Date
Fire Marshal's Final Acceptance of Fire Alarm System (Copy of certificate
attached.)
C.
1.
D.
Name
Agency
The following systems have been
representative.
Fire Detection and Alarm
Owner's Rep
Record Drawings
Attache Transmitted previously
d
to
demonstrated
Date
to Owner's
Date
Date
E.
F.
G.
O & M Manuals
Attache Transmitted
d
to
Test
Reports
Attache Transmitted
d
to
previously
previously
Date
The work is complete in accordance with contract documents and
authorized changes except for
and the architect/engineer's representative is requested to meet with
at
o
n
Supervisor of Electrical Work
Time
Date
Contractors
Signature
Rep.
Date
28 05 00-11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC
SAFETY
SECTION 28 05 00
Sparling Schedule of Values for Kirkland City Hall
Description of Work
Device Rough-in (boxes and raceways) - Labor and Materials
Fire Detection and Alarm - Labor and Materials
Testing, Demonstration (AHJ approvals)
Training
Close Out (Record Drawings, O&M, etc.) - Materials & Labor
TOTAL DIVISION 28
Amount
SPARLING SUBMITTAL LIST Bellevue College Health Sciences Building
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
SUBMIT
RECEIVE
DATE
283100
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
END OF SECTION 28 05 00
28 05 00-12
STATU
S
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
B.
NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.3
A.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Existing fire alarm panel located in lower level room office (gridline F.5/1) to remain
operations though out the project construction duration. This project has multiple
phases that will required working around areas that are operational. Provide temporary
or re-routed connections through areas being demolished for areas that remain
operational. Coordinate all system shut downs with the City at least 72 hours priot to
work. Provide demoltion and removal of existing fire alarm system cabling and new
devices, power supplies and cabling to the existing panel as necessary for a complete
and operational system.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects
of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7
B.
System shall comply with local fire code, building code, mechanical code, electrical
code, and rules and interpretations as required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction
(City of Kirkland.)
1.5
CONTRACTOR DESIGN
A.
The contract drawings indicate the general nature of the fire alarm system, but do not
necessarily show all components or system aspects required by this specification. The
drawings are intended to aid the contractor in providing the complete fire alarm system.
B.
Notification device performance: The locations of fire alarm notification devices shown
on the drawings indicate the rooms and spaces to be covered by the indicated types of
devices, but not necessarily the total quantity of devices required in each room or
space to meet the applicable codes. Contractor shall provide design calculations
283111 - 1
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
based on vendor device performance characteristics for each space and notification
method indicating compliance with applicable codes and criteria.
C.
Raceways, routing and wiring are not shown on the drawings and it shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to design raceway routing and wiring and to show the
same on shop drawings.
D.
Shop drawings shall be stamped by a professional engineer who shall serve as the
engineer of record for the fire alarm system.
1.6
A.
SUBMITTALS
Provide submittal information in accordance with Section 280500 - Common Work Results for Electronic Safety and Security and supplementary requirements described in
this specification.
1.
2.
Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting
them to Architect.
Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a.
b.
Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum.
B.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C.
Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the
"Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
2.
Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector,
verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity,
temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
3.
Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and airconditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke
detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement
and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm
indicators.
Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
4.
Include horn/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding
schematic, power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
D.
Design Calculations: To comply with codes, performance requirements and design
criteria, include analysis:
1.
.Show compliance with requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of
detection, complying with NFPA 72.
2.
Battery sizing calculations
3.
Voltage drop calculations
4.
Visible and audible notification device performance demonstrating compliance
with NFPA 72 and local building code.
283111 - 2
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
5.
E.
1.7
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
For systems with voice notification: amplifier capacity
Input/Output Matrix
1.
Submit matrix showing for each system input the appropriate system response
including control unit annunciation, notification appliance activation, fire safety
controls, and supplementary actions.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual
test of assembled components or on calculation.
2.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data,"deliver copies to authorities
having jurisdiction and include the following:
1.
Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter in NFPA 72.
2.
Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article
"Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance" Chapter.
3.
Record copy of site-specific software.
4.
Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72
article of the same name and include the following:
a.
Frequency of testing of installed components.
b.
Frequency of inspection of installed components.
c.
Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
d.
Manufacturer's user training manuals.
5.
Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
6.
Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
283111 - 3
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
1.
2.
3.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of
each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.
Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: two of each type installed.
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for
installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system
from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with,
and operate as, an extension of existing system.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
1.11 SERVICE INTERRUPTION
A.
Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions
1.
Notify owner and design team no fewer than two days in advance of proposed
interruption of fire-alarm service.
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without owner’s written
permission.
3.
Provide “fire watch” or similar temporary guard service to affirm the same role as
the fire alarm system in protecting the facility’s occupants and the owner’s
property. Obtain approval from the authority having jurisdiction for the proposed
method.
1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new
equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT
IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into
service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from
the building.
B.
Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing
disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.
283111 - 4
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Existing system to remain. Provide power supplies, connections, reprogramming and tests as necessary.
1.
Silent Knight, Gamewell, .
CIRCUITS
A.
Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72,
Class B.
1.
Signaling Line Circuits: Style 4
2.
Install no more addressable devices on each signaling line circuit than 70% of
the signaling line circuit capacity. Circuits shall not be shared between floors or
smoke control zones.
3.
Allow for 20% spare circuits of each type, but no less than three spares.
4.
Power supplies shall have 30% spare capacity.
B.
Wire
1.
Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Conductors shall be 600-V rated, 75 deg C, colorcoded insulation.
a.
Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum, stranded copper (maximum
of seven strands).
b.
Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum, solid or stranded copper.
2.
Power-Limited Circuits: NFPA 70, Types FPL, FPLR, or FPLP, as recommended
by manufacturer.
C.
Raceways, Outlets, and Junction Boxes
1.
Shall conform to specification sections "Raceways" and "Outlet and Junction
Boxes".
2.
Provide 5" square by 2-2/7" deep outlet boxes with plaster ring for all flush
mounted notification appliances.
D.
Survivable Circuits: Where required by applicable codes and standards provide survivable circuits using one or more of the following methods:
1.
Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity (CI) Cable, 2-hour fire rated per UL 1724.
2.
Electrical Circuit Protective Systems (FHIT) - System No. 17 of the UL Building
Materials Directory.
3.
Installation in a 2-hour rated shaft or enclosure.
4.
Installation in a 2-hour rated stairwell in a building fully sprinklered in accordance
with NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
2.3
A.
MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES
General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall
be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color;
283111 - 5
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box.
If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.
1.
Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module
arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to
fire-alarm control unit.
2.
Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.
3.
Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the
top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an
integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm
operation.
2.4
SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:
1.
Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
2.
Detectors shall betwo-wire type for power limited circuits.
3.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
4.
Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be
mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals
in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.
5.
Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation
to restore them to normal operation.
6.
Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and
power-on status.
B.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1.
Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be
able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2.
An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall
be able to manually access the following for each detector:
a.
Primary status.
b.
Device type.
c.
Present average value.
d.
Present sensitivity selected.
e.
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
C.
Ionization Smoke Detector:
1.
Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be
able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2.
An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall
be able to manually access the following for each detector:
a.
Primary status.
b.
Device type.
c.
Present average value.
d.
Present sensitivity selected.
e.
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
283111 - 6
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
D.
2.5
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1.
Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be
able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
2.
Detectors address shall be visible without having to remove it from the duct.
3.
Shall operate at 300 to 400 feet per minute
4.
An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall
be able to manually access the following for each detector:
a.
Primary status.
b.
Device type.
c.
Present average value.
d.
Present sensitivity selected.
e.
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
5.
Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for
use with the supplied detector.
6.
Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
7.
Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for
specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
8.
Provide remote indicator lights for duct smoke detectors.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected
to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals
for system connections.
B.
General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance
signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw
terminals for system connections.
C.
Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a
sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the
coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.
D.
Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word
"FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens.
1.
Rated Light Output:
a.
As determined by contractor analysis.
b.
15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.
2.
Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3.
For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be
determined with guards in place.
4.
Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
5.
Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
6.
Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, per City of Kirklan
7.
.
283111 - 7
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
2.6
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A.
Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are
complete with matching doorplate.
1.
Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf (111-N) holding
force.
2.
Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Rating: 24-V ac or dc.
B.
Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
2.7
REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
A.
Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for
alarm, supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match
those of fire-alarm control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and
testing.
1.
Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.
Location: Annunciators mounted outdoors shall be rated for the environment.
B.
Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating
lights shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge,
silence, reset, and test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.
C.
Graphic Annunciator: Provide a graphic annunciator that shows floor plans with LED's
that indicate location and type of device in alarm. Graphic annunciator shall be listed in
combination with the fire alarm control unit.
2.8
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICES
A.
Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system
address for alarm-initiating or supervisory/reporting devices,for wired applications. .
B.
In NEMA 1 enclosure with exterior label. Internal label with I/O point(s) identification.
C.
Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal with appropriate contact ratings to
system interface, or receiving signal from system interface, including but not limited to:
1.
Fan shutdown motor controller
2.
Door holders/lock release.
3.
Security system
4.
Elevator Controller: Recall, alternate recall, power available, shunt trip (existing
elevators to remain)
5.
DDC system,
6.
Stairwell and Shaft Pressurization System
7.
Smoke Control system
8.
Pre-action sprinkler system (located in lower level server room)
9.
Fire suppression systems
283111 - 8
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
D.
2.9
A.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
Smoke Dampers:
1.
Smoke damper interface modules and relays shall be enclosed in a NEMA 1
cabinet with hinged door and handle latch. Door interior shall contain circuit
diagram for each module/relay and its associated dampers. Provide one cabinet
per each smoke compartment and at least one per floor.
2.
Relays contacts shall be suited to the load. Relay contacts shall be loaded to no
more than 70% of their rating.
OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION
All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected from surges in
accordance with IEEE C62.41.1/IEEE C62.41.2 B3 combination waveform and NFPA
70. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection. The surge protector shall be rated
for a maximum let thru voltage of 350 Volts ac (line-to-neutral) and 350 Volt ac
(neutral-to-ground).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
1.
Mount signaling and notification devices within the more stringent of gthe
restrictions imposed by NFPA 72 and the restrictions imposed by device
manufacturer.
B.
Wiring
1.
Install all wiring in raceways dedicated to the fire alarm system
2.
For Class A circuits, provide a minimum of 48" separation between incoming and
returning raceways.
3.
Wiring in panels, cabinets, and other enclosures shall be neatly bundled and
channeled. Provide channel routing to all I/O and neatly fan wiring to terminus.
4.
Ground per code.
C.
Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational
before making changes or connections.
1.
Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
2.
Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising
station.
3.
Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to
extend existing control functions to the new points. New components shall be
capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance
of either system.
D.
Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1.
Comply with NFPA 72.
2.
HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than [3 feet (1 m)] [5 feet (1.5 m)] from airsupply diffuser or return-air opening.
283111 - 9
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any
part of a lighting fixture.
E.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes
so they extend the full width of duct.
F.
Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with
sprinkler rating and location.
G.
Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within
a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm
causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.
H.
Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each
sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from
normal viewing position.
I.
Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the
ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating
mechanism concealed behind a grille.
J.
Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn,
unless it is integral with audible alarm indicating device. Install wall mounted devices
such that the bottom of the lens is not less than 80 inches above the finished floor.
Ceiling mount devices allowed where shown and shall be approved for ceiling
application. More than two visible notification devices in the same room or adjacent
space within the field of view shall flash in synchronization. Synchronization of devices
not in the same field of view is allowed. In corridors where there are more than two
devices in any field of view, they shall be spaced a minimum of 55' apart or they shall
flash in synchronization.
K.
Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
L.
Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the
finished floor.
M.
Fan Shut down relays: Install within 5 feet of the motor controller.
N.
Smoke Damper Relay cabinets: Wall mountl in electrical room on same floor as smoke
dampers.
O.
Survivable Circuits:
a.
A single notification appliance circuit shall not serve more than one notification zone.
b.
Failure of equipment or a fault on one or more insulation wiring conductors
of one notification appliance circuit shall not result in functional loss of any
other notification appliance circuit.
c.
Notification appliance circuits and any other circuits necessary for the operation of the notification appliance circuits shall be protected from the
283111 - 10
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
d.
3.2
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
point at which they exit the control unit until the point that they enter the notification zone that they serve using one or more of the following methods:
1)
A 2-hour rated cable assembly
2)
A 2-hour rated shaft or enclosure
3)
A 2-hour rated stairwell in a building fully sprinklered in accordance
with NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
Provide at locations required by the International Building Code and in
conformance with NFPA 72.
CONNECTIONS
A.
For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to
doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1.
Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system
in this Section before making connections.
B.
Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following
devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1 m) from the device
controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is
available at the device or system being controlled.
1.
Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.
2.
Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
3.
Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
4.
Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.
5.
Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel
supplies.
6.
Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches, including exterior Post
Indicator Valve.
7.
Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler
system.
8.
Supervisory connection at preaction sprinkler panels
9.
Supervisory connection at fire suppression panels.
10. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements
for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.
3.4
A.
GROUNDING
Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a
ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.
283111 - 11
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
3.5
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field tests shall be witnessed by City of Kirkland
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections, and to assist in testing.
D.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a.
Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,
Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.
b.
Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection"
Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72;
retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed
components.
2.
System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
3.
Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level
meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.
4.
Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
5.
Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
6.
Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System
Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form"
in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in
NFPA 72.
E.
Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of
added or replaced devices and appliances.
F.
Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
H.
Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly,
monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and
inspections.
283111 - 12
KIRKLAND CITY HALL RENOVATION
NOVEMBER 17, 2015
I.
3.6
A.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
SECTION 28 31 11
Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test firealarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72.
Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
END OF SECTION 28 31 11
283111 - 13